Proactive Net User Guide v8.5 | Command Line Interface | Web Browser

BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Supporting
BMC ProactiveNet version 8.5
October 2010

www.bmc.com

Contacting BMC Software
You can access the BMC Software website at http://www.bmc.com. From this website, you can obtain information about the company, its products, corporate offices, special events, and career opportunities.

United States and Canada
Address BMC SOFTWARE INC 2101 CITYWEST BLVD HOUSTON TX 77042-2827 USA Telephone 1 713 918 8800 or 1 800 841 2031 Fax 1 713 918 8000

Outside United States and Canada
Telephone +01 713 918 8800 Fax +01 713 918 8000

© Copyright 2009-2010 BMC Software, Inc.

BMC, BMC Software, and the BMC Software logo are the exclusive properties of BMC Software, Inc., are registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office, and may be registered or pending registration in other countries. All other BMC trademarks, service marks, and logos may be registered or pending registration in the U.S. or in other countries. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. BladeLogic and the BladeLogic logo are the exclusive properties of BladeLogic, Inc. The BladeLogic trademark is registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office, and may be registered or pending registration in other countries. All other BladeLogic trademarks, service marks, and logos may be registered or pending registration in the U.S. or in other countries. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. AIX, Current, NetView, Notes, Tivoli, and WebSphere are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. EJB, JVM, Java, Solaris, Sun, and Sun Java are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc., in the U.S. and other countries. UNIX is the registered trademark of The Open Group in the US and other countries. The information included in this documentation is the proprietary and confidential information of BMC Software, Inc., its affiliates, or licensors. Your use of this information is subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable End User License agreement for the product and to the proprietary and restricted rights notices included in the product documentation.

Restricted rights legend
U.S. Government Restricted Rights to Computer Software. UNPUBLISHED—RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES. Use, duplication, or disclosure of any data and computer software by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions, as applicable, set forth in FAR Section 52.227-14, DFARS 252.227-7013, DFARS 252.227-7014, DFARS 252.227-7015, and DFARS 252.227-7025, as amended from time to time. Contractor/Manufacturer is BMC SOFTWARE INC, 2101 CITYWEST BLVD, HOUSTON TX 77042-2827, USA. Any contract notices should be sent to this address.

Customer support
Support website
You can obtain technical support from BMC 24 hours a day, 7 days a week at http://www.bmc.com/support. From this website, you can ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ read overviews about support services and programs that BMC offers find the most current information about BMC products search a database for problems similar to yours and possible solutions order or download product documentation download products and maintenance report a problem or ask a question subscribe to receive proactive e-mail alerts find worldwide BMC support center locations and contact information, including e-mail addresses, fax numbers, and telephone numbers

Support by telephone or e-mail
In the United States and Canada, if you need technical support and do not have access to the web, call 800 537 1813 or send an e-mail message to customer_support@bmc.com. (In the subject line, enter SupID:yourSupportContractID, such as SupID:12345). Outside the United States and Canada, contact your local support center for assistance.

Before contacting BMC
Have the following information available so that Customer Support can begin working on your issue immediately: ■ product information ― ― ― ■ product name product version (release number) license number and password (trial or permanent)

operating system and environment information ― ― ― ― ― machine type operating system type, version, and service pack or other maintenance level such as PUT or PTF system hardware configuration serial numbers related software (database, application, and communication) including type, version, and service pack or maintenance level

■ ■ ■

sequence of events leading to the problem commands and options that you used messages received (and the time and date that you received them) ― ― ― product error messages messages from the operating system, such as file system full messages from related software

3

License key and password information
If you have questions about your license key or password, contact BMC as appropriate for your location: ■ ■ ■ (USA or Canada) Contact the Order Services Password Team at 1 800 841 2031, or send an e-mail message to ContractsPasswordAdministration@bmc.com. (Europe, the Middle East, and Africa) Fax your questions to EMEA Contracts Administration at +31 20 354 8702, or send an e-mail message to password@bmc.com. (Asia-Pacific) Contact your BMC sales representative or your local BMC office.

4

BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Contents
Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 13 Accessing the Operations Console ...............................................................................13 Choosing the console type .............................................................................................15 Navigating the Operations Console .............................................................................16 Navigation pane ...................................................................................................17 Navigation tree .....................................................................................................23 Operations Console views ..................................................................................29 Breadcrumbs .........................................................................................................31 Chapter 2 Working with events 33 Event views in the Main drawer of the navigation pane ..........................................33 Customizing the display of the event list ....................................................................34 Viewing the default event list for All Event Collectors .............................................36 Viewing further information for a specific event from the Tools Menu ................38 Behavior of popup windows for Tools Menu options ...................................41 Viewing the event list for a specific component in the navigation tree ..................41 Selecting the type of event list to view ........................................................................43 Intelligent Events Details template ...................................................................44 Creating a new template for event list columns .........................................................45 Editing a default or user-defined template for event list columns ..........................46 Copying an existing template for event list columns ................................................46 Deleting a user-defined template for event list columns ..........................................47 Applying a default, global, or user-defined template for event list columns ........47 Adding a column to an event list .................................................................................48 Deleting a column from an event list ...........................................................................48 Viewing the event Details Notebook ...........................................................................49 Viewing related events ...................................................................................................52 Refreshing the event list .................................................................................................52 Organizing events in the event list ...............................................................................53 Using event and component folders .................................................................53 Filtering events .....................................................................................................64 Searching events ...................................................................................................71 Sorting events .......................................................................................................72 Creating shortcuts for Tools Menu options ................................................................74 Performing event operations .........................................................................................76 Exporting and copying event information ..................................................................79

Contents

5

Executing remote actions ...............................................................................................80 Ping Event mc_host_address .............................................................................81 TraceRoute to Event mc_host_address .............................................................82 Send EVENT as SMTP E-mail ............................................................................82 Modify Slot Value ................................................................................................82 Show Remote Action Environment ...................................................................82 Setup Sending SMTP E-Mails - Windows Only ..............................................83 Trigger Remedy Incident for Event ...................................................................83 BMC Atrium Orchestrator workflows ..............................................................83 Launching an originating BMC ProactiveNet Server ...............................................86 Customizing the display of events ..............................................................................86 Viewing the event list for remote cells ........................................................................88 Operations possible on the event list for remote cells ....................................91 Viewing predictive events .............................................................................................92 Viewing all abnormalities ..............................................................................................93 Adding a column to an event list for an abnormality ....................................95 Deleting a column from an event list for an abnormality ..............................95 Filtering event display for All Abnormalities ..................................................97 Viewing further information for an abnormality ............................................99 Viewing events and abnormalities by service ..........................................................100 Viewing further information for All Services => Grid View ....................102 Viewing monitor and device information under the All Services => Grid View ....................................................................................................................103 Viewing services in a hierarchical tree ......................................................................105 Controlling the display in the All Services => Tree View ........................106 Viewing events by group .............................................................................................107 Default groups ....................................................................................................110 Filtering event display for All Groups ............................................................110 Viewing further information for All Groups => Grid View ......................111 Viewing monitor and device information under the All Groups => Grid View ....................................................................................................................112 Viewing events for groups in a hierarchical tree .....................................................114 Controlling the display in the Tree View .......................................................115 Viewing events by device ............................................................................................116 Filtering event display for All Devices ...........................................................119 Viewing further information for All Devices ................................................120 Viewing events for monitored services .....................................................................121 Viewing further information for All Monitors ..............................................122 Acknowledging events ................................................................................................122 Closing events ...............................................................................................................124 Managing configuration changes ...............................................................................125

6

BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Managing data collection .............................................................................................126 Distinction between new and upgrade users ................................................127 Pausing data collection .....................................................................................127 Resuming data collection ..................................................................................129 Diagnostics ..........................................................................................................129 Examining current data (FlashCheck) ............................................................130 About the Canvas view ................................................................................................131 Canvas view modes ...........................................................................................131 Canvas view details ...........................................................................................131 Setting up and using the Canvas view .....................................................................132 Using Edit mode to set up the Canvas view ..................................................133 Using View mode to monitor objects in the Canvas view ...........................138 About the Tile view ......................................................................................................140 Tile view modes .................................................................................................140 Tile attributes ......................................................................................................140 Tile preferences and defaults ...........................................................................141 Tile view details .................................................................................................142 Setting up and using the Tile View ...........................................................................143 Using Edit mode to change preferences in the Tile view .............................143 Saving tile preferences as defaults ..................................................................145 Using View mode to monitor objects in the Tile view .................................146 About the graph view ..................................................................................................147 Graph view modes .............................................................................................148 Graph view details .............................................................................................148 Setting up and using the Graph View ......................................................................149 Using Edit mode to change preferences in the Graph view ........................150 Using View mode to monitor objects in the Graph view .............................152 Viewing the Tile, Canvas, or Graph view Details notebook ..................................154 Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 159 What is probable cause analysis? ...............................................................................159 How BMC ProactiveNet performs probable cause analysis on events ................159 Time correlation .................................................................................................162 User-defined filters ............................................................................................163 Knowledge patterns ..........................................................................................163 Service model relationships .............................................................................164 Global relationships ...........................................................................................164 Data correlation ..................................................................................................165 Scoring .................................................................................................................165 Configuring BMC ProactiveNet to perform probable cause analysis ...................165 Configure complete monitor coverage ...........................................................165
Contents 7

Assign correct device types ..............................................................................166 Create monitors under the correct devices ....................................................166 Create service models for interdependent CIs ..............................................166 Associate monitors to the proper CI ...............................................................166 Set a polling interval of 5 minutes or less .......................................................167 Establish a reliable baseline ..............................................................................167 Ensure sub-categories are defined for external events .................................168 Viewing probable cause analysis for an event .........................................................168 Customizing the display of the Probable Cause Analysis list ...............................170 Filtering unrelated events to find probable cause ....................................................172 Changing the time correlation filter ................................................................172 Enabling user-defined filters ............................................................................173 Saving recurring conditions as a known probable cause ........................................174 Probable cause analysis in a scalable deployment environment ...........................175 Limitations of probable cause analysis in a scalable environment .............176 Probable cause analysis in a virtual environment ...................................................177 How probable cause analysis handles VMotion events ..............................177 Limitations of probable cause analysis in a virtual environment ...............177 Chapter 4 Event administration 179 Overview ........................................................................................................................179 For upgrade users ..............................................................................................179 Accessing the event administration options ..................................................180 Understanding event thresholds ................................................................................180 Baselines ..............................................................................................................182 Auto-baseline ......................................................................................................183 How abnormalities are generated ...................................................................183 Setting event thresholds ....................................................................................184 Managing event rules ...................................................................................................187 Default event rules .............................................................................................188 Filtering the event rule list ................................................................................190 Event rule types ..................................................................................................191 Event rules or event management policies ....................................................192 Adding a basic event rule type .......................................................................192 Adding an advanced rule type ........................................................................198 Editing a basic or an advanced rule ................................................................200 Deleting an event rule .......................................................................................201 Updating event actions .....................................................................................201 Enabling and disabling event rules .................................................................202 Supplying arguments to a server command ..................................................202 Defining email groups .......................................................................................204
8

BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

.....................251 Creating a x-y graph ........................268 Button options ..........................................................................................276 Generating PDF .............................................................................................................................................237 Reducing events .....244 Customizing event text ...........................................................................................................................................................................................270 Additional information for changing graph display ..................................249 Limitations ............279 Contents 9 ............................................................257 Creating a pie graph ...............................................................................................................256 Creating a Top N graph ...........................261 Customizing monitor graphs ...275 Mailing the graph page ...........205 Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through SNMP traps ...245 For upgrade users .............................................................................................................................................................................264 Graph tab .........................................................................250 Creating a line or area graph ....................268 Creating an individual/multiple monitor graphs ....................................................................276 Sharing the graph page ...................................................................................................................................................216 Managing BMC ProactiveNet events in the Remedy environment ..................................................218 Managing BMC ProactiveNet events in the BEM environment ................................................................................................................................................................................265 Attributes and indicators tab ........................................ 215 Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through Diagnostic Commands on the BMC ProactiveNet Server ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................216 Managing the AlarmPoint integration ..........................247 Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 249 Creating custom graphs ......................................................................................................................................................................272 Exporting graph data to Excel ........................................................................................................................................................229 Managing BMC ProactiveNet events BMC Atrium Orchestrator (formerly known as BMC Run Book Automation) .........277 Chapter 6 Managing Views 279 What is a view? ............................245 Integrating BMC ProactiveNet with Service Level Management ................................................................................................273 Displaying all abnormalities for a graph ........................Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments ...................271 Adjusting graph axes ..........................................................................................................................259 Creating a dial gauge graph ................................266 Monitor information tab ..............................205 Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through Run Command on Server ......................

..............................................................................................................................................................................326 Deleting instances .....332 Chapter 8 Managing service levels 335 What is an SLO? ............301 Report Scheduler ........................330 Mailing a report ..................335 Customizing basic settings for SLO data display ............................................................................................336 Managing SLOs .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................345 Recalculating SLO data for modified time periods ..................................342 Managing range sets during SLO configuration ...........299 Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet .....................341 Managing SLO types during SLO configuration .....................................348 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide 10 .........................................................332 Points to Remember ............................298 Copying an existing report ..................................................................................327 Adding comments to a report ...............................................298 Changing email settings in a report .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................341 Managing schedules during SLO configuration .....................338 Deleting SLOs ....................331 Managing all reports .......................................................................................................................329 Adding a report to a view ...................................................300 Asset .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................329 Exporting to Portable Document Format (PDF) ..................................................................325 Additional options .....................................................................................................331 Printing a report .........................................................................281 Customizing the basic screen layout on the Views tab ...........................289 Chapter 7 Generating Reports 293 Overview .................................................................................................................................328 Scheduling ....287 Managing view templates ..........................293 Creating or editing a report ........................................................................335 The SLO Management Console .......................................................................................287 Managing graph thumbnails for a view ...........344 Requesting guidance for setting SLO thresholds ...................................................................Navigating the Views & Graphs drawer .......................................................................279 Managing views .................................................................................330 Exporting to CSV .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................337 Creating or editing an SLO ......................................294 Deleting a report .....327 Disable generation .....................................................329 Generating a report ........................................

.......377 Managing baselines ................................................................................................................................................................................................................397 Defining Intelligent Event Suppression relationships ..........................410 Importing and exporting users .....373 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet and PATROL agent statuses .......................................380 Pausing baseline calculation ............................................................................................................................................361 Viewing SLOs in a hierarchical tree ..................................................................................363 Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 365 Activating and deactivating data collection ......................................................383 Creating a separate baseline for seasonal or special dates .......351 Customizing the display of SLO status information .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................400 Enabling or disabling Intelligent Event Suppression relationships ...........................................................357 Viewing a breakdown of SLO metrics for various time periods ......................................................................................352 Viewing SLO compliance details and history ..................................................................................................................360 Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations .........................................................................................................................409 Managing schedules ..............................369 Edit/Delete downtime schedule ...................360 Viewing instance details ....359 Drilling down to an individual SLO in the Watch List ...352 Viewing a summary of details and compliance metrics for an SLO ..............................................................398 Overview of the Intelligent Event Suppression screen .......................403 Deleting a relationship .............................................365 Scheduling downtime ............362 Accessing further information from the SLO Tree ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................402 Adding or editing an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship ...................................................366 Usage scenario ..........................................................374 Drill down from the agent status table .......................................................................372 Tracking changes to BMC ProactiveNet objects ................359 Filtering SLO records in the Watch List ..........367 Adding a downtime schedule ..............384 Managing relationships .....................381 Resetting a baseline .................................................376 Managing attribute sets .....................................................350 Viewing the current status of SLOs ....................................................................................................354 Viewing violation details for an SLO .............Resetting SLO compliance data ............................................361 Controlling the display in the SLO Tree ...............................................................371 Special notes ................412 Contents 11 ................................358 Accessing the Watch List .......355 Viewing a history graph for an SLO ...357 Comparing compliance objectives with actual results ...................................

....................................................................................................................................430 Viewing BMC BladeLogic device history information ..................................................417 Downloads tab .................................435 Slots used during probable cause analysis ..........................................426 Creating new BladeLogic content ...418 Chapter 10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic 419 Benefits of BMC BladeLogic integration ...........................415 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet performance diagnostics ....................................................................................428 Creating packages to deploy ProactiveNet Agents to BMC BladeLogic managed systems ............................................................................................................................................................................Viewing BMC ProactiveNet software information .................................................................................................415 Installation history .................................................................................................438 Monitors related to VMware ..................................................440 12 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide ....................419 Setting up the integration between BMC BladeLogic and BMC ProactiveNet ....................................................................................415 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet license usage .........................431 Appendix A Event information used in probable cause analysis 435 Event classes not used by probable cause analysis ..................................................................................................421 Additional change information using snapshot job execution .........................................................................425 Installing the BMC ProactiveNet content ....

see “To enable multiple sessions on Firefox version 3. For multiple logons. see the BMC ProactiveNet Getting Started Guide. 3 In the BMC ProactiveNet Logon screen. Avoid multiple logons using the same browser. ■ To log on for the first time after installation. 2 Enter the host name or IP address of the BMC ProactiveNet server. user name.5” on page 14 and “To enable multiple sessions on Internet Explorer version 8” on page 14. use the following default values: — user name: admin — password: admin Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 13 . and launching different tabs within the same browser. as this might result in NO DATA or other unpredictable results. and password.1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console Accessing the Operations Console The BMC ProactiveNet server is a Web-based application that you can access by logging on to the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console using supported Web browsers such as Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox. For information about supported browser versions. enter a valid user name and password. Note To log on to the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 1 Open a Web browser.

To enable multiple sessions on Internet Explorer version 8 1 Go to File => New Session or 14 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 2 In the General tab. click Edit. Related Topics Choosing the console type on page 15 Navigating the Operations Console on page 16 To enable multiple sessions on Firefox version 3. 4 Right-click the icon for each shortcut and open the Properties window.5 By default. 3 Create a shortcut to Firefox. To log on using a secure HTTPS connection. 4 Click Log On. Firefox shares one session across all browser windows that you open. To change your Operations Console password 1 Click the Options link at the top the Operations Console. "F:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox. 3 Enter the old password and the new password.exe” -P “ProfileA". 1 From the command line. 7 Click on each Firefox icon and a separate session for each of your browser windows will open.exe -P. execute the command Firefox. click the link Switch to Secure Mode on the log on page. under User ID and Password. BMC ProactiveNet encrypts the information relay from the Web interface for additional security. and then click Apply.exe on your desktop or quickbar for each profile you made. Secure connection mode is indicated by the text You are using a secure connection now. For example. If you use HTTPS. 2 Create as many profiles that you need from the Profile Manager window. 6 Create a new environment variable MOZ_NO_REMOTE with a value 1. 5 In the Target field specify the profile to use when launching Firefox.Accessing the Operations Console Note The default protocol for this connection is HTTP.

and track SLOs. abnormalities. and monitors The Operations Console is the default console displayed when you log on to BMC ProactiveNet. groups. Several console views are available based on assigned access rights. 3 Click Apply. services.Choosing the console type 2 Add the -nomerge parameter to the end of the target on its properties page to launch a new window from a shortcut and double-click the shortcut icon. Related Topics Accessing the Operations Console on page 13 Navigating the Operations Console on page 16 Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 15 . 2 In the General tab. under Layout Preferences. see To set the default logon console on page 15. To set the default logon console 1 Click the Options link at the top of the Operations Console. A window with a new session will open. measure. Table 1 on page 15 lists the console types available and the characteristics of each type. To change this setting. Choosing the console type The BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console provides options to navigate through the system and view related information. You can select the appropriate console type from the Change Console list at the top of the Operations Console. SLO Management Console Displays an integrated view of all Service Level Objectives (SLOs) These business views help define. select the console type that you want to set as the default when you log on to BMC ProactiveNet. Table 1: Characteristics of console types Console Type Operations Console Purpose Displays an integrated view of all the events. devices.

Use the view pane to view events and information related to each object. Figure 1: BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 16 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Navigating the Operations Console Navigating the Operations Console Use the navigation pane. and navigation trees within each navigation drawer to group and select the objects displayed in the Operations Console. “Navigating the Operations Console” on page 16 shows the default view in the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console and the major areas within this console. Use the smart icons in the toolbar in the Operations Console to switch between different views. navigation drawers within the navigation pane.

Table 2: Navigation drawers in the Operations Console Navigational element Main Other cells Description Provides access to event lists and displays event information and status Lists available remote cells connected to the BMC ProactiveNet Server and monitored by BMC ProactiveNet Enables you to generate and manage Generating a report on page 329 reports based on data collected by BMC ProactiveNet Provides options for the management of views and graphs in the Operations Console ■ “Managing view templates” on page 289 ■ “Managing graph thumbnails for a view” on page 287 Bookmarks Enables you to view. rename.Navigating the Operations Console Navigation pane In the navigation pane in the Operations Console is a series of drawers and links that enable you to navigate through BMC ProactiveNet. Table 2 on page 17 describes the available drawers in the navigation pane and discusses their functions. For details. and “Creating bookmarks in the delete bookmarks of objects and their navigation pane” on page 19 related views that you create in the navigation tree. see “Changing navigation pane options” on page 18. Provides a search mechanism so that you can search for CIs that meet the specified search criteria “Finding configuration items to view” on page 20 Further information Viewing the default event list for All Event Collectors on page 36 Reports Views & Graphs Find CI Related Topics Accessing the Operations Console on page 13 Choosing the console type on page 15 “Hiding the navigation pane” on page 18 Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 17 . Only you can view and manage the bookmarks that you create. You can select which drawers that you want displayed in the navigation pane by setting options in the Navigation Pane Options dialog box.

18 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . depending on which drawer that you select: a In the Main drawer. click the double left arrows . click on the drawer name and perform the following additional steps. box. ■ Click OK to save your changes and close the Navigation Pane Options dialog ■ Click Cancel to close the Navigation Pane Options dialog box without saving your changes.Navigating the Operations Console Changing navigation pane options If you have the appropriate permissions. select the cells that you want to display in the cell navigation tree. b In the Other Cells drawer. Hiding the navigation pane By default. 4 Perform one of the following actions: ■ Click Apply to save your changes and keep the Navigation Pane Options dialog box open. 3 To make changes to the objects displayed in individual drawers. You can adjust the size of the navigation pane or hide the navigation pane To hide the navigation pane 1 In the title bar of the Navigation pane. 2 In the Navigation Pane Options dialog box. click Navigation Pane Options . To set navigation pane options 1 In the title bar of the navigation pane. the navigation pane is displayed when you log on to the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console. you can select the drawers that you want to display in the navigation pane and select the objects that you want to display in the drawers. select the folders that you want to display in the navigation tree. select the drawers that you want to display in the navigation pane by clicking the check box next to the name of the drawer.

Note The bookmark does not show the object's status or the hierarchy in the navigation tree. 2 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the Bookmarks drawer. click on the title bar. 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. See “To add a folder to the Bookmarks drawer” on page 20. if you drill down on the device tile from the bookmark. 2 In the right pane. choose Delete. To redisplay the Navigation pane. select a view for the object that you selected in the navigation tree. To create bookmarks 1 In any drawer of the navigation pane. other views are available for the objects associated with the bookmarked device. if you bookmarked a device that was displayed in Tile View. select an object in the navigation tree. select the object that you want to remove.Navigating the Operations Console The Navigation pane is collapsed and the title bar is displayed vertically on the left side of the Operations Console. However. Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 19 . only the Tile View is available when you view the bookmark. 4 Click the Bookmarks drawer in the navigation pane to view the bookmarked objects. choose Bookmark Current View The object and view are bookmarked and saved. you can organize bookmarks into folders within the Bookmarks drawer and drag and drop the bookmarks among those folders. For example. Creating bookmarks in the navigation pane You can quickly access objects that you view frequently by creating a bookmark of the object and its associated view and viewing that bookmark in the Bookmarks drawer in the navigation pane. To remove bookmarks 1 In the Bookmarks drawer of the navigation pane. You cannot select other views of the object from the bookmark. However.

2 Click on the new folder created in the Bookmarks drawer. The name of the folder is changed to an editable field. 2 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the Bookmarks drawer. You can now drag and drop bookmarks that you create into the new folder. 2 In the Basic tab. A basic search lets you search for a specific CI based on name and class type. enter all or part of the name of the component that you want to search for. To rename bookmark folders 1 In the Bookmarks drawer of the navigation pane. The name of the folder is changed to an editable field. 20 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Navigating the Operations Console To add a folder to the Bookmarks drawer 1 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the Bookmarks drawer. choose Add Folder. select the object that you want to rename. 3 Enter the name for the new folder and press Enter. Note To perform a basic search for a configuration item 1 In the Navigation pane. choose Rename Folder. If the user account that you are using to log on to the Operations Console has ReadOnly permissions. 3 Enter the new name for the folder and press Enter. the Find CI drawer is not displayed in the navigation pane. An advanced search lets you use a filter with defined parameters. Finding configuration items to view Use the Find CI tool to locate a particular configuration item in a BMC ProactiveNet cell and view it in the Graph View of the Operations Console. click Find CI.

For details. You can drag and drop a CI from the results list to a static folder that you create in the navigation tree in the Main drawer. You should refine the search by specifying values in one or both of these fields. database. All components matching the search criteria appear in the results list at the bottom of the Find CI pane up to a maximum 500. For details. 5 Click Find. select the filter that you want to use to perform the search. click Find CI. see “To create a new filter to perform an advanced search for a configuration item” on page 22. These CIs are considered the important components for your business. click Advanced. Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 21 . If you leave Name contains or Class blank. 3 From the Query list. For details about creating static folders. the results list could be very long. This number can be configured. see “#unique_19” ■ In the Add Component Folder dialog box when you create a new component 4 Click Find. select a component type. and so on. This number can be configured. such as Computer System. the search could take a long time. You can create filters in one of the following ways: ■ By accessing the CI Query Editor in the Find CI drawer. see “#unique_19” Note To use an existing filter to perform an advanced search for a configuration item 1 In the Navigation pane. All components matching the search criteria appear in the results list at the bottom of the Find CI pane up to a maximum of 500. see the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide.Navigating the Operations Console 3 From the Class list. If you select Base Element. see the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide. all service CIs for all classes are returned. Also. 4 To find only those CIs that propagate their priority to causal components. select Propagates Priority. For details. 2 In the Find CI drawer. For details. depending on the number of CIs. folder in the navigation tree in the Main drawer. application service.

indicated by the OR before the attribute names.Navigating the Operations Console You can drag and drop a CI from the results list to a static folder that you create in the navigation tree in the Main drawer. 4 In the CI Query Editor dialog box. perform the following actions: 22 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Each new attribute that you add narrows and refines the search. but specify different values. 2 In the Find CI drawer. 3 Perform one of the following actions: ■ To use an existing filter to create a new filter. click Edit Queries. If you select an existing filter than contains blank entries. 5 (optional) To make the filter available to all users who log on to the operations console. If you use the same attribute. ■ To create a new filter. see “#unique_19” To create a new filter to perform an advanced search for a configuration item 1 In the Navigation pane. click Advanced. indicated by the AND before the attribute names. select the type of component that you want to search for. 8 Begin building the parameters for your query by selecting the attributes for the class type that you selected. 6 From the Class list. click the plus button next to the attribute name. select the filter from the Query list and click Edit Queries. click Find CI. the Find CI search assumes that it is a template and automatically opens the CI Query Editor dialog box. 7 If necessary. select Create New Filter. 9 When you have finished building the filter. To display additional attributes. An asterisk is placed next to the name of the query to indicate that it is global. For details about creating static folders. then the query will search for components with any but not all of the values that you specify. The query will search for components with all of the attributes that you specify. select Make *Global (all users). expand the query builder options by clicking the plus button next to the Class list.

You can use the new filter to create a static folder of CI objects or a dynamic folder in the navigation tree. For more information about CIs. Event and component folders are displayed in a hierarchical manner in the navigation tree. such as process documentation and SLAs. CIs are under the control of change management. click Save and enter a name for the filter in the Enter Query Name dialog box. for example. A CI is any component that needs to be managed in order to deliver an IT service. you can drag and drop components from one folder that you create to another folder that you create within the navigation tree and you can drag and drop tiles from the Tile or Canvas view to an existing folder that contains the same type of component. All components matching the search criteria appear in the results list at the bottom of the Find CI pane and the new filter is displayed in the Query list. then that tile can be moved to another device folder by using drag and drop.Navigating the Operations Console ■ To save the filter. You can drag and drop a CI from the results list to a static folder that you create in the navigation tree in the Main drawer. click Find. software. ■ To execute the search. all BMC ProactiveNet users can view and access that folder. buildings. ■ My Folders: When you create a folder under this node. see the BMC ProactiveNet Service Modeling and Publishing Guide. The folders displayed in the navigation tree are divided into the following categories: ■ Global: When you create a folder under this node. see “#unique_19” . beneath these top-level folders. Navigation tree The navigation tree shows an at-a-glance synopsis of the events and views. you can add event and component folders. people. depending on your permissions. Also. including folders for configuration items (CIs) associated with a service model. only you can view and To further organize your display. CIs typically include hardware. access that folder. and formal documentation. For details about creating static and dynamic folders. Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 23 . if the tile represents a device.

An event list is associated with 24 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . you can change how the navigation tree is loaded. see the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide. Each level of the collector is shown as a node under the event folder. For example. all nodes and subnodes are loaded even if a node is not expanded.mrl file of the collectors. or All Monitors nodes in the navigation tree the parent folders) ■ Parent event and component folders (not individual collectors within or outside In the navigation tree. For example. All Groups. Event and component folders Event and component folders enable you to organize cells and collectors to make event displays meaningful for operators. All Devices. or All Monitors (Grid View and Tree View) ■ All Abnormalities. This allows you to see the status of devices on your system immediately. All Devices. If this causes performance issues. Events and components can be grouped in the following ways: ■ Event folders ■ Event collectors ■ Component folders Event folders An event folder is a grouping of collectors that shows the relationship of events or abnormalities through the hierarchy of the navigation tree. you might create an event folder for collectors that gather database warning events and allow only operators that are database administrators access to that event folder. when you open the navigation tree. if there is a Critical event on one of the devices. the severity icons for a collector dynamically change depending on the severity level of the events for that collector. All Services. the collector-based permissions on events do not apply when you view an event list from the following locations: ■ Drill-downs from All Groups. By default. indicating a Critical event.Navigating the Operations Console Users traversing the navigation tree can see and perform actions and operations on only those collectors to which they are granted access. However. Administrators define event folders and associate them with one or more collectors. All Services. For details. based on different roles in the . then the green icon changes to a red icon.

or devices through the hierarchy of the navigation tree. Event collectors Event collectors gather events for display in an event list to provide operators with meaningful groups of events or abnormalities and to show relationship through the hierarchy of the nodes in the navigation tree. or devices. users can create event and component folders under this node to organize the event view. services. The parent level of a component folder represents all of the events associated with the groups. the Global node contains the following default collectors: ■ All Event Collectors: Displays the entire event collector hierarchy ■ All Abnormalities: Displays all the abnormality events ■ All Services: Displays all the services ■ All Groups: Displays all the groups ■ All Devices: Displays all the devices ■ All Monitors: Displays all monitor categories Based on permissions. Event collectors are dynamic or static. services. The parent level of an event folder represents all of the events or abnormalities associated with the collectors. or devices from several different event lists (collectors) that shows the relationship of groups. Nodes for static collectors remain in the navigation tree whether events are present or not. Nodes for dynamic collectors appear or disappear from the navigation tree based on whether or not events are present that meet the collectors’ criteria. services. or devices. An event list is associated with the lowest level nodes of a component folder. Component folders A component folder is a grouping of groups. Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 25 . Administrators define component folders and associate them with one or more groups. To access the event list for a collector. Each level of the component folder is shown as a node under the parent component folder. Table 3: Navigation tree objects and definitions Object icon Name and definition Navigation tree top-level node (Global). Table 3 on page 25 shows the icons and describes the objects represented in the navigation tree.Navigating the Operations Console the lowest level nodes of an event folder. services. operators click the collector node in the navigation tree.

The BMC ProactiveNet Server assigns a status value to each event. if you have configured the event list to use the severity color for the event line. For example.Navigating the Operations Console Object icon Name and definition Navigation tree top-level node (My Folders). Table 4 on page 26 lists the icons that are displayed in the event list to represent event status. Also. based on permissions. an event group subnode of the navigation tree toplevel node or another event group node Child collector node Child group node Child service node dynamic component folder with less than 500 configuration items Understanding event status The status of an event provides basic information about the event’s response activity. Understanding event severity Each event has a severity level associated with it that indicates the seriousness of the event. a rule can change the status of an event automatically. However. and then you can change the status by performing event operations or other actions on the event. the color of the icon’s background varies with the severity of the event. users can create event and component folders under this node to organize the event view Event group collector. a high severity level for an event in 26 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Table 4: Event status icons Icon Event status Open Closed Acknowledged Assigned Blackout The color of the status icon is always the same. the severity level indicates the urgency of the need to take action. In combination with status and priority.

Distinguishing between severity and priority helps you to understand which event requires action first. Table 6 on page 28 lists the icons that are displayed in the event list to represent event priority. Table 5: Event severity levels Color red dark orange light orange yellow blue green grey red with a blue border dark orange with a blue border light orange with a blue border faint grey Icon in Event List Severity level Critical Major Minor Warning Information Ok Unknown Predictive Critical Predictive Major Predictive Minor No event The event with the highest severity level in an event or component folder determines the severity indicator that you see for the event or component folder in the navigation tree. Table 5 on page 27 lists the default severity levels and colors for the events that appear in the navigation tree and event list and shows the icons used in the event list. the event or component folder is displayed in the navigation tree with a Critical (red) severity indicator. if one event has a severity of Critical. Understanding event priority In addition to a severity level. each event has a priority level.Navigating the Operations Console the Closed status is no cause for alarm. Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 27 . For example. but a high severity level for an event in the Open status and with a priority of 1 indicates an urgent need for action.

For example. The circles represent the event states. Assign To. Table 7: Event states resulting from event operations Event operation performed Acknowledge Event Take Ownership Decline Ownership Assign To Close Event Unacknowledge Event Black Out Resulting state Acknowledged Assigned Acknowledged Assigned Closed Open Blackout Figure 2 on page 29 shows how an event in any state is affected by the operations that are valid for that current state. Close Event. see “Performing event operations” on page 76. Each event’s state depends on multiple factors: ■ Severity. or Unacknowledge Event 28 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Navigating the Operations Console Table 6: Event priority icons Icon Event Priority Priority 1 (highest) Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Priority 5 (lowest) Determination of event states The event list displays sufficient information for you to recognize an event’s current state quickly. reflected in the status icon When you perform an event operation on an event. Each arrow represents an action. you can perform a Take Ownership. with the direction of the arrow indicating the flow of the action. reflected in the severity icon and color of the event line (based on the preference selected by the user) ■ Priority. reflected in the priority icon ■ The last event operation performed on the event. the state of the event changes according to Table 7 on page 28. For information about performing event operations. if the event is currently in the Acknowledge Event state.

for that event to be in the Acknowledge Event state. Figure 2: How event operations affect event state Understanding the effect of event status on event count for collectors In the navigation tree (except the top-level node). The second count indicates the sum of all the events. For example. Conversely. Operations Console views In the Operations Console. if the navigation tree displays Intelligent Events (8) 11. This counter decreases whenever the status changes from open to closed. it means that the number of open intelligent events is 8 and the total number of intelligent events is 11. assigned. you can use the smart icons in the toolbar to select the following views. each event collector has two event counts. blackout. you should perform an Acknowledge Event or Decline Ownership action. and acknowledged events. The first count is enclosed in parentheses and represents the number of unacknowledged (Open) events. assigned. this count does not include closed.Navigating the Operations Console action. blackout. or acknowledged state. depending on the object that you have selected in the navigation tree: Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 29 .

events can be organized into different collectors and folders in the navigation tree ■ Tile View: displays a dashboard summary of event activity ■ Canvas View: allows you to create a graphical representation of objects that you are monitoring in your environment ■ Tree View or Graph View: the Tree View displays all service groups in a hyperbolic tree for a user-defined duration. with the option of expanding the tree to display the contents of the service groups and their infrastructure groups The Graph View displays a graphical representation of the configuration items (CIs) in a service model. The following table lists the default views defined for each object type. The only exception is if the selected view is not available for a particular object type. The view that is available depends on what object that you have selected in the navigation tree. When this option is enabled. Use the Graph View to monitor events for published service models that represent your business services. ■ Grid View: allows you to re-calibrate events in the Event Status chart and display results based on groups set up by the BMC ProactiveNet administrator. you can enable a configuration option that allows the view to be changed automatically. In this case. the operations console automatically switches to the default view defined for the object type that you select in the navigation tree. Object type Event collectors Event folder All Groups folder Group All Device folder Device All Services folder Configuration item (CI) Component folder Default view Event View Event View Grid View Grid View Grid View Grid View Tile View Graph View Tile View 30 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The Graph View is available only for CI objects.Navigating the Operations Console ■ Event View: displays information about events. The view stays the same until you select a different view. The same button is used for both views. However. the operations console changes to a view that is defined for that object type.

Navigating the Operations Console Note The view changes only if you select an object of a different type in the navigation tree. If you click more than five areas. The number of breadcrumbs that are displayed can be configured. The breadcrumb is labeled based on the object that you selected. A new breadcrumb is created each time you click on a navigation item. Breadcrumbs As you navigate through the operations console. see the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Guide. folder. such as a navigation pane drawer. or view. The view does not change if you select objects of the same type. You can return to an item by clicking on one of the breadcrumbs. providing a history of the areas that you have viewed. see the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide. You can continue to use the toolbar buttons to manually change the view with this option enabled. a trail of breadcrumbs is created at the top of the operations console window. five breadcrumbs are shown in the breadcrumb string. For details about how to enable this option. then the first breadcrumb is dropped and the new breadcrumb is added to the end of the breadcrumb trail. Chapter 1 Introducing the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console 31 . By default. For instructions.

Navigating the Operations Console 32 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Each view is displayed as a separate node in the navigation tree in the Main drawer. The event information and statuses are updated every two minutes. Displays a list of events for configuration items (CIs) in a service model Displays a list of events for groups set by the BMC ProactiveNet administrator Displays a list of events for devices monitored by BMC ProactiveNet Displays a list of events for monitors created on the devices monitored by BMC ProactiveNet Viewing service model configuration items by service Viewing events by group on page 107 Viewing events by device on page 116 Viewing events for monitored services on page 121 All Services All Groups All Devices All Monitors Chapter 2 Working with events 33 . based on the assigned access rights. Abnormality Viewing all abnormalities on type events are events that are automatically detected page 93 from statistically significant abnormal trends. Table 8 on page 33 summarizes the basic characteristics of each type of event view. Table 8: Views of event information in the Main drawer View All Event Collectors All Abnormalities Description Displays a list of events for services and devices monitored by BMC ProactiveNet Further information Viewing the default event list for All Event Collectors on page 36 Displays a list of abnormality type events.2 Working with events Event views in the Main drawer of the navigation pane The Main drawer in the navigation pane in the Operations Console presents information about events in various tables and graphics.

use the information in Table 9 on page 34 to determine the appropriate settings.refreshRate property in the installDirectory\ pw\pronto\conf\pronet. click Preferences . Auto Refresh is enabled.conf file. and select View Events. Table 9: Event list preference settings Field Auto Refresh Description Enables automatic refresh of the event list after a periodic interval. By default. This can be configured by changing the pronet. 34 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . right-click a configuration item under All Services => Graph View. Note: The event list pop-up window for configuration items is not refreshed even if you set a time interval in this field. The default refresh interval is 2 minutes. Number of Events to Download Per Page Enables specification of the number of events to be downloaded per page. the more time required to refresh the events. The recommended setting is 200. 2 In the Event List Preferences dialog box.Customizing the display of the event list Customizing the display of the event list You can adjust the following aspects of the event list to suit your event monitoring and management preferences: ■ auto refresh ■ number of events to download per page ■ confirmation dialog boxes ■ tooltips ■ row color ■ icons ■ row numbering To customize display settings for the event lists 1 From the navigation bar. The higher the value. To view the event list pop-up window.alarmStatusView.

4 In the Event List Preferences dialog box. This setting is not applicable to slots related to Baseline and Threshold for Intelligent events. Show Internal names of Event Attributes in Tooltips If selected. click OK. By default. the header row of the event list and labels in the Details Notebook. and Severity columns) ■ No severity color in any row Make Closed and Blackout Events Rows White Make Acknowledged and Assigned Events Rows White Use Icons for the Status. in both. Priority. confirmations are displayed for All event operations. tooltips display internal names of event attributes in the header row of the event list and labels in the Details Notebook. If cleared. and Severity Columns Row Numbering Displays rows that have events that are closed or blackout in white Displays rows that have events that are acknowledged or assigned in white Displays icons instead of text for these columns Displays the row number in the left-most column 3 Click Update All Views to save the changes and exit the dialog box. Tools Menu. Priority.Customizing the display of the event list Field Confirmations Description Enables a notification when a user takes an action Displays confirmation for the following options: ■ All event operations ■ Close an event ■ None of the event operations When selected. Chapter 2 Working with events 35 . tooltips display the same event attributes as displayed in the header row of the event list and labels in the Details Notebook. Tools Menu. Filling Row with Severity Color Displays the severity color for the following options: ■ Entire event row ■ Only the first column (after the Status. a user can enter operation notes using confirmation dialog boxes.

All pop-up boxes reflect this change with a delay of a maximum of one minute. The status of an event can be one of the following event: ■ Open ■ Assigned ■ Acknowledged ■ Blackout ■ Closed Note 36 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . displays the current status of the event. The default event list does not display events based on permissions of devices. It displays all events based on the permissions of event collectors. Events on the All Event Collectors screen are displayed in a tabular form as summarized in Table 10 on page 36. Table 10: Event information columns on the All Event Collectors screen Column Row number Description Displays the row number of the event This column appears only if you have selected Row Numbering in the Event List Preferences dialog box. Viewing the default event list for All Event Collectors The All Event Collectors screen lists all the events for services and devices monitored by BMC ProactiveNet.Viewing the default event list for All Event Collectors Note The preference settings are applied to browser windows for a particular user logon on the same computer. Status Provides basic information about the event’s response activity. that is.

In combination with status and priority. this menu provides a launch point. the severity level indicates the urgency of the need to take action. execute remote actions/diagnostics. For events originating from the BMC ProactiveNet Server. add a change entry to track the changes in your environment. Severity is based on the comparison of metrics to defined thresholds.proactivenet.conf file. and export the event.defaultSeverity property in the installDirectory\pw\pronto\conf \pronet. For multiple server deployment and BMC Atrium Explorer environments.Viewing the default event list for All Event Collectors Column Tools Menu Description For events originating from BMC Impact Manager (cell). Also. perform probable cause analysis for the event. Priority Severity Determines which event requires action before the other Indicates the seriousness of the event. you can perform diagnostics. view graphs and parent groups. this menu enables you to perform operations on an event. retrieve BMC BladeLogic device history. This can be configured by changing the bmc. as follows: ■ Critical (red) ■ Major (dark orange) ■ Minor (light orange) ■ Warning (yellow) ■ Information (blue) ■ OK (green) ■ Unknown (grey) ■ Major and above ■ Minor and above ■ Warning and above ■ Information and above ■ OK and above ■ Unknown and above The default severity is Information and above. Occurred Displays the date and time when the event occurred Chapter 2 Working with events 37 . this menu enables you to perform all the actions that you can perform on the cell events. set thresholds and manage data collection.

It might also display the following icons: ■ Action Result ■ Detailed Diagnostics ■ Notes ■ Related Events ■ Suppressed Events (for upgrade users only) Host Displays the name of the host on which the event occurred When you navigate from one collector to another using the navigation tree. For more information. Related Topics Viewing the event list for remote cells on page 88 Note Viewing further information for a specific event from the Tools Menu The following summarizes the available options for further information about a specific event from the Tools Menu on the All Events screen. Enables you to perform probable cause analysis on the selected event. see Performing event operations on page 76. and so on. no event is selected and highlighted in the event list. see Executing remote actions on page 80. by default. Enable you to execute a remote action on a selected event. 38 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . For more information.Viewing further information for a specific event from the Tools Menu Column Message Description Displays a short description of the reason for the event. the first event in the list is selected. Occasionally. Table 11: Further information options from the Tools Menu on the All Events screen Option Operations Remote Actions/Diagnostics Probable Cause Analysis Description Enable you to perform event operations such as open. see How BMC ProactiveNet performs probable cause analysis on events on page 159. close. For more information.

For more information. Managing data collection on page 126. Displays the parent groups and subgroups. see Launching an originating BMC ProactiveNet Server on page 86. see Diagnostics on page 129. If you have configured BMC Service Level Management with BMC ProactiveNet. see Exporting and copying event information on page 79. and Resetting a baseline on page 383. For more information. Both these options are available in a multiple server deployment environment where devices are sourced from the CMDB. This option is available only when you have a multiple server deployment environment. Enables you to export information about all or only visible slots in a BAROC. or CSV file. you can view BMC Service Level Management options for CMDB-published CIs. see Managing configuration changes on page 125. see Understanding event thresholds on page 180. For more information. Show Graph(s) Show Parent Groups Threshold + Data Collection Additional options based on environment Launch ■ BMC Impact Model Designer: Enables you to launch BMC Impact Model Designer from BMC ProactiveNet and view the selected configuration item (CI) in BMC Impact Model Designer. XML. if available Enables you to set event thresholds and managed data collection. For more information. Chapter 2 Working with events 39 . see Customizing monitor graphs on page 264. For more information. Enables you to use pre-configured and user-defined diagnostic tools to help monitor your system.Viewing further information for a specific event from the Tools Menu Option Add Configuration Change Export Description Enables you to store and track configuration data. Displays a graph and provides additional options to modify the graph. Additional options for an Intelligent Event Intelligent Event History Diagnostics Displays event history details. For more information. For more information. Note: The Launch options are available for events associated with the CI and the CI itself. ■ Originating BMC ProactiveNet Server: Enables you to launch a BMC ProactiveNet Server from which events originated in a multiple BMC ProactiveNet Server deployment environment. see Table 12 on page 40. only if the CIs are sourced from the Configuration Management Database (CMDB).

Viewing further information for a specific event from the Tools Menu Table 12: Further information on the Intelligent Event Details page Option Event History Description The following event history details are displayed: ■ Time when the event got triggered ■ Device information ■ Severity of the event ■ Description of the event ■ Analyze .Click the Probable Cause or Service Impact icon to analyze the event. ■ Remote Actions/Diagnostics ■ Tools Event Action History The history of actions (Intelligent or External events) performed on the event are displayed: ■ Time when the event action began ■ Severity level of the event ■ Event Rule Name—name of an event rule that triggered the action ■ Action Type—type of action initiated (for example: Detailed Diagnostics) ■ Action Details ■ Result More Information More information on the event are displayed: ■ Time when the event occurs ■ Message Related Topics Viewing all abnormalities on page 93 Viewing events by device on page 116 40 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

otherwise. Chapter 2 Working with events 41 . All further navigation that you perform from this popup window is limited to this popup window only. BMC ProactiveNet displays the events for the selected object in the event list pane. and Show Parent Groups open in a popup window.Viewing the event list for a specific component in the navigation tree Viewing events by group on page 107 Viewing events for groups in a hierarchical tree on page 114 Acknowledging events on page 122 Viewing events and abnormalities by service on page 100 Viewing services in a hierarchical tree on page 105 Searching events on page 71 Behavior of popup windows for Tools Menu options on page 41 Behavior of popup windows for Tools Menu options When you navigate through various BMC ProactiveNet screens. Viewing the event list for a specific component in the navigation tree The procedures for viewing events for an event collector. ■ Threshold + Data Collection operations such as Edit Violated Absolute Global ■ Add Change Entry operation reuses a popup window if one is already opened for ■ Diagnostics operations such as FlashCheck and Top Processes-CPU always open in a new popup window. Signature Instance Threshold. These operations do not reuse the popup window opened by operations listed in the first bullet point. and a monitor are almost alike. no matter from where they are launched. open in a second popup window. Reset Baseline. you observe the following behavior for various options selected from the Tools Menu: ■ Operations such as Intelligent Event History. opens in a new window. a device. Show Graph(s). the same operation. a group. a service. Absolute Instance Threshold. and Manage Data Collection. Probable Cause Analysis. Threshold. Signature Global Threshold.

click the Global folder . To view the event list for a group 1 In the navigation tree. 3 Expand the hierarchy to locate the group 4 Click the group. see Applying a default.Viewing the event list for a specific component in the navigation tree To view the event list for a collector 1 In the navigation tree. or user-defined template for event list columns on page 47. click Global. click Global. 2 Click All Groups. whose events you want to display. whose 2 Expand the hierarchy under All Event Collectors to locate the collector events you want to display. global. 3 Apply one of the following out-of-the box advanced filters: ■ All Abnormalities ■ Active Abnormalities ■ Inactive Abnormalities For more information. 2 Click All Event Collectors => All Events. To view the event list for a service 1 In the navigation tree. 3 Click the collector. To view the event list for all abnormalities 1 In the navigation tree. Tip You can also view the event list for abnormalities by performing the following steps: 1 In the navigation tree. click Global. 2 Click All Abnormalities. 42 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . click Global.

Each event class has defined slots. host name on which the abnormality occurred. whose events you want to display. The Quick Columns Selector in the toolbar panel allows you to select the columns that are displayed in the event list. Table 13: Out-of-the box event list templates Template Abnormality Information Columns displayed in the event list Status. 3 Expand the hierarchy to locate the service 4 Click the service. By changing the slots presented in the event list. click Global. 2 Click All Monitors. To view the event list for all devices 1 In the navigation tree. host name on which the intelligent event occurred. date and time the abnormality occurred. priority. while others are unique to an event class. Some slots are common to all event classes. Selecting the type of event list to view Slots identify information within an event class. and object (monitor) on which the abnormality occurred Status. date and time the intelligent event occurred. BMC ProactiveNet provides the following out-of-the-box or default templates. score. priority. tools menu. The default slots in the event list provide basic information about an event. and IP address of the host on which the intelligent event occurred Alarm Information Chapter 2 Working with events 43 . 2 Click All Devices. action count (number of occurrences). To view the event list for all monitors 1 In the navigation tree. message produced by the intelligent event. severity. severity. message produced by the abnormality.Selecting the type of event list to view 2 Click All Services. you can view additional pertinent information or change the order in which event data is presented. click Global. tools menu.

and host name on which the event occurred Tools menu. device. incident status. priority. tools menu. All Services. date and time the intelligent event occurred. All Devices. incident priority. priority. severity. and propagations Status. see Intelligent Events Details template on page 44. For more information. All Devices. date time. message produced by the event. tools menu. incident ID. date and time the event occurred. and object (monitor) on which the event occurred Status. All Services. severity. and All Monitors. date and time the event occurred. object (monitor) on which the event occurred and its class Status. predicted severity. priority. severity. internal ID. date and time the event occurred. tools menu. tools menu. and message produced by the event Status. tools menu. and then clicking the event counts displayed on these pages Related topics: Creating a new template for event list columns on page 45 44 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . priority. ID. message. host name on which the event occurred. message produced by the event. message produced by the event. and All Monitors ■ Event View => All components folders created by a user under the Global and My Folders folders ■ Tree View => All Groups and All Services and then right-clicking to select the All Events or Abnormalities options ■ Grid View => All Abnormalities. This template is available from the following drill-down options: ■ Event View => All Abnormalities. severity. priority. message produced by the event. tool. or copy the Intelligent Events Details (default or out-of the box) template. Event Incident Information Intelligent Events Information Predicted Events Information Remote Cell Events Information Supervisor Information Intelligent Events Details Intelligent Events Details template Administrator and other users cannot edit. metric. severity. and score. owner of the event. predicted time. host name on which the event occurred. delete. date and time the event occurred. All Groups. host name on which the event occurred. and message produced by the event Status. incident assignee. priority. severity. object (monitor) on which the event occurred. date and time the event occurred.Selecting the type of event list to view Template Basic Information Columns displayed in the event list Status. tools menu. All Groups.

7 Select Show in Quick Columns Selector so that this template appears in the Quick Columns Selector dialog box. 5 Select Make Global so that all users can view this template. 3 In the Event List Column Editor dialog box. perform the following steps: a Click Event Class Selector .Creating a new template for event list columns Creating a new template for event list columns An administrator can create a customized template so that the event list displays only those columns that are present in this newly created template. and then click OK. 9 Click Save. 6 Select Default for New Event Folders to use this template as a default for newly created event folders. on the left. select the Templates tab. 4 Specify a Name for the new template. Only an administrator user can delete a global template. d Click the right arrow. 8 Under Available Columns. and then. User-defined templates are not prefixed with an asterisk. click Editor. click New Template . To create a new template for event list columns 1 Click Quick Columns Selector. A global template is prefixed with an asterisk (*). c Select a column name. e Click the Up or Down arrows to change the order in which the columns will be displayed. Tip b Select an event class. Related topics: Chapter 2 Working with events 45 . 2 In the Quick Columns Selector dialog box.

or user-defined template for event list columns on page 47 Adding a column to an event list on page 48 Deleting a column from an event list on page 48 Adding a column to an event list for an abnormality on page 95 Deleting a column from an event list for an abnormality on page 95 Editing a default or user-defined template for event list columns Administrators can edit default or user-defined templates created by them or other users. click Editor. Copying an existing template for event list columns Users with appropriate permissions can make a copy of a default template or a userdefined template created by them. on the left. global.Editing a default or user-defined template for event list columns Editing a default or user-defined template for event list columns on page 46 Copying an existing template for event list columns on page 46 Deleting a user-defined template for event list columns on page 47 Applying a default. click a default or user-defined template. select the Templates tab. 3 In the Event List Column Editor dialog box. 4 Modify the information that you want to edit. 5 Click Save. and then. 2 In the Quick Columns Selector dialog box. To edit a default or user-defined template for event list columns 1 Click Quick Columns Selector. 46 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

global. To delete a user-defined template 1 Click Quick Columns Selector. 3 In the Event List Column Editor dialog box. under the list of availabletemplates. A template Copy of copiedTemplate appears on the left. 3 In the Event List Column Editor dialog box. 2 In the Quick Columns Selector dialog box. or user-defined template for event list columns All users can apply default. or user-defined templates to an event list to view the columns present in these templates. Applying a default. global. select the Templates tab. click Editor. 2 In the Quick Columns Selector dialog box. click a user-defined template. 4 Click Copy . on the left. 4 Click . click Editor. select the Templates tab. Deleting a user-defined template for event list columns Administrators and other users can delete user-defined templates created by them. To apply a default. click a user-defined or default template. and then. and then. on the left.Deleting a user-defined template for event list columns To copy a default or user-defined template 1 Click Quick Columns Selector. global. or user-defined template 1 Click Quick Columns Selector. Chapter 2 Working with events 47 .

drag a column name into the header row of the event list. 6 From the Event List Column Editor dialog box. on the left. . 4 Under Available Columns. The event list displays only those columns that are present in the selected template. BMC recommends that you add a maximum of 30 columns to the event list to optimize the performance of refresh. click Editor. or user-defined template. and then click OK. The newly added column now appears in the event list and the same is removed from the Events List Column Editor dialog box. click Editor.Adding a column to an event list 2 In the Quick Columns Selector dialog box. global. click a default. 4 Click . 3 In the Event List Column Editor dialog box. select the Single Columns Selector tab. 48 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . click Event Class Selector 5 Select an event class. 3 In the Event List Column Editor dialog box. select the Templates tab. 2 In the Quick Columns Selector dialog box. Best practice Deleting a column from an event list All users can delete a single column from the event list for a specific event class. This operation requires the event list and the Quick Columns Selector dialog box to be open simultaneously. Adding a column to an event list All users can add a single column from any event class to the event list. To add a column to an event list 1 Click Quick Columns Selector. and then.

and detailed message Event Metric Event metric information such as metric and its value. score. host. modified. class. and Detailed Diagnostics Basic information about the event. object name. event notification history. predict. minimum sampling window. repeated. The Logs and Notes table displays notes added by the user. reported by source. Chapter 2 Working with events 49 . original severity and priority. 2 From the event list. drag a column name from the header row of an event list and drop it into the Event List Column Editor dialog box. received. and action count (number of occurrences of actions) A user can enter additional information using the notes text area and click the Notes icon present in the Logs and Notes table to view the notes in a larger window. absolute deviation. severity. arrived. time to close. object class. baseline. event rule history. this field includes additional information such as threshold. monitor category. and event operation history. such as date and time of occurrence. message. origin time.Viewing the event Details Notebook To delete a column from an event list 1 Click Quick Columns Selector. last modifier. such as status.s The cards or columns of the details notebook pane organize the information as described in the following table: Table 14: Event Details Notebook pane Column name Summary Sections in subtab Overview Description of contents Hyperlinks to launch Probable Cause Analysis. priority. repeated. average value. owner. Viewing the event Details Notebook The Details Notebook pane displayed below the event list provides all of the recorded information about an event. comparison. deviation. baseline type. and SLO For an intelligent event. and auto close Logs and Notes Historical Attributes Historical attributes of the event. duration. date and time of occurrence. Show Graph(s). category. history of any rule or policy applied.

modification history. this field includes additional information. tool class. manufacturer. ID. company. For example. and operation category 1. see To select the cards to be displayed in the Details Notebook pane on page 51”. and URL For an intelligent event. key. By default. such as the ID. rule. item. and 3. this card is not visible. such as VMWare host and ID Parameter Related Component Source Origin Reporter Monitor metric and its value. and tool time (time when the event originated) By default. tool severity. The event type is displayed before the slots present for that event type. monitoring tool name. causes and effects. provided the event type has slots that are not present in the remaining cards. owner. and event relations A list of undefined attributes and values Undefined Attributes Other dependOnTheSelectedEvent Information in this card changes according to the type of event selected. 50 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . product name. this field includes additional information about groups. and priority might be displayed in this card. tool suggestion. location. propagations. address. and severity Information about the adapter or gateway from which the event originated. account. including the tool name. associations. model. tool key. tool ID. this card is not visible. class. history. Host of Object Information about the host of the monitored object. 2. parameter unit and its threshold Device name. For more information. location.Viewing the event Details Notebook Column name Object Sections in subtab Object Monitored Description of contents Hyperlinks to launch Show Graph(s) and Tools Menu Information about the monitored object. including class. client address. and service For an intelligent event. timeout. collectors. Access Control List (ACL). and Common Event Model (CEM) version Alarm ID is displayed in this section if the event selected is of ALARM type. Internals Tracking Tracking information. internal ID. attributes of a core event that are not displayed in other cards. abstractions. adapter host. such as its name. class. Relationships Information about events abstracted from this one. type. tool address. such as ITSM category. Service Model Component (SMC) impact. and type Information about the origin of the event. component alias. such as its name. relation source. see To select the cards to be displayed in the Details Notebook pane on page 51”. For more information. version.

. To select the cards to be displayed in the Details Notebook pane 1 Select an event from the event list. 3 Select the cards to be displayed in the Details Notebook pane. If you select more cards than can be displayed. when you click Edit Preferences. to hide the Details Notebook. 4 Click Close . attributes related to Baseline and Threshold for Intelligent events are not available for selection and hence these attributes cannot be displayed in the default Summary card view. Note Chapter 2 Working with events 51 . The permissions that a user has determine whether the user can perform an action on a hyperlink. Tip To select the event attributes to be displayed within a card in the Details Notebook pane 1 Select an event from the event list. 4 Click Close. In the Summary card. The attributes available for selection depend on the type of event selected. use the tiny right and left arrows to the right and left of the Details Notebook to navigate through the cards. 2 In any of the cards listed in Table 14 on page 49 of the Details Notebook pane. click Edit Preferences 3 Select the event information that must be displayed in the selected card. 2 Click Edit Notebook Preferences .Viewing the event Details Notebook To view and hide the Details Notebook 1 Select an event from the event list. 2 Click the Up arrows 3 Click the Down arrows to the left of Details to view the Details Notebook.

you can manually refresh at any time to be sure that you have the most recent data. 52 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . and even if you use the automatic refresh. 4 Click Save. These characters are not supported. Do not include nonprinting characters such as FS (0x1c) and RS (0x1e). click Related Event(s) in the Message column or the Tools Menu. . click More Info 2 Click Minimize . You can configure refresh of the event list to occur automatically or manually. Refreshing the event list All of the event sources in the BMC ProactiveNet system can generate thousands of events. in an event list row. ‘. >. and “in the notes. select an event. and printing characters such as <. the BMC ProactiveNet Server is queried for any changes in events.Viewing related events To view additional information about a card in the Details Notebook pane 1 In any of the cards listed in Table 14 on page 49 of the Details Notebook pane. When you manually refresh the event list. 2 In the Logs and Notes card of the Details Notebook pane. To add notes or annotate an event 1 From the event list. A Notes icon is displayed in the selected event message. . click More Info 3 Scroll down to the Logs and Notes section and enter the annotated text. You can choose whether to view all of those events as they occur. The console updates the event list if changes are present. Note You cannot view related events after BMC Impact Manager (cell) purges data. Note Viewing related events To view events that are associated with an event.

Note To automatically refresh the event list 1 From the navigation bar. Using event and component folders BMC ProactiveNet has an organizational feature that provides event and component folders for operators and administrators to use to view and manage numerous events from different sources in meaningful ways. ■ Change the sorting of the event list. the event is not updated until you manually refresh the event list by clicking Refresh in the navigation bar.Organizing events in the event list On the Internet browser. on some UI screens. Chapter 2 Working with events 53 . grouping events in your own ways. Note If the BMC ProactiveNet Server is extremely busy. ■ Search events to see only the ones of interest. If Auto Refresh is not enabled and an event is modified externally from the console. select Auto Refresh. the F5 and Refresh buttons are not supported. the event list might not be refreshed until the BMC ProactiveNet Server completes the current eventprocessing load. Organizing events in the event list You can use various techniques to organize events and view information about them: ■ Use event and component folders to arrange events from different sources. Forward. ■ Filter events to see only the ones of interest. you can display events in a single tree node in the navigation tree. With these folders. the Back. and Close buttons are also not supported. 2 In the Event List Preferences dialog box. click Preferences . Also.

select a collector or subcollector to add to the new event folder. 2 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. To remove the selected collector from This Folder’s Event Collectors . delete. 6 To add another collector or subcollector. For more information about creating event folders. The selected collector appears beneath the new event folder in This Folder’s Event Collectors . 4 Under Available Event Collectors. For more information about creating remote cell event folders. To add an event folder node 1 In the Main drawer of the navigation pane. 54 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Creating event folders The following procedures explain how to add. see “Creating component folders” on page 56. 3 In the Add Event Folder dialog box. see “Creating remote cell event folders” on page 61. see “Creating event folders” on page 54. You must first create an event or component folder to which you can add an image view. choose Add Folder => Event Folder. and how to move them within their hierarchy. For more information about creating component folders. 5 Click the right arrow to add the selected collector to This Folder’s Event Collectors . and modify event folders. enter a name for the new event folder and optionally enter a description. Tip You can also drag a collector or subcollector from Available Event Collectors and drop it into This Folder’s Event Collectors . click Global or My Folders . repeat the previous steps.Organizing events in the event list Note Folders are a prerequisite for image views. click the left arrow .

perform the following additional steps: a Under This Folder’s Event Collectors. d Repeat the previous steps to add more event subfolder. 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. perform the following actions: ■ From Event List Columns. 4 In the Edit Event Folder dialog box. e Add event collectors to each subfolder as specified in step 4 through step 6. c Specify a name for the newly created event subfolder. choose Delete. ■ From Event List Filter. select the event folder subnode or collector that you want to move. choose Edit Folder. click Global or My Folders.Organizing events in the event list 7 Scroll down on the dialog box and underEvent List View . WARNING To move an event folder subnode within its parent folder node 1 In the Main drawer of the navigation pane. 9 Click OK. To delete an event folder node 1 In the Main drawer of the navigation pane. select the newly created event folder. 2 Select a folder in the navigation tree. 4 In the Delete Folder confirmation dialog box. 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. 2 Select a folder in the navigation tree. Chapter 2 Working with events 55 . b Click Add Subfolder . Deleting a parent event folder deletes the event folder and all its descendants. 8 (optional) To add a subfolder. select a template to use to determine which columns to display in event list. click Global or My Folders . click Yes. select how you want to filter the events in the event list.

choose Edit Folder. select one of the following options to determine what components are displayed in the folder that you are creating: 56 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . or move event folder subnodes or collectors. and modify component folders. 4 Under Folder Contents. if any ■ Change the template for the event list ■ Change the filter for the event list 5 Click OK. perform any of the following actions: ■ Modify the name of the existing event folder ■ Add or modify the description ■ Add. delete. at the top of the drawer. To add a component folder node 1 In the Main drawer of the navigation pane. 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. delete.Organizing events in the event list 5 Click the Move Up or Move Down arrow button to move the event folder or collector subnode within the parent folder node hierarchy. Creating component folders The following procedures explain how to add. specify a name for the new component folder and optionally enter a description. To edit an event folder node 1 In Main drawer of the navigation pane. 4 In the Edit Event Folder dialog box. 2 From the Navigation Menu Component Folder. choose Add Folder => 3 In the Add Component Folder dialog box. and how to move them within their hierarchy. click Global or My Folders . 6 Click OK. 2 Select a folder in the navigation tree. click Global or My Folders.

b Enter the search criteria for the name of the group or device that you want to search for. The maximum number of CIs that a static or dynamic folder can hold is 500. Continue with the following procedures. The list of components changes over time based on the filter criteria. High level or general search criteria could return too many results. 2 If you selected Groups and Devices.Organizing events in the event list ■ Static List of Objects . When you create a dynamic folder. see the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide. “To add a static folder node” on page 57 “To add a dynamic folder node” on page 59 To add a static folder node 1 If you selected Static List of Objects.search for components based on the filter criteria that you specify. use the following guidelines when you create CI folders: ■ Be specific when you enter the search criteria to determine what CIs will be included in the folder. depending on what type of folder you are creating. select to search for Groups or Devices or All. select one of the following types of components to include in the new folder: ■ Groups and Devices: proceed to step 2. ■ CIs from Service Model: proceed to step 3.conf file. You can configure this number in the pronet.Contents Change . enter additional attributes in the search criteria to narrow the search. use Test Filter to verify approximately how many CIs match the search criteria that you enter. Chapter 2 Working with events 57 . To avoid performance issues when the navigation tree loads. For details. ■ Dynamic.search for components and select the components that you want to include in the folder from the list returned in the search results. If the search results in too many CIs. The Groups and Devices list is automatically filtered based on the search criteria that you entered. perform the following additional steps: a Under Available Components.

or device. The query will search for components with all of the attributes that you specify. c From the Class list. Each new attribute that you add narrows and refines the search.Organizing events in the event list c Select the group or device that you want to include in the folder and click the right arrow to move it into This Folder's Components. expand the query builder options by clicking the plus button next to the Class list. select Make *Global (all users). 58 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . indicated by the AND before the attribute names. b (optional) If you want all users that log on to the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console to access the query that you are creating. indicated by the OR before the attribute names. then the query will search for components with any but not all of the values that you specify. click Find. create a query to search for the CIs that you want to include in the folder by performing the following additional steps: a Select Create New Filter from the Filter list. An asterisk is placed next to the query name to indicate that it is global and is available to all users. but specify different values. click the plus button next to the attribute name. service. select the type of component that you want to search for. If you use the same attribute. Tip You can also drag a group or device from Available Components and drop it into This Folder’s Components. f When you have finished specifying the query attributes. d If necessary. g Under Results. select the CI to add to the new component folder. d To add another group. To display additional attributes. e Begin building the parameters for your query by selecting the attributes for the class type that you selected. repeat these steps. 3 If you selected CIs from Service Model.

click OK. An asterisk is placed next to the query name to indicate that it is global and is available to all users. To add a dynamic folder node 1 If you selected Dynamic . click Save. 5 On the Add Component Folder dialog box. select the newly created component folder.Contents Change. A device added to a CI folder node or subnode is not visible in the navigation tree but is useful in the Tile view. perform the following additional steps: a Under This Folder’s CIs. b (optional) If you want all users that log on to the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console to access the query that you are creating. i To save the query to use again. The selected item appears beneath the new component folder in This Folder's CIs. b Click Add Subfolder . 4 (optional) To add a subfolder. d Repeat the previous steps to add more component subfolders. Chapter 2 Working with events 59 . You can also drag a component or subcomponent from Results and drop it into This Folder's CIs. Click the left arrow to remove the selected item. create a query to search for the CIs that you want to include in the folder by performing the following additional steps: a Select Create New Filter from the Filter list. Tip Note c Specify a name for the newly created component subfolder. and click OK. select Make *Global (all users). The saved query can also be used to search for CIs in the Find CI drawer in the navigation pane.Organizing events in the event list h Click the right arrow to add the selected CI to This Folder's CIs. enter the Query Name.

e Begin building the parameters for your query by selecting the attributes for the class type that you selected. To delete a component folder node 1 In the Main drawer of the navigation pane. WARNING 60 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. click Save. g Under Results. click Global or My Folders . h To save the query to use again. 2 Select a folder in the navigation tree. but specify different values. the CIs that match the search criteria are displayed up to a maximum of 500. 2 On the Add Component Folder dialog box. click the plus button next to the attribute name. click Test Filter.Organizing events in the event list c From the Class list. If you use the same attribute. then the query will search for components with any but not all of the values that you specify. click OK. The query will search for components with all of the attributes that you specify. click Yes. Each new attribute that you add narrows and refines the search. Deleting a parent component folder deletes the component folder and all its descendants. indicated by the OR before the attribute names. select the type of component that you want to search for. expand the query builder options by clicking the plus button next to the Class list. 4 In the Delete Folder confirmation dialog box. and click OK. f When you have finished specifying the query attributes. enter the Query Name. indicated by the AND before the attribute names. choose Delete. d If necessary. To display additional attributes.

service.Organizing events in the event list To move a static component folder subnode within its parent folder node 1 In the Main drawer of the navigation pane. click Global or My Folders . perform any of the following actions: ■ Modify the name of the existing component folder ■ Add or modify the description ■ Add. and how to move them within their hierarchy. or device within its parent folder node. groups. 2 Select a folder in the navigation tree. 4 In the Edit Component Folder dialog box. choose Edit Folder. click Global or My Folders . delete. 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. 5 Click the Move Up or Move Down arrow button to move the component folder or collector subnode within the parent folder node hierarchy. and modify remote cell event folders. click OK. 2 Select a folder in the navigation tree. delete. 6 Click OK. select the component folder subnode that you want to move. choose Edit Folder. 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. You can use this procedure to move a group. or move component folders. Chapter 2 Working with events 61 . services. 4 In the Edit Component Folder dialog box. Tip To edit a component folder node 1 In the Main drawer of the navigation pane. Creating remote cell event folders The following procedures explain how to add. if any 5 To save your changes. or devices.

at the top of the drawer. choose Add Event 4 In the Add Event Folder dialog box. The self collector is the top level collector in the Available Event Collectors list and has the same name as the remote cell. select a collector or subcollector to add to the new event folder. Note Tip You can also drag a collector or subcollector from Available Event Collectors and drop it into This Folder’s Event Collectors . 9 (optional) To add a subfolder. select the newly created event folder. 6 Click the right arrow to add the selected collector to This Folder’s Event Collectors . perform the following actions: ■ From Event List Columns. 3 From the Navigation Menu Folder.Organizing events in the event list To add a remote cell event folder node 1 In the navigation pane. repeat the previous steps. To remove the selected collector from This Folder’s Event Collectors . 62 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . perform the following additional steps: a Under This Folder’s Event Collectors. select how you want to filter the events in the event list. 8 Scroll down on the dialog box and underEvent List View . click Other Cells. 5 Under Available Event Collectors. ■ From Event List Filter. select a template to use to determine which columns to display in event list. The selected collector appears beneath the new event folder in This Folder’s Event Collectors . 7 To add another collector or subcollector. You cannot add the self collector to a remote cell event folder. enter a name for the new event folder and optionally enter a description. click the left arrow . 2 Select a remote cell for those listed in the Other Cells navigation tree.

5 Click the Move Up or Move Down arrow button to move the event folder or collector subnode within the parent folder node hierarchy. All remote cell event folders are global folders. e Add event collectors to each subfolder as specified in step 4 through step 6. click Yes. 10 Click OK. 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. 2 Select a folder in the navigation tree. choose Delete. c Specify a name for the newly created event subfolder. select the event folder subnode or collector that you want to move.Organizing events in the event list b Click Add Subfolder . 2 Select a folder in the navigation tree. Deleting a parent event folder deletes the event folder and all its descendants. d Repeat the previous steps to add more event subfolder. the user account that is used to log on to the operations console must belong to a user group that has permission to view and perform actions on the remote cell for which the folder is created. 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. 4 In the Delete Folder confirmation dialog box. Chapter 2 Working with events 63 . choose Edit Folder. To delete a remote cell event folder node 1 In the navigation pane. To view a remote cell event folder in the operations console. meaning they can be seen by all users who access the operations console with the correct permissions. WARNING To move a remote cell event folder subnode within its parent folder node 1 In the navigation pane. 6 Click OK. 4 In the Edit Event Folder dialog box. click Other Cells . click Other Cells .

The Quick Filter in the filters panel provides an easy way to view only those events in an event or component folder. if any ■ Change the template for the event list ■ Change the filter for the event list 5 Click OK. you can narrow the scope and number of events displayed. perform any of the following actions: ■ Modify the name of the existing event folder ■ Add or modify the description ■ Add. event type. By default. the Quick filters panel is button in the navigation bar toggles the filters panel displayed. time. BMC ProactiveNet offers the following filtering methods: ■ quick filters. 4 In the Edit Event Folder dialog box. 3 From the Navigation Menu at the top of the drawer. or an event collector that satisfy a single or multiple criteria for filtering. which an administrator or user creates and are available to any user logged on to the server where the global filter was created Using quick filters BMC ProactiveNet displays the filters panel below the navigation bar. The Show Filter on and off. severity level. click Other Cells . or move event folder subnodes or collectors. delete. which show events based on a specific status. Examples of event folders are: 64 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Organizing events in the event list To edit a remote cell event folder node 1 In the navigation pane. Filtering events Using filters available in the filters panel located above the event list. or groups ■ global filters. 2 Select a folder in the navigation tree. choose Edit Folder. device.

select an event or component folder. 2 In the filters panel. All Devices. but does not include closed and blackout events) — Open (includes open events only) — Acknowledged — Assigned — Blackout — Closed 3 Select the event status that you want to use to filter the event list. Intelligent Events. By Status. select an event or component folder. and All Monitors under the Global folder and user-defined component folders created under the My Folders or Global folder Examples of event collectors are: All Events. 4 Click Filter. and so on To filter events by status 1 From the navigation tree. or an event collector. 2 In the filters panel. assigned. ■ A list of event statuses is displayed: — All Open (includes open. Chapter 2 Working with events 65 . or an event collector. and acknowledged events.Organizing events in the event list All Event Collectors and All Abnormalities under the Global folder and userdefined event folders created under the My Folders or Global folder Examples of component folders are: All Groups. click the down arrow next to the Status list. All Services. Note To filter events using severity 1 From the navigation tree. click the down arrow next to the Severity list. Select No filter from the Status list to return to the default event list view.

Organizing events in the event list ■ A list of severity levels is displayed: — Critical — Major — Minor — Warning — Information — OK — Unknown — Major and above — Minor and above — Warning and above — Information and above — OK and above — Unknown and above By default the Information and above severity filter is applied to all the nodes in the navigation tree. 3 In the Quick Filter Time Selector dialog box. select an event or component folder. on page 66 or List item. 2 In the filters panel. 4 Click Filter. 3 Select the severity level that you want to use to filter the event list. To filter events by time 1 From the navigation tree. 4 Select Relative time and proceed with the following substeps: a Click the down arrow below Relative time. on page 67. click the Edit Time (calendar) icon next to the Time field. 66 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . perform either List item.

hours. days. 6 Click OK. ■ A list of event types is displayed: — Alarm — Abnormality — Predictive — Configuration Change 3 Select the event type that you want to use to filter the event list. weeks. on page 67. and skip to List item. Chapter 2 Working with events 67 . click Clear to return to the default event list view. or months. or an event collector. click the down arrow next to the Event Type list. In the Quick Filter Time Selector dialog box. 4 Click Filter. select the number of minutes.Organizing events in the event list b From the list. 7 Click Filter. b Select the To date and time. select an event or component folder. or an event collector. select an event or component folder. Note To filter events by type 1 From the navigation tree. Note To filter events by device 1 From the navigation tree. Select No filter from the Event Type list to return to the default event list view. 2 In the filters panel. 5 Select Absolute time and proceed with the following substeps: a Select the From date and time.

Tip Using global filters Administrators and users can create global or advanced filters and make them accessible to all users who are logged on to the server where the filters were created. 3 In the Groups Filter dialog box. Global or advanced filters are available for the All Event Collectors event folder and all its subnodes. Use the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple groups. d In the box on the right. These filters are not available for the All Abnormalities event folder 68 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Organizing events in the event list 2 In the filters panel. To filter events by groups 1 From the navigation tree. select the way in which you want to display the groups by selecting one of the following options: ■ Tree: Displays the parent group nodes. f Click Apply. perform the following substeps: a From the list on the left. select a component folder. c Select the groups. enter the device name in the Device field. 4 Click Filter. e From the list on the right. and then click the right arrow. 2 In the filters panel. such as All Devices or All Monitors. and the child nodes in a hierarchy as shown in the navigation tree ■ Flat List: Displays the parent and child group nodes only b Expand or collapse the groups. click Groups. select the groups that you want to use to filter the event list. 3 Click Filter. intermediate nodes. select Include or Exclude to include or exclude the groups in the filter criteria.

All Services. 4 Select an event class. on page 69 through List item.Organizing events in the event list and all the component folders: All Groups. f To add another filter condition (event attribute). Tip To remove a filter condition. c Select a comparison operator. and then click . Chapter 2 Working with events 69 in the corresponding filter condition row. 6 Click Save. d Enter a value against which you want the filter to compare. By default. . the advanced filter selected in the filters panel is applied to the event list. h Repeat List item. enter a name for the filter. All Devices. on page 69 to add as many filter conditions as you want. 2 Click Create New Filter 3 Click the down arrow next to the Class list. click . click Advanced Filters . and All Monitors and all the drill-downs associated with all the component folders. AND or OR. You can use these filters to adjust the view of the event list just as you use the quick filters. . specify the following information for each attribute: a (optional) Select a left parenthesis or a NOT condition. To create a filter 1 In the filters panel. e (optional) Select a right parenthesis. b Select an event attribute. and then click OK. click g Select a logical operator. 7 In theEnter Filter Name dialog box. 8 Click OK. 5 To filter events according to one or more event attributes.

click Start Over. click Advanced Filters. click Yes. The modified filter conditions are discarded and the original filter is applied to the event list. The conditions that you change in an existing filter are not saved until you click Save. 2 Click the down arrow next to the Name list. click Advanced Filters. 5 To clear a filter condition. Note To clear a filter 1 In the filters panel. 4 In the Filter Change Confirmation dialog box. 3 Select a filter. To apply an out-of-the-box-or user-defined filter 1 In the filters panel. 4 Modify one or more filter conditions. To apply a filter without saving changes 1 In the filters panel. 2 Click the down arrow next to the Name list.Organizing events in the event list The new filter is displayed in the Name list. 3 Select a filter. 3 Select a filter. 70 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . click Advanced Filters. 4 Modify one or more filter conditions. 2 Click the down arrow next to the Name list. The selected filter is applied to the event list. 5 Click Apply.

4 Click Cancel. click Advanced Filters. To delete a filter 1 In the filters panel. click Yes. click Yes. The most recently applied filter is canceled and the previously selected filter is applied to the event list. However. Administrator and other users can delete user-defined filters they create. 3 Select a filter. 5 In the Cancel Filter Confirmation dialog box. Note Searching events Using Find Events . Search is Chapter 2 Working with events 71 . click Advanced Filters. 6 Click OK . 2 Click the down arrow next to the Name list.Organizing events in the event list To cancel a filter 1 In the filters panel. 2 Click the down arrow next to the Name list. 5 In the Filter Delete Confirmation dialog box. you can narrow the scope and number of events displayed. The search functionality is available for event collectors only. The selected filter is removed from the Name list. available in the toolbar panel located above the event list. 4 Click Delete. 3 Select a filter. neither an administrator nor other users can delete default or out-of-thebox filters. Search is performed only on those slots of a CORE_EVENT class that are visible to you in the event list at that instance.

Single-click sorting You can use single-click sorting by clicking the header of the column that you want to use as the basis of your event list sort. you change the slot order. you must enter the exact search criteria to retrieve results. select an event collector. Search is ineffective in the following cases: ■ If the search is based on the date slot ■ If you select a component folderin the navigation tree ■ If you select an event folder (All Event Collectors. All Abnormalities. Therefore. 2 In the search box. or any user- WARNING defined event folder) in the navigation tree ■ If the search query contains the following characters: ■ Left square parenthesis([) ■ Right square parenthesis (]) ■ Backward slash (\) ■ Single quotes (') ■ Single character To find an event 1 From the navigation tree. either by adding or removing slots or by rearranging them. type a query to search. When you change the slots presented. Sorting events The set of slots presented in the event list is called the slot order.Organizing events in the event list case sensitive and considers blank spaces. 72 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 3 Click Find Events.

press the Ctrl and Shift keys.Organizing events in the event list Even if a multiple sort order has been established. Multiplecolumn sorting is available for the All Event Collectors event folder and all its subnodes. you can click any column header that is not part of the designated multiple sort order to reset sorting. All Devices. and All Monitors and all the drill-downs associated with all the component folders. Figure 4: -Multiple-column sorting indicators In the following procedures. you can select or clear the column headers that you want to use to sort the contents of the event list. this feature is not available for the All Abnormalities event folder and all the component folders: All Groups. However. Chapter 2 Working with events 73 . column in the new sort order. and the column on which you clicked is designated as the first. To remove the sort order. To add a column to the sort order 1 Click a column header that you want to use as the first criterion to sort the event list. and click the column header. 2 Press the Ctrl key and click a second column header. and only. This action establishes single-column sorting. All Services. To reverse the sort order. Figure 3: Single-click sorting indicators Multiple-column sorting Designating multiple columns for a sorting order is useful in resolving sort-order conflicts in the event list. You can set a multiple-column sort order as shown in Figure 4 on page 73 . re-click the column header.

in the By default. for example. available in the toolbar panel located above the event list. you can: ■ Click one of the columns to re-sort the event list based on that single column. then shortcuts for all the following operations. If a user does not have permission for a particular operation. ■ Press the Ctrl key and click a column header contained in the sort order to toggle that column’s display between ascending and descending order. on page 73 to add more columns to the sort order for the event list. except Close are displayed. order to remove that column from the sort order. However. Close. executing commands. By default.Creating shortcuts for Tools Menu options 3 Repeat List item. the toolbar panel is available to all the users. Show Toolbar navigation bar toggles the toolbar panel. ■ Acknowledge ■ Close ■ Take Ownership ■ Decline Ownership ■ View Remote Action Results ■ Copy ■ Export ■ Set Priority ■ Intelligent Event History 74 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . you can create shortcuts for performing event operations. and click a column header contained in the sort Creating shortcuts for Tools Menu options Using Edit Toolbar . ■ Press the Ctrl and Shift keys. and actions. Tip If you have established a multiple sort order in the event list. Edit Toolbar is visible only if a user has permissions to view it. the following shortcuts are available in the toolbar panel right above the the event list only if a user has permissions for all these operations.

and then drop it into the toolbar panel right above the event list: ■ Menu Buttons: For all event operations. 3 Click Close. click Edit Toolbar. For example. if the event is not acknowledged. operations available in the Tools Menu. ■ The shortcuts appear in the toolbar panel. select and drag one icon at a time that you want to remove. However. Once a user changes the toolbar buttons. right above the event list. and actions 1 In the toolbar panel. 2 Click Close. To remove shortcuts for menu buttons. if an event is acknowledged. commands. they are context-sensitive. they are saved as user preferences and available to that user on the subsequent logon. and actions 1 In the Edit Toolbar dialog box.Creating shortcuts for Tools Menu options ■ Probable Cause Analysis ■ Operations Menu ■ Tools Menu To create shortcuts for menu buttons. select and drag one icon (not the icon label) at a time from the following list. and remote actions ■ Spacers: For adjusting the space between the shortcut buttons ■ Commands: For individual operations and commands ■ Actions: For individual remote actions Note The number of buttons that you can select and drag depends on the available space in the toolbar panel. 2 From the toolbar panel. the Acknowledge button is enabled. commands. the Acknowledge button in the Menu Buttons section is disabled. and then drop it into the Edit Toolbar dialog box. Chapter 2 Working with events 75 .

This operation is displayed only for remote event management cells. puts the event in the Assigned state Removes ownership of an event in Assigned event. You can perform these operations on a maximum of 500 events. Tip BMC recommends that you use the toolbar to perform operations on multiple events. priority. press and hold the Shift key to select multiple continuous events. puts the event back in the Acknowledged state Recognizes the existence of on Open event. disables any further event operation Assigns a priority level to the event Changes the state of an event to Open. or ownership of an event. or Assigned event to self or another person in the same account. Your user role determines the event operations that you can use. puts the event in the Assigned state Assigns ownership of an Open. if you choose to use the Tools Menu or the Operations Menu in the Status column. Table 15: Event operation descriptions Event operation Take Ownership Description Assigns ownership of an Open or Acknowledged event to self.Performing event operations Performing event operations Event operations change the status. or the Ctrl key to select multiple non-continuous events. Acknowledged. However. 76 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Assigned or Acknowledged event in the Closed state. and ensure that you click the Tools Menu on the last selected event. Assign To Decline Ownership Acknowledge Event Unacknowledge Event Close Set Priority Reopen Event The following topics provide instructions for performing event operations. puts the event in the Acknowledged state Changes a previously Acknowledged event back to the Open state Puts an Open. ignores the event in calculating status.

Note To assign an event to an individual 1 From the event list. For more information. and then click OK. If the operation is not valid for some selected events. and the events are not changed. Under Event Administration. Note To decline ownership of an event 1 From the event list. an operation is performed only on the selected events whose status makes the operation valid.Performing event operations Although all the event operations that are available to your user role are available when you select two or more events in the event list. select an event of which to take ownership. you do not receive a confirmation when you take ownership of an event. a message box reports the internal IDs of those events. 4 In the confirmation dialog box. column. or . click Edit next to Assign to User List. select the person to whom you want to assign the event. To access this screen. Chapter 2 Working with events 77 . click OK. 2 Click the wrench icon in the Tools Menu column. and then the Administration tab. If Confirmations in the Event List Preferencesdialog box. 3 Click Operations => Assign To. The list of users in the Assign To dialog box contains only those users selected in the Assign to User List screen. Note To take ownership of an event 1 From the event list. see Customizing the display of the event list on page 34. is not set for All Event Operations. 2 Click one of the wrench icons. select an event that you own. 4 In the Assign To dialog box. select one or more events to assign. on the Operations Console select the Options link. (that is available) in the Tools Menu 3 Click Operations => Take Ownership. 2 Click the wrench icon in the Tools Menu column.

click OK. click OK. 2 Click the wrench icon in the Tools Menu column. 3 Click Operations => Close Event. 3 Click Operations=>Unacknowledge Event. select an event that is acknowledged. 4 In the confirmation dialog box. assigned to you. 2 Click the wrench icon in the Tools Menu column. . select an event that is open. To Unacknowledge an event 1 From the event list. ■ The Close Event operation is not available for abnormality events. 4 In the confirmation dialog box. This can cause a discrepancy between the status of the event in the Notebook Summary tab and the status of the event in the Status column until the event closes and the two views of the event become synced. it may take some time to close the event. To close an event 1 From the event list. 3 Click Operations=>Acknowledge Event. To acknowledge an event 1 From the event list. 4 In the confirmation dialog box. click OK. 78 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . click OK. Note ■ When the Close Event operation is performed on an intelligent event. or acknowledged.Performing event operations 3 Click Operations => Decline Ownership 4 In the confirmation dialog box. select one or more open events designated with 2 Click the wrench icon in the Tools Menu column.

To export event information 1 From the event list. 3 In the Export Events dialog box. These operations enable you to send the event information to BMC Impact Manager (BMC IM or cell) using CLI commands. select an event. 6 Click OK. select the priority level for the event. and then click Export. You can perform the export and copy operations on a maximum of 500 events. or CSV file or copy information about all the slots into the clipboard. select the format in which you want to export the event column information. XML. If a user has initiated a status change operation on an event and the status of that event is changed due to an event rule or policy before the execution of the status change operation from the Operations Console. 4 Select Visible Slots to export information about the visible slots only or All Slots to export information about all the slots. 2 Click the wrench icon in the Tools Menu column. Chapter 2 Working with events 79 . select an event. the operation initiated by the user is not executed. Note Exporting and copying event information You can export information about all or only visible slots in a BAROC. 3 Click Operations => Set Priority.Exporting and copying event information To set the priority for an event 1 From the event list. 4 In the Set Priority dialog box. 2 Click the wrench icon in the Tools Menu column. 5 (optional) Add notes.

You can perform remote actions on events that have been associated with or mapped to devices through a device alias. the generated BAROC file is not in a format that can be imported directly using the mposter command. For example. 2 Select one or more events to copy. make minor edits to the file. 6 Select a location to save the slot information. change the double-quotes to single quotes. 80 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . and click Save. Tip Executing remote actions You can respond to a selected event by executing a remote action. core event or intelligent event. You can also copy one or more events using the Ctrl and K keys. To respond to an event by using a remote action 1 From the event list. When you use a remote action. The copied event information is available in BAROC format in the clipboard and can be pasted into a new text or Microsoft Word document. 3 Click Copy Event. it is issued from your local console but executed on the computer where the BMC Impact Manager (cell) or the BMC ProactiveNet cell is installed. 5 Click Save. select an event. To copy an event to the clipboard 1 Create a shortcut for Copy Event as explained in To create shortcuts for menu buttons. To import the BAROC file. and actions on page 75. The device must be configured so that it allows the remote action to be executed on it. Copy is the only operation that you can perform using keyboard keys.Executing remote actions Note When you export all the slots of an event. These remote actions are created by an administrator as a response to specific events as required for your environment. 4 In the Copy to clipboard dialog box. click OK. in those slots that have a list of strings. commands. The number of remote actions that you can execute depends on the event type.

An exit code of 0 indicates a successful ping and a working connection between the local system and the target host.97.50.10: 209. In the Event Remote Action Results dialog box. Show Remote Action Environment.97.50.10: Packets: Sent = 5. 4 In the Execute Action dialog box.50.10: bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 bytes=32 time=33ms time=34ms time=34ms time=35ms time=35ms TTL=242 TTL=242 TTL=242 TTL=242 TTL=242 Ping statistics for 209. click Action Result(s) in the Message column or the Tools Menu.50. and details about the remote action by clicking the corresponding tab. 5 Click Execute. errors. Note The remote actions Modify Slot Value. Received = 5.Executing remote actions 2 Click the blue wrench icon in the Tools Menu column. The output of a successful ping command. consists of ping statistics: Pinging 209. and Trigger Remedy Incident for Event do not display an associated Action Result(s) or Related Events option.97. Average = 34ms Chapter 2 Working with events 81 . — View the output.97. Ping Event mc_host_address This remote action executes a ping command against the target host defined by the mc_host_address slot.10: 209.97.50. enter the appropriate values required to run the selected remote action. ■ To access the results of the remote action.10 with 32 bytes of data: Reply Reply Reply Reply Reply from from from from from 209. 3 Click Remote Actions/Diagnostics and then select a remote action.97. available from the Action Result(s) option. in the event list row. Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 33ms.50. Lost = 0 (0% loss).97.10: 209.10: 209.50. you can perform the following operations: — Export the information about the remote action to a file by selecting the action information and clicking Export. Maximum = 35ms.

The event information that is sent includes event severity.out displays remote environment information that includes. ALLUSERSPROFILE=C:\Documents and Settings\All Users ASANY9=C:\Program Files\ProactiveNet\pw\sybase ASANYSH9=C:\Program Files\ProactiveNet\pw\sybase\shared BMC_PROACTIVENET_HOME=C:\Program Files\ProactiveNet\pw CATALINA_HOME=C:\Program Files\ProactiveNet\pw\tomcat CELLCONFDATAPATH=%MCELL_HOME%\etc ClusterLog=C:\WINDOWS\Cluster\cluster. BMC recommends that you do not change the severity of an intelligent event by executing the Modify Slot Value remote action. class.13. It does not display the action results in the GUI. Send EVENT as SMTP E-mail This remote action allows you to send a selected event to a designated e-mail recipient through the msend_email executable.log CommonProgramFiles=C:\Program Files\Common Files . the action results are captured in an output file in the installDirectory \server\tmp\ cellName path.. IBRSD_HOME=C:\PROGRA~1\PROACT~1\pw\INTEGR~1\ibrsd JAVA_HOME=C:\Program Files\ProactiveNet\pw\jre 82 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . where installDirectory by default equals Program Files\ProactiveNet\pw or /usr/pw. handle Id.Executing remote actions TraceRoute to Event mc_host_address This remote action executes a traceroute command to identify the path of the event from its origin to its destination. the sample output file installDirectory \server\tmp\ cellName\ result. Instead. Modify Slot Value This remote action allows to change the value of a specified slot for the selected event. The selected event must contain a specified host name.. Note Show Remote Action Environment This feature is designed to display information about the remote action environment. In the following example. the following data: This is the Local Action execution environment. but is not limited to.. and the server cell name. status. You can view the change in the Details pane.

Setup Sending SMTP E-Mails .. This topic addresses the on-demand workflow. Note Launching a workflow on demand from the Events Console By default. See the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide for the configuration steps... BMC Atrium Orchestrator workflows These workflow actions are designed to be launched on demand or through remote action policies.Executing remote actions MCELL_HOME=C:\PROGRA~1\PROACT~1\pw\server NUMBER_OF_PROCESSORS=2 OS=Windows_NT Path=C:\Perl\site\bin.Windows Only You can use this remote action in conjunction with the Send Event as SMTP E-mail action. You specify the destination host to which to send the event. you must perform configuration steps on the BMC ProactiveNet server side and the BMC Atrium Orchestrator BEM adapter on the BMC Atrium Orchestrator server side. you must be integrated with the BMC Remedy Service Desk application.... (Refer to the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide for descriptions of the remote action policies designed to launch these workflows automatically. each workflow applies to all event types. . Trigger Remedy Incident for Event This remote action enables to generate BMC Remedy Service Desk incident for the selected event. Follow these steps to select and launch a workflow from the Events Console: Chapter 2 Working with events 83 . To enable this action.) Before you can launch these workflows. Here.C:\Perl\bin.C:\WINDOWS\system32. RULE_NAME=Show Remote Action Environment REQUESTOR=admin CLASS=EVENT . you can define the SMTP server you want to use as the e-mail server for sending events.

Is used when a monitored host system is down. An Execute Action dialog box opens containing input parameters that are specific to your workflow selection. 2 Choose Remote Actions => Atrium Orchestrator Actions to display the list of workflows. This workflow uses a series of ping and traceroute commands to verify whether the host specified in the event is actually down. Note 84 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Triage Host Down For a complete description of the workflows. the workflow undertakes a change management process to generate the change form and associate it with the incident information. After updating related events and incidents with the disk usage metrics.Executing remote actions To launch a workflow on demand from the Events Console 1 Identify the appropriate event for the workflow. It then launches the remediation task. 3 Select the workflow. When launched this workflow uses the corresponding OS command to check for disk space usage on the system where the configuration item resides. and click the Tools icon to display the menu. Table 16: BMC Atrium Orchestrator workflows Workflow type Triage and Remediate Disk Full Description Is used when the operating system disk space reaches or exceeds its capacity. which executes volume clean-up commands based on the operating system. It does not attempt to restart the host. It only confirms that the host is unreachable. see the BMC Software Triage and Remediation Solution Getting Started Guide for BMC ProactiveNet.

filter. If you choose false. the exit code defaults to -1. You can view output. An Action Results icon and a Related Events icon are displayed in the event row. The exit code 0 indicates a successful execution. Otherwise. To view related events 1 Click the Related Events icon to open the Event List window. Change Request Type String: Specifies the type of change request (normal or preapproved) Create-Update Incident Boolean: True or false indicator that shows whether you want to create an incident in the incident management system. The event notes describe the stages of the workflow’s execution and indicate whether the workflow has been launched successfully. the Change Request Type parameter is ignored. and click Execute to launch the workflow. An information event is returned indicating the action and the target host. You can view. and perform actions on consequent events that are related to the workflow launch. Remediate Boolean: True or false indicator that shows whether you want to proceed with the remediation action. If an incident already exists. To check the results of the workflow action 1 Click the Action Results icon to display the Event Remote Action Results dialog box. 4 Make your selections in the Execute Action dialog box. then workflow updates the existing incident information. and details associated with the workflow action. Chapter 2 Working with events 85 . Triage Host Down Create Incident Boolean: True or false indicator that shows whether you want to create or update an incident in the specified incident management system. errors.Executing remote actions Table 17: Input parameters for BMC Atrium Orchestrator workflow types Workflow type Triage and Remediate Disk Full Execute Action input parameters Create Change Request Boolean: True or false indicator that shows whether you want to create a change request in BMC Service Desk. 5 Verify the event notes in the Details pane.

select an event. see the Administrator Guide . depending on your system authentication policies and procedures. Table 18: Event Display Preferences for customizing event display Setting Home page Description Select the default view to be displayed whenever you access the Events Console tab. You might need to enter a user name or password. All functionality is available in the Operations Console of the originating BMC ProactiveNet Server (also called a child BMC ProactiveNet Server). To launch an originating BMC ProactiveNet Server 1 From the event list. 3 Choose Launch => Originating BMC ProactiveNet Server. The default is the All Events view. 86 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 3 Modify the settings described in Table 18 on page 86 under Event Display Preferences as necessary. For details about configuring this kind of deployment. 2 Click the blue wrench icon in the Tools Menu column. Customizing the display of events Through the Options screen.Launching an originating BMC ProactiveNet Server Launching an originating BMC ProactiveNet Server When monitoring events from a central BMC ProactiveNet Server in a multiple BMC ProactiveNet Server deployment environment. 2 Click the Operations tab. you can launch BMC ProactiveNet Servers from which events originated. you can customize the overall layout of the events to suit your preferences. To customize the event display 1 In the Operations Console. click the Options link at the top right.

Customizing the display of events

Setting Events Console Groups 3.a

Description Configure the display of groups in the Events Console => All Groups (Events View, Tile View, Canvas View, Tree View, and Grid View). Click Edit and then use the arrow icons to select groups and to set the order of groups. The Show all groups check box on the top left enables you to display all groups dynamically, including all future groups.

Events Console Monitor Categories Configure the display of monitor categories in the Events Console => All Monitors => Grid View. Click Edit and then use the arrow icons to select monitor categories and to set the order of monitor categories. The Show all monitor categories check box on the top left enables you to display all monitor categories dynamically, including all future monitor categories. Show All Devices with Counts Show Devices in Hierarchy Show All Groups with Counts Show Suppressed Events 3.b Display events in the Events Console => All Devicesview with the actual numerical count of the events. Set the hierarchical view as the default view on Events Console => All Devices view. Display events in the All Groups => Grid View with the numerical count of the events (rather than the default event severity icons). View suppressed events in the following locations: ■ Status column in the All Events view ■ Event counts in the All Groups => Grid View and All Devices ■ Status-based border color in graphs ■ Status icons in the navigation tree for All Events, All Devices, and All Groups => Grid View Show Predictive Events Display a separate symbol for predictions on the Tile View and Canvas View

a This feature is available only for unrestricted users of groups. b Available only for upgrade users 4 Click Apply.

To set layout preferences
1 In the Operations Console, click the Options link at the top right. 2 Click the Operations tab.

Chapter 2 Working with events 87

Viewing the event list for remote cells

3 Under Layout Preferences, select the views, described in Table 19 on page 88, that you want to see: Table 19: Layout Preferences settings
Setting Show Navigation Tree Show Dashboard View Description Displays the navigation tree on the left (default) Displays a list of user-defined views These views are displayed in the top right portion of the Grid View and Tree View. This enables the user to get a snapshot of the most important attributes being monitored. Note: You can select only graph-based views as dashboard views. You cannot select folder-based views. The Dashboard is not displayed on the Event View, Tile View, and Canvas View. Show Home View Displays the selected view as the default view

4 Click Apply.

To set tab preferences
1 In the Operations Console, click the Options link at the top right. 2 Click the Operations tab. 3 Under Tab Preferences, select the tabs that you want to display as navigation tabs in the Operations Console. 4 Click Add Tab. 5 Click Apply. Related Topics Customizing the display of the event list on page 34

Viewing the event list for remote cells
You can view events on a standalone remote cell, or a remote cell in High Availability (HA) mode once you configure the remote cell for viewing on the Operations Console. BMC ProactiveNet supports BMC Impact Manager (cell) from version 7.1 onwards only as remote cells. BMC recommends that you do not add a second BMC ProactiveNet cell as a remote cell.

88 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Viewing the event list for remote cells

To configure a standalone remote cell for viewing on the Operations Console
1 Add an entry for the remote cell in the cell_info.list file located at installDirectory \pw\pronto\conf\ by entering the following command: iadmin -ac name=remoteCellName:key=mc:primaryHost=hostName:primaryPort=portNumber:e nvironment=Production:usergroups=* The parameters are defined as follows:
■ name is the name of the remote cell that you want to display as defined in the

mcell.dir file.

■ key is the encryption key of the cell; the default is mc. ■ primaryHost is the computer where the cell is located. Specify the computer

name and the domain name.

■ primaryPort is the port on which the remote cell is listening; the default is 1828 ■ environment is the type of environment where the cell is used, either

Production or Test.

■ usergroups is the name of the user groups that can access the remote cell. To

allow access to all user groups, enter an asterisk (*). To specify only certain user groups, enter the group names separated by commas. If a user group contains spaces, enclose the entire entry for this parameter with double quotes.

iadmin -ac name=qa:key=mc:primaryHost=qa.company.com:primaryPort=1828:environment=Produ Access, Read Only" 2 Add an entry for the remote cell in the mcell.dir file located at installationDirectory \pw\server\etc\ as follows:
cell cellName mc computerNameWithDomain: portOnWhichCellIsInstalled

Example

Example cell qa mc qa.company.com:1828

To configure a remote cell in HA mode for viewing on the Operations Console
1 Add an entry for the remote cell and its counterpart in HA mode in the cell_info.list file located at installDirectory\pw\pronto\conf\by entering the following command:
Chapter 2 Working with events 89

Viewing the event list for remote cells

iadmin -ac name=remoteCellName:key=mc:primaryHost=hostName:primaryPort=portNumber: failoverHost=hostName:failoverPort=portNumber:environment=Production:usergr oups=* The parameters are defined as follows:
■ name is the name of the remote cell that you want to display as defined in the

mcell.dir file.

■ key is the encryption key of the cell; the default is mc. ■ primaryHost is the computer where the cell is located. Specify the computer

name and the domain name.

■ primaryPort is the port on which the remote cell is listening; the default is 1828 ■ failoverHost is the computer where the failover cell is located. Specifiy the

computer name and the domain name.

■ failoverPort is the port on which the failover remote cell is listening ■ environment is the type of environment where the cell is used, either

Production or Test.

■ usergroups is the name of the user groups that can access the remote cell. To

allow access to all user groups, enter an asterisk (*). To specify only certain user groups, enter the group names separated by commas. If a user group contains spaces, enclose the entire entry for this parameter with double quotes.

Example iadmin -ac name=ha_cell:key=mc:primaryHost=host1.company.com:primaryPort=2344:failoverHost=
2 Add an entry for the remote cell and its counterpart in HA mode in the mcell.dir file located at serverInstallationDirectory \server\etc\ as follows:
cell cellName mc computer1NameWithDomain: portOnWhichCellIsInstalled

computer2NameWithDomain: portOnWhichHACellIsInstalled

Example cell ha_cell mc host1.company.com:2344 host2.company.com:2344

To view the event list for remote cells
1 In the Operations Console, click Navigation Pane Options .

90 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Viewing the event list for remote cells

2 In the Navigation Pane Options dialog box, click Other Cells. 3 Select a remote cell from the list and click Apply. If multiple remote cells are configured, select each cell that you want to display.

4 Click OK to close the Navigation Pane Options dialog box. 5 In the navigation pane, click Other Cells. 6 Select a remote cell from the list. The event list for the remote cell is displayed in the Event List view of the operations console. For details about the actions you can perform on remote cells, see Operations possible on the event list for remote cells on page 91. For details about creating a remote cell event folder, see “Creating event folders” on page 54.

Operations possible on the event list for remote cells
You can perform the following operations from the event list for remote cells:
■ All event operations, remote actions, export, and copy operations ■ Quick filters, sort, and search events ■ All the operations (menu buttons, commands, and actions) added as shortcuts

from the main event lists page to the toolbar panel

■ View the slots included in the Remote Cell Events Information default template or

any slots added or removed from this default template from the main event lists page

■ View event list preferences applied from the main event lists page

You cannot perform the following operations from the event list for remote cells:
■ Operations specific to intelligent events ■ Advanced filters ■ Add or remove icons from the toolbar because Edit Toolbar is not available Chapter 2 Working with events 91

Viewing predictive events

■ Change the slot order since Quick Columns Selector is not available ■ Change the event list preferences since Preferences is not available ■ View the event details notebook

Viewing predictive events
In addition to the normal events generated after a problem arises, BMC ProactiveNet can also generate predictive events. Predictive events are early warning events that BMC ProactiveNet generates before an event condition occurs on an existing metric. Such events enable you to identify potential problems before the condition causes impacts to business services and before the end users notice the problem. The typical predictive window is three hours or less, which means most predictive events are generated up to three hours before an actual event condition would occur. BMC ProactiveNet treats predictive events like normal events and displays them in all the standard event screens. Predictive events target persistent anomalies that might go undetected for most of the day (during the off-peak periods) but become serious issues at peak load periods. These kinds of problems are typically caused by configuration changes or user load shifts. For example, if you make a change to a load balancer that accidentally redirects more end-user transactions to one of the servers in the pool, that server might now have much more load than the other servers in the pool. However, this would not be obvious during low traffic periods. As the peak load period approaches, the imbalance would become more serious and the server load issue would become obvious, eventually causing an event on an end user transaction and performance or availability issues for all transactions routed through that server. In this scenario where BMC ProactiveNet events are used, an abnormality is generated as soon as the first change in behavior is detected, a predictive event would be generated two to three hours before any impact or before a real event condition. Predictive events are enabled through the absolute threshold settings. The predictive algorithm leverages the hourly baseline in conjunction with the threshold setting to determine when to create a predictive event.

To view predictive events using quick filters
To view predictive events, on the Operations Console select the Options link, and then the Operations tab. Under Event Display Preferences, ensure that you select the Show Predicted Events check box. You cannot view predictive events from the navigation tree as no default event collector is available under the Global folder for them. 1 In the filters panel, click Quick Filters.

92 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Viewing all abnormalities

2 From the Event Type list, select Predictive. 3 Click Filter.

To view predictive events using advanced filters
1 In the filters panel, click Advanced Filters 2 From the Name list, select one of the following out-of-the box advanced filters:
■ Predicted Events-Active (Not Closed) ■ Predicted Events-All ■ Predicted Events-Inactive

Viewing all abnormalities
The All Abnormalities => Events View lists all abnormality events for groups, services, devices, and monitors monitored by BMC ProactiveNet.
Table 20: Columns of event information on the All Abnormalities screen Column Status Description Provides basic information about the abnormality’s response activity, that is, displays the current status of the abnormality. The status of an event can be one of the following: ■ Open ■ Acknowledged ■ Assigned ■ Blackout ■ Closed

Chapter 2 Working with events 93

Viewing all abnormalities

Column Tools Menu

Description For events originating from BMC Impact Manger (cell), this menu enables you to perform operations on an event, execute remote actions/diagnostics, perform probable cause analysis for the event, retrieve BladeLogic device history, and export the event. For events originating from the BMC ProactiveNet Server, this menu enables you to perform all the actions that you can perform on the cell events. Also, you can perform diagnostics, view graphs and parent groups, add a change entry to track the changes in your environment, set thresholds and manage data collection. For multiple server deployment and BMC Atrium Explorer environments, this menu provides a launch point.

Priority Severity

Determines which abnormality requires action first Indicates the seriousness of the abnormality. In combination with status and priority, the severity level indicates the urgency of the need to take action. Severity is based on the comparison of metrics to defined thresholds. The severity of the abnormality event is Info (blue). Indicates how closely the event relates to the probable cause of the problem Displays the date and time when the abnormality occurred Displays a short description of the reason for the abnormality. It might also display the following icons: ■ Action Result ■ Detailed Diagnostics ■ Notes ■ Related Events

Score Occurred Message

Host Object

Displays the name of the host on which the abnormality occurred Displays the name of the object monitoring the abnormality

Note The BMC ProactiveNet administrator can set up specific user-defined rules that can help you keep track of frequent events and their causes. For instance, if you continually receive an event and you realize that the event is triggered by a recognizable pattern, you can set up rules that replace BMC ProactiveNet probable cause description with specific information related to that event. In other words, you can override BMC ProactiveNet’s generic probable cause information by attaching a rule to a specific abnormality that adds known information and domain knowledge into the system.
Related Topics Adding a column to an event list for an abnormality on page 95

94 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Viewing all abnormalities

Deleting a column from an event list for an abnormality on page 95 Filtering event display for All Abnormalities on page 97 Viewing further information for an abnormality on page 99

Adding a column to an event list for an abnormality
All users can add a single column from an event class to events of abnormality type for groups, devices, and monitors by selecting the Event View on the All Abnormalities screen.

To add a column to an event list for an abnormality
1 Click Quick Columns Selector. 2 In the Quick Columns Selector dialog box, click Edit Columns. 3 In the Event List Column Editor dialog box, under Available Columns, click Event Class Selector .

4 Select Abnormality as the event class, and then click OK. 5 Drag a column name into the header row of the event list. The newly added column now appears in the event list and the same is removed from the Events List Column Editor dialog box. Related Topics Deleting a column from an event list for an abnormality on page 95

Deleting a column from an event list for an abnormality
All users can delete a single column from the event list for an abnormality by selecting the Event View on the All Abnormalities screen. This operation requires the event list and the Quick Columns Selector dialog box to be open simultaneously.

To delete a column from an event list for an abnormality
1 Click Quick Columns Selector.

Chapter 2 Working with events 95

Viewing all abnormalities

2 From the event list, drag a column name from the header row of an event list and drop it into the Event List Column Editor dialog box.

Tip To view the columns in the default template, in the Event List Column Editor dialog box, click Intelligent Event Details.
The All Abnormalities => Grid View has different subtabs that display different information about abnormalities. The Device View tab groups events by device with the option of expanding any device for information about its events, and the All View tab lists all events regardless of their device association. Table 11 on page 38 summarizes the columns of information available for events on the All Abnormalities screen. When you search for abnormality based on service name, it also displays direct impact abnormalities. Table 21: Columns of alarm information on the All Abnormalities >Grid View screen
Column Description Device View Select Device Selection column for further information and analysis Name of the device In the case of an event on Aggregate Monitors (Resource Pool Monitors and Abnormality Index Monitors), No associated device is displayed. Num Events Severity Total number of events opened for the device Indicates whether it is a Threshold problem or a Signature problem Signature problems are described as 'Abnormal'. Threshold issues are shown as 'Critical', 'Major', or 'Minor'. Score Indicates how closely the alarm relates to the probable cause of the problem All View or event under expanded device Select Time Opened Monitor Severity Selection column for further information and analysis Date and time when the event took place Monitor instance to which this event belongs Indicates whether it is a Threshold problem or a Signature problem Signature problems are described as 'Abnormal'. Threshold issues are shown as 'Critical', 'Major', or 'Minor'.

Note

96 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Viewing all abnormalities

Column Description

Description Provides an indication of why the event went off On Mouse over, the tool tip on the icon displays the abnormality details. The tabular data provides Baseline, Hourly, Daily, and Weekly values. For attributes of Poisson Type, the abnormality details show 10%, median, and 90% values. However, for attributes of Normal Type, the abnormality details show the Min (Minimum), Avg (Average), and Max (Maximum) values.

Analyze Score

The Probable Cause Analysis icon launches the Probable Cause Analysis screen. Indicates how closely the event relates to the probable cause of the problem Each event listed in the table is given a score between zero and 100 percent, indicating the possibility that this event is the cause of the problem. The percentage is determined by applying a Smart Filter Algorithm to the event and calculating the score value.

Tools Menu

Additional tools for further information about the event and for setting the event thresholds

Filtering event display for All Abnormalities
Note The BMC ProactiveNet Administrator can set up specific user-defined rules that can help you keep track of frequent alarms and their causes. For instance, if you continually receive an alarm and you realize that the alarm is triggered by a recognizable pattern, you can set up rules that replace BMC ProactiveNet probable cause description with specific information related to that alarm. In other words, you can override BMC ProactiveNet’s generic probable cause information by attaching a rule to a specific abnormality that adds known information and domain knowledge into the system.
You can filter events using the criteria listed in Table 22 on page 97 by selecting the Grid View instead of the default Event View on the All Abnormalities screen. These filters correspond to probable cause analysis only. Table 22: Filter options on All Abnormalities screen
Filter option Status Description Choose the status of the events you want to see. The menu lets you to choose either all open, open, acknowledged, assigned, blackout, closed, or no filter.

Chapter 2 Working with events 97

Viewing all abnormalities

Filter option Time

Description Time boundary of the event or event selected for probable cause analysis. This link displays all time-correlated events that occurred during the period. Input the following to specify the period: ■ Minus: Start time of the period; time of the event or event selected for the probable cause analysis - time selected in minutes. ■ Plus: End time of the period; time of the event or event selected for the probable cause analysis + time selected in minutes. All events that occurred during this time range are queried for probable cause based on the Smart Filter check box selection. The Time Filter on probable cause Analysis page does not filter based on the selected time range (even though the filter results heading indicates the time range). This is 'as designed'. By default, if you are doing probable cause analysis on a non-availability (up or down) problem, then events or events that were opened up to 24 hours ago are included, as long as they are still open in the time window the user specified. This is configured in installDirectory /usr/pronto/conf/pinpoint.conf filterRules.TimeFrameForPastOpenEvents=86400. This design accommodates degradation issues resulting from something that happened several hours earlier. For example, if a process starts using an abnormal amount of memory at 10:00 AM and memory usage continues to grow to the point, that at 4:30 PM, it affects some transactions to that device.

Device Name Group Monitor Category Score

Specify the device name (already set up) to view corresponding records. Select a group from the list to limit the displayed records to those that are associated with the group. Select a monitor category by which to filter one of the following: user transactions, application, network, system, or database. Indicates how closely the event relates to the probable cause of the problem Each event listed in the table is given a score between zero and 100 percent, indicating the possibility that this event is the cause of the problem. The percentage is determined by applying a Smart Filter Algorithm to the event and calculating the score value.

Smart Filter

Select this option to apply Smart Filters (built-in Probable Cause Analysis algorithm to find out the most probable cause). This filter limits events to a selected set based on type and other attributes. If you clear the check box, BMC ProactiveNet displays all events that occurred during the selected period. For details, see To set the filter criteria on page 99.

98 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Viewing all abnormalities

BMC ProactiveNet supports the following relationships:
■ service to service ■ service to group ■ group to group ■ group to service ■ service to device ■ group to device

Note

The service definition is always maintained as the source of the relationships. For example, when you search for an abnormality based on service name it also displays direct impact abnormalities in the underlying relationships.

To set the filter criteria
1 Click Edit to set the filtering criteria. 2 Select one of the following options to apply filter criteria:
■ Show all events for each monitor instance ■ Show one event per attribute for each monitor instance ■ Show only top scored event for each monitor instance

3 Select the Save as default option if you want to set current setting as default filter criteria. 4 Click Apply.

Viewing further information for an abnormality
You can view further information for an abnormality by selecting the Grid View instead of the default Event View on the All Abnormalities screen, expanding the + icon in the Select column, and then clicking the wrench icon in the Tools Menu column.

Chapter 2 Working with events 99

Viewing events and abnormalities by service

Table 23: Further information options on the All Abnormalities screen Option View a statistics graph View the parent group of a subgroup View abnormality details View Probable cause Analysis for the abnormality View graphical representation of an event record Details Choose Tools Menu => Show Graph. BMC ProactiveNet provides additional options to modify the graph. Choose Tools Menu => Show Parent Groups. Place your mouse over the i icon in the Description column Click the Probable Cause Analysis icon in the Analyze column Select the check box in the Select column and click Show Graph(s). The Graph Display screen provides additional functionality through icons on the right side of the graph. Use these icons to zoom in on graphs, add the graph to a view, and perform other functions.

Viewing events and abnormalities by service
The All Services => Grid View summarizes events and abnormalities of all service groups, and helps you visualize event and abnormality information for services. To access All Services => Grid View, select the Events Console => All Services subtab, and click the Grid View icon. You can filter the list of services using the fields described in Table 24 on page 100.
Table 24: All Services => Grid View filter fields Field Status Description Displays a list of status values such as: ■ Open ■ Acknowledged ■ Assigned ■ Closed The default value is No Filter.

100 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Viewing events and abnormalities by service

Field Severity

Description Displays a list of severity values such as: ■ Critical ■ Major ■ Minor ■ Warning ■ Information The default value is No Filter. The severity values Predictive Critical, Predictive Major, and Predictive Minor are available only if you select the Show Predictive Events option under Options > Operations > Event Display Preferences. For more information, see Customizing the display of events on page 86.

Absolute Time Range Relative Time

Enables you to restrict the list of services to a specified beginning and ending time and date range. By default, this option is unchecked. Displays a list of date and time values that lets you restrict the list of services to a time range between the current time and the selected time. The values range from one hour to three months before the current date and time. The default value is No Filter. Text string, full or partial, that retrieves matching service names. The default value is blank.

Service Name

After selecting your values, click Filter. Table 25 on page 101 summarizes the columns of information available for events on the All Services => Grid View screen.
Table 25: Columns of event information on the All Services > Grid View screen Column Service information Name Displays the service name Click the link to drill down to a list of subservices or a list of monitors and devices. If an arrow is displayed before the service name it indicates dependent service. Note: This column expands when there are too many IT group dependencies. Description

Chapter 2 Working with events 101

Viewing events and abnormalities by service

Column Status

Description Displays the highest severity status of its monitors, devices, and subservices Tool tip displays the number of open, assigned, and acknowledged events of all severities.

Details IT Group Dependencies Name

Click the icon to view the service details.

Displays the name of the IT group of this service, sub-services, and dependency groups Note: If there are too many IT group dependencies associated with a service some part of the All Services > Grid View table goes out of view. You need to scroll horizontally to view the other columns.

Monitor Category ■ User Transactions ■ Application ■ Network ■ System ■ Database ■ Other Tools

Displays the IT group name and event or abnormality status of the IT group categorized by monitor type

Additional tools for further information about data collection, change logs, adding change entry, and for setting event thresholds

Related Topics Viewing further information for All ServicesGrid View on page 102

Viewing further information for All Services => Grid View
The following table summarizes the available options for further information about a specific event on the All Services => Grid View screen.

102 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

For information on tool tips. In the Monitors tab. see Viewing further information for All GroupsGrid View on page 111. and relationships Event Summary Graph Service Information Limitations The All Services => Grid View does not support Group to Service and Group to Device relationships.Viewing events and abnormalities by service Table 26: Further information options on the All Services => Grid View screen Options Event History Details Displays the name. abnormalities. If a service has both a dependency and a container relationship with the same subservice or device. current status. IT groups. both of which comprise the service. The Service Details page does not include information about external events. source agent. monitor type. Clicking an event or abnormality icon opens the event list screen. you can click the service name to drill down to a detailed view of the monitors and devices. and event summary. and predictive events. Viewing monitor and device information under the All Services => Grid View In the All Services => Grid View screen. From the count of events you can drill down to the event list. event count. Displays a graphic representation of the services from the last 24 hours along with service information Displays the service name. then the container relationship takes precedence over the dependency relationship. you can view the following information described in Table 27 on page 103: Table 27: Monitor details: All Services Column Monitor Name Monitor Type Source Agent Open Description String description of the monitor Functional category of monitor Agent to which the monitor belongs The highest severity event Chapter 2 Working with events 103 . service description.

such as those from external sources 104 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . you can view the information described in Table 28 on page 104: Table 28: Device details: All Services Column Device Name Agent Type User Transactions Application Network System Database Other Description String description of the device Associated agent name Functional category of device Events under the Web-URL monitor Events under the rate monitor Events under the Ping monitor Events under the Windows File System monitor Events under a database monitor Miscellaneous events.Viewing events and abnormalities by service Column Closed Collect Data Tools Description Number of closed events Check box that indicates whether data collection for the monitor is turned on Options are: ■ Show Graph ■ FlashCheck ■ Manage Data Collection ■ Thresholds ■ Show Parent Groups ■ Add Change Entry ■ Reset Baseline In the Devices tab.

Monitors. Note When you drill-down a service. Group to Device. Group to Service. or other) based on the severity of the predictive event. The color of this icon is ■ Intelligent events and external events that are associated with a device (device- associated events) that have the highest severity are displayed.Viewing services in a hierarchical tree Column Tools Description Options are ■ Device at a glance ■ Manage Data Collection ■ Add Change Entry ■ Show Change Log ■ Show Parent Groups ■ Close Events ■ Diagnostics Some options are available only when certain events are selected. and Services tabs are displayed only if the relationships exist. ■ If there are any events related to a dependent group. Viewing services in a hierarchical tree The All Services => Tree View displays all service groups in a hyperbolic tree for a user-defined time duration. The All Services => Tree View supports the following probable cause analysis relationships: Service to Group. database. The following information is displayed in the All Services => Tree View: ■ Categorization of the aggregate event status for each service by category (user transactions. Group to Group. application. and Service to Device. Devices. its severity color based on a direct impact check. ■ The Predictive icon is displayed next to the category icon. system. with the option of expanding the tree to display the contents of the service groups and their infrastructure groups. network. a dashed line is shown with Chapter 2 Working with events 105 .

click Network Settings. then the Group tree might not be displayed properly in Firefox 2. To ensure the proper display of the Group tree correctly on Firefox 1.grouptree. and the abnormality score (it indicates how close the event abnormality is to failure) For a full list of icons. network.Viewing services in a hierarchical tree ■ Aggregate abnormality score for each service (as a purple thermometer bar) ■ Dependency events can be propagated by accessing Options > Administration > Advanced > Edit Relationships and selecting the Direct Impact check box. and then change the default Use browser settings option to Direct connection. you can display a legend by clicking Show Legend. double-click the Java icon. 2 In the Java Control Panel. Table 29: Controlling the display in the All Services => Tree View Objective Change the focus point on the tree Change the data refresh interval Display or hide the legend Instructions Drag any point on the Tree.refreshRate' in installDirectory/ pw/custom/ conf/pronet. database.0. system. This is due to known issues with the browser.conf. Various icons indicate the severity of system objects (application. 106 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . the impact on services. Note Related Topics Controlling the display in the All Services Tree View on page 106 Controlling the display in the All Services => Tree View This topic summarizes the various actions that you can perform to control the display of information on the All Services => Tree View.applet. the impact on SLOs. Data refresh interval (in seconds) for the Group Tree can be specified using the property 'pronet. and other). ■ Services containing metrics which belong to SLO (Service Level Objective) are highlighted with an indication whether the SLO has open violations or no open violations If BMC_ProactiveNetServer is within the firewall and the Operations Console is outside the firewall. transactions.5. Indicators are aggregated at each level and propagated upwards. perform the following on Windows 2000 or XP: 1 In the Windows Control Panel.

then the tree does not behave as expected.tree. Viewing events by group On the All Groups => Grid View screen you can re-calibrate events in the Event Status chart and display results based on groups set up by the BMC ProactiveNet administrator. For example. change the value of the pronet.conf from false to true: pronet. a user might be restricted to view only a subset of services that exist in the system. it displays the first service that is encounters and ignores the other service with the same name. To enable dependency event propagation. The service tree does not display duplicate services at the same level. then tree does not behave as expected. Groups contain selected set of devices or applications.tree. special monitoring of devices and applications Chapter 2 Working with events 107 . determined by your operating needs. dependency events are not propagated in the service tree. ■ All Events ■ All Abnormalities ■ Manage data Collection ■ Add Configuration Change ■ Show Configuration Changes ■ Service Details ■ Set As Root Services are displayed based on the access level and event display preferences of the user. Propagate dependency events By default.applet.applet. For example. For example. Instead. if a relationship is created for Service A to Service B and again Service B to Service A. Click the list to choose an appropriate time by which to filter the display.Viewing events by group Objective Change the time list Filter the displayed services Instructions The default time is None.propagateDependencyEventsBasedOnDirectImpact property in the pronet.propagateDependencyEventsBasedOnDirectImpact= true Limitation If cyclic service-to-service relationships are created.

depending on the configuration of display— whether with counts or with severity icons (see Customizing the display of the event list on page 34). Related Topics Default groups on page 110 Filtering event display for All Groups on page 110 Viewing further information for All GroupsGrid View on page 111 Table 30: Columns of event information on the All Groups >Grid View screen Column Group Name Description Information about the associated device When you bring the mouse over the group name the following details are displayed as tool tip: ■ Group Path ■ Group Name ■ Group Description ■ Source is displayed only if it is CMDB auto sync 108 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Table 42 on page 154 summarizes the columns of information available for events on the All Groups => Grid View screen.Viewing events by group might be setup by building. Hierarchical view is the default view only if there are groups in the system that can be displayed in hierarchy. The counts displayed in the Grid View include intelligent events and external events that are associated with a device (deviceassociated events). BMC ProactiveNet administrator selects the groups available to a user in the corresponding User Profile. The number of records for a particular page displayed at the bottom right corner in this view considers only the parent groups and will not consider the child groups under it. You can switch between hierarchical/flat view. If no virtual solution is configured then flat view is the default view The display on this screen differs. department. The All Groups table displays only top level groups that is. or individual. list of groups which are not part of any other group.

a Events are displayed with either number of events or severity icons. Both the icon and the color represent event severity. set thresholds. These devices are displayed. and view diagnostics under Device at a Glance. Events of each type. Additional tools for further information about the event. depending on user configuration (see “Viewing all abnormalities” on page 85). the numbers of events of each severity is displayed. including options to view graphs. The severities are displayed as an icon. Events by type Step 1 on page 119 ■ User Transactions ■ Application ■ Network ■ System ■ Database ■ Other Devices Tools Devices contain monitors that are under a group.Viewing events by group Column Numbers of events by severity ■ Critical ■ Major ■ Minor ■ Predictive ■ Warning ■ Information ■ Closed a Description The number of events for each severity The color indicates severity of the events. When you place your mouse over this column. Chapter 2 Working with events 109 .

Table 31: Default groups available in BMC ProactiveNet Group name BMC_ProactiveNet BMC_ProactiveNetServer BMC_ProactiveNetAgent Description BMC_ProactiveNet is a parent group. week. Table 32 on page 110 describes the available filter options. or hour to compare measurements. Filtering event display for All Groups All Groups => Grid View offers filters to query and view specific records. assigned. predictive minor. predictive critical. or no filter. major. The menu lets you to choose critical. Choose the severity level of the events you want to see. File System and Process monitors are grouped under BMC_ProactiveNetServer. Use this option to show the events in the specified time range. Specify the group name to which the events that you want to view are associated Absolute Time Range Relative Time Group Name 110 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . You can change the time and date when you want to view resource data for the previous day. The menu lets you choose from 1 hour up to 3 months. The default event rule. major and above. System-related default monitors like System. predictive major. acknowledged. Table 32: Filter options for All Groups => Grid View Filter option Status Severity Description Choose the status of the events you want to see. information. Time Range option allows the Start and End Time selections to reflect either a particular day and hour or a particular duration of time. minor. Default Agent status monitor is grouped under BMC_ProactiveNetAgent. such as the last four hours. DefaultRule-BMC_ProactiveNet. i do not see severities marked in red? or no filter Choose the events in the specified time. and the action type is email notification. closed.Viewing events by group Default groups The following groups are available in BMC ProactiveNet. The menu lets you to choose either open. This contains two child groups namely BMC_ProactiveNetServer and BMC_ProactiveNetAgent. warning. is created for this default group. by default.

which is made of other groups (subgroup-based). In case of groups made up of subgroups. View group details Choose Tools => Group Details to display a graphic representation of events issued for the group over the past 24 hours along with group information and a history of all events from the past 24 hours. Click Edit Thresholds. The Show Device screen is similar to All Devices. it only lists devices belonging to the selected group. see . Note: The Group Details page does not display external events. The All Groups => Grid View table might contain subgroup information. For more information. warning. and predictive events. If you select a group. However. see Setting event thresholds on page 184. Links are available to a drill-down Event List. Limitation The Group Details page does not include information about info. Table 33: Further information options on the All Groups => Grid View screen Option Drilling down to monitors associated with a group Drilling down to subgroups Details Click the Group Name link to navigate to the selectedGroupName screen. However. the navigation displays all subgroups under the main group (even if you have not selected the individual subgroups). abnormality. Chapter 2 Working with events 111 . the Device drill-down displays all devices belonging to the subgroups. This screen gives the monitor details for the group. devices that are part of more than one subgroup are listed only once. Use the Tools list to get additional information. abnormalities. or predictive events. For information on tool tips. View devices associated with a group Click Devices to view all devices associated with the group. Further drill-down to individual monitors is available from the Show Device screen. Click Sub Groups to view subgroup information.Viewing events by group Viewing further information for All Groups => Grid View The following table summarizes the available options for further information about a specific event on the All Groups => Grid View screen.

instance name. both of which comprise the group. and host name.Viewing events by group Tool Tip description for various adapters at instance hierarchy level. you can click the group name to drill down to a detailed view of the monitors and devices.TMART Adapters: Do a mouse-over at the instance hierarchy level on ■ Tool Tip . project. and monitor name. monitor name the tool tip displays device name. Number of closed events Check box that indicates whether data collection for the monitor is turned on 112 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . In the Monitors tab. monitor name the tool tip displays the device.VMware Adapters: Do a mouse-over at the instance hierarchy level on Viewing monitor and device information under the All Groups => Grid View In the All Groups => Grid View screen.Portal: Do a mouse-over at the instance hierarchy level on monitor Note name the tool tip displays absolute path and hierarchy of the instance. location. ■ Tool Tip . you can view the following information described in Table 34 on page 112: Table 34: Monitor details: All Groups Column Monitor Name Monitor Type Source Agent Open Closed Collect Data Description String description of the monitor Functional category of monitor Agent to which the monitor belongs Displays the highest severity icon and the tool tip displays the severity and status counts separately.Native Adapters: Do a mouse-over at the instance hierarchy level on monitor name the tool tip displays device name. ■ Tool Tip . and host server. ■ Tool Tip . The instance hierarchy level is displayed only if there is hierarchy.

you can view the information described in Table 28 on page 104: Table 35: Device details: All Groups Column Device Name Agent Type Description String description of the device Associated agent name Functional category of device User Events under these categories TransactionsApplicationNetworkS ystemDatabaseOther Tools Options are ■ Device at a Glance ■ Manage Data Collection ■ Add Change Entry ■ Show Change Log ■ Show Parent Groups ■ View Service Impact Graph Chapter 2 Working with events 113 .Viewing events by group Column Tools Description Options are ■ Show Graph ■ FlashCheck ■ Manage Data Collection ■ Thresholds ■ Show Parent Groups ■ Add Change Entry ■ Reset Baseline ■ View Service Impact Graph In the Devices tab.

■ Categorization of the aggregate event status for each service by category (user transactions.Viewing events for groups in a hierarchical tree The functionality is similar to that described for the All Services => Grid View screen under Viewing monitor and device information under the All ServicesGrid View on page 103. ■ Aggregate abnormality score for each service (as a purple thermometer bar) If BMC_ProactiveNetServer is within the firewall and the Operations Console is outside the firewall. or other) based on the severity of the predictive event. application. and then change the default Use browser settings option to Direct connection. The color of this icon is ■ Intelligent events and external events that are associated with a device (device- associated events) that have the highest severity are displayed. system. double-click the Java icon. 2 In the Java Control Panel. Viewing events for groups in a hierarchical tree The Group Tree provides a real-time. database. then the Group tree might not be displayed properly in Firefox 1. perform the following on Windows 2000 or XP: 1 In the Windows Control Panel. ■ The Predictive icon is displayed next to the category icon. Related Topics Controlling the display in the Tree View on page 115 Note 114 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The entire group hierarchy and devices are all visible on a hyperbolic pane mapped to a circular display region. network. Information is displayed for Monitors that are not part of the explicitly mentioned monitor types which are listed under the 'Other' category. This is due to known issues with the browser. To ensure the proper display of the Group tree correctly on Firefox 1.5.5. interactive visualization of the event status for a user-defined time duration. click Network Settings.

the impact on SLOs. Container relationships between groups are supported and depicted by connecting bold lines.Viewing events for groups in a hierarchical tree Note Group to group dependent relationships are not represented in hierarchical fashion. Dependent relationships are indicated by dotted lines. a user may be restricted to view only a subset of groups that exist in the system. database.applet.grouptree. Filter the displayed groups ■ All Events ■ All Abnormalities ■ Manage data Collection ■ Add Change Entry ■ Show Change Log ■ Group Details ■ Set As Root ■ View Service Impact Graph Groups are displayed based on the access level and event display preferences of the user. transactions. Table 36: Controlling the display on the Tree View Objective Instructions Indicators are aggregated at each level and propagated upwards. For example. and the abnormality score (indicates how close the event is to failure) For a full list of icons. and other). network. Change the data refresh interval Data refresh interval (in seconds) for the Tree View can be specified using the property 'pronet.conf Various icons indicate the severity of system objects (application.refreshRate' in installDirectory/ pw/custom/conf/pronet. you can display a legend by clicking Show Legend. Controlling the display in the Tree View This topic summarizes the various actions that you can perform to control the display of information in the Tree View. Change the focus point on the tree Drag any point on the tree Display or hide the legend Chapter 2 Working with events 115 . system. the impact on services. Only IT dependent relationships are permitted between services and groups.

116 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Viewing events by device Objective Filter the displayed devices Instructions ■ All Events ■ All Abnormalities ■ Device at a Glance ■ Manage data Collection ■ Add Change Entry ■ Show Change Log ■ Show Parent Groups ■ Diagnostics Filter the displayed monitors ■ All Events ■ All Abnormalities ■ Show Graph ■ Flash Check ■ Manage data Collection ■ Thresholds ■ Show Parent Groups ■ Add Change Entry ■ Reset Baseline ■ Diagnostics Viewing events by device When BMC ProactiveNet discovers a problem with a device. A monitored resource does not generate an event unless the event conditions are specified in the Event Profile. the monitor setup for that device activates an event triggered by the specific conditions set up for that device (sometimes also called the Monitored Resource).

All Devices screen under the Events Console tab. The icon displays a cross mark next to the Device Name. When you bring the mouse over the device name the following details are displayed as tool tip: ■ Device Name ■ IP address ■ Device Description or OS Name. The counts displayed in the Grid View include intelligent events and external events that are associated with a device (device-associated events). ■ Device is marked for deletion (displayed for devices that are marked for deletion). Table 37: Columns of event information on the All Devices screen Column Device Name Description Information about the associated device. The All Devices screen. The display on this screen differs. You can switch between hierarchical or flat view. Default settings are also available in BMC ProactiveNet for automatic configuration. see.Viewing events by device The Event Profile consists of Event Thresholds (to generate an event) and Event Rules (to send event notifications). Hierarchical view is the default view only if there are devices in the system that can be displayed in hierarchy. ■ Multiple IP address (displayed only for CMDB devices that have multiple IP addresses) Chapter 2 Working with events 117 . The number of records for a particular page displayed at the bottom right corner in this view considers only the parent devices and will not consider the child devices under it. Table 37 on page 117 summarizes the available options on the All Devices screen. The BMC ProactiveNet administrator sets event profiles. You can expand the physical host node to see the virtual computers running in the system. For more information on event profiles. depending on the configuration of display—whether with counts or with severity icons (see Customizing the display of the event list on page 34). you can view the device hierarchy on clicking Show Hierarchy. If no virtual solution is configured then flat view is the default view. the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide. providing a quick view of the overall health of the system. displays information about the events that were issued for all devices that BMC ProactiveNet is monitoring. the out-of-box default screen displayed on the Events Console tab.

Viewing events by device Column Agent Description Displays the status of the agent attached to the device. the numbers of events of each severity is displayed. ■ Critical ■ Major ■ Minor ■ Predictive ■ Warning ■ Information ■ Abnormal ■ Closed The severities are displayed as an icon. When you place your mouse over this column. either connected or disconnected. Both icon and color represent event severity. server or web server). A green Plugged icon indicates that the agent is connected. When you bring the mouse over the agent icon the following details are displayed as tool tip: ■ Status ■ OS Name Type Displays the type of device (for example. 118 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . and a red Unplugged icon indicates the agent is disconnected. Numbers of events by severity The number of events for each severity a The color indicates the severity of the events. Events by type Step 1 on page 119 ■ User Transactions ■ Application ■ Network ■ System ■ Database ■ Other Events of each type.

Chapter 2 Working with events 119 . or hour to compare measurements. Choose the severity level of the events you want to see. predictive minor. acknowledged. warning. and view diagnostics under Device at a Glance. Use the arrows to move the selected groups. or no filter. Table 38: Filter options for All Devices Filter option Status Severity Description Choose the status of the events you want to see. 2 Expand or collapse the groups. major. Use this option to show the events in the specified time range. Available groups are displayed either as Hierarchy or as Flat. such as the last four hours. set thresholds. The menu lets you choose from 1 hour up to 3 months. The menu lets you to choose either open. Select the groups. Filtering event display for All Devices You can filter the listed events using the criteria listed in the following table. Choose the events in the specified time. The menu lets you to choose critical. closed or no filter. information. You can change the time and date when you want to view resource data for the previous day. Parent and child devices are displayed to make the hierarchy complete. assigned. minor. Absolute Time Range Relative Time Group/Services Device Name To include or exclude a group 1 Click the link corresponding to group to open the Group Filter window. a Events are displayed with either number of events or severity icons. depending on user configuration (see “Viewing all abnormalities” on page 85). You can include or exclude the groups to view the events that are associated to it. predictive major. If the filter criteria is not matching then the parent is displayed in italics. Time Range option allows the Start and End Time selections to reflect either a particular day and hour or a particular duration of time. Use hierarchy on or off to switch over to the corresponding view type. including options to view graphs. predictive critical. major and above. Select No Filter option to consider all the events of the available groups.Viewing events by device Column Tools Description Additional tools for further information about the event. Specify the name of a device to limit the display to events associated with a specific device. week.

Include Selected Groups. 4 Click Apply. then Closed Time will be displayed for all closed events. 120 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Viewing further information for All Devices The following table summarizes the available options for further information about a specific event on the All Devices screen.Viewing events by device 3 Select No Filter. you can click Status. Use the Tools list to get additional information. Drilling down to an event list for a The middle columns indicate triggered events (if any) on the Device. If Status selected is No Filter. For details. Included groups will be displayed with (+) sign and excluded groups will be displayed with (-) sign. you can show graphs and create rules. device Click the Severity icon (or the Count) link to view open events. Table 39: Further information options on the All Devices screen Option Drilling down to monitors associated with a device Details Click the Device Name link to navigate to Show Monitors: All Events screen. or Exclude Selected Groups. ■ No Filter: To consider all the groups. Show Monitors screen gives the monitor details for the device. ■ Exclude Selected Groups: To exclude the selected groups. see the BMC ProactiveNet User Guide. From the Event List screen. The probable cause link on the Event List opens the Probable cause Analysis screen for selected events and indicates the open events associated with the event. View event history and graphs for a device Analyze probable cause This opens the Event History screen and Graph Display. which you can modify as required. Selected groups will be displayed in the All Events screen. If Status selected is Closed. From this screen. all closed events will have Open Time and Closed Time and open events will have only Open Time. Analyze. No time value is displayed in the Closed Time Column if the event is in open condition. and Tools links to get additional information. ■ Include Selected Groups: To include the selected groups.

database. The number of events for each severity The color indicates the severity of the events. Numbers of events by severity ■ Critical ■ Major ■ Minor ■ Predictive ■ Closed The severities are displayed as an icon. This option can also be accessed from the Graph Display page. the Device At a Glance page shows a stacked line graph for all monitors on the device. Open events with highest severity are displayed. the open event status. Table 40 on page 121 summarizes the columns of information available for events on the All Monitors screen. major or minor. Choose Tools => View Service Impact Graph. user transactions. Table 40: Columns of event information on the All Monitors screen Column Monitor Category Current Status Description Application. other Displays the severity of the open events. system. The severity icon can be critical. network. When generated. Click the severity icon to drill-down to Event List screen. BMC ProactiveNet filters and re-calibrates the displayed events based on the monitored services. Choose Tools => Show Parent Groups. Choose Tools => Device at a Glance.Viewing events for monitored services Option Device at a Glance Details Device at a Glance allows easy navigation from the graph to other related attributes graphed below without having to re-implement graph selections. If there are no open events green icon is displayed. When you access All Monitors. Chapter 2 Working with events 121 . View the parent group of a subgroup Viewing devices that are associated to a CI Viewing events for monitored services All Monitors displays information about services monitored by BMC ProactiveNet. and number of closed events for each service.

This feature is helpful when you want to know who has addressed the event or who is responsible for the event. 122 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Acknowledging events BMC ProactiveNet provides the option of acknowledging events and add messages to those events. see Viewing further information for All GroupsGrid View on page 111. Monitor names are displayed hierarchically based on the relationship between the parent and child monitor instances for the selected monitor type. If acknowledging is cleared. This column is collapsed by default. For information on tool tips. An ellipsis (three-dot) icon displayed along with the monitor name indicates that the monitor is an Aggregate Monitor. You cannot drill-down from the instances that do not have stats attributes. Acknowledging an event triggers the associated event rules. click the Monitors link to view the list of monitors by type. the associated event rules are not triggered. View a statistics graph View the parent group of a subgroup Viewing monitors that are associated to a CI Choose Tools => Show Graph(s) BMC ProactiveNet provides additional options to modify the graph. Viewing further information for All Monitors The following table summarizes the available options for further information about a specific event on the All Monitors screen. Instances that satisfy the filter criteria are shown normally and those that do not satisfy the filter criteria are also displayed in italics to complete the hierarchy. From here. Choose Tools => View Service Impact Graph. You can choose to either expand or collapse all the monitor names. From here. Choose Tools => Show Parent Groups. This options is available only if the monitor has a valid CI. Click the link to view all monitors in that category. Table 41: Further information options on the All Monitors screen Option Drilling down to view Monitor types To view monitors in a specific category Details Click the link to view Monitor Types under the particular service. click the Monitors link to view the list of monitors by type.Acknowledging events Column Monitor Types Description Click the link to view all monitors in that category.

1 From the All Events tab go to Tools Menu => Operations => Acknowledge Event. or critical) as at the time of acknowledgement. Acknowledgment is applied only to event instances of the same severity (minor. select the Acknowledge check box. add a note and click Yes if you are sure you want to acknowledge the event. 4 Enter the acknowledgement message text (up to 128 characters) in the Message box. you must be assigned “Allow Acknowledge Event” privileges by the BMC ProactiveNet administrator.Acknowledging events To limit the display of events to events that have not yet been acknowledged. and is not valid when the severity status of the event changes. BMC ProactiveNet updates the event status screen advising others on the event acknowledgment. major. 2 On the Intelligent Event Details page. 2 In the Acknowledge Event Confirmation box. choose Tools => Intelligent Event History . Chapter 2 Working with events 123 . 3 If you want to assign the event to yourself. select Tools => Acknowledge Event. Acknowledged events are available only to the person acknowledging the event. Summary views set to show counts do not display Acknowledged events. To set the acknowledgement message 1 On the All Events tab. Related Topics To acknowledge a specific event on page 123 To set the acknowledgement message on page 123 To view operations history on page 124 To acknowledge a specific event Note To acknowledge events. see Viewing all abnormalities on page 93. Your message is displayed together with the event on the Intelligent Event History screen. 5 Click Submit.

124 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Closing events To view operations history 1 On the All Events tab. When you close an event it can be viewed in the system for a week. but after a week it is removed from the system. along with timestamp details. (s) from the tool tip (s) from the tool tip ■ All Devices => Grid View: do a mouse over on Tools and select Close Event ■ All Groups => Grid View: do a mouse over on Tools and select Close Event ■ Specific event on the All Events tab. Dependency events are not closed. choose Tools => Close Event on the row of the relevant object: ■ Service on the All Services => Grid View tab. The Operation History for selected Event window contains all operations or messages associated with an event. or the Probable cause analysis screen 2 Click OK on the confirmation message. choose Tools => Intelligent Event History . When closing events from the service object. Closing events The Close Event feature allows you to close events manually. 2 On the Intelligent Event Details page. the system considers only container events. select Tools => Operation History. the Event Details screen. This feature is useful if the Auto Close option for automatically closing events (set through the Event Thresholds Setting screen) was not selected or could not be selected for lack of appropriate authorizations. Related Topics To close an event or a group of object events on page 124 To close multiple events on page 125 To close an event or a group of object events 1 From the appropriate display of events.

This option is available on all event screens. Managing configuration changes Add Configuration Change screen stores and tracks configuration data. Related Topics To add a configuration change entry on page 125 To view and manage all configuration changes that have been submitted on page 126 Note To add a configuration change entry 1 From the appropriate display of events. and provides information on the possible impact to your Web environment.Managing configuration changes To close multiple events 1 On the All Events tab. 2 Click Close Event above the list of events. Add Configuration Change can also be accessed through Options => Administration tab. Chapter 2 Working with events 125 . 3 Click OK on the confirmation message. choose Tools => Add Configuration Change on the row of the relevant object: ■ Event on the All Events tab ■ Abnormality on the All Abnormalities tab (All View) ■ Service on the All Services => Graph View tab ■ Group on the All Groups => Grid View tab ■ Device on the All Devices => Grid Viewtab ■ Monitor on the Show Monitors screen accessed from the All Monitors tab ■ CI on the All Services => Tile View or All Services => Graph View. select the relevant events through the appropriate check box in the Select column.

Change entry events (Configuration Change Events) which were generated during the previous releases does not get migrated to the current version. such as an urgent server maintenance task that must be carried out. In the graph. and long description. This feature enables you to stop data collection by entities immediately during unforeseen situations. summary. select Show External Events option from the Custom Graphs while generating the graph. Users with Allow Collect Data Management privileges can use the Manage Data Collection feature to start or stop data collection for a monitor. device. or service. monitor. 3 Click Apply. On the Configuration Change screen. you can filter the change entries by date and time. device. and group or service. name of contact person.Managing data collection 2 Enter the specifications of the configuration change event: user. date and time. ■ The time when the event was generated. To view the configuration change event. 126 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . group. or groups of monitors. To view and manage all configuration changes that have been submitted From the appropriate display of events. when you place the cursor on the Configuration Change Event icon the tooltip displays the following: ■ Configuration Change Event ■ The date when the event was generated. choose Tools => Show Change Log on the row of the relevant object: 1 device on the All Devices => Grid View 2 group on the All Groups => Grid View 3 service on the All Services => Tile View or All Services => Graph View. Note Managing data collection The Manage Data Collection function gives you the flexibility to pause and resume data collection by a device. ■ The description given while generating the event.

Chapter 2 Working with events 127 . monitor.pausepollperiod denotes the time interval that the scheduler looks for pause or resume requests. In the Manage Data Collection dialog box. New users can pause or resume Data Collection only from the Manage Data Collection dialog.defaultVal indicates the default pause duration that Distinction between new and upgrade users Just as in the Scheduled Down Time feature. The Pause period that you define and assign is a one-time setting and not recurring.server.minutes. The minimum and default value is 60 seconds. will be displayed in the Operations Console.pause. ■ pronet. new and upgrade users have different options available to them. or data collection by the entity during this latent phase. event notification.Managing data collection Note ■ Schedules set using the Schedule Device Downtime feature of the Administration Console cannot be modified using the Operations Console. The current time is the start time of the Pause period. or group of monitors will be temporarily inactive. ■ The following configurable properties that control the Manage Data Collection function are listed in the pronet. upgrade users have the ability to pause or resume the following options: ■ Event Generation ■ EventRule Action or Notification ■ Calculate Baseline ■ Data Collection Pausing data collection The Pause feature allows you to specify a time range during which a selected device. You can choose to stop event generation.conf file (located in installDirectory/ pw/pronto/ conf): ■ pronet.

for setting to On or Off) only if you select to keep data collection on. specify the duration for which the object must be paused.) Note For upgrade users. except for other runtime parameters such as polling interval of the scheduler thread and any upcoming downtime schedules defined using the Schedule Device Downtime function (Administration Console). choose Data Collection.Managing data collection The Pause feature can be configured with restrictions when maximum values are defined in the pronet. click the displayed link to see the status of the instances and manage the activity of specific instances. click the displayed link to see the status of the individual instances and manage the activity of specific instances. BMC ProactiveNet scheduler processes pause schedules prior to schedules defined from the Administration Console. choose Tools => Manage Data Collection on the row of the relevant object: ■ device on the All Devices => Grid View tab ■ group on the All Groups => Grid View tab ■ service on the All Services => Grid View tab ■ abnormality on the All Abnormalities tab (All View) ■ event on the All Events tab ■ monitor on the Show Monitors screen accessed from the All Monitors tab 2 On the Manage Data Collection screen. To pause data collection 1 From the appropriate display of events. Event or Event Generation. 3 If you want to pause data collection. (This is the only selection available to new users. you can pause an entity for any duration without any predefined values. Event Rule Action or Notification. ■ If you want to stop only certain instances of the object. and choose when to start pausing (either immediately or after a delay that you specify). and Calculate BaseLine are available for selection (that is.conf file. 128 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . A pause period that you define from the Operations Console cannot overlap an upcoming downtime schedule set from the Administration Console. 4 If you want to stop only certain instances of the Device or Group or Service. If configured without restrictions.

See Diagnostics Wizard section of the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Guide for detailed instructions on using these commands. Diagnostics BMC ProactiveNet offers both pre-configured and user-defined diagnostic tools to help monitor your system. select the schedules to be resumed. This option performs a full download of the Web page (for Web monitors) or Web pages (for Chapter 2 Working with events 129 . The Get URL option is available for Web or Web Transaction monitors. You can only resume entities that are currently paused.Managing data collection 5 Click Apply. choose Tools => Manage Data Collection on the row of the relevant object: ■ device on the All Devices => Grid View tab ■ group on the All Groups => Grid View tab ■ service on the All Services => Grid View tab ■ abnormality on the All Abnormalities tab (All View) ■ event on the All Events tab ■ monitor on the Show Monitors screen accessed from the All Monitors tab 2 On the Manage Data Collection screen. Resuming data collection The Resume feature enables you to activate an entity currently in the Pause state. You cannot resume a device or group whose downtime schedule has been defined from the Administration Console. All event-related data is archived at the end of seven days. 3 Click Resume. without having to wait for the Pause period to complete. The Diagnostics option is not available on the Event Details page for any event that is open for more than seven days. To resume data collection 1 From the appropriate display of events.

You typically use FlashCheck to determine whether a previously detected condition still exists. wait a few moments and run FlashCheck again.Managing data collection Web Transaction monitors). Results might take several minutes to appear in the FlashCheck window. select an event in the Event View or Grid View. and to update data for newly added or edited monitors. ■ FlashCheck triggers the Run Now feature in BMC TM ART Central. you can quickly examine current data values from a selected monitor. and shows the breakdown of all objects in those pages and their download times. monitors do not retry polling. and displays the results in a separate browser window. ■ FlashCheck does not update BMC TM ART data in BMC ProactiveNet. Examining current data (FlashCheck) With FlashCheck. Selecting this option displays results in a separate browser window. Data is 130 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . ■ (Grid View) Choose Tools => FlashCheck. FlashCheck does not influence the statistics collected in BMC TM ART Central. which executes the monitor immediately. During FlashCheck. you can also use FlashCheck to close resolved issues for an event before the next scheduled poll. updated with the next scheduled poll. To examine the current data values of a monitor 1 In the Operations Console. Note FlashCheck for the BMC TM ART adapter monitors has the following differences from other BMC ProactiveNet monitors: ■ FlashCheck can only be run for active synthetic transactions. Get URL is also an integral part of Diagnostics tool. A separate browser window opens with the current parameter values for the selected monitor. By triggering a poll. If FlashCheck exceeds the timeout period before data is displayed. 2 Run FlashCheck according to the current view: ■ (Event View) Choose Tools => Diagnostics => FlashCheck. FlashCheck triggers an instant poll from the agent running on the selected monitor.

You can create and display a Canvas view for any event collector. The Details pane displays the following cards: ■ Latest 10 Events: displays the event list for the first 10 events that you select in the Canvas view ■ Summary: displays a summary of the object attributes ■ KPIs: displays violations of parameters set for Key Performance Indicators associated with the Group or Device that you select in the Canvas view object that you select in the Canvas view ■ Prediction: displays a prediction graph that shows the future status trends for the If the object displayed in the tile is a CI.About the Canvas view About the Canvas view The Canvas view in the Operations Console lets you create a graphical representation of the components that are being monitored in your environment. Canvas view details You can view event details for the objects in the Canvas view in the Details notebook pane that is displayed at the bottom of the Canvas view window. Canvas view modes The Canvas view has the following modes: ■ View mode: Use this mode to monitor the objects that you select to display in the Canvas view. adding objects. or metrics information. and selecting the display options for those objects. such as images or connectors. the following additional cards are displayed in the Details notebook and the KPIs and Prediction cards are not displayed: Chapter 2 Working with events 131 . The objects can be graphics. or service that you select in the navigation tree by clicking the Canvas View button in the toolbar in the right pane view of the Operations Console. represented in a tile. device. The components are represented by objects that can be placed on a background image. group. ■ Edit mode: Use this mode to create the view by selecting a background.

set up the objects that you want displayed in the view. You can create a Canvas view for event collectors. and then after you have set up the objects. creation and modification time. impact priority. the page is in View mode and no objects are displayed. To create objects in the Canvas view. shows information about the To expand a card to view more information. and consumers of the selected object ■ Schedule: displays the times when the selected component is in service ■ Advanced: displays information on identification. and services. return to View mode to monitor the object status.Setting up and using the Canvas view ■ Status: Displays the applicable status levels of the selected object ■ Priority and Cost: Displays the schedule status. To switch to Edit mode 1 Click the Preferences button in the toolbar. Canvas. You can create a Canvas view for static and event folders but not dynamic folders. providers. possible problems. 132 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . you must first change to Edit mode. and read/write permissions for groups for the selected object service level agreement associated with the component ■ SLM: if BMC Service Level Management is installed. The view is changed to Edit mode. or Graph view Details notebook on page 154 . click the More Info button Related topics: Setting up and using the Canvas view on page 132 Viewing the Tile. groups. When you access the Canvas view initially. Setting up and using the Canvas view Use the Canvas view to create a graphical representation of objects that you are monitoring in your environment. and the Canvas View Preferences dialog box is displayed in the Canvas view pane. and impact cost for the selected object ■ Related CIs: Displays information on status causes. devices.

select the object for which you want to create a canvas view and then click the Canvas View button in the Events Console toolbar. For more information about setting up the Canvas view. click the number 1 that appears in the title bar after the objects are sorted the first time. see “Using Edit mode to set up the Canvas view” on page 133 . and to choose which objects that you want to display and how you want to display them. The objects are sorted in alphabetical order. you use the options in the Canvas View Preferences dialog box to determine how you want the Canvas view to look. To add objects to the Canvas view 1 In the Canvas View Preferences dialog box. 2 Drag and drop an object from the list to where you want that object displayed on the background image. Chapter 2 Working with events 133 . Before you begin In the navigation tree. To create the Canvas View background 1 Click the Preferences button to change the Canvas view to Edit mode. click Monitored Objects. see “Using View mode to monitor objects in the Canvas view” on page 138 Using Edit mode to set up the Canvas view When the Canvas view is in Edit mode.Setting up and using the Canvas view Where to go from here To return to View mode. 2 In the Background pane in the Canvas View Preferences dialog box. ■ Select the Image option and then use the list to select the background image that you want to display. For more information about using the Canvas view to monitor objects. close the Canvas View Preferences dialog box. perform one or both of the following actions: ■ Select the Color option and then use the palette to select the color that you want to display. To reverse the sort order. click Name in the title bar. To sort objects in the Monitored Objects pane.

The color of the connector shows the current status of that object. on page 134. on page 135. edit the tile attributes as follows: 134 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . select the connector order and style as follows: ■ Bring the image to the front of the view or send it to the back of the view. Continue with List item. 2 In the Canvas View Preferences dialog box. click the circle to the right of the boundary box and move it until the connector is pointing in the direction that you want. Continue with List item. To change object attributes in the Canvas view 1 Select an object in the Canvas view. — Connector: shows a relationship between two objects in the Canvas view. on page 136. a tile is created for that object. for example. ■ Select the number of arrowheads: — None for no arrows — One for one arrow that by default points to the right — Two for an arrow on each end of the connector ■ To change the size of the connector. resize the tile and change the attributes in the tile display. ■ Editing options are displayed. 5 If you selected Canvas as the object type. 3 Select one of the following object types. Continue with List item. Continue with List item. You can — Icon with severity background: displays an image of the object type on a colored background that represents the object’s current severity. depending on the object type that you select. click Properties of Selected Object. click the lower right corner of the boundary box and drag it until the connector is the size that you want. on page 134. if the object is in OK status. then the color of the connector is green. To rotate the connector. — Canvas: displays a tile view of the object that is being monitored.Setting up and using the Canvas view After you drag and drop the object onto the Canvas view background. 4 If you selected Connector as the object type.

7 If you selected Icon with severity background as the object style. and click Apply Selection. place the mouse pointer over the tile. At the smallest size. the Attribute Selection for Information Capsule dialog box is displayed. the tile is shown as an icon of the object’s current status. on page 135. For example. For example. select the icon image and order as follows: ■ Select the image icon that you want to display: — Application — Application Server — Database — Database Server — Firewall Chapter 2 Working with events 135 . ■ Resize Tile: use the slider bar to make the tile smaller so that you can fit more ■ Object Type Icon: select to include an icon of the object type in the title bar of ■ Not Being Worked on: indicates that an event has not been assigned and is Continue with List item. on page 136. Perform the following additional steps: a Click the item at the end of the row until a list of attributes is displayed. Continue with List item. For example. b Select the attribute that you want to display in the tile. 6 Select the attributes that you want to display on the tile by clicking the attribute and dragging and dropping it onto the tile area. currently not being addressed. If you select a KPI attribute. if the object that you are monitoring is a server. To see the tile details. tiles onto the view. The attributes that you can select to display depend on the object type that is displayed in the tile. devices have a broader list of attributes to select than services. selecting a tile and clicking Bring to Front displays the selected tile in the front of the other tiles in the Canvas view.Setting up and using the Canvas view ■ Tile order: Use the Bring to Front and Send to Back buttons to layer the order of tiles in the Canvas view. the tile. a server icon is displayed before the object name.

drag and drop the Label icon onto the Canvas view and position it near the object that you want to label. on page 136.Setting up and using the Canvas view — Mail Server — Network — Other — Remote Agent — Router — Server — Switch — System — User Transaction — Web Server — Arrow — Box — Line ■ Bring the image to the front of the view or send it to the back of the view. To change the size of the image. To add labels and additional icons to the Canvas view 1 To add a label to the object that you are monitoring. The Canvas view is returned to View mode. 8 Repeat List item. 9 Close the Canvas View Preferences dialog box to save your changes. on page 134 through List item. 10 Click Refresh to display data for the new metrics. in the Background pane in the Canvas View Preferences dialog box. click the lower right corner of the boundary box and drag it until the image is the size that you want. Continue with List item. on page 135 for each object that you add to the Canvas view. 136 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

3 In the Properties of Selected Object pane. enter the text that you want to display in the Label Options text box and use the additional formatting options to select the text font. in the Background pane. 6 Click Properties of Selected Object and select the icon image and order as follows: ■ Select the image icon that you want to display: — Application — Application Server — Database — Database Server — Firewall — Mail Server — Network — Other — Remote Agent — Router — Server — Switch — System — User Transaction — Web Server — Arrow Chapter 2 Working with events 137 . 4 Click Apply.Setting up and using the Canvas view 2 Click Properties of Selected Object. drag and drop the Clip Art Image icon onto the Canvas view and position it near the tile object that you want it to represent. 5 To add an additional icon near a tile object that you are monitoring. and style. size.

To remove an object from the Canvas view 1 If you are in View mode. click the lower right corner of the boundary box and drag it until the image is the size that you want. You can also remove metrics from tile objects by clicking on the metric and dragging it to the trash can icon.Setting up and using the Canvas view — Box — Line ■ Bring the image to the front of the view or send it to the back of the view. 2 Click the tile and then drag the lower right corner to adjust the height and width. To adjust the height and width of a tile 1 If you are in View mode. The Canvas view is returned to View mode. 2 Click an object and drag the object to the Thrash Can icon at the bottom of the Canvas view pane. you can monitor the event status of the objects and perform actions on those objects. Using View mode to monitor objects in the Canvas view When the Canvas view is in View mode. click the Preferences button to change to Edit mode. To turn on predict mode 1 Click Predict on the toolbar. 7 Close the Canvas View Preferences dialog box to save your changes. To change the size of the image. click the Preferences button to change to Edit mode. 3 Close the Canvas View Preferences dialog box to save your changes. 3 Close the Canvas View Preferences dialog box to save your changes. 138 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

The tiles that have the severity that you select and higher are displayed in the Canvas view.Setting up and using the Canvas view A graph. To filter tiles 1 Click the down arrow next to the filter option in the toolbar. 2 Click the right arrow in the tile title bar to drill down further. click the right arrow . The objects that have dependency relationships with the parent object are displayed in the Canvas view. The prediction severity is displayed only if that severity is higher than the object’s current severity. and OK. 2 Select Show Predictive Events in the Operations tab of the Options window to display the Predict button on the Canvas view. Related topics: About the Canvas view on page 131 Viewing the Tile. 2 Select to filter the tiles based on event severity type: Critical. if the object’s severity is Minor. and Critical are displayed and all tiles with a status of Informational and OK are not displayed. showing what the potential status of the object will be and at what point in time that status will be achieved. Warning. Major. If the object’s severity is Critical. or Graph view Details notebook on page 154 Chapter 2 Working with events 139 . If you select Warning. Minor. Canvas. all tiles with a status of Warning. 1 In the tile title bar. Informational. the prediction severity is not displayed if it is predicted to change to Minor. you must create Canvas views for all objects that have dependency relationships with that tile object. see Customizing the display of events on page 86. Minor. Example To drill down on a tile in the Canvas view To drill down on a tile object in the Canvas view. Major. the prediction severity is displayed if it is predicted to change to Major. For details about setting this option. is displayed at the top of each tile. For example. divided into increments.

Warning 140 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Tile attributes By default. the tiles in the Tile view display the following attributes: ■ Name of the component ■ Icon and type of component ■ Current severity ■ Events severity counters (number of events of a specific severity) color coded as follows: — Red . such as the background image and attributes displayed in the tiles.Major — Light Orange . device. group. You can display a Tile view for any event collector. to save your customizations as defaults.About the Tile view About the Tile view The Tile view in the Operations Console displays an encapsulated view of event metrics for the components that are being monitored in your environment. Use the Tile view to get a dashboard summary of event activity.Minor — Yellow . or service that you select in the navigation tree by clicking the Tile View button the right pane view of the Operations Console. and optionally.Critical — Dark Orange . in the toolbar in Tile view modes The Tile view has the following modes: ■ View mode: Use this mode to monitor the objects that are displayed in the tiles in the Tile view. ■ Edit mode: Use this mode to customize various aspects of the tile display.

tiles that represent configuration items display the following attributes: ■ Name of the component ■ Icon and type of component ■ Current status ■ CI indicators ■ Event severity by monitor category indicators ■ Owner and owner contact information ■ Not being worked on flag CI tiles also include a Tools Menu that is displayed in the title bar when you select the tile. and predictive status and trend. Preferences remain persistent until you change them again. or you can choose to display the same metrics for all tiles. if you have administrative privileges. you can optionally save those preferences and apply them to all tiles that do not have any customizations or. You can display different metrics for each tile. By default. The Tools Menu lets you view additional information about the CI and perform certain task. Chapter 2 Working with events 141 .About the Tile view ■ Event priority counters (number of events of a specific priority) ■ Current status ■ Event severity by monitor category ■ Abnormality score (how close the event is to failure) ■ IP Address Optionally. you can select and change tile preferences. such as setting manual status or maintenance mode. to all tiles for all users. you can display key performance indicators (KPIs). Tile preferences and defaults In Tile view Edit mode. see “Viewing further information for a CI from the Tools Menu”. For more information on the CI Tools Menu. even for those tiles that have customizations. which show where the component status might be in the future. After you set the tile preferences and metrics. which are the primary metrics defined to show the health of business services.

and read/write permissions for groups for the selected object service level agreement associated with the component ■ SLM: if BMC Service Level Management is installed. impact priority. click the More Info Related topics: “Setting up and using the Tile View ” on page 143 button. creation and modification time. The Details pane displays the following cards: ■ Latest 10 Events: displays the event list for the first 10 events that you select in the Tile view ■ Summary: displays a summary of the object attributes ■ KPIs: displays violations of parameters set for Key Performance Indicators associated with the Group or Device that you select in the Tile view object that you select in the Tile view ■ Prediction: displays a prediction graph that shows the future status trends for the If the object displayed in the tile is a CI. shows information about the To expand a card to view more information. Canvas.About the Tile view Tile view details You can view event details for the objects in the Tile view in the Details notebook pane that is displayed at the bottom of the Tile view window. possible problems. providers. or Graph view Details notebook on page 154 142 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . and consumers of the selected object ■ Schedule: displays the times when the selected component is in service ■ Advanced: displays information on identification. Viewing the Tile. and impact cost for the selected object ■ Related CIs: Displays information on status causes. the following additional cards are displayed in the Details notebook and the KPIs and Prediction cards are not displayed: ■ Status: Displays the applicable status levels of the selected object ■ Priority and Cost: Displays the schedule status.

For more information about setting up the Tile view. and the Tile View Preferences dialog box is displayed in the Tile view pane. tiles are created for each node that your administrator or you create in Global or My Folders in the navigation tree. services. the page is in View mode and tiles are displayed for the object that you select in the navigation tree. For more information about using the Tile view to monitor objects.Setting up and using the Tile View Setting up and using the Tile View Use the Tile View in the Operations Console to display a dashboard summary of event activity for event collectors. You can select the attributes that you want to display in each tile or use the default attributes. groups. see “Saving tile preferences as defaults” on page 145. you use the options in the Tile View Preferences dialog box to determine how you want the tiles to look. Using Edit mode to change preferences in the Tile view When the Tile view is in Edit mode. Chapter 2 Working with events 143 . return to View mode to monitor the object status. or to all tiles for all users regardless of customized settings. The view is changed to Edit mode. To edit the objects in the Tile view. and then after you have made your changes. see “Using Edit mode to change preferences in the Tile view” on page 143. see “Using View mode to monitor objects in the Tile view” on page 146. you must first change to Edit mode. To switch to Edit mode 1 Click the Preferences button in the toolbar. and devices. and to choose which metrics that you want to display in the individual tiles. change tile preferences and metrics. you can optionally save the changes that you make to the Tile view preferences as default values that can be applied either to all Tiles that do not have customized settings. Where to go from here If you are logged on to the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console with a user account that has Administrator privileges. By default. For more information about saving tile preferences as defaults. When you access the Tile view.

click the Preferences button to change to Edit mode. 2 In the Background pane in the Tile View Preferences dialog box. perform one or both of the following actions: ■ Select the Color option and then use the palette to select the color that you want to display.Setting up and using the Tile View Before you begin In the navigation tree. the Attribute Selection for Information Capsule dialog box is displayed. 144 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . select the folder that contains the object that you want to display in the Tile view and then click the Tile View button in the Operations Console toolbar. 6 Click Refresh to display data for the new attributes. and then click Metric Selection in the Tile View Preferences dialog box. 4 In Metric Selection. 3 To change the tile metrics. If you select a KPI attribute. Perform the following additional steps: a Click the item at the end of the row until a list of attributes is displayed. To change tile attributes and preferences 1 If you are in View mode. ■ Select the Image option and then use the list to select the background image that you want to display. b Select the attribute that you want to display in the tile. ■ The attributes that you can select to display depend on the object type that is displayed in the tile. devices have a broader list of attributes to select than services. click a tile. For example. and click Apply Selection. 5 Close the Preferences dialog box to save your changes. ■ The Tile view is returned to View mode. click the attribute that you want to add and then drag and drop that attribute from the Tile View Preferences dialog box to the tile that you selected.

you can save tile preferences as the default values for all users. select Change ALL Views. select Only Change Views That Are Using Defaults. and click Apply. and click Apply. 2 To save preferences for your tile views only. perform one of the following actions: ■ To save the changes as the default values for all tiles in your tile views that are using default values (no customized settings). you can apply those changes for all users who have access to the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console. In the All Users Tile Views section of the Background and Images tab. in All Users Tile Views. if you are logged on to the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console with an account that has Administrator privileges. click Apply. ■ To save the changes for all tiles including those that have settings other than the default values (customized settings). select Change ALL Views. if you are an administrator. click Apply. click Defaults Selection. To save tile metrics as defaults 1 In the Tile View Preferences dialog box. To save tile preferences as defaults 1 In the Tile View Preferences dialog box. ■ To save the changes for all tiles including those that have settings other than Optionally. ■ If you are an administrator and you want to apply the changes as the default values for all tiles that are using default values (no customized settings) and for all users who log on to the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console. click Defaults Selection.Setting up and using the Tile View Saving tile preferences as defaults You can apply the changes that you make in the Tile View Preferences dialog box to all tiles in your tile view that use default values. select Only Change Views That Are Using Defaults. 2 In the Tile Metrics tab. in the My Tile Views section of the Background and Images tab. and click Apply. Optionally. the default values (customized settings). perform the one of the following actions: ■ To save the changes as the default values for all tiles that are using default values (no customized settings). and click Apply. in My Tile Views. perform one of the following actions: ■ To save the changes as the default values for all tiles that are using default values (no customized settings). Chapter 2 Working with events 145 .

A graph. To drill down on the tile 1 In the tile title bar. see Customizing the display of events on page 86. If the object’s severity is Critical. To search for tiles 1 In the text box in the toolbar. click the right arrow . To size tiles 1 Move the slider control in the toolbar to the left and right. is displayed at the top of each tile. For details about setting this option. The prediction severity is displayed only if that severity is higher than the object’s current severity. only icons of the object severity are displayed in the Tile view. Place the mouse pointer over the tile icons to display a pop up window that shows the tile details. you can monitor the event status of the objects and perform actions on those objects. the prediction severity is displayed if it is predicted to change to Major. showing what the potential severity of the object will be and at what point in time that severity will be reached. 146 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . To sort tiles 1 Click the down arrow next to the sort option in the toolbar. 2 Select Show Predictive Events in the Operations tab of the Options window to display the Predict button on the Tile view. the prediction severity is not displayed if it is predicted to change to Minor. enter the letters or numbers that you want to search on. At the smallest size.Setting up and using the Tile View Using View mode to monitor objects in the Tile view When the Tile view is in View mode. For example. if the object’s severity is Minor. divided into increments. To turn on predict mode 1 Click Predict on the toolbar.

For information about the CI Tools Menu. 2 Click the Tools Menu icon in the tile title bar. Major. Canvas. or Graph view Details notebook on page 154 Example To access the Tools Menu for CIs If the component that is displayed in the Tile view is a CI. Related topics: About the Tile view on page 140 Viewing the Tile. 2 Select to filter the tiles based on event severity type: Critical. and OK. and Critical are displayed and all tiles with a status of Informational and OK are not displayed. the tile displays the CI Tools Menu that you can use to access additional information about the CI and perform tasks. see “Viewing further information for a CI from the Tools Menu” About the graph view The graph view in the Operations Console displays a graphical representation of the configuration items (CIs) in a service model and shows how those CIs relate to each other.About the graph view 2 Select to sort the tiles based on the name of the monitored objects. Warning. Major. or the type of object that is being monitored. Minor. If you select Warning. The tiles that are have the severity that you select and higher are displayed in the Tile view. all tiles with a status of Warning. To filter tiles 1 Click the down arrow next to the filter option in the toolbar. Use the graph view to monitor events for published service models that represent your business services. the current severity. Informational. Chapter 2 Working with events 147 . 1 Select a CI tile. Minor.

possible problems. creation and modification time. providers. and impact cost for the selected object ■ Related CIs: Displays information on status causes. ■ Edit mode: Use this mode to customize various aspects of the service model display in the Graph view. click the More Info icon Related topics: 148 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . . and read/write permissions for groups for the selected object service level agreement associated with the component ■ SLM: if BMC Service Level Management is installed. shows information about the To expand a card to view more information. impact priority. Graph view details You can view event details for the objects in the Graph view in the Details notebook pane that is displayed at the bottom of the Graph view window. in the toolbar in the right pane view of the Graph view modes The Graph view has the following modes: ■ View mode: Use this mode to monitor the CI objects that you select to display in the Graph view. and consumers of the selected object ■ Schedule: displays the times when the selected component is in service ■ Advanced: displays information on identification.About the graph view You can display the graph view for any service that you select in the navigation tree by clicking the Graph View icon Operations Console. The Details pane displays the following cards: ■ Latest 10 Events: displays the event list for the first 10 events that you select in the Graph view ■ Summary: displays a summary of the object attributes ■ Status: Displays the applicable status levels of the selected object ■ Priority and Cost: Displays the schedule status.

see “Using Edit mode to change preferences in the Graph view” on page 150 For more information about using the Graph View to monitor objects. To return to View mode. the page is in View mode and CI objects are displayed for the object that you select in the navigation tree. and the Graph View Preferences dialog box is displayed in the Graph view pane. you must first change to Edit mode. By default. When you access the Graph view. change service model preferences and metrics. and then after you have made your changes. or Graph view Details notebook on page 154 Setting up and using the Graph View Use the Graph View in the Operations Console to display a configuration item (CI) and its relationships in a graphical service model that represents your important business services. see “Using View mode to monitor objects in the Graph view” on page 152" Chapter 2 Working with events 149 . Where to go from here For more information about setting up the Graph view. close the Graph View Preferences dialog box. service model objects are created for each CI that is displayed in the Global or My Folders nodes in the navigation tree.Setting up and using the Graph View “Setting up and using the Graph View ” on page 149 Viewing the Tile. To switch to Edit mode 1 Click the Preferences button in the Graph View toolbar. The view is changed to Edit mode. return to View mode to monitor the CI object status. Canvas. To edit the objects in the Graph view. You select how you want to display the service model objects and the relationships between those objects in the Graph View.

with space between groups. Before you begin In the Services node in the navigation tree. you use the options in the Graph View Preferences dialog box to determine how you want the configuration item (CI) objects in the service model to look. 150 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . To change CI attributes and preferences 1 If you are in View mode. Bottom to Top. or Left to Right. 2 In the Layout Options pane of the Graph View Preferences dialog box. and lines that indicate a component's impact on another component (Impacted Lines). b Select how you want the label of the object to be determined. This number indicates the impact percentage on the graph between the two components. select the CI object that you want to display in the Graph View and then click the Graph View button in the Operations Console toolbar. Right to Left. ■ Orthogonal: Arranges CIs in a more compact design with provider components shown perpendicular to their consumer components.Setting up and using the Graph View Using Edit mode to change preferences in the Graph view When the Graph View is in Edit mode. Top to Bottom. d Select to show numbers for the lines that indicate a component's impact on another component. Optionally select the orientation of the service model. either by the object's name or its short description. c Select the thickness of the lines that indicate relationships between components for both lines that indicate consumer and provider relationships (Regular Lines). set the following options: a Select one of the following layout formats as the default when the Graph View is opened: ■ Circular: Groups related CIs in circles to help you visualize how the groups are related. click the Preferences button to change to Edit mode. ■ Organic: Groups CIs according to their relationships with each other. ■ Hierarchic: Arranges CIs according to their hierarchy in the service model.

The darker the color. and the default for Providers is 2. The default for Consumers is 1. the more severe is the status or the more important is the priority. If this option is not selected.Setting up and using the Graph View e Select if you want to use the status color of the component for the lines that indicate relationships between the components. select what you want the size of the spotlight to indicate: — Priority: the impact priority of the CI Size based on either on its own priority or on the priority of another impacted CI which propagates its priority to it defined for the CI — SLA: the status of the the worst SLA — Not Being Worked On: the CI has events that have not been assigned — Direct Events: the CI has events directly associated with it. 3 Click Indicator Icons Options and select the icons and indicators that you want to display for each component in the service model: ■ Spotlight: Displays a highlighted circle behind the CI icon. not propagated from other CIs Chapter 2 Working with events 151 . f Select the how many levels you want to show in the service model by selecting the number of consumer CIs and provider CIs that you want displayed when the Graph View is opened. not propagated from other CIs Brightness: select what you want the brightness of the color associated with the CI to indicate: — Direct Events: the CI has events directly associated with it. either the status or the priority of the CI based on the most recent event. You can select a specific number for both consumers and providers or have no limits on the number of levels displayed. You can set the following options for the spotlight: Color select what you want the color of the spotlight to indicate. the color of the lines is black.

Using View mode to monitor objects in the Graph view When the Graph view is in View mode. 152 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . ■ Click OK to save your changes and close the Graph View Preferences dialog box. 5 Click Refresh . you can monitor the status of the CI objects in the service model.Status of Worst Targeted SLA: the status of the the worst SLA defined ■ Prediction Event is Present: the CI has an event that predicts that its future status will become worse than its current status ■ Substatus: the worst status propagated up from any provider CIs 4 Perform one of the following actions: ■ Click Apply to save your changes and keep the Graph View Preference dialog box open. ■ Click Cancel to close the Graph View Preferences dialog box without saving your changes. not propagated from other CIs for the CI ■ SLAs .Setting up and using the Graph View — Not Being Worked On: the CI has events that have not been assigned ■ Status icon: the CI's current status ■ Priority Icon: the impact priority of the CI based on either on its own priority or on the priority of another impacted CI which propagates its priority to it ■ Not being worked on: the CI has events that have not been assigned ■ Direct Events From Component are Present: the CI has events directly associated with it. select one of the following layouts: ■ Circular: Groups related CIs in circles to help you visualize how the groups are related. To set the Graph view layout 1 At the top of the display pane.

■ Hierarchic: Arranges CIs according to their hierarchy in the service model. Any changes you make to instances in the display pane are immediately reflected in this box. You can select the properties of the spotlight in the Graph View Preferences dialog box. components shown perpendicular to their consumer components. to display an overview of the entire contents of the display pane in a box next to the zoom bar.Setting up and using the Graph View ■ Organic: Groups CIs according to their relationships with each other. or Right to Left layout. Left to Right. For details. or use the scroll wheel on a mouse. ■ Orthogonal: Arranges CIs in a more compact design with provider To size the CI objects in the Graph view 1 Use the zoom bar on the left side of the Graph view to resize the CI objects in the service model as follows: ■ Use the Zoom Out button Zoom In button to make the objects appear smaller. A highlight is displayed behind the CI objects displayed in the Graph View. with space between groups. see “Using Edit mode to change preferences in the Graph view” on page 150 Chapter 2 Working with events 153 . drag the slider between the Zoom Out and Zoom In buttons. ■ Use the Zoom Fit button to resize the service model so that all CIs and their relationships fit in the viewable area of the display pane. Bottom to Top. ■ Use the Show Overview button To view details on CI objects 1 Perform one of the following actions: ■ Click the Details icon in the CI object tile ■ Open the Details notebook at the bottom of the Graph view window To turn the spotlight on and off 1 Click the Show Spotlight button on the Graph View toolbar . Select a Top to Bottom. The Show Overview button lets you view the effect of your changes on all the instances in the display pane. and the to make the objects appear larger. Alternatively.

and Graph views provides all of the recorded information about the events associated with the objects that are displayed in the tiles in these views.Viewing the Tile. Canvas. The following indicator icons are displayed around the CI objects displayed in the Graph View: ■ Status ■ Priority ■ Not Being Worked On ■ Direct Events From Component are Present ■ Substatus To expand and collapse the CI hierarchy 1 Click the plus or minus buttons at the top and bottom of the CI objects. Canvas. or Graph view Details notebook pane for all objects Card name Latest 10 Events Description Lists the most recent 10 events for the object (tile) selected in the view. or Graph view Details notebook To turn indicator icons on and off 1 Click the Display All Indicators button on the Graph View toolbar . Viewing the Tile. Canvas. Table 42: Cards displayed in the Tile. The cards of the Details notebook pane organize the information. and provides toolbar options so that you can search and take actions on these events. 154 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The Details notebook event list shows the same information that is displayed in the Events List view. as described in Table 42 on page 154. or Graph view Details notebook The Details notebook pane displayed below the Tile. Canvas.

Changes. Show Configuration Changes. Manage Data Collection. and object description. current event severity status. if applicable. the prediction severity is displayed if it is predicted to change to Major. Device at a Glance. object type icon. Clear Maintenance Mode). Impacting. such as object name. short description. The menu commands that are available depend on what object is displayed in the selected tile as follows: ■ Services: Operations (Set Manual Status. View Service Impact Graph ■ Groups: Monitors+Devices. Impacting. if the object’s severity is Minor. View Events (All. and Group Details commands ■ Devices: Add Configuration Changes. prediction status. Set Maintenance Mode. View Events (All. any actions taken on the last known event. Tree View. the prediction severity is not displayed if it is predicted to change to Minor. Clear Manual Status. View Serivce Impact Graph. For example. Also includes hyperlinks to launch the Tools Menu. The prediction severity is displayed only if that severity is higher than the object’s current severity. and Predictions). Chapter 2 Working with events 155 . and BladeLogic Device History ■ Monitors associated with Devices: Show Parent Groups. and where applicable Remote Actions/Diagnostics commands KPIs Displays violations of the parameters set for Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) if the object that you select in the navigation tree is a Group or Device Displays a graph that shows what the object’s status will be and at what time that status will be reached. description.The Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) and Prediction cards are not displayed for CIs. or Graph view Details notebook Card name Summary Description Displays basic information about the object (tile) that you have selected in the Tile or Canvas view. If the object’s severity is Critical. and Predictions). Show Monitors. Canvas. Prediction If you select a CI object. Flash Check. Show Parent Groups.Viewing the Tile. additional cards are displayed as described in Table 43 on page 156. Direct. Changes. Direct.

Schedule Advanced Displays the times when the selected component is in service ■ Identification ■ Time Stamps ■ Permission Groups Displays information on identification. perform the following steps. To view the Details notebook By default.Viewing the Tile. maintenance mode. and consumers of the selected component type. Canvas. Canvas. 1 Select an object in the Tile. This subtab also lets you view other components that have relationships with the selected component. To display the Details notebook. providers. Canvas. click the Up arrows . possible problems. 156 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . manual status. ■ Summary ■ Priority Details ■ Time-Variable Properties Related CIs Displays information on status causes. or Graph view. or Graph view Details notebook pane for CI objects Card name Status Sections in card ■ Summary ■ Status Details ■ Status Computation Priority and Cost Displays the schedule status. and impact cost. Description Displays the applicable status levels of the component: Service Level Agreement. Canvas. or Graph view. impact priority. the Details notebook is not displayed when you open the Tile. creation and modification time. SLM Shows information about the service level agreement associated with the component Note: This tab is visible only when BMC Service Level Management is installed. or Graph view Details notebook Table 43: Additional cards displayed in the Tile. and computation statuses. 2 In the Details notebook title bar. and read/write permissions for groups for the selected object.

click More Info . To select the cards to be displayed in the Details notebook pane 1 Select an object in the Tile.Viewing the Tile. Canvas. Tip To view additional information in a card in the Details notebook pane 1 In any of the cards listed in Table 42 on page 154 or Table 43 on page 156of the Details notebook. 3 In the Preferences dialog box. 4 Click Close . 2 Click Edit Notebook Preferences . If you select more cards than can be displayed. Canvas. or Graph view Details notebook To hide the Details notebook 1 In the Details notebook title bar. click the Down arrows . select the cards to be displayed in the Details notebook pane. or Graph view. Chapter 2 Working with events 157 . use the tiny right and left arrows to the right and left of the Details notebook to navigate through the cards.

Viewing the Tile. or Graph view Details notebook 158 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Canvas.

How BMC ProactiveNet performs probable cause analysis on events Probable cause analysis focuses on events that are able to impact other events in unexpected ways. The more data that is provided about an event. such as an attribute that is outside the desired range. Therefore. Probable cause analysis in a virtual environment on page 177. This process of gathering and filtering data to determine the cause for an event is called probable cause analysis. BMC ProactiveNet can determine the most-likely causes for an event. For more information see. ■ VMware-related VMotion events — Events related to use of a virtual machine are Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 159 . the following events are not considered during probable cause analysis: ■ administrative events—Administrative events include all events that belong to specific event classes within the MC_CELL_EVENT class. the more accurate probable cause analysis will be.3 Determining the probable cause for an event What is probable cause analysis? By gathering data from different sources and applying filters to rule out unrelated events. You can increase the accuracy of probable cause analysis by providing relationships between devices and monitors. see Configuring BMC ProactiveNet to perform probable cause analysis on page 165. These event classes are listed in Event information used in probable cause analysis on page 435 handled differently from other events. For more information. The probable cause analysis process analyzes data and displays the relevant events automatically.

Because internal and external events vary in the amount and type of data that they supply. these events do not have the data associated with them that an internal event does. An internal event is an event that is generated by the BMC ProactiveNet Server. external events. see “Event information used in probable cause analysis” on page 435 External events are events that are received from an external source such as a remote cell or an event adapter.How BMC ProactiveNet performs probable cause analysis on events ■ predictive events—Predictive events are early warning events that BMC ProactiveNet generates before a severe event occurs on an existing metric. The Service model is well defined and thresholds are on all the metrics that represent the health of all the CIs that are present in the model. internal and external events are handled differently during the probable cause analysis process. ■ The Service Model is present. blackout period for an adapter. shown as impacting events. PCA can be used to sort the events by score computation and by looking at various factors like data correlation. PCA is used for finding the root causes after the occurrence of the event. In this case. ■ Impact computation is available only for open events. but lot of many events are ■ The Service model is not present. time correlation. The Probable Cause Analysis(PCA) in BMC ProactiveNet computation is useful in trouble shooting performance related issues. ■ When trouble shooting system resource related issues in virtual environments and BMC adapter for VMware is used for data collection. and so on. For a list of slots used by probable cause analysis to analyze events. severity. Internal events also are referred to as intelligent events or data events because these events include a large and rich amount of data. In this case. PCA can be very effective by looking at relevant abnormalities. Probable cause analysis can be performed on internal events and external events. ■ blackout events—Blackout events include all events that occur during a defined The Root Cause Analysis(RCA) in SIEM computation is useful in finding the root causes for the up or down issues. ■ The Service Model is present in a detailed or high level. 160 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . but the thresholds are not set on all the metrics. Because these events come from a source that is external to BMC ProactiveNet. and configuration change events.

it applies a series of filters to the internal event. probable cause analysis for external events uses fewer filters. Figure 6: Probable cause analysis process for an external event Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 161 . Figure 5: Probable cause analysis process for an intelligent event Because external events do not contain data as internal events do. as illustrated in Figure 6 on page 161. these events go through more analysis steps than external events.How BMC ProactiveNet performs probable cause analysis on events Because internal events are rich in data. in the order shown in Figure 5 on page 161. When BMC ProactiveNet is analyzing an internal event to determine if it could be a probable cause for another event.

which might make it the cause of the result event. the longer the period of time between the probable cause event and the result event. the less likely it is that the probable cause event is the cause of the result event. In general.How BMC ProactiveNet performs probable cause analysis on events Time correlation The first measure used to determine if an internal or external event might be the cause of another event is whether the event being analyzed as the probable cause occurred during a logical timeframe. 162 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

see Knowledge patterns on page 163. you can filter probable cause events based on a collection of filters that you define. These following user-defined filters are applied depending on whether the event is internal or external: ■ Device Name—filters all internal events and external events that are associated with a device that exists within BMC ProactiveNet ■ Group—filters all internal events and external events if the external event is associated with a BMC ProactiveNet device and that device is part of the specified group relationships and less scoring events. using global For instructions on configuring these filters. that internal event is then compared against any saved knowledge patterns.How BMC ProactiveNet performs probable cause analysis on events If the probable cause event occurs within the time specified by the time correlation filter. service model. see Service model relationships on page 164. BMC ProactiveNet examines the user-defined relationships for the external event to determine if the external event might be a probable cause event.Filters based on the non-KPI metrics. but with lower scores. then the probable cause event is assessed against the user-defined filters. ■ Event level . For instructions on modifying the time specified by the time correlation filter. Knowledge patterns If you have determined that a certain set of criteria usually results in the same probable cause event. For information about the userdefined relationships filter. Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 163 . then you can create a knowledge pattern of that criteria so that BMC ProactiveNet can compare internal events against that criteria to quickly identify whether or not that internal event is a probable cause event. If an internal event passes through the user-defined filters that have been applied. see Enabling user-defined filters on page 173. If an external event passes through the user-defined filters. For more information about knowledge patterns. User-defined filters Once the event has passed the time correlation filter. Also filters external events that are not associated with a computer system and displays event outside the model. see Changing the time correlation filter on page 172.

Service model relationships The relationships between configuration items (CIs) identify potential probable cause events. see the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Guide. BMC ProactiveNet examines the relationships of the CI for the potential probable cause event. Service model relationships capture relationships between CIs. If the event belongs to any CI instance relationships. Because these relationships are unique to your environment. For more information about service model relationships. 164 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . BMC ProactiveNet analyzes the event based on global relationship rules. then that event is displayed immediately as the probable cause event. then those relationship filters are applied. see the BMC Knowledge Base Development Reference Guide. If the event instance does not belong to any instance relationship. This domain knowledge cannot be modified. For information about defining knowledge patterns. BMC ProactiveNet examines the CI relationships for the internal event to determine if the event might be a probable cause event. out-of-the-box domain knowledge provided for existing BMC ProactiveNet monitors. For more information about the mc_event_subcategory slot. Global relationships are analyzed for all internal events and all external events that have a sub-category specified in the mc_event_subcategory slot. see Saving recurring conditions as a known probable cause on page 174. you must set them yourself.How BMC ProactiveNet performs probable cause analysis on events If an internal event is compared to a knowledge pattern and matches. Global relationships Global relationships are pre-defined. If an internal event does not match any of the saved knowledge patterns. Service model relationships are analyzed for all internal events and for external events if the relationship is based on a CI and the external event is associated with that CI.

as well as all System Resource monitors for each of the computers these run on. If monitors are not covering all dependencies in your infrastructure. For example. Database monitors. Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 165 . System monitors. Log File monitors. If there is not enough coverage. Complete monitor coverage is key for probable cause pinpointing to work correctly. Application Server monitors. and DNS monitors. This includes monitors at the system level. and network level. you should configure your BMC ProactiveNet system as recommended by these guidelines. such as Web Server monitors. Configuring BMC ProactiveNet to perform probable cause analysis To maximize the capabilities of BMC ProactiveNet probable cause analysis. Interface monitors.Configuring BMC ProactiveNet to perform probable cause analysis Data correlation Data correlation is computed using the data collected for the result event and the probable cause event. you must make sure to create a monitor for it using the Web URL or Web Transaction monitor. Data correlation is applicable only to internal events. if you have a Web site in your environment. then it is virtually impossible to get to the granular cause of a problem. application level. then probable cause will show that no events are correlated. Disk monitors. Ping monitors. Configure complete monitor coverage You must configure complete monitor coverage for your entire infrastructure. Scoring Scoring of probable cause analysis events is based on a combination of factors computed by BMC ProactiveNet that determine the likelihood that the event is a probable cause event. Process monitors. such as TCP monitors. but you also need to create a monitor for all resource dependencies that support it.

ensure that you associate the montior to the proper CI. however. 166 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Conversely. Associate monitors to the proper CI When you create a service model by using the Associate Monitor feature in the Administration Console. A device type is assigned to each device by default. Create service models for interdependent CIs You must create service models for CIs that have dependencies on one another.either virtually or physically. ensure that the monitor is created under the correct device in the Administration Console. Create monitors under the correct devices Each monitor in the BMC ProactiveNet system is located under a specific device in the Administration Console. if events that are unrelated to the result event may be pinpointed as probable cause events because that event has an incorrect device type. unrelated events may appear. conversely. This device should be the target computer where the application being monitored is running . You can create service models using the Administration Console or BMC Impact Model Designer. BMC ProactiveNet system uses device type information to isolate and relate problems across different computers. you should verify that this device type is correct.Configuring BMC ProactiveNet to perform probable cause analysis Assign correct device types You must ensure that the correct device types are assigned to all devices in your infrastructure. Probable cause analysis can use the device as a way of filtering out unrelated events. If the monitor assignment is not correct. probable cause analysis can incorrectly eliminate an event as a probable cause event because it is eliminating all events of a certain device type. For information see the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide and the BMC ProactiveNet Service Modeling and Publishing Guide. If the device type is set incorrectly. This information is important for the probable cause analysis process to draw conclusions about the relationship of monitors with respect to one another. there is a chance that an event that is correlated to the result event will not be displayed or. When creating a monitor.

the monitor should be collecting data consistently for at least a week. At 10:00 AM the CPU USED is higher than 90%. If there is another event created at 10:15 AM because of this high CPU consumption and you are trying to perform probable cause analysis on the event that occurred at 10:15AM. The following types of threshold settings impact the probable cause analysis process: ■ Absolute/Signature Event Thresholds—the duration of these thresholds is critical for correlating events that occur closely in time to the original event. the more reliable the probable cause analysis process becomes. the CPU usage problem will not be displayed as a probable cause event because the duration for this event has not yet passed. see the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide. Establish a reliable baseline To ensure a reliable baseline for a monitor. an event will be generated only at 11:00 AM if the CPU USED percentage stays above 90% until 11:00 AM. For example. then too few data points are will be available within the default period to reliably pinpoint probable cause. Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 167 . if you decide to change the polling frequency. However. keep in mind that polling frequency affects probable cause analysis. If this duration period is too long and if you are trying to find the probable cause analysis as soon as the problem event is created. The longer the monitor has been collecting data. Probable cause analysis will not display events that are outside the specified timeframe before or after the result event. you create a threshold that creates a CRITICAL event when server CPU USED is above 90% (condition) for 1 hour (duration). this event might not be displayed. An event is not generated until the condition exists for the duration specified in the threshold definition. if the default time correlation filter of one hour before the event and 30 minutes after the event is being applied and the polling frequency is 45 minutes.Configuring BMC ProactiveNet to perform probable cause analysis For information on associating the montior to the proper CI. Therefore. For example. However. it is best to configure the smallest polling interval that does not affect the performance of the device. Set a polling interval of 5 minutes or less BMC ProactiveNet recommends using the default polling frequency. A greater number of data points increases the likelihood that the probable cause analysis process will be successful.

2 You can launch into the probable cause analysis page from the ■ Tools menu icon ( or ) in the Object column of the event Details area and choose Probable Cause Analysis Probable Cause Analysis icon located in one of the following locations: ■ a above the event list b in the Summary column of the event Details area c to the right of any monitor graph display 168 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . For information about the mc_event_subcategory slot.Viewing probable cause analysis for an event ■ Abnormality Event Thresholds—BMC Software recommends that you keep the default settings for these thresholds. Viewing probable cause analysis for an event The probable cause analysis information for an event is displayed in the Probable Cause Analysis For Selected Event screen in the Operations console. select the event for which you want to determine probable cause. see the BMC Knowledge Base Development Reference Guide. the mc_event_subcategory slot must be set for each external event. Ensure sub-categories are defined for external events For external events to be analyzed based on global relationships. 1 From the event list. To view probable cause analysis for an event You can view the probable cause analysis from the Tools menu or by clicking on the icon. This screen displays the probable cause events that remain after all the relevant filters have been applied.

1 By Score: This tab sorts the probable cause events based on the highest score. 3 Monitor information for the selected event. you can set up a knowledge pattern that saves and recognizes those particular conditions. From the Probable Cause Analysis For Selected Event screen. If you determine that particular conditions for a particular instance always indicate probable cause. 2 Click on the Detailed Diagnostics icon to view detailed diagnostics for the event. you can view: 1 A graph of the raw data for the selected event. For information about defining a knowledge pattern. see Saving recurring conditions as a known probable cause on page 174. Secondary events pane The bottom pane of the Probable Cause Analysis page contains the list of probable cause events that are determined for the primary event after all the event filters have been applied. 2 The attributes and indicators for the selected event. This section includes: 1 Severity level 2 Time at which the event occurred Probable Cause Events section This section enables you to set the user-defined filters. the By Score and the By Device tabs. For instructions on enabling these filters.Viewing probable cause analysis for an event Event Being Analyzed section This section of the Probable Cause Analysis For Selected Event screen displays information about the event for which you are trying to find the probable cause (also called the primary event). The BladeLogic icon Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 169 . There are two tabs in this pane. If the device for this event includes BladeLogic job which has run before 24 hours before and 30 minutes after the primary event the icon for the job type is displayed in the Most Recent BladeLogic Job Type column. see “Customizing the display of the Probable Cause Analysis list” on page 170. BMC ProactiveNet will instantly identify those conditions as the probable cause for the event. When that pattern is encountered again. The tools menu also is available for this event from the Probable Cause Analysis For Selected Event screen. 3 By Device: This tab sorts the probable cause events by device.

click Preferences . For more information about integration with BMC BladeLogic. Table 44: Probable cause analysis preferences settings Field General View Displays the events sorted by score or by device. The default view is By Score. use the information in the following table to determine the appropriate settings. The tooltip displays the time of the last run BladeLogic job with respect to the primary event. Customizing the display of the Probable Cause Analysis list You can customize the following aspects to suit your probable cause event monitoring: ■ view ■ time ■ events filter ■ analysis ■ event filter levels ■ number of devices and events displayed To customize display settings for the PCA lists 1 In the Probable Cause Analysis page. Description 170 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The default time interval is -1 and +30. Time Enables the time specification based on the secondary event time out interval. see Integrating with BMC BladeLogic on page 419. 2 In the Probable Cause Analysis Preferences page.Customizing the display of the Probable Cause Analysis list depends on the latest job that is executed. ■ By Score: displays the events sorted on the score. Click the Tools menu icon for the event and choose BladeLogic Device History to view BladeLogic device history page. ■ By Device: displays the events sorted by devices of the events.

■ Data Correlation . Data correlation is applicable only to internal events. Only the metric data within the analysis window is analyzed. ■ Correlate metric data during previous abnormalities on event's metric . Analysis Enables you to correlate information in the following ways: ■ Time Correlation .enables you to display the secondary events in the same timeframe as the primary event. For example. the results may take up to 3 times longer to return. level1 is displayed. but lower scores Select this option to display only the event with the highest score. For a given metric there could be multiple abnormalities and threshold events. ■ Correlate metric data within time window .1 hour and + 1 hour in the time window slider. Select this option to filter events based on the impact relationships defined for the CI associated with the primary event.Customizing the display of the Probable Cause Analysis list Field Events Filter Description Enables the levels of event filter for the following options: ■ Level 1 ■ Level 2 ■ Level 3 ■ Level 4 By default. This can produce more accurate data correlation results at the cost of increased processing time. Show only highest scoring event per metric Filter using service model Displays event outside the model. Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 171 . Select this option to show the events that are not associated with the impacting CI's based on the model identified above. However.co-relates data between the metric of the primary event against other metrics for the time periods at which the primary metric was abnormal in the past. (subject to data retention limits).co-relates the metric data of the primary event against the metric data of each candidate event. then up to 2 hours of data are analyzed.enables the computation of data using the data collected for the resulting event and the probable cause event. if you select . Event Filter Levels Filter levels on non-KPI metrics Select this option to filter by non-Key Performance Indicators (KPI).

Filter events not associated with a computer system or CI Filter events scoring less than Select this option to filter an event that is not associated with a device or a CI Select this option to filter events with a score lower than that entered in this field. The following topics explain how to configure these filters. After the probable cause analysis identifies the probable cause events.Max Number of Events to Display By Device . Enables you to determine the maximum number of devices to display in the PCA results window. Filtering unrelated events to find probable cause There are many ways to filter unrelated events to find the probable cause of an event.Max Number of Devices to Display By Device . BMC ProactiveNet only considers events that have occurred one hour before or 30 minutes after the primary event. each event is scored and only the events whose score is above the specified limit are shown as root cause in the probable cause analysis page. To change the time correlation filter 1 Access the probable cause analysis for the selected event. you must change the time correlation filter. 172 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . If you want to increase or decrease the time correlation between the primary and the second event. Changing the time correlation filter The timeframe during which a probable cause event and a result event is most likely to occur is specified in a time correlation filter.Max Number of Events per Device to Display Enables you to determine the maximum number of events to display in the PCA results window based on the score of the events. Enables you to determine the maximum number of events per device to display in the PCA results window.Filtering unrelated events to find probable cause Field Description Filter using global relationships Select this option to control whether the built-in global relationships are used to determine probable cause. Advanced By Score . By default.

drag the sliding pointer to set the time window before or after the timestamp of the primary event. This filter removes all events from the probable cause event list that are not associated with the device that you specify. This filter adds all the events that are associated with the group that you specify and click Filter on the Probable Cause Events section. To filter by group 1 Click No Filter next to the Group field. ■ Select Tree from the drop-down list to display the hierarchical group view. 3 Click Apply.Filtering unrelated events to find probable cause 2 From the Sliding bar. click on the filter displayed. select the desired level for the events that you want to filter and display. ■ Select Flat List from the drop-down list to list all the available groups. 2 From the Group Filter dialog box. select the group and click Apply. These user-defined filters can be configured in the Probable Cause Analysis Events section. Enabling user-defined filters User-defined filters limit the events to be considered as probable cause events based on criteria that you define. If no name is specified in the Device field. click on X next to the enabled group filter. then events for all devices will be displayed. ■ To edit the group filter. Click Filter on the Probable Cause Events section. ■ To remove the group filter. To filter by events 1 In the Events Filter list. To filter by device name 1 In the Device field enter the name of the device to see the associated events. You may enable one or more of these filters at the same time. Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 173 . This enables you to filter out the unrelated events.

■ The Create Knowledge Pattern screen is displayed. The available conditions will change based on the event that you have selected. 2 In the Event list. 4 Select the instance or instances for which you want the knowledge pattern to apply: ■ all instances in group — allows you to define the knowledge pattern for all instances of a selected group ■ only instance monitor_name —allows you to define the knowledge pattern for the selected instance of the selected monitor ■ all instances of monitor_name —allows you to define the knowledge pattern for all instances of the selected monitor 5 If required. Saving recurring conditions as a known probable cause When you run a probable cause analysis on an event and find a pattern which you want to reuse in future. 6 In the Name field. BMC ProactiveNet immediately applies this pattern to similar conditions and does not run probable cause analysis. 3 Click Create Knowledge Pattern. enter the text that you want displayed in the Probable Cause Analysis for Selected Event dialog box when these conditions occur for the instances that you have selected. select the event that you want to use for your knowledge pattern. To create a knowledge pattern 1 Access the Probable Cause Analysis For Selected Event dialog box. Once a knowledge pattern is available.Saving recurring conditions as a known probable cause This filter adds all events of the specified level from the probable cause event list that are associated with the level that you specify. select the check box or check boxes to add further conditions to the knowledge pattern. The levels can be modified in the preference page. ■ For example. if you created a knowledge pattern for a scenario where there is an event on Application Availability and Ping Availability to the same device 174 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . capture it by creating a knowledge pattern.

If you want to perform probable cause analysis on all the events in the environment. ■ Continuing the example from List item. After you have created one or more knowledge patterns. you can access an edit or delete dialog box for modifying or deleting your knowledge patterns. Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 175 . This text would appear on the screen when the server is not responding to ping requests and probable cause analysis is initiated for the PING AVAILABILITY event. enter details for the probable cause knowledge pattern. Knowledge patterns are saved in the database. probable cause analysis must be performed on the central BMC ProactiveNet Server.Probable cause analysis in a scalable deployment environment where the application is running you might name it Application Server Not Available. on page 174. 7 In the Description field. such as Reboot server. 8 Click Save. Probable cause analysis in a scalable deployment environment In a scalable deployment environment events are propagated from the local BMC ProactiveNet servers to a central BMC ProactiveNet Server. you could enter the action that an operator should take if this knowledge pattern is encountered.

This causes the propagated intelligent events to be treated as external events. 176 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . This data loss causes probable cause analysis on the master BMC ProactiveNet Server to lose accuracy because no data correlation is available on the master BMC ProactiveNet Server.Probable cause analysis in a scalable deployment environment Figure 7 on page 176 illustrates how events are propagated in a scalable environment. Figure 7: Event propagation in a scalable environment Limitations of probable cause analysis in a scalable environment Data for the intelligent events on the local servers is not propagated to the master BMC ProactiveNet Server.

Limitations of probable cause analysis in a virtual environment By default. When probable cause analysis is requested for a VMotion event. ESX host and VM relationships imported from the BMC Atrium CMDB cannot be used in probable cause analysis unless monitors of the type that are included in VirtualSystem Attribute set are added to these devices. see Event information used in probable cause analysis on page 435 Chapter 3 Determining the probable cause for an event 177 . BMC ProactiveNet takes into account the issues with all the virtual machines running on that host. If you add monitor instances of the type that are part of the VirtualSystem Attribute Set to the devices imported from he BMC Atrium CMDB. How probable cause analysis handles VMotion events In addition to considering system resource events. probable cause analysis also displays relevant virtual machine migration events for the host of the event for which probable cause analysis is requested. as well as issues with the ESX host server itself. if that event is on the virtual machine or ESX host. When probable cause analysis is requested for a system resource-related event on an ESX host or a virtual machine. BMC ProactiveNet displays all the system resource issues on the VMWare ESX Host from where the VM is moved.Probable cause analysis in a virtual environment Probable cause analysis in a virtual environment BMC Proactivenet handles probable cause analysis differently for system resource issues on VMware ESX hosts or virtual machines. probable cause analysis will leverage the ESX host and/ or the virtual machine relationship between these devices. probable cause analysis in a virtual environment is confined to VMWare metrics. For a list of monitors related to VMware.

Probable cause analysis in a virtual environment 178 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Along with the escalation policy.4 Event administration Overview Event administration includes the following tasks: ■ Defining threshold values that determine when events are generated ■ Filtering the event rule list ■ Defining and updating basic. the escalation actions are removed from the event rule and consequently are not triggered by the event. You can also use an AlarmPoint integration to handle event Chapter 4 Event administration 179 . you can use the event management escalation policy available through the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Console (see the BMC Software ProactiveNet Administrator Guide for information on the event management policies). A specified number of event recurrences can also trigger escalation of an event. and other event types ■ Eliminating duplicate events and limiting the number of events that are generated and sent ■ Using variables to compose and customize event text to be incorporated into email messages For upgrade users The BMC ProactiveNet event escalation feature has been deprecated in this release. you can create a notification policy to alert users of changes to an event’s severity level. Instead of the BMC ProactiveNet escalation feature. An escalation policy raises or lowers the priority level of an event after a specified period of time. advanced. If you have created an event rule with an associated escalation action. then after you upgrade.

if the total CPU utilization of Solaris System is above 80%. In general. For example. Support for the TelAlert product is discontinued. Accessing the event administration options Access the event administration options through the BMC ProactiveNet Operations console by selecting Options => Administration from the top menu bar to display the Administration tab. Understanding event thresholds Events are generated when Event Threshold values are exceeded. 180 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Understanding event thresholds escalations. See Managing the AlarmPoint integration on page 216 for general guidelines. Table 45: Types of event thresholds Threshold type Absolute threshold Description Absolute thresholds represent an absolute value above or below which an event is generated. you can specify an Absolute threshold of 80% for this attribute. Absolute thresholds are better suited for attributes that change status. The features are listed on the Administration tab under the Event Administration heading. The approach BMC ProactiveNet takes to detect abnormal behavior is different from the traditional threshold approach. In this case. This requires precise knowledge of the environment and is not very scalable in terms of administration. The traditional approach requires the definition of hard thresholds that need to be customized for each instance. it may result in performance issues. Choose the corresponding Edit button to access detailed information about each option. an absolute threshold is specified for attributes that have common accepted values beyond which performance is known to degrade. Paging capability is no longer supported. Table 45 on page 180 describes the types of event thresholds that BMC ProactiveNet offers.

It is used to set the minimum deviation from the high and low baseline established by BMC ProactiveNet for a monitor whose overall baseline is considered too low. Signature thresholds are better suited for attributes that degrade over time. In case no signature threshold is enabled by the user. servers. Because of this. Abnormalities are used in Probable cause analysis. Abnormality Event threshold BMC ProactiveNet Abnormality thresholds operate in the same way that Signature thresholds work. it is a much more scalable approach in managing thresholds Signature thresholds focus on performance metrics such as response time. WANs. LANs. and are automatically closed when the generating condition no longer exists. ■ Predefined Abnormality Event thresholds cannot be removed or cleared for any of the attributes. baselines are not generated and events are not triggered for those attributes. Chapter 4 Event administration 181 .Understanding event thresholds Threshold type Signature threshold Description Signature thresholds are dynamic thresholds that use the baseline as the threshold. utilization. However. reporting readings above or below the baseline. Users do NOT need to set a threshold value. This is important because users do “not” need to do anything in order to start seeing the value of the abnormalities in context of Probable cause analysis correlation. Signature thresholds allow you to control the number of events generated by a monitor. BMC ProactiveNet uses the default values to generate events. they generate abnormality events utilized by Probable cause Analysis correlation rather than generate events. Abnormality thresholds are automatically set (out of the box) on all metrics. and network application services. ■ If the abnormality threshold is suppressed for any of the attributes. errors for network devices. as the baseline is autogenerated. generally do not generate events. ■ To disable the abnormality threshold select Suppress event and click Apply in Advanced option.

Hourly interval ranges represent a smaller number of data points and will have a tighter range. and is repeated for each 182 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . alerting. ■ They facilitate faster detection of potential problems. For example. A higher weight is given to the latest data being factored into the baseline average. To track the anomalies in behavior for different attribute types different patterns are required. Intelligent thresholds provide the following benefits: ■ They reduce the aggravation to manually set and maintain hundreds of absolute thresholds. This allows you to fix problems proactively.Each hour of the day has a high or low value that is tracked. This eliminates the problem of over. This tracks the pattern for that metric on an hourly basis. Related Topics Setting event thresholds on page 184 Baselines The baseline is the expected normal operating range for a metric or attribute of a monitor. or under. ■ They reduce false events to a large extent. by guessing what the threshold should be for each attribute and device at any time or day of week. These help to alleviate issues with Absolute values that are set too low for the normal operating environment. The baseline is calculated by collecting the values for a monitor’s attributes and metrics over a specified time period and establishing a low baseline value (consisting of the 10th percentile of all the values for a given time period) and a high baseline value (consisting of the 90th percentile of all the values for a given time period). taking a weighted average of these values over time. for attributes that change frequently. a pattern captured at hourly intervals may be best. which is best suited for capturing frequent changes.Understanding event thresholds Threshold type Intelligent threshold Description Signature and Absolute Thresholds can be combined to create an Intelligent Threshold that will generate events when a metric value falls outside its baseline and it is above its Absolute Threshold. The accuracy of the baseline improves over time. BMC ProactiveNet captures the following baseline patterns: ■ Hourly baseline .

and Sunday.Saturday ■ Seasonal baseline . A weekly baseline is initialized after the monitor instance is created and 168 hours of data collection has occurred. Auto-baseline analysis engine automatically detects abnormality in any monitor instance attribute and determines the best baseline to be used depending on the behavior of the monitor instance. A daily baseline is initialized after the monitor instance is created and 24 hours of data collection has occurred. Weekly. causing unnecessary abnormalities. All these ■ Weekend Pattern . Auto-baseline Out of the box thresholds are set to use Hourly. These days. By default auto-baseline feature is enabled for new customers.A high or low value is derived from the moving average of each consecutive day. this works well in majority of the cases. Chapter 4 Event administration 183 .Baseline is calculated separately for pre-determined days when your business experiences out of the ordinary workloads or other special behavior.Understanding event thresholds day. artificially will raise or lower the baseline. but it might be more appropriate to use one specific baseline type in order to catch the exceptional behavior.Baseline is calculated daily from Monday to Friday. if calculated into the baseline. but the user has to set threshold with auto-baseline option manually. ■ Weekday Pattern . or All baselines. out of the box thresholds will have auto-baseline option set. How abnormalities are generated Abnormalities are generated when the data values from a monitor fall outside of the normal baseline range for a statistically significant number of points within the sample window specified in the signature threshold. days share the same 24-hour baseline. An hourly baseline is initialized after the monitor instance is created and 24 hours of data collection has occurred. For upgrade users the Auto-baseline feature is enabled.Baseline is calculated separately for the weekend . These two days share the same 24-hour baseline. Daily. This high or low range is taken from a larger number of data values and consequently will be a wider range than the hourly. ■ Daily baseline .

signature. select any one of the following tabs: ■ Group Matrix ■ Device Matrix 2 Click the Device link of the device name to view the list of monitors under the device. 3 From the Tools list. the algorithm will still automatically wait for five data points to come in. For example. By default. which records which baseline was exceeded for a significant number of points (helping determine the severity of the abnormality). it is better to use lower polling rates for monitors.Understanding event thresholds The abnormalities generated have a severity field. For example. the abnormality will be closed. To set event thresholds 1 On the Event Summary tab. select the threshold to create based on the type of threshold (absolute. By default. Generally. BMC ProactiveNet will generate abnormalities for above baseline conditions. according to the type of threshold that you want to define. 184 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 25 minutes must pass before an abnormality is generated. A minimum of five data points are required. For this reason. even if no explicit global or instance signature threshold is set. If the sample window is set too small (sample window is set in time duration). if no signature threshold is set. and abnormalities that exceed Daily baseline are more serious in nature than ones that exceed Hourly baseline. Abnormalities are closed when the number of data points exceeded in the last window sample size is not considered significant. or abnormality) and the level of coverage (either global for all instances or for a particular monitor instance or event). if you set a sample window to 10 minutes on a specific monitor attribute but the polling rate of that monitor is 5 minutes. if six out of seven data points out of range are statistically significant. then as soon as the last exceeded points drop to five out of seven points. Setting event thresholds Use the following procedure to set event thresholds. abnormalities are still generated. abnormalities that exceed Weekly baseline are more serious in nature than ones that exceed Daily baseline.

The same duration is required to close an event.Understanding event thresholds Note Alternatively. Click the Edit link beside Intelligent Event Thresholds and then click Edit for the relevant monitor type and threshold type. Major. <. 4 Set threshold values for the relevant attributes using the parameters displayed on the Edit Thresholds screen. This is available only for the Absolute Global and Instance Thresholds. Parameters specific to absolute thresholds Comparison This is a reference point for comparison of the actual measurements with the defined threshold values. For example: ■ Above checked . as summarized in Table 46 on page 185. you can reach the threshold setting through the Options => Administration tab. Severity of the event created—Minor. This range does not include the threshold.An event is generated if data is continually lesser than the threshold for the specified duration. The range of values for which events are triggered. For example.An event is generated if data is continually greater than the threshold for the specified duration. if you select the >= operator for an attribute and set the threshold value to 90%. or Critical (not relevant for Abnormality thresholds) The duration (in minutes) of delay from when the threshold is violated to when an event is generated. To set Abnormality Event thresholds. Most application classes have 1–2 parameters that are KPIs for the application. >= or <=. ==. ■ Below checked . Table 46: Parameters for thresholds Item Enabled KPI Attribute Severity Duration Description Allows you to select an attribute to set its threshold value Parameter value represents a key performance indicator for the application class. events are generated when the threshold value is greater than or equal to 90%. The supported operators for comparison are >. starting with the first data point where threshold is no longer violated. click Edit link beside Abnormality Events. Threshold Chapter 4 Event administration 185 . Name of the monitored attribute to which the threshold setting applies.

186 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Understanding event thresholds Item Outside Baseline Description The baseline to associate with the threshold. response time may be higher during peak time. When the threshold field is set. Minimum Sampling WindowStep 4. For example. Other options are Hourly. Usually.b on page 187 Define minimum window of time to keep raw data points that will be considered for intelligent threshold computation.an event is generated accordingly. Clear this option if you do not want BMC ProactiveNet to automatically close the triggered event. Hourly and Daily and All Baselines. if baseline low value is 40. This is useful to filter out insignificant abnormalities.%. For example. associating the response time with appropriate baseline will cover any false event. and so on). Absolute DeviationStep 4. Weekly. Weekly. and deviation is set to 2. Predict Auto Close Select this option to generate predictive events. see Viewing predictive events on page 92. This is useful for events that have a very short duration. For more information see Auto-baseline on page 183. Hourly and Daily and All Baselines.a on page 187 ThresholdStep 4. The default value for Absolute deviation is 5 units. then a signature event will be generated when the average of all data values inside the threshold duration goes above 102 or below 38. Daily. This helps to reduce false events associated with latest trends. bytes. Data points outside this range are usually discarded. If you select Auto-baseline on page 183 an event is generated accordingly. For more information.Above the High baseline ■ Below Low . a signature event is generated if the data values go outside the baseline range. it additionally requires the data to be above or below the threshold value. If there is on page 187 a small change in baseline that is not significant for reporting purposes.b Deviation is a way of introducing tolerance into the baseline values.Below the Low baseline ■ Auto-baseline . In this case. baseline high value is 100. which must be met for the Signature Event to be generated. The threshold field is used as an additional constraint. milliseconds. when it returns to normal state. The deviation value is additive (not multiplicative) and is given in the same units being measured by the particular monitor attribute (that is #. deviation can be set to ignore this small change. Parameters for signature or abnormality thresholds Above or Below Reference point for the following parameters: ■ Above High . Other options are Hourly. Daily.

except that the actual value of the deviation is expressed in terms of a percent of the baseline value (rather than an absolute value). choose Edit next to the Event Rules entry under the Event Administration heading on the Administration tab. and Percentage Deviation are additional filters for triggering events.a on page 187 1 Advanced parameter 2 Threshold. Click the Advanced link to set thresholds with minimum sampling window. Chapter 4 Event administration 187 . threshold. (Abnormality events only) If suppress event is enabled baselines projection and abnormality detection will not happen for that specific attribute. absolute deviation.The default value for percentage deviation is 5%. To display the Event Rule Administration page. Related Topics Understanding event thresholds on page 180 Note Managing event rules Event rules define the set of actions that can be performed when an event occurs. you must be assigned Allow Event Rule Management privileges by the BMC ProactiveNet administrator.Managing event rules Item Percentage DeviationStep 4. The Event Rule Administration page displays the list of event rules. and then click Apply. and percentage deviation.b on page 187 Description Percent Deviation has the same meaning as the existing deviation field. Suppress Event Step 4. Depending on your privileges. To define event rules. you can see your event rules or. All set values must be exceeded to trigger an event. You perform event rule management from the Event Rule Administration page. you can view all event rules. as an administrator. This option is applicable only for Signature and Abnormality Event thresholds. Absolute Deviation. 5 Select the Enabled check boxes for all relevant attributes. No event is generated if a single value is exceeded.

Top Processes by Memory Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) Linux System Swap Space Used DD_Command: Top Processes-Mem(Linux) Oracle .Top Processes by Memory Included Monitors Included Attributes Solaris System Swap Space Used 188 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Managing event rules Default event rules A group of default event rules are provided out-of-the-box. Table 47: Attributes of default event rules Event rule JVM Monitor Included Attributes Selected Action(s) JVM/Thread Count.Top IPs by Traffic Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) SolarisTM TCP Bytes Received.Top Processes by CPU Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) Linux System Total CPU Utilization DD_Command: Top Processes-CPU(Linux) Linux . When any one of the threshold values are exceeded. an event is triggered. Oracle Query CPU Usage by Sessions. Response Time DD_Command: Top SQL-DiskReads(Oracle) Solaris .Top SQL Statements Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) Solaris .Top Processes by CPU Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) Solaris System Total CPU Utilization DD_Command: Top Processes-CPU(Solaris) Solaris . Bytes Sent DD_Command: Top IP Traffic Oracle Intelliscope. The default event rules all apply to the 00:00 hours to 00:00 hours of day range and include all days of the week. Process CPU time Diagnostics/Remote Actions: JVM Detail Diagnostics Default event rule Linux . Database Free Space.

Top Processes by CPU Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) Windows System System CPU Utilization.Top Processes by Memory Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) Windows System Swap space used DD_Command: Top Processes-Mem(Windows) Chapter 4 Event administration 189 . EJB Avg Method Response Time. EJB Activates. EJB Activates.Active Info Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) WebSphere . or 8.Top IPs by Traffic Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) Windows TCP Total Segments DD_Command: Top IP Traffic Windows .Managing event rules Event rule Selected Action(s) WebLogic . Web App Response Time DD_Command: TopEJBs-WebSphere WebSphere Thread Pool Maxed. 7. Web App Response Time DD_Command: TopServlet(WebSphere) Web URL Total Response Time DD_Command: Get URL Windows .Get Page Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) Default event rule DD_Command: Top Processes-Mem(Solaris) WebLogic Server 6.0. EJB Total Method Calls. Total CPU Utilization. EJB Avg Method Response Time. Execute Queue Usage DD_Command: ActiveInfo-WebLogic WebSphere Thread Pool Maxed. EJB Total Method Calls.1.Top Servlets Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) Web URL . User CPU Utilization DD_Command: Top Processes-CPU(Windows) Windows . EJB Passivates.1 JVM Memory Used. EJB Passivates.Top EJBs Included Monitors Included Attributes Selected Action(s) WebSphere .

Consequently all event rules that you have permission to view are displayed. Filtering the event rule list The Action Type. choose values from among the following filter criteria described in Table 48 on page 190. you can filter the list according to the various criteria for managing event rules. Table 48: Event rule filtering criteria Fields Action Type Options List containing values indicating the actions that you can associate with an event. To perform the filtering action 1 On the Event Rule Administration page.Managing event rules Event rule Default event rule a The default event rule will not be created if the administrator E-Mail ID is not provided during server installation. To focus on specific categories of event rules. and Status lists display the No Filter value by default. Rule Type. The remaining filtering fields are left blank. These actions include: ■ No Filter ■ E-Mail ■ SNMP Trap ■ Run Server Command ■ Remote Actions/Diagnostics ■ E-Mail Group ■ RSD Incident ■ BEM event ■ AO event 190 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . You can specify one or more filter criteria.

Managing event rules Fields Groups/Services Options Lists the available groups and/or services that you associate with the event. After making your selection. Text box where you can enter a full or partial string to retrieve matching event names List that contains the available rule types. click Apply. and for external events triggered by event adapters. and/or assigned) filter. for external device-associated events. Note Event rule types Event rules are designated by one of the following types described in the following table. you can choose to select an intelligent event type. close. event. an external event type. Valid values are ■ No Filter ■ Basic ■ Advanced Rule Name Rule Type Status List of the event status values: ■ No Filter ■ Enable ■ Disable Email groups associated with event rules cannot be filtered. Click No Filter to open the Groups/Services Filter dialog box. If you select an intelligent event type only. or both (the default). When distinguishing a basic event rule type. It is often used to trigger email notifications. and predictive event filter options. and abnormality. you can specify the full range of monitor type. You can choose to include or exclude selected groups or services. Table 49: Event rule types Type Basic Description This rule type is used to trigger the full range of actions for BMC ProactiveNet intelligent events. If you select an external event. Chapter 4 Event administration 191 . then you can specify only the severity level and event state (open. acknowledged.

(See BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide for a discussion of event management policies which you can access from the Event Management Policies tab of the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Console.Managing event rules Type Advanced Description This rule type is used to trigger the full range of actions for ProactiveNet intelligent events. close. complete or modify the text boxes and selections listed in the following table: Table 50: Fields on the Add Event Rule (Page 1/3) window Item Event Rule Name Description Description Required. you can specify monitor types and instances. 2 Click Add to display the Add Event Rule (Page 1/3) window. using an event management notification policy with detailed event selector criteria might be the preferred choice. click Edit next to the Event Rules entry to display the Event Rule Administration page. an event state filter notification for the event statuses open. 3 On the Add Event Rule (Page 1/3) screen. Adding a basic event rule type Add a basic event rule type to trigger email notifications for monitored events and external events on systems on which a BMC ProactiveNet device has been defined. To add a basic event rule 1 On the Administration tab. Generally speaking. Event rules or event management policies Event rules can trigger actions that overlap with actions that event management policies can also trigger. acknowledge. event rules are easier to configure and execute than event management policies. It is often used to trigger diagnostic and remote actions. Nevertheless. When distinguishing an advanced rule type. and an abnormality event filter. if you are building an advanced rule type that uses multiple event slot values. not external events.) For example. an event rule can trigger an email notification in much the same way as an event management notification policy can. together with their attributes. and assigned. Alphanumeric string that describes the name of the event Description of the event 192 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Managing event rules Item Time Range/Schedule Description You can select either the Time Range or the Schedule option. To include 24 hours. For detailed steps. Schedule: Click New to create a new schedule or Edit to edit an existing schedule from the list. ■ No Filter: Applies event rule to all included monitors irrespective of the group they belong to. Use hierarchy on or off to switch over to the corresponding view type. 4 Click Next to display the Add Event Rule (Page 2/3): Select Event/Monitor/ Severity Information page. see Managing schedules on page 410 Temporarily disable Event Rule Event Rule Type Groups Filter ■ No Filter/Include Selected Groups/Exclude Selected Groups Disables the event from being applied immediately Click Basic Event Rule. Use the arrows to move the selected groups. If you choose No Filter. ■ Include Selected Groups: Applies the event rule to the selected group ■ Exclude Selected Groups: Does not apply the event rule to the selected group. Use an event management policy to trigger nondevice-associated events exclusively. select “00:00”-”00:00”.Select this option to include the day of the week. Time Range: ■ Time of Day Range .Select the time range in days. ■ Days of Week . I f you choose either the Include Selected Groups or Exclude Selected Groups option. ■ Available Groups ■ Selected Groups Hierarchy Expand or collapse the groups. then only device-associated events trigger the event rule. then both device-associated and nondeviceassociated events can trigger the event rule. Complete the options listed in the following table: Chapter 4 Event administration 193 . See the Event Policy tab of the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Console.

Up. the following filters are disabled: ■ Monitor Type filter options ■ Relationship direction Any. Run Agent Diagnostic actions. If you have an existing basic event rule with external events. Up.Managing event rules Table 51: Event. then the event rule is upgraded and mapped to a basic event rule with the Intelligent Events option selected and the External Events option unchecked. Close. then the event rule is upgraded and mapped to a basic event rule with the External Events option selected and the Intelligent Events unchecked. By default. or Down) ■ Event states Open. apply only to Intelligent Events. ■ External Events: External events refer to device-associated events and events received from external event adapters. Note for upgrade users: If you have an existing basic event rule without external events. remote actions apply only to device-associated events. You can select one or both options. both options are selected. monitor. and severity options of event rules on the Add Event Rule (Page 2/3): Select Event/Monitor/Severity Information window Options Event Type Filter ■ Intelligent Events ■ External Events ■ Intelligent Events: These are internal events: BMC ProactiveNet events that are generated when you have data collection and monitoring enabled on the BMC ProactiveNet system. or Down options of the event severity level ■ Abnormality and Predictive event filters For External Events. When you select both Intelligent Events and External Events options. Acknowledge. BMC ProactiveNet Operations Manager (POM) users do not see Intelligent Events. however. Monitor Type Filter Description 194 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . and Assigned Upon selecting both Intelligent Events and External Events options. then you enable the filter options that apply to both options: ■ Event severity filter (but not the relationship direction Any.

The event severity levels are: ■ Info ■ Warning ■ Minor ■ Major ■ Critical ■ Info-Warning ■ Minor-Major ■ Major-Critical ■ Info-Warning-Minor ■ Warning-Minor-Major ■ Minor-Major-Critical ■ Info-Warning-Minor-Major-Critical Up Down Open Close Triggers event rule every time the new severity is higher than the old severity Triggers event rule every time the new severity is lower than the old severity Triggers event rule every time a new event is opened Triggers event rule every time an event is closed Chapter 4 Event administration 195 . this will enable all available monitors. if no specific monitors are needed. Severity/State Filter Event tab Any Triggers event rule for any severity level that matches the specified severity.Managing event rules Options No Monitor Type Filter/Select Monitor Types Description ■ Select No Monitor Type Filter. ■ Select Monitor Type to assign the type of filter by choosing from the Available Monitor Types pane and moving them to the Selected Monitor Types pane. By default.

Description Lists the actions that you have associated with the event after clicking the Add button corresponding to the action 196 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Valid values are ■ Minor ■ Major ■ Critical ■ Minor-Major ■ Major-Critical ■ Minor-Major-Critical Open Close Acknowledge Assigned Triggers an event rule each time a predicted event is opened Triggers an event rule each time a predicted event is closed Triggers an event rule each time a predicted event is acknowledged Triggers an event rule each time a predicted event is assigned 5 Click Next to display the Add Event Rule (Page 3/3): Action Information for Event Rule complete the options listed in the following table: Table 52: Action options of event rules on the Add Event Rule (Page 3/3): Action Information for Event Rule window Options Actions to Perform Send Email action From Your e-mail address. Use this option to filter abnormal events that have abnormality score from the list.Managing event rules Options Acknowledge Assigned Abnormality tab Open Close Abnormality Score >= Predictive tab Select Predicted Severity Description Triggers event rule every time an event is acknowledged Triggers the event rule each time an event is assigned Triggers event rule every time when a new abnormality is opened. Specifies the severity level of the predicted event. Triggers event rule every time when an abnormality is closed.

Chapter 4 Event administration 197 . For detailed information on the run command. Click Add to include a Send Email action.Managing event rules Options To Message Format Description Recipient e-mail address. Send SNMP Trap action SNMP Host (Name/IP) To send events to a management system that accepts standard SNMP traps. If you do not enter the user name. Note: To add an AlarmPoint notification for a data-only implementation. Enter the pw_AlarmPoint . E-mail will be sent to the configured user. For detailed information see. the event is sent to the default user. Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through SNMP traps on page 205. enter the SNMP host name or IP address. and click Add. See also Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through Diagnostic Commands on the BMC ProactiveNet Server on page 216. create an event rule using the AlarmPoint command. see To create or edit an E-Mail Group on page 205 Customizes the settings for all email alerts. add a preconfigured command to an event rule using the Agent Diagnostics Command. and click Add. see Customizing event text on page 245. Run Command on Proactive Server action Path Include the file path where you wish to run specified executables or scripts and execute an application or script when an event occurs. For more information. see Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through Run Command on Server on page 215. For detailed steps.u userName in the Path field. Then click Add. See also Managing the AlarmPoint integration on page 216. Run Agent Diagnostic actions apply to intelligent events. Then choose the process to inquire about from the list. Select one of the following: ■ Full Page ASCII ■ One-line Summary ASCII ■ Full Page HTML/GIF E-Mail Group Event Text Customization Option to create E-mail groups. Run Agent Diagnostics For systems running BMC ProactiveNet agents.

and click Add. click Done to save the event rule type and its attributes. attribute-level events. Sends an event to BMC Atrium Orchestrator. Integrate with BMC Remedy Service Desk. Integration configuration for event actions (Remedy Service Desk) on page 218. Send event to BMC Atrium Orchestrator Integrate with BladeLogic Execute Blade Action Runs the snapshot on BladeLogic automatically. The triggering of action happens on any specified event when the event rule is satisfied even when the other slots or information are changed.Integration configuration for event actions (BEM) on page 229. on monitored. 6 After adding actions to the event. Advanced rule types apply only to intelligent events. For more information see “Integrating with BMC BladeLogic” on page 419. For more information see. The event must be mapped to the device through a device alias. where the device is the target system on which the remote action is executed. create and register a userdefined command to associate with the event rule. The device must have its authentication credentials defined so that the remote action can access the device. Then choose the process to inquire about from the list. ■ The newly created event rule is displayed in the event rule list of the Event Rule Administration page. For detailed information see. For more information see. Managing BMC ProactiveNet events BMC Atrium Orchestrator (formerly known as BMC Run Book Automation) on page 237. See also Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through Diagnostic Commands on the BMC ProactiveNet Server on page 216. Remote actions are triggered by device-associated events. 198 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . including remote and diagnostic actions.Managing event rules Options Run Remote Actions/Diagnostics Description For systems without BMC ProactiveNet agents. Do not use this action for any other event rule apart from DefaultRule-BladeEvent. Send event to BMC Event Manager Sends an event to BMC Event Manager (BEM). Note Adding an advanced rule type Add an advanced event rule type to trigger actions. BMC Event Manager and BMC Atrium Orchestrator actions Create incident in BMC Remedy Service Desk Creates an AR system request in BMC Remedy Service Desk (BRSD).

and click Next. a In the Monitor Type Filter dialog box. 4 Alternatively. The corresponding attributes are displayed. a Select one or more monitor types. 2 Click Next to display the Add Advanced Rule (Page 2/3): Select Attribute Information page. You can select and add monitor types and attributes together with monitor instances and attributes. The monitor instances and respective attributes are displayed. The attributes are displayed in the Selected Attributes table. and then click Apply. Instance. The instances and attributes are displayed in the Selected Attributes table. Be sure to select the Advanced Rule option under Event Rule Types. The Attribute. The default is abnormality. 5 In the Selected Attributes table. b Select one or more instances and attributes.Managing event rules To add an advanced rule 1 Complete steps 1 through 3 as described under To add a basic event rule on page 192. specify a severity level for each attribute. and click Add. and click Add to display the Monitor Type Filter dialog box. You can choose from the following severity levels: ■ Abnormality ■ Predictive Minor ■ Predictive Major ■ Predictive Critical Note Chapter 4 Event administration 199 . b Select one or more of the corresponding attributes. or Severity Filter selections are based on the filter options you chose to include or exclude on Page 1/3. to include specific instances of a monitor. select Monitor Type and Attribute under Attribute/Instance/Severity Filter. 3 To include all instances of a particular monitor type. select the monitor type or types. select Monitor Instance and Attribute and click Add to display the Instance Selector window.

12 Click Done to save the event rule type and its attributes. 7 Select which attributes you wish to associate with the event. the selected attributes remain the same because they are based on the original filter selection. (You can click Delete to remove selected attributes. click Edit next to the corresponding rule in the event rule list of the Event Rule Administration page. The procedures are the same as for adding an event rule. specify a value. In the Event Rule wizard.Managing event rules ■ Minor ■ Major ■ Critical 6 Indicate whether you want to include severity levels greater than the selected one by selecting the and higher option. you can edit any field except for the event rule type. select one or more of the following options: ■ Open to trigger the event rule every time a new event or event is opened ■ Close to trigger the event rule every time an event or event is closed ■ Acknowledge to trigger this event rule every time an event is acknowledged ■ Assigned to trigger this event rule every time an event is assigned 9 To set a filter for abnormality events. If you modify the filter selection later. 200 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 8 Under Event State Filter. Editing a basic or an advanced rule To edit any of the rule types. or no filter under Abnormality Score Filter. 10 Click Next to display the Add Event Rule (Page 3/3): Action Information 11 Complete the options listed in Table 52 on page 196.) Note The selections that you make in the Selected Attributes table are based on the current filter selection.

To select all the event rules click Select All. 4 Click Apply to update the action. 3 Click OK in the confirmation screen. would be removed from the event rule definition. To update event action 1 On the Event Rule Administration window. you can add. modify or delete any actions of the event rule. For example. Any updates to an event automatically trigger corresponding notification events. then any Run Agent Diagnostic actions. To delete an event rule 1 On the Event Rule Administration screen. The Update Action screen appears. or of both types would have on actions that are already assigned to the event rule. Updating event actions Through the Update Action tab.Managing event rules WARNING When editing an existing basic event rule. 2 Click the Delete tab. select the event rule which requires changes. By default. BMC ProactiveNet deletes the event rule and refreshes the Event Rule Administration window. if you edit a rule that originally applied to both external and intelligent event types so that now it applies to external events only. 3 Select the desired Action Type to update action. which apply to intelligent events only. the Update Action tab is disabled. Chapter 4 Event administration 201 . Deleting an event rule The deletion action removes the event rule and its related actions from the BMC ProactiveNet server. 2 Click Update Action. intelligent event type. select the corresponding check box under the Select column to delete an event rule. you need to determine the impact that the selection of an external event type.

The status of the selected event rule gets changed. Enabling event rule would re-instantiate all the actions. send events to BEM and so on. click Disable.Managing event rules Enabling and disabling event rules Event rules are associated with different actions such as sending an email.Description of the event ■ <Event ID>: Unique ID of the event associated with the event. that is also a new event. accompanied by it's own event ID. select the corresponding check box under the Select column to enable or disable the event rule. 3 Click OK in the confirmation screen. They are as follows: ■ <rule_name>: Name of the event rule ■ <time_stamp>: Time when the event occurred ■ <Device_Name>: Name of the device hosting the monitor from where the event originated ■ <Severity>: Severity associated with the event ■ <Status>: Current status of the event ■ <Description> . To enable or disable an existing event rule 1 On the Event Rule Administration screen. run scripts on remote target. Supplying arguments to a server command By default. the server passes nine arguments to the script or program that is executed as a result of an event action launch. if an event transitions from high to critical. 2 Click the relevant option: ■ To enable an event rule. click Enable. 202 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . ■ To disable an event rule. When the event closes. For example. that is a new event. You can suppress these actions by disabling the entire event rule. Event ID is different for each new event that affects the state of the event.

e. ■ <Source Agent IP>: IP address of the device hosting the BMC ProactiveNet Agent.Managing event rules ■ < Intelligent Event ID>: Unique ID of the intelligent event. see /usr/pw/pronto/bin/ generic_script. Note the use of the 'flags' parameter: /usr/pw/pronto/usr_apps/bin/notifycce. the source agent will always be the IP Address of machine hosting the BMC ProactiveNet Server. Here’s an example of passing 'value1' and 'value2' into the event script.csh&flags=value1&flags=value2 Separating the values using the ampersand and the term flags (&flags) is optional. Note Chapter 4 Event administration 203 . For an example of a script that uses these parameters.pl.The default arguments are passed in the order given above. Intelligent Event ID remains constant for the duration of the intelligent event.csh rule_name time_stamp device_name severity status description eventId AlarmId DeviceID Source_AgentIP Additional user arguments can be passed into the event scripts by appending them to the script name. ■ <Device IP>: IP address of the device hosting the monitor from where the event originated. User-defined arguments are passed first to the server. until it closes. The scripts can simply ignore these arguments if they are not needed. When additional user arguments are specified. Here’s an example: /usr/pw/pronto/usr_apps/bin/notify.csh value1 value2 rule_name time_stamp device_name severity status description eventId AlarmId Note Default arguments are passed into the script. Device IP is a string denoting the 4 octets of the device IP address. followed by the default arguments. they are passed into the script before the default arguments. For event actions triggered by SNMP based monitors. i.. regardless of whether the event scripts intend to use them or not. Here’s an example of a script that was launched with only the default arguments: /usr/pw/pronto/usr_apps/bin/notify.

The workaround is to write the command in a script file and execute the script using Command On Server Action. relevant graphs can be viewed. When setting up event rules. E-mails can be sent in HTML format. HTML provides for enhanced report layout and inclusion of graphs. along with the event graph.host=mail.emailer. and network support HTML e-mails. E-mail notification. The character “+” is used as a keyword internally by the BMC ProactiveNet Server. It is important that your ISP. do not pass “+” character as an argument.smtp. Details of the SMTP Server to be used for email alerts are stored in pronet. You can add. For example.sh’. 204 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The group consisting of email addresses is notified. subject and body of a particular Email Alert can also be customized using Event Text Customization for Individual Event Rules. This may lead to unexpected results. If your e-mail client supports HTML format. Please refrain from editing these without prior impact assessment. Any changes to these entries will impact all mail related BMC ProactiveNet actions (event notification/reports/alerts). BMC ProactiveNet can send event notifications through e-mail when an event is generated. Note Defining email groups An email group is a group of email addresses by which event rule actions.smtp.conf under installDirectory /pw/custom/conf: pronet. modify or delete any e-mail group by accessing the E-Mail Group Administration dialog through the E-Mail Group Administration button on the Event Rule Administration page. you must determine the way in which event notifications will be sent. event e-mails contain the same information as the events viewed from the event Summary page. ProactiveNet Server will execute the command ‘chmod x abc.api.Managing event rules While passing arguments to command on server. is similar to how it would be viewed from the BMC ProactiveNet Operations console. if the Command on Server is specified as 'chmod +x abc. e-mail client.com pronet.sh'. can be sent to an email group.port=25 These entries are dynamically generated.api. which includes the event listing. Similarly. HTML event notifications contain partial GIFs of the event summary detail.emailer. HTML format is preferred if your e-mail client supports it.bmc.

Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Some ISPs do not allow or only allow an image of a certain size to be mailed. In case of notification through HTML e-mail. 5 Click Add to add the E-mail group. you can manage all events in the external environment monitored by BMC ProactiveNet. 6 Click Done to save the E-mail group options. Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through SNMP traps In the BMC ProactiveNet Administration console. Check with your administrator. Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Through the action options of event rules on the Add Event Rule (Page 3/3): Action Information for Event Rule window. The actual time of event generation could be much later. select the appropraite option to specify event notification by SNMP traps. Table 53: SNMP trap options Option Standard Description Works with any management system that accepts standard SNMP traps Chapter 4 Event administration 205 . BMC Event Management. depending on threshold duration and polling interval. and BMC Atrium Orchestrator. 2 On the E-Mail Group Administration page. 4 Select the preferred E-mail type from the list. timestamp included in the subject refers to the time when the threshold was first crossed. Note To create or edit an E-Mail Group 1 On the Event Rule Administration page. This external environment also refers to integrations with the following BMC products: BMC Remedy Service Desk. click the E-Mail Group Administration tab. File size is often limited to 2MB. click Add 3 Type the name of the group and list of e-mail address.

3.2. Applicable to a specific monitor instance162: Crossed signature threshold.1.1.1.1.6.3.2.6.1.5 1. Can either be OPEN or CLOSED event description Device types to which this event is related are AppServer.1.15 206 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .1.2.161: Crossed absolute threshold.6 1. 3 (MAJOR).2.1.1.3287.1.4.6. Remote Agent.1. ifType of Interface.1.6. Applicable to all instances of specified monitor type158: External events that are imported using pw user event or using SNMP trap receiver monitor159: Change Event.6.1.3287.4.2.1.1.10 1.3287.1.1.1. Variable bindings that are sent as part of the BMC ProactiveNet trap are: Table 54: BMC ProactiveNet Trap Variable Bindings OID 1.3.1.3.6.1.1.6.3287.1. FireWall.1.4.1.9 1.4.6.2. By default.4.1.1.3.2. This indicates how closely the event relates to the probable cause of the problem.3. Values are 4 (CRITICAL).1.1.3.2.3287.6. 1 (ABNORMAL) Status of the event. ChangeEvent or Imported Event.1.6. Signature. Other.3287.4.1.1.3287.1.3287.1.3 1.14 1.2. Server.1.1. 2 (MINOR).2.2.6.2. Router.3287.8 1.4 1.4.4.3.2.2.1.6.1.1.1.2.1.3287.13 1. Severity of the event.1 1.4.3.1.1. Abnormality score. DBServer.1.3. Applicable to all instances of specified monitor type157: Crossed signature threshold.1.4.1.3287.3.6.4.1.3287.1.1.3287.3. By default.6. this OID is sent blank.3287. the value is set to 100. Mail Server. 1.1.11 1.12 Description event ID Time when the event was generated Path of the monitor instance that generated the event IP address of the trap-sending BMC ProactiveNet Server IP address of the device that generated the event ifNum of interface.1.1.1.1.1.2.1.3.4.3287.4.1.1. Threshold Type is an integer defined as 156: Crossed absolute threshold.1.1.1. Threshold type that is whether it was Absolute.4.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Option HP OpenView Tivoli CA Unicenter NSM Description Integrates with HP OpenView traps Integrates with TEC and NetView traps Integrates with Computer Associates Unicenter NSM traps BMC ProactiveNet SNMP trap details The BMC ProactiveNet Enterprise OID is 1.1.6.1.4.3. WebServer.1.1.1.1. Applicable to a specific monitor instance event rule name.7 1.1.1.1. Switch.3.1.1.1.

41 and later) In addition to the integration package.17 1.20 1. All BMC ProactiveNet traps are seen under the Pronto Proactive Events category.1. If set to true.1. Device name.3287.1.1.1. HP OpenView integrates BMC ProactiveNet traps into Network Node Manager (NNM).3287.1.1.2.6.6.3.21 1. Instance name.6.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments OID 1.3.3.2.3.1.4.1.3.6.4.3287.3.4.2.1.2.16 1. More Info is an important piece of information for determining the reason for event. HP OpenView integration You can use HP OpenView in conjunction with the BMC ProactiveNet Server and Proactive Remote Agent (UNIX).1.1.3.3287.18 1.1. Note See the BMC ProactiveNet Release Notes for compatible versions of HP OpenView Network Node Manager.1.1. Device description.6.1.6.2.1. event suppression.19 1.1.3287.1. The enhancements include: ■ A link to the Event Details page for individual BMC ProactiveNet events ■ The severity of the event displays on the HP Open Views map ■ Device Level Event Matrix from the node is displayed on the HP OpenView Console Chapter 4 Event administration 207 . MIB for the BMC ProactiveNet Server is also loaded so that you can use the MIB Browser and navigate down BMC ProactiveNet Server MIB.1.4.1. Escalation information.1.23 Description The URL of the page on BMC ProactiveNet web server where detailed information of the event can be found.2. Integration (for version 6.4.1.4.4.22 1.3287.1.1.1.2. It also allows you to launch BMC ProactiveNet from the pop-up menu as well as the menu bar. the event suppresses other BMC ProactiveNet events.1.2.1.1.1. Monitor type.3287.4.1.1.6.1.6.1.1.1.1.3287.1.1.1.3. BMC ProactiveNet provides an enhanced integration package for HP OpenView. The traps are correctly formatted and displayed in the Event Console.

sh or ov.envvars.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Prerequisites ■ The correct version of HP OpenView Network Node Manager must be installed on a supported version of HP-UX. ■ For a status change to be reflected when a BMC ProactiveNet event is received. ■ The default path for ov.envvars. a read-write enabled Open View Map must be opened on the computer where the BMC ProactiveNet Integration package has been installed. restart the Open View User Interface (ovw) to activate the BMC ProactiveNet package. the installer installs the required registration.csh. To install the new integration package 1 Source the Open View environment. 3 Execute .csh. details of the installation log and its availability.sh under UNIX is /opt/OV/ bin. 208 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . A confirmation message to install the package appears. This can be done by sourcing ov. 3 Change directory to ovproactivenet. Click y (yes) The installer tries to determine the path to the browser executable. and icon files in the appropriate directory. The ovproactivenet directory is created. 4 Run the following command: ■ .sh A welcome note displays. The default path for ov. symbol. see the BMC ProactiveNet Release Notes.envvars. This can be done by sourcing ov. executable./instl-proactivenet-ov.sh under UNIX is /opt/OV/bin. To uninstall the new integration package 1 Source the Open View environment.sh or ov. For installation and uninstallation. For supported versions.envvars. If the executable is not found in the default path./uninstall to uninstall BMC ProactiveNet Package for HP Open View.envvars. it is not necessary that Open View Map be open. Once the browser path is determined.tar file. a message is displayed to supply the complete path to the browser. 2 Untar the ovproactivenet. 2 Change directory to ovproactivenet.envvars. 5 After the installation is complete.

Time of the computer where HP OpenView is installed. All BMC ProactiveNet events forwarded to HP OpenView can be viewed under a separate event category called BMC ProactiveNet events in the Event Categories window of NNM. Table 55: event message options Option Date Trap Sending Agent Description Time when BMC ProactiveNet trap was received. Chapter 4 Event administration 209 . Click Status corresponding to BMC ProactiveNet events to open the Event Browser for BMC ProactiveNet events. 3 Delete the BMC ProactiveNet Events category. configure the required BMC ProactiveNet Server to forward BMC ProactiveNet events as SNMP traps to the computer where HP OpenView Integration package has been installed. 4 Close Event Categories Window. 5 Remove BMC ProactiveNet Events category manually.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments 4 Restart Open View User Interface (ovw). To delete BMC ProactiveNet events from the event browser: 1 On NNM Event Configuration Window. Viewing BMC ProactiveNet events on event browser After installing BMC ProactiveNet Integration package. choose File => Save. 2 On the Event Categories Window. Each event message is shown in the following format: date trapSendingAgent trapMessage The options are listed in Table 55 on page 209. To send SNMP Traps for events. BMC ProactiveNet Remote Agent that raised the event because of which the trap was generated. This deletes the BMC ProactiveNet Events category. 5 On the NNM Event Configuration window. choose Edit => Configure => Event Categories. create an event notification rule on the BMC ProactiveNet Server. choose Options => Event Configuration.

such as in which event source will each event go. 1 Select a BMC ProactiveNet event. The severity of the incoming event must be mapped to one of these. These files also contain information. but must be customized so it can understand and listen to BMC ProactiveNet traps. and Unknown. 5 Click OK to open the corresponding event details page. 2 Select Actions => Additional Actions. then a new browser instance is opened. 3 On the Additional Actions for BMC ProactiveNet Events screen. Warning. modify the tecad_snmp. In this case.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Option Trap Message Description event received on ProactiveNetAgentHostname Description: ProactiveNetEventDescription event URL: URLToOpenProactiveNet EventDetailsPage To view the event details page. and then run the installation as follows. There are four event classes for four different event types. Harmless. Tivoli Tivoli integration requires you to untar the file provided on your BMC ProactiveNet Server. To accomplish this. Critical. Use the instructions in the Tivoli manual for installing the Tivoli Module. The event severities are mapped as follows: ■ Critical => Fatal ■ Major => Critical 210 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . the user is required to log on to the BMC ProactiveNet Server.cds and tecad_snmp. The SNMP adapter by itself cannot receive and understand all SNMP traps coming in on that computer. mapping of the event severity for the incoming event is done through this file. If no browser instance is open currently. Minor.oid files. The necessary file appears as part of the BMC ProactiveNet Server or BMC ProactiveNet Agent (UNIX) installation. The content of these files must be appended with the Event Class definitions. select Open ProactiveNet Event Page and click OK. Also. The event severity must be mapped because the TEC server understands only these severities: Fatal. 4 Select the Selected events check box.

The product name. 7 Right-click the Setup Event Adapter for TEC icon and click Modify Job. select the endpoint/managed node where SNMP adapter is running from the Available Task endpoints frame. 5 Select the node name that is installed and then click Install and close. On successful installation the two icons for the Operational Task are displayed. Then click ProactivePlus for Tivoli.cds are inherited from the main event class defined in this BAROC file. BMC ProactiveNet Plus module There are two operational tasks in this Plus module: ■ Set up TEC Event server for BMC ProactiveNet ■ Set up Event adapter for TEC To install the plus module 1 Start the Tivoli desktop. ensure that the rule base ProactivePlus does not exist.x listed in the Install Product window is displayed. click the TivoliPlus icon on the Tivoli Desktop.baroc file defines the new event class. The four new event classes defined in tecad_snmp. Chapter 4 Event administration 211 . which is inherited from the base SNMP Class.1. select Desktop => Install => Install Product. ProactivePlus Module for Tivoli.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments ■ Minor => Minor ■ Abnormal => Harmless Once done. ■ Double-click Setup Event Adapter for TEC or right-click the icon and click Run job to run the task.image/Cfg directory. 3 Choose Select Media and select the path to the ProactivePlus. Remove all the other node names from this frame. which in turn are forwarded to the TEC server. This task should always be executed before running Setup TEC Event Server for BMC ProactiveNet. Then click Change and close. the TEC server must be customized so that it understands the traps received by the adapter. Version 1. pw_plus. Click the arrow so that it shows up in the Selected Task endpoints frame. 4 Choose Set Media&Close. This rule_base might exist if this task was executed in a previous installation. 8 Before running the Setup TEC Event Server for BMC ProactiveNet task. In this window. 2 From the menu bar. 6 Once the Plus module is installed successfully.

6 Once this is done. select the SNMP option and enter the TEC console location in the entry field provided. then double-click ProactivePlus for Tivoli.9 integration To integrate Tivoli TEC 3. Ensure that all these individual components have all the icons under them deleted before actually deleting the main icon.8/3. One of the event sources is BMC ProactiveNet. 2 Run the removepw. The system prompts you for the rule_base to clone. Select ProactivePlus and then select Edit => Delete from the menu. ■ The Tivoli setup is now complete. The BMC ProactiveNet events is displayed. 5 Delete all the listed components.sh script that was provided in the original tar file.8 / 3. 9 Double-click Setup TEC Event Server for ProactiveNet. Double-click the icon.8/ProactiveNetPLUS directory 212 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .sh Otherwise. run the Tivoli TEC 3. 10 Once these two tasks are executed correctly./ generic_unix/TME/PLUS/Proactive/PLUSproduct-info. Tivoli TEC 3.. To uninstall the Plus module: 1 If Framework 3.. the TEC console opens from the Tivoli Desktop. Select default values in this case./generic_unix/TME/PLUS/LINK/PLUSuninstall. 4 Double-click Tivoli Plus.9 install script. run ■ BINDIR/. 3 Go to the Tivoli desktop and choose Desktop => TMR Connections => Top Level Policy Regions from the menu bar. Remove all components from within the Plus module.6 is installed.8 and 3.9 on the BMC ProactiveNet Server. The install scripts are part of the BMC ProactiveNet Server installation. right-click the Event Server icon and select rule bases.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments ■ To delete this rule base. From the BMC ProactiveNet Server. and are available under usr/pw/apps3rdparty/tivoli/3.sh d $BINDIR/. skip this step. go to /tivoli/tec_rules and delete the directory ProactivePlus.

oid files with Event Class definitions. and Unknown) mapping for incoming event.9): on page 215 Chapter 4 Event administration 213 .cds and tecad_snmp. Harmless.cds and tecad_snmp.9) Ensure that there are no spaces in the path specified while installing TEC Server on Windows. The severity of incoming event is mapped to the default mapping listed in Table 56 on page 213. The Tivoli TECAD SNMP adapter receives these traps and forwards them to the TEC Server for display on the Event Console of Tivoli. event severity (Fatal. BMC ProactiveNet PLUS module installation will fail. If there are spaces in the path. Table 56: Default mapping BMC ProactiveNet Severity Critical Major Minor Abnormal Tivoli TEC Severity Fatal Critical Minor Harmless The BMC ProactiveNet PLUS installer configures the TEC server by adding the pw_plus.oid files with entries regarding BMC ProactiveNet SNMP Traps. on page 214 To delete an existing BMC ProactiveNet rulebase on page 214 To setup TEC Event server for BMC ProactiveNet on page 214 To uninstall the ProactiveNetPlus module (for TEC 3. There are four event classes for four different event types. BMC ProactiveNet PLUS installer performs the following configuration changes: ■ Modifies tecad_snmp.cds and tecad_snmp. To achieve this coordination with TECAD SNMP adapter. ■ Appends tecad_snmp.8/3.oid also contain information. tecad_snmp. Related topics: To install BMC ProactiveNet Plus module.baroc file to the Rule base. Warning.8/3. Minor. Critical.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments BMC ProactiveNet sends events to Tivoli as SNMP Traps. such as event source mapping. Installing the plus module (for TEC 3. This file contains new event classes inherited from the base SNMP Class.

2 Run the ProactiveNetPLUSinstall. 3 On the Tivoli desktop. Note ■ Execute this task before running Setup TEC event server for BMC ProactiveNet. right-click and choose Run job. ■ Delete any rulebase from previous installations. select the endpoint/managed node using arrow keys where TECAD SNMP adapter is running and make the required selections. 4 On the new window. To setup TEC Event server for BMC ProactiveNet 1 Run TEC Event Server. 2 Double-click Setup TEC Event Server for ProactiveNet. ■ The following icons are displayed under the Operational Tasks: — Setup SNMP Adapter for ProactiveNet — Setup TEC Event Server for ProactiveNet 5 Under Operational Task. To delete an existing BMC ProactiveNet rulebase 1 Right-click Event Server and select rule bases. double-click Setup SNMP Adapter for ProactiveNet.sh script. right-click and choose Run job. Alternatively. click TivoliPlus. Alternatively. right-click Setup SNMP Adapter for BMC ProactiveNet and choose Modify Job. 8 On the Operational Tasks window. 2 Select ProactiveNet and delete using the Edit menu. 214 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 7 Click Change and close. click ProactiveNetPlus for Tivoli. 6 On the Modify Job screen.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments To install BMC ProactiveNet Plus module. 1 Start Tivoli Desktop.

You run the executables or scripts through the Run Command on Server You can run an application or script when an event occurs.8/ProactiveNetPLUS / plusmoduleremove 2 Run the script by using the following commands ■ paremove. They can also be used to send events directly to ticket systems such as BMC Remedy Service Desk. open the TEC console to view BMC ProactiveNet events. To uninstall the ProactiveNetPlus module (for TEC 3. BMC ProactiveNet Administrator will choose the application or create the script and decide whether to run the application or script. shows how arguments can be passed to the script.9): 1 Navigate to installDirectory /usr/pw/apps3rdparty/tivoli/3. such as AlarmPoint. Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through Run Command on Server Server commands run specified executables or scripts and execute an application or script when an event occurs.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments 3 Select default values for the Rulebase to clone prompt. The script can be modified and moved to the installDirectory /pw/pronto/usr_apps/bin directory. as well as event integration with other notification systems.pl script. — Delete the BMC ProactiveNet rule base from /tivoli/tec_rules. The installDirectory /pw/pronto/bin/generic_script. After BMC ProactiveNet PLUS module has been removed. Chapter 4 Event administration 215 . Such applications or scripts can be used for escalation management. ■ After successful execution of the two tasks. which is provided as a model. ■ Path: Enter the script you want to execute when an event occurs. on the server or on the agent system where the event occurred.8/3. — Specify another rulebase for Tivoli Event Server.sh This script uninstalls all BMC ProactiveNet PLUS components.

See the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide for information about diagnostic commands. If the target system does not have an agent. do not enter the “+” character as an argument. Managing BMC ProactiveNet events through Diagnostic Commands on the BMC ProactiveNet Server You can define two types of diagnostics commands to execute on remote systems: ■ Run Agent Diagnostics. If the BMC ProactiveNet Server stops responding. if the command on Server is specified as chmod +x abc. For example. when the target system does not have an installed and running agent Both diagnostic commands are used to gather information about the top system processes on the target system. this log file can be checked for errors. The workaround is to write the command in a script file and execute the script using Command On Server Action. The “+” character is used as a keyword internally by Proactive Server.sh command. The Run Agent Diagnostics commands are predefined.sh. This may lead to unexpected results. Proactive Server will execute the chmod x abc. Limitation: The BMC ProactiveNet Server executes the commands on a different thread to prevent it from terminating unexpectedly.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Note While entering arguments to send server commands. Managing the AlarmPoint integration The AlarmPoint integration for BMC ProactiveNet provides the ability to notify AlarmPoint users who are monitoring a device about BMC ProactiveNet events that meet specified escalation criteria. Any exception that occurs while executing the command will be recorded in the ProactiveNet. So the event action history will record Run Server commands successfully. 216 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . You can select one to execute it. when a BMC ProactiveNet agent is installed and running on the system ■ Run Agent-less Diagnostic/Remote Actions.log file in the installDirectory /pw/pronto/logs directory. you must define and register the remote action command and use the appropriate remote login protocol to retrieve the process information.

Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments BMC ProactiveNet 8. Chapter 4 Event administration 217 . v.1. You can create an event rule for AlarmPoint. and AlarmPoint Server 4. it triggers the notification policy. Event-only implementation In the event-only implementation. The data-only implementation is unidirectional. you must configure the installDirectory / custom/conf/pronet. you use the Run Command on Proactive Server action to define the action.0. These actions are processed by the BMC ProactiveNet cell server.0 is compatible with AlarmPoint for BMC Event and Impact Management (Advanced Edition). The AlarmPoint integration can satisfy an event-only and a data-only implementation. When an incoming event matches the event criteria formula. close. Follow the installation and configuration directions in the AlarmPoint documentation. In page 3/3 of the event rule wizard. the AlarmPoint user can perform management actions on the event. the event is escalated and the AlarmPoint user is notified.com.conf file to enable AlarmPoint to communicate with the Product Short Server. Enter the BMC ProactiveNet CLI pw_AlarmPoint -u userName in the Path field. perform the additional configuration step described in the Remote Actions/Diagnostics chapter of the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide. The AlarmPoint user cannot reply to the event with an action such as acknowledge. For the data-only implementation. You can find the compatible AlarmPoint products at http://www. or phone messages. In the event-only implementation. When the event matches the event rule criteria. Both implementations leverage the same AlarmPoint products. e-mail. The notifications are then displayed in the Event List. Data-only implementation To prepare the data-only implementation. which forwards it to the AlarmPoint server and to the designated AlarmPoint users of the configured device—whether it be SMS. See the Remote Actions/Diagnostics chapter of the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide . the AlarmPoint user goes through the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Console to create a notification event management policy specifically for AlarmPoint users. 2. assign. Be sure to install the AlarmPoint client on the system where the BMC ProactiveNet cell server resides. The notification policy forwards the event to the AlarmPoint client. and so forth. such as acknowledge.alarmpoint. The AlarmPoint users are identified through a specially defined event criteria formula.

The description for the ARS Requests created out of BMC ProactiveNet events based on Abnormalities and Predictive events are prefixed with the word Abnormal: and Predictive: respectively to distinguish it from the other BMC ProactiveNet events. click Edit. 7. click New.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments In either implementation. When the event is closed in BMC ProactiveNet. Managing BMC ProactiveNet events in the Remedy environment An event generated in BMC ProactiveNet creates an AR system request in BMC Remedy Service Desk. 218 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . the status of the AR system request gets changed accordingly as per the IBRSD setting. The severity of predictive events is changed to Warning before the AR System Request is changed.0. The Add RSD Configuration Details window opens. To add a new RSD Configuration 1 Click New to display the Add RSD Configuration Details window. if the Create Incident in BMC Remedy Service Desk option is selected in the Add Event Rule (Page 3/3): Action Information for Event Rule screen. — To edit an existing RSD Configuration.1.5. Integration configuration for event actions (Remedy Service Desk) ■ Select Create incident in BMC Remedy Service Desk in the Add Event Rule (Page3/3): Action Information for Event Rule window to add/edit an AR System Request: ■ Click the relevant option: — For a new RSD Configuration. Ensure that Integration to BMC Remedy Service Desk (IBRSD) is installed to integrate BMC ProactiveNet and BMC Remedy Service Desk 7. 2 Choose the gateway entry from the IBRSD Gateway list. The Edit RSD Configuration Details window opens. click Edit and then click Delete. — To delete an RSD Configuration. if an event notification fails. BMC ProactiveNet events based on Abnormalities also create AR System Requests. or 7. you can enable the debug option of the BMC ProactiveNet server and check for exception errors.

dir for the BMC ProactiveNet server is C:\Program Files\ProactiveNet\pw\server \etc. click Add . Note By default the Event Class is Event and Status is Active. and then click Close to return to the Add Event Rule (Page3/3): Action Information for Event Rule window. 3 Click Done. Note Chapter 4 Event administration 219 .dir file of the BMC ProactiveNet server cell. The default path of the mcell. cell cellName mchostIPaddress:3115 The default path of the mcell. Specify all the actions for the event rule. ■ The added action is displayed under Actions To Perform. 4 After specifying the action for the event rule. For upgrade users of the BMC Remedy Service Desk integration You can upgrade your previous integration with BMC Remedy Service Desk by following these steps: To upgrade the integration with BMC Remedy Service Desk 1 Manually copy the IBRSD entries of the mcell.dir for the Web Services Server is C:\Program Files \BMC Software\Impact\webServices\mcell.dir file of the BMC ProactiveNet implementation that points to the IBRSD server.dir of the BMC Impact Integration Web Services Server that is used by the BMC Remedy Service Desk installation to the mcell. To remove a selected action 1 Select the action from Actions To Perform. BMC ProactiveNet returns to the Event Rule Administration screen. The updated event rule list is displayed.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments The gateway entries are populated from the mcell. 3 Click Done. 2 Click Remove.

ibrsd. gateway. before an abnormality event is sent to the target application.ibrsd mchostIPaddress:3115 gatewayName 3 Restart the BMC ProactiveNet server using the following command: pw sys start In the integration with BMC Remedy Service Desk.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments 2 Rename the cell entry to the gateway entry gateway. Note 220 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . its severity level is set to warning.

■ Transforms the event data to proper format and send the event data to IBRSD. the status of the AR request is changed in accordance with the IBRSD configuration.xml (the XML configuration file under the installDirectory/ pw/pronto/conf folder) to determine the cell name pointing to IBRSD. Figure 8: BMC ProactiveNet integration with AR system using IBRSD ■ When an event is generated in BMC ProactiveNet. an AR System Request is created simultaneously.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments How the BMC ProactiveNet integration works with the AR System The following block diagram explains the BMC ProactiveNet integration with AR System using IBRSD. Chapter 4 Event administration 221 . ■ IBRSD communicates with the IBRSD module installed in the AR Server and creates an AR System Request on the AR Server. ■ The PN Event Sender reads the configuration file PN-ARS-Integration. When the event is closed in BMC ProactiveNet.

1. If you change the AR System Intelligent Incident business rule. the other details also get updated in the AR System Request. If the event Id is the same for multiple BMC ProactiveNet events.5. other than the status fields are to get updated in the AR System Request. 222 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The event data available at the time of event generation from BMC ProactiveNet. In this case. the same ARS Request is updated at the AR System. This is the business rule for Intelligent Incidents. only the status fields get updated. 7. are sent to AR System. 7.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Related topics: Configuration file details on page 222 Configuration file details The configuration file details are as follows: ■ IBRSD Gateway Name ■ AR System Field Default Values (if required) ■ BMC ProactiveNet Event Details ■ BMC ProactiveNet Event Fields to IBRSD Event Slot Mapping Create individual ARS requests for each unique BMC ProactiveNet event. Related topics: External dependency on page 222 Setting up intelligent incident mappings on page 222 Limitation on page 224 Troubleshooting on page 224 High level flow chart on page 225 Event slots to AR system form field mapping on page 226 Note External dependency ■ BMC Remedy Service Desk 7. or 7. the workflow at the AR System needs to be changed. If details.0.6 Setting up intelligent incident mappings Navigate to Quick Links on the Home Page of the BMC Remedy User application.

3 Expand Integration Configuration. Figure 9: BMC Remedy Home Page Figure 10: Custom configuration tab 2 Expand Integration for BMC Remedy Service Desk. Chapter 4 Event administration 223 .Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments To set up intelligent incident mappings 1 Click the Custom Configuration tab.

224 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Map each income severity to the appropriate severity in the AR system. Mention the status of the request when the event is closed. Limitation ■ Once an AR System Request is closed in the Incident Management form. Troubleshooting Here are some points to be noted while setting up: ■ Once the AR System with Remedy Service Desk and ITSM Patch-4 are installed. Figure 11: Incident integration setup 5 Add the contact information.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments 4 Select BMC Event Manager Incident Integration Setup. it cannot be re-opened. map it to the appropriate priority in the AR System. use the AR System User Interface to check whether the Incident Management and Problem Management Applications are enabled. Similarly for each incoming priority.

mc_ueid=UID_001. then the data point would have violated some of the workflow rules. Send one event data point to IBRSD.status=OPEN” –n @<IBRSDServer>:<IBRSDPort>#mc installation. ■ Check the UnsentEvent log file in the IBRSD server. ■ Check whether the data exists in the Staging Form. High level flow chart This flow chart explains the functions of a PN Event Sender module. If the data exists in the Staging Form and not in Incident Form. use the msend CLI to test the msend -a EVENT -r CRITICAL -m "TestMessage" -b "mc_priority=PRIORITY_1. Chapter 4 Event administration 225 . the event data will be logged into the UnsentEvent log of the IBRSD. Use the following syntax: This should create an entry in the Incident form. If there is a failure in sending the data.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments ■ Once the IBRSD configuration is complete.

Event slots to AR system form field mapping To map the Event Slots to AR System: ■ Edit DefaultMapping.map in the IBRSD server conf directory. You do not need to edit the DefaultMapping.map file if you have installed the IBRSD component that is part of the ProactiveNet server 8. ■ Use BEMUseCase maps for the changes. ■ Change the event slot names to AR System Form Field mapping. The following event slot names are used to create the event data.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments The following flow chart explains the workflow in the AR System.0 installation package. Note 226 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

MAJOR will be mapped to PRIORITY_2. WARNING] Status [OPEN. In the case of BPM Adapter Monitor the Reconciliation ID is at the instance level. eventAttribute AttrValueCausedEvent AttrValueUnit severity status submitter device_info event_url pn_server_ip event_time event_rule monitor_instance pn_server_name monitor_type pn_event_score pn_event_has_diagnostics pn_event_ack_status pn_event_ack_message mc_smc_id Event_Severity Status_Event Event_Requester. Reconciliation ID is not sent. Submitter Notes Notes Notes Notes Notes Notes Notes Notes Notes Notes Notes Notes Notes mc_parameter mc_parameter_value mc_parameter_unit Notes Notes Notes Chapter 4 Event administration 227 . send it.CLOSED] BMC ProactiveNet DeviceInfo eventURL PNServerIP eventTime eventRule MonitorInstance PNServerName MonitorType EventScore HasDD eventAckStatus eventAckMessage BPMReconId. and Minor will be mapped to PRIORITY_3 Severity [CRITICAL. If the instance level Reconciliation ID is not blank. Host level Reconciliation ID stored in PN. When the event is created and if the Reconciliation ID is not blank. Hence CRITICAL will be mapped to PRIORITY_1. send that.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Table 57: Event slot details Event Slot Name mc_ueid msg mc_priority AR System Form Field Mc_ueid Event_Message Event_Priority Event Data eventId eventDescription In the BMC ProactiveNet event there is no concept of priority.MAJOR. don’t send it.MINOR. if the Reconciliation ID is blank. When the event is modified. Otherwise send the device level Reconciliation ID.

status Mc_ueid=$Format("%s_%s".slot.device_info.mc_parameter.slot.pn_serve r_name.pn_server_ip).slot.slot. Event_Requester=slot. The Event Slot to AR System field mapping is done in the IBRSD DefaultMapping.0" Submitter=slot.product_tier2 Product_Categorization_Tier_3=slot.event_url.slot.msg $if(slot.mc_smc_id.pn_event_ack_status.slo t.mc_priority Event_Severity=slot.cell_name Notes=$Format"event Id: %s\nevent Rule: %s\nevent Time: %s\nDevice: %s \nMonitor Type: %s\nMonitor Instance: %s\nevent URL: %s\nPNSever IP: %s \nPNSever Name: %s\nEvent Score: %s\nevent Rule Has DD: %s\nevent Acknowledged: %s\nevent Ack Message: %s\nReconciliationId: %s\nComponent Alias: %s\nevent Attribute: %s\nAttr Value Caused event: %s\nAttr Value Unit: %s\nMoreInfo: \n %s".slot.submitter Event_Type="NEW" Keyword="BEM" z1D_FirstName="BEM" z1D_LastName="User" Application_Version="ITSM 7.mc_parameter_unit.product_tier1 != "") Product_Categorization_Tier_1=slot.map file in the IBRSD installation’s conf directory. The BMC ProactiveNet event fields given in the diagram are fields that are available for use and they are case sensitive.product_tier1 Product_Categorization_Tier_2=slot.slot. Short_Description=slot.slot.mc_ueid.slot.xml file under the installDirectory /pw/pronto/conf directory in the BMC ProactiveNet server.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Event Slot Name mc_smc_alias AR System Form Field Notes Event Data ComponentAlias The mapping between BMC ProactiveNet event fields and event slots is done in the PN-ARS-Integration.pn_event_score.event_rule.monit or_type.slot.event_time.slot.monitor_instance.mc_parameter_value.map mapping file located in the conf directory of the IBRSD server.slot.slot.slot.slot.mc_smc_alias.slot.slot.mc_ueid.product_tier3 $endif Event_Message=slot.pn_server_ip.pn_event_has_dd.slot.pn_event_ack_message.severity Status_Event=slot.submitter z1D_CellName=slot. Follow the same mapping to modify the events.sl ot.more_info).msg Event_Priority=slot. Note The above mapping is for the new events.slot. Ensure that the following code is present in the DefaultMapping. The Work Info History list box in the Work Info Tab of BMC Remedy Service Desk’s Incident Management form captures the following details when a BMC ProactiveNet event is generated and if the AR System Request is created: Note 228 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Note The Send event to BMC Event Manager option is addressed to BMC ProactiveNet upgrade users who are sending events to a BMC Event Manager instance and who wish to retain their current settings. New users should use the BMC ProactiveNet event processing mechanisms. the ARS Request will have the severity of the latest event. Note Managing BMC ProactiveNet events in the BEM environment An event generated in BMC ProactiveNet creates an event in BMC Event Manager. When multiple events are generated with the same event id (correlated events) but different severities. Integration configuration for event actions (BEM) ■ Select Send Event to BMC Event Manager in the Add Event Rule (Page 3/3): Action Information for Event Rule screen to add/edit a BEM Event: ■ Click the relevant option: Chapter 4 Event administration 229 . Ensure that BMC Impact Solution is installed to integrate BMC ProactiveNet and BMC Event Manager. The description for the BEM Events created out of BMC ProactiveNet events based on Abnormalities and Predictive events are prefixed with the word Abnormal: and Predictive: respectively to distinguish it from the other BMC ProactiveNet events. if the Send event to BMC Event Manager option is selected in the Add event Rule (Page3/3): Action Information for Event Rule screen. the corresponding BEM Event also gets closed. BMC ProactiveNet events based on Abnormalities also create BEM events. When the event is closed in BMC ProactiveNet.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments ■ Priority ■ Severity ■ Status ■ Source ■ Time and Date The Work Info History list captures the above details for all the events. The severity of predictive events is changed to WARNING before the system creates the BEM Event. if multiple events are coming with the same mc_ueid.

To remove a selected action. 2 Select the BEM cell from the BEM Cell name list. BMC ProactiveNet returns to the Event Rule Administration screen.dir file of the ProactiveNet implementation that points to the BEM cell. The added action is displayed under Actions To Perform.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments — For a new BEM event. 3 Click Done. The Add BEM Configuration Details window opens. ■ The cell name entries are populated from the mcell. The updated event rule list is displayed. — To delete an BEM event. 4 After specifying the action for the event rule. 230 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . and then click Close to return to the Add Event Rule (Page 3/3): Action Information for Event Rule window. click New. Selecting the local ProactiveNet server cell or selecting a cell that propagates events back to the local ProactiveNet server cell can result in unpredictable application behavior. click Edit. 1 Select the action from Actions To Perform. Ensure that the cell you do select does not contain a propagation rule or policy that propagates events back to the local ProactiveNet server cell. By default the Event Class is PROACTIVE_INTELLIGENT_EVENT and the status is ACTIVE. click Delete. 3 Click Done. — To edit an existing BEM event. To add new BEM configuration details 1 Click New to open the Add BEM Configuration Details window. Specify all the actions for the event rule. WARNING Do not select the local ProactiveNet server cell. The Edit Configuration Details window opens. click Add. 2 Click Remove.

cell cellName mchostIPaddress:1828 The default path of the mcell. 2 Restart the BMC ProactiveNet server using the following command: pw sys start Note Note In the integration with BMC Event Management. before an abnormality event is sent to the target application. its severity level is set to warning.dir of the BMC Impact Integration Web Services Server that is used by the BMC Event Management installation to the mcell.dir for the Web Services Server is C:\Program Files \BMC Software\Impact\webServices\mcell. Chapter 4 Event administration 231 .Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments For upgrade users of the BMC Event Management integration You can upgrade a previous BMC Event Management integration by following these steps: To upgrade a previous BMC Event Management integration 1 Manually copy the BEM entries of the mcell. The default path of the mcell.dir file of the BMC ProactiveNet server cell.dir for the BMC ProactiveNet server is C:\Program Files\ProactiveNet\pw\server \etc. How the BMC ProactiveNet integration works with the BEM environment The following block diagram explains the BMC ProactiveNet integration with BEM Event.

the corresponding BEM Event is also closed.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments ■ When an event is generated in BMC ProactiveNet. When the event is closed in BMC ProactiveNet. ■ The PN Event Sender reads the configuration file PN-BEM-Integration. Related topics: Configuration file details on page 232 Configuration file details The configuration file details are as follows: ■ Cell Name 232 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .xml (the XML configuration file placed in the installDirectory /pw/pronto/conf) to determine the cell name pointing to BEM. a BEM Event is created simultaneously. ■ Transforms the event data to proper format and sends the event data to BEM.

For information on supported versions of BMC Impact Solutions. see the BMC ProactiveNet Release Notes .Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments ■ BEM Event Default Values (if required) ■ BMC ProactiveNet Event Details ■ BMC ProactiveNet Event Fields to BEM Event Slot Mapping Related topics: High level flow chart on page 233 BMC ProactiveNet – BEM Event mapping on page 235 External dependency Install a supported version of BMC Impact Solutions. Chapter 4 Event administration 233 . High level flow chart This flow chart explains the functions of a BEM Integrator module.

Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments The following flow chart explains the workflow at the BEM System. 234 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

This is located in the installDirectory /pw/ pronto/conf directory in the BMC ProactiveNet server. To create an event in BEM. This is required if multiple PN servers are sending events to the same BEM String description of the event AlarmDescription msg Chapter 4 Event administration 235 .xml file using the following mapping details: Table 58: Mapping details PN Event Data AlarmId_PNServer IP Event Slot mc_ueid Comments Combination of eventId & PN Server IP.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments BMC ProactiveNet – BEM Event mapping The mapping between BMC ProactiveNet event Fields and CEM complaint Slots is done in PN-BEM-Integration.xml file. make the entries in the PN-BEM-Integration.

Hence CRITICAL will be mapped to PRIORITY_1. PATROL. Data collection layer (PN. We send the eventURL to the mc_tool_uri slot. low. [CRITICAL. somewhere in between). and so on) can usually not assess priority.MINOR. Event Slot mc_priority Comments In the BMC ProactiveNet event there is no concept of priority.MAJOR. and Minor will be mapped to PRIORITY_3. down. The pn_event_ack_status is defined as a slot in the event class for the PN Events event Acknowledgement message. The pn_event_ack_message is defined as a slot in the event class for the PN Events AlarmAckMessage pn_event_ack_message 236 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Something that is “down” may have low urgency (for example if it happens on a Sunday). The value is calculated instead.1 release of BMC Impact Solutions. WARNING] [OPEN. This is required if multiple PN servers are sending events to BEM event Rule More Info Monitor Instance Name Monitor Type The pn_event_score is defined as a slot in the event class for the PN Events Severity AlarmStatus Submitter DeviceIP PNServerIP PNServerIP PNServerName DeviceName AlarmURL Severity Status mc_origin mc_host_address adapter_host mc_tool_address mc_tool mc_host mc_tool_uri AlarmId_PNServer IP mc_tool_key AlarmRule MoreInfo MonitorInstance MonitorType EventScore HasDD AlarmAckStatus mc_tool_rule mc_tool_suggestion mc_object mc_object_class pn_event_score pn_event_has_diagnostics The pn_event_has_dd is defined as a slot in the event class for the PN Events pn_event_ack_status event Acknowledgement status. MAJOR will be mapped to PRIORITY_2. priority describes the business urgency (high. Combination of eventId & PN Server IP. Severity determines how bad the technical problem is (device is up. in between).Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments PN Event Data no equivalent mapping field. CLOSED] BMC ProactiveNet Device IP Address For backward compatibility PN Server IP Address PN Server Name Device Name Cross launch is implemented in the BMC IX Console for the field mc_tool_uri in the post 7.

All subsequent references to RBA in the User Guide would collectively mean BMC Run Book Automation and BMC Atrium Orchestrator. In the case of BPM Adapter Monitor the Reconciliation ID is at the instance level.5. When the event is modified. Otherwise send the device level Reconciliation ID. the BEM Event will have the severity of the latest event. The active RBA Rules processes the event or event data. Please refer to the appropriate version of the BMC Atrium Orchestrator Development Studio User Guide for developing RBA Rules and RBA Workflow. BMC ProactiveNet also supports unidirectional integration with BMC Atrium Orchestrator 7. Note Chapter 4 Event administration 237 .06. and after the successful rule validation an appropriate RBA Workflow is triggered depending on the specified logic. send it. send that. if the Reconciliation ID is blank.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments PN Event Data BPMReconId Event Slot mc_smc_id Comments Host level Reconciliation ID stored in PN.00. If the instance level Reconciliation ID is not blank. In the case of external events this will not be present The attribute value that caused the event The unit of the attribute value ComponentAlias coming from the BMC TM ART adapter monitor. The attribute that caused the event. Managing BMC ProactiveNet events BMC Atrium Orchestrator (formerly known as BMC Run Book Automation) When a BMC ProactiveNet event is generated the event action Send Event to BMC Atrium Orchestrator sends event data to the BMC Run Book Automation environment. Reconciliation ID is not sent. When the event is created and if the Reconciliation ID is not blank. AlarmAttribute mc_parameter AttrValueCausedEven mc_parameter_value t AttrValueUnit ComponentAlias mc_parameter_unit mc_smc_alias Note The History tab of the event in the BMC Impact Explorer captures only Last Modifier Cell and the last update time. BMC ProactiveNet only supports unidirectional integration with RBA 3. don’t send it. When multiple events are generated with the same event id (correlated events) but different severities.0.

click Edit. By default the Event Class is PROACTIVE_INTELLIGENT_EVENT and the status is ACTIVE. — To edit an existing AO event. 2 Click Remove. Note To remove a selected action 1 Select the action from Actions To Perform. click Add. The Edit Configuration Details — To delete an AO event. To add new AO configuration details 1 Click New to open the Add AO Configuration Details window. 4 After specifying the action for the event rule. click Delete. The added action is displayed under Actions To Perform. click New. 238 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . and then click Close to return to the Add Event Rule (Page3/3): Action Information for Event Rule window. Specify all the actions for the event rule. window opens. ■ Click the relevant option: — For a new BMC Run Book Automation event. The Add AO Configuration Details window opens. 3 Click Done. 2 Select the IMCOMM gateway from the AO Gateway Cell list.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments Integration configuration for event actions (BMC Atrium Orchestrator) ■ Select Send Event to BMC Atrium Orchestrator in the Add Event Rule (Page3/3): Action Information for Event Rule screen to add or edit a BMC Run Book Automation event. 3 Click Done. The IMCOMM entries pointing to the BEM-RBA gateways are populated from the mcell.dir file of the BMC ProactiveNet implementation that points to the BMC Atrium Orchestrator server.

imcomm ao mchostIPaddress:1859 2 Restart the BMC ProactiveNet server using the following command: pw sys start 3 Next. and click Remove. and BMC Atrium Orchestrator title. choose the gateway entry you’ve added to the mcell. 7 Select previously existing actions that were used by the BMC Atrium Orchestrator installation. 5 Click Done to close the Add AO Configuration Details window.dir file from the AO Gateway Name list. 2 Select the event rule from the list. and click New next to the Send Event to BMC Atrium Orchestrator list under the Integration with BMC Remedy Service Desk.dir file of the BMC ProactiveNet server and by updating existing event rules that apply to the BMC Atrium Orchestrator integration. To update existing event rules that apply to the BMC Atrium Orchestrator integration 1 Open the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console. 6 Click Add next to the Send Event to BMC Atrium Orchestrator list to post the new action to the Actions to Perform list.dir file of the BMC ProactiveNet server: gateway.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments BMC ProactiveNet returns to the Event Rule Administration screen. For upgrade users of the BMC Atrium Orchestrator integration You can upgrade your previous integration with BMC Atrium Orchestrator by following upgrading the mcell. To upgrade BMC Atrium Orchestrator integration 1 Add the gateway entry gateway. 3 Go to page 3/3 of the wizard. The updated event rule list is displayed. and click Edit to open the Edit Event Rule wizard.imcomm to the mcell. BMC Event Manager. and choose Options => Administration => Event Administration => Event Rules => Edit to open the Event Rule Administration page. 4 In the Add AO Configuration Details window. Chapter 4 Event administration 239 . you edit existing event rules that apply to the BMC Atrium Orchestrator integration.

its severity level is set to warning. In the integration with BMC Atrium Orchestrator.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments 8 Click Done to save your changes and close the wizard. Note 240 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . before an abnormality event is sent to the target application.

the appropriate RBA Workflow is triggered A list of integration features follows: Chapter 4 Event administration 241 . If the rule validation succeeds.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments How BMC ProactiveNet integration works with BMC Atrium Orchestrator The following block diagram explains BMC ProactiveNet integration with BMC Atrium Orchestrator. Figure 12: How BMC ProactiveNet integrates with BMC Atrium Orchestrator ■ The BEM-RBA monitor adapter receives event or event data from BMC ProactiveNet ■ The BEM-RBA monitor adapter formats the input and sends it to active RBA rules ■ The event is evaluated against active RBA Rules.

Data collection layer (PN. The BMC ProactiveNet abnormality event description is prefixed with the word Abnormal to distinguish it from the other BMC ProactiveNet events before the RBA event is created.RBA events are created when the BMC ProactiveNet event is opened. RBA Events can be created for BMC ProactiveNet abnormalities as well. etc. priority describes the business urgency (high. Mapping BMC ProactiveNet event fields for RBA Event slots Table 59: Mapping details PN Event Data AlarmId_PNServer IP Event Slot mc_ueid Comments The following table lists Product Short event fields for the Event Slots of RBA events. low. Something that is “down” may have low urgency (for example if it happens on a Sunday). or in between). string description of the event In BMC ProactiveNet event there is no concept of priority. or in between). and Minor is be mapped to PRIORITY_3. MAJOR is mapped to PRIORITY_2.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments ■ Creating RBA events . Severity determines how bad the technical problem is (device is up. Msg mc_priority Severity AlarmStatus Submitter DeviceIP PNServerIP PNServerIP PNServerName DeviceName Severity Status mc_origin mc_host_address adapter_host mc_tool_address mc_tool mc_host 242 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The value is calculated instead. acknowledged. Combination of event Id & PN Server IP is required when multiple PN servers are sending events to the same RBA.) can usually not assess priority. or closed based on the action set for the event. down. and the severity of the predictive event is changed to warning an RBA event is created.MINOR.MAJOR. (CRITICAL. WARNING) (OPEN. CLOSED) BMC ProactiveNet Device IP Address For backward compatibility PN Server IP Address PN Server Name Device Name AlarmDescription no equivalent mapping field. PATROL. it is a combination of event Id and host name of the PN Server. For DHCP enabled systems. The predictive event description is prefixed with the word Predictive to distinguish it from the other BMC ProactiveNet events. RBA events can be created for BMC ProactiveNet predictive events. Hence CRITICAL is mapped to PRIORITY_1.

■ Configure the BEM-RBA monitor adapter used for the BEM-RBA integration to accept events from BMC ProactiveNet. Combination of eventId and PN Server IP. AlarmAttribute AttrValueCausedEvent AttrValueUnit ComponentAlias mc_parameter mc_parameter_value mc_parameter_unit mc_smc_alias Attribute that causes the event It is not present for external events. See the Release Notes for the supported versions of these products. AlarmId_PNServer IP mc_tool_key AlarmRule MoreInfo MonitorInstance MonitorType EventScore HasDD AlarmAckStatus AlarmAckMessage mc_tool_rule mc_tool_suggestion mc_object mc_object_class pn_event_score pn_event_has_diagnostics The pn_event_has_diagnostics is defined as a slot in the event class for the PN Events. send it. Chapter 4 Event administration 243 . pn_event_ack_status pn_event_ack_message Event Acknowledgement status Event Acknowledgement message The pn_event_ack_message is defined as a slot in the event class for the PN Events.Event actions: managing BMC ProactiveNet events in external environments PN Event Data AlarmURL Event Slot mc_tool_uri Comments Cross launch is implemented in the BMC IX Console for the field mc_tool_uri in the post 7. This is required when multiple PN servers send events to RBA. Otherwise send the device level Reconciliation ID. Sends the eventURL to the mc_tool_uri slot. Attribute value that caused the event Unit of the attribute value ComponentAlias from the BMC TM ART adapter monitor External setup For external setup the following installation and configuration is required: ■ RBA or Atrium Orchestrator must be installed.1 release of BMC Impact Solutions. Event Rule More Information Monitor Instance Name Monitor type The pn_event_score is defined as a slot in the event class for the PN Events. If the instance level Reconciliation ID is not blank. BPMReconId mc_smc_id Host level Reconciliation ID stored in PN In the case of BPM Adapter Monitor the Reconciliation ID is at the instance level.

3 In the Event Administration area. The Event Reduction screen is displayed. availability events related to application A are suppressed by the availability events on system B. click the Edit link to the right of Intelligent Event Reduction. clear the Enable Intelligent Events check box to map absolute threshold to the baselines.Reducing events Reducing events BMC ProactiveNet allows you to limit the flow of events. clear the Enable Event suppression check box to disable the suppression rules. To suppress events The event suppression option is available only if you are upgrading to the current version of BMC ProactiveNet and you used the relationship administration or event suppression functionality in a previous version of the product. Each threshold with Outside Baseline enabled activates when the data exceeds the specified baseline and absolute threshold. If the system is offline. The event suppression rule defines a relationship between the application and host system. For example. 4 On the Event Reduction screen. To configure intelligent events 1 Click Options on the top right of the BMC ProactiveNet Operations console. Note 244 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . For more information. 5 Click Apply. However. but an alert is sent only for system availability. Hourly Baseline. Auto. this causes the application to be unavailable. Daily Baseline. see “Defining Intelligent Event Suppression relationships” on page 398. The outside baseline column can be set to Not Enabled. 1 On Event Reduction screen. because the relationship is defined. see “Setting event thresholds” on page 184. For full information on setting thresholds. This creates a new outside baseline column in the Event threshold administration screen. BMC ProactiveNet does not send an alert for the application availability. 2 Choose the Administration tab. or Weekly Baseline.

for event text customization. Customizing event text Event text customization enables you to insert event text for all email alerts. the Relationship Administrator screen opens and you can define the relationships. For upgrade users BMC ProactiveNet 8. See the table below for a complete list. clear the Enable Abnormality Detection and Baseline Generation for non-KPI metrics check box to stop further baseline projection and abnormality detection for non-KPI attributes. Certain event text customization variables are only available for ProactiveNet intelligent events. However. this check box maintains the same non-KPI status that it had before the upgrade. Upgrade users cannot immediately select these additional variables. these variables will have blank values. if the check box was enabled before the upgrade. Chapter 4 Event administration 245 . and $MC_PRIORITY.0 provides additional out-of-the-box variables. For example. $MC_HOST.Customizing event text 2 Click Configure Event Suppression link. 2 Click Apply. for upgrade customers. the Enable Abnormality Detection and Baseline Generation for non-KPI metrics check box is disabled. They are: ■ $EVENTID ■ $MC_LONG_MSG ■ $INSTANCE_NAME ■ $ABNORMALITY When applied to external events. such as $Status. To enable or disable non KPI metrics 1 On Event Reduction screen. Note By default. for fresh installations. it remains enabled. They have to add them manually. Upgrade users can enter the new variables that they need directly in the wizard.

Table 60: Variables for customizing event text Variable ($VAR) $ABNORMALITY $ACK $ACK_MSG 3. customize the subject and body of the Email Alerts. 2 On the Administration tab.Customizing event text To customize event text 1 Click the Options tab at the top right of the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console. You can choose from among the following variables listed in in the table below. 3 On the Global Event Text Customization screen. choose Event Text Customization Edit link.a Description abnormality used in pinpointing acknowledgement status Acknowledgement message name of event rule that applies to this event attribute name such as “availability” name of the device under which the monitor instance is shown Description about the device under which the monitor instance is shown BMC ProactiveNet Intelligent Event ID First Time Threshold was exceeded in ASCII Full path to the Monitor Name of the Monitor instance Last value when Event was generated Last Time data was collected in UTC seconds Last Time data was collected in ASCII Fully-qualified name of the host on which the problem occurred Network address of the host on which the problem occurred Location at which the managed object resides More info of a BMC ProactiveNet Intelligent Event List of free text annotations added to the event Subcomponent of the host to which the event is related Identifies the class of an object $ALARMRULE_NAME $ATTR_NAME $DEVICE $DEVICE_DESCR $EVENTID $FTIME_ASC $FULL_PATH $INSTANCE_NAME $LAST $LTIME_UTC $LTIME_ASC $MC_HOST $MC_HOST_ADDRESS $MC_LOCATION $MC_LONG_MSG $MC_NOTES $MC_OBJECT $MC_OBJECT_CLASS 246 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Name of the Monitor instance. Managing BMC ProactiveNet with Service Level Management (SLM) .Integrating BMC ProactiveNet with Service Level Management Variable ($VAR) $MC_ORIGIN $MC_ORIGIN_CLASS $MC_OWNER $MC_PRIORITY $MC_TOOL $MC_TOOL_CLASS $MC_UEID $MO_TYPE $MSG $SEVERITY $STATUS $SCRIP $TIME $UNITS $CLASS $URL_INSTANCE_NAME Description Event management systems that is closest to the source of the event as possible Identifies the event management system type Current user assigned to the event Priority of an event with respect to their impact on the SIM model Represents whether the event is coming from within a mc_tool_class value User-defined categorization of the tool reporting the event Universal identifier of the event Managed Object Type such as. 5 Click Apply.Performance data collected by BMC ProactiveNet is exposed in Service Level Management to be utilized in Performance Based Service Targets. The metrics can be from BMC ProactiveNet Monitors that are packaged with the product as well as from adapters Chapter 4 Event administration 247 . Network Ping Text description of the event Severity of the event Status of the event The IPAddress of Remote Agent where Monitor Instance is actually created Event Time formatted as "MM dd HH:mm" Units in which Threshold value is measured Class name of the event. Integrating BMC ProactiveNet with Service Level Management This section provides information on integration of BMC ProactiveNet with Service Level Management. encoded for safe use in URLs a ACK_MSG retains the latest operations message. 4 Select Include MoreInfo in E-Mail Body to receive the detailed information in an email.

Note 248 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . see the BMC Service Level Management User’s Guide and the BMC Service Level Management Configuration Guide. For more information on using the BMC ProactiveNet integration with SLM.Integrating BMC ProactiveNet with Service Level Management to other enterprise performance monitoring solutions. Probable cause analysis from BMC ProactiveNet is shown in SLM as a link so that an impacted SVT can be linked to the reason behind the impact. BMC ProactiveNet only supports unidirectional integration with SLM.

You can choose the type of graphing format that works best for you. Peak. and correlate data effectively. For more information. you can select a combination of monitors and attributes. For more information. Customizing graphs helps you to: ■ choose the type of graphing format that works best for you.5 Customizing graphs Creating custom graphs The Custom Graphs feature is used to generate individual and multiple graphs based on resources monitored by BMC ProactiveNet. such as Baseline. Multiple data type graphs enable you to compare data across sites. Using this feature. Click the Custom Graphs icon in the Views & Graphs drawer in the navigation pane to choose from the following options before creating your graph: ■ Line Graph ■ Area Graph ■ X-Y Graph Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 249 . but do not allow you to chart thresholds or indicators. as they only relate to a single attribute. Custom Graphs that focus on an individual monitor enable you to chart thresholds and other indicators. see Creating an individual/multiple monitor graphs on page 270. and so on. see Creating an individual/multiple monitor graphs on page 270. ■ create graphs for multiple monitors showing a single attribute but view the statistics from multiple sites. ■ create graphs that show data from an individual monitor type or multiple attributes. This feature gives you more control over information than the Show Graph option on the Tools menu.

if two statistics are measured in percentage and two in units. one being measured in units. ■ When choosing any Indicator. Indicator cannot relate to more than one measurement. This problem happens mostly when adding a graph to a view and seems to occur only when using Internet Explorer 6. graph period. ■ However. an error message appears (as shown below) and the graph does not display. ■ Graph displays NO_DATA image when there are no data available for the total 250 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . This problem is being addressed. if you have three statistics.0 with updates Q321232 and Q323759. keep the following limitations in mind: ■ No more than twelve attributes can be displayed on a graph.Creating custom graphs ■ Top N Graph ■ Pie Graph ■ Dial Gauge Graph Related Topics Limitations on page 250 Creating a line or area graph on page 251 Creating a x-y graph on page 256 Creating a Top N graph on page 257 Creating a pie graph on page 259 Creating a dial gauge graph on page 261 Limitations When creating graphs. then all four appear in the graph because Y1 or Y2 allows a graph to have two likemeasurements each. ■ No more than two measurement types can be displayed on a graph. only one Attribute can be selected because the ■ Currently there is a problem that Custom Graph settings are not preserved when adding graphs. ■ For example. and the other being measured in time. one being measured in percentage.

However. ■ Show Graph for the last . and click Apply. 5 Select a Monitor Type. The list lets you choose from 1 hour up to 3 months. Area graphs are specialized line graphs. select graph options for the graphs. and indicators are not applicable to Area Graphs. 2 In the Views & Graphs drawer. To show the parent instance for the selected monitor instance on page 255 and To show the child instances for the selected monitor instance on page 255 To create a line or area graph 1 In the navigation pane in the Operations Console. choose more than one Monitor Type.Creating custom graphs Creating a line or area graph Line graphs are the most common type of graphs that plot linear relationships. 4 Select a Group Filter. choose only one Monitor Type. click Views & Graphs. or Area Graph option graph. The Custom Graph screen is displayed. regardless of whether they are in a group or not. Choosing a filter limits your graph choices to the selected group and provides a means of organizing your data. In the Custom Graphs screen. For Multiple Monitor Graphs. Select the desired group. A list of resource instances available under the Monitor Type you selected is displayed. select the Line Graph . Choosing No Filter lets you generate a graph from all resources in the system.Choose the amount of time you want to show on the . Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 251 . 8 Select appropriate values in the Filter Area. 7 Select the resource instances to monitor. For an Individual Graph. click the Custom Graphs icon 3 In the Custom Graphs screen. To view parent and child instances for the selected monitor instance see. 6 Click Next to open the Monitor Instance area. they can plot only single instance and single attribute selections.

■ Indicators provide options for dynamically changing the charting of data. Choose the attributes you want to graph for each instance. Thresholds and a Config attribute may also be graphed.Time Range option allows the Start and End Time selections to reflect either a particular day and hour or a particular duration of time. Baseline Low represents the point at which 90% of the weighted average of historical values for that hour. or week fall above this line. These values can be used only if multiple attributes have not been selected. Figure 13: Attributes Area 10 Select appropriate options in the Indicators area. # and ms). Baseline High represents the point at which 95% of the weighted average of the historical values fall below this value for that hour. week. however you are limited to 2 units of measure (that is. see the BMC ProactiveNet Monitor Guide. Baseline indicators 252 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . or week. day. You can chart up to 12 attributes per graph. When choosing any indicator. or Hourly & Daily Baseline: There are two baselines: Baseline High and Baseline Low. only one statistic (attribute) is viewable at a time because the Indicator cannot relate to more than one measurement. The Attributes Area lets you dynamically change statistical data displayed in the graph you are viewing.Creating custom graphs ■ Time Range . day. Weekly Baseline. — Hourly Baseline. You can select device or application-dependent elements for viewing. or hour to compare measurements. A colored box around an attribute indicates there is at least one open event of the severity indicated by the color of the box. such as the last four hours. You can change the time and date when you want to view resource data for the previous day. The attributes available vary depending on the monitor chosen. 9 Select appropriate options in the Attributes area. Daily Baseline. The statistics selections (attributes) vary based on the monitored entity. For more information on attribute statistics and their function.

and applied PAD factor. the data type you are viewing. Major. a few data points may appear inside the shaded downtime. which is associated to threshold. and applied PAD factor. threshold. and applied PAD factor. and weekly baseline values. — All Baselines: Select this option to show condensed Baseline High and Baseline Low for hourly. check boxes are displayed. baseline. the selected duration. — Abnormality Threshold: Composite values of abnormality threshold. the shading may use a color different from that shown in the legend. — Minor. — Critical Signature Threshold: Composite values of signature critical threshold. Peak indicator can be selected only when viewing data older than 24 hours. or external events. same will be displayed as an icon. in case of overlapping scheduled downtime. the graph will show the data points already collected. Similarly. SNMP trap.Creating custom graphs always use the current week as baseline data. same will be displayed as an icon. — Hourly Min: Lowest values of data found for the specified graph period. — Show Intelligent Events: If there are any intelligent events on the selected attributes and for the selected duration. the same will be displayed as an icon. Low indicator can be selected only when viewing data older than 24 hours. There will be two different icons for open and closed intelligent events. Critical Absolute Thresholds: If thresholds have been set for — Minor Signature Threshold: Composite values of signature minor — Major Signature Threshold: Composite values of signature major threshold. baseline associated to threshold. — Show Abnormality: If there are any events on the selected attributes and for — Show External Events: If there are any events raised by change entry. Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 253 . — Hourly Max: Highest values of data found for the specified graph period. baseline associated to threshold. In case the Scheduled downtime is created after the start time and before the end time for the day. — Scheduled Downtime: To view the scheduled downtime for the monitor on the graph. These indicators show you what the event settings are relative to the performance of the data you are viewing. and applied PAD factor. The baseline indicator is recalibrated for each hourly point per week. baseline associated to threshold. daily. Due to the lag in start of a scheduled downtime event.

Instance Name or Attribute Name. — Period Avg: Displays average attribute value of all points of Period Min and Period Max attribute values. However. SLO indicator will only be available for upgrade setups with existing views. ■ Show each attribute on a separate graph . same will be displayed as an icon. 13 Select Device Name. For complete definition of configuration attributes and their functionality. see the BMC ProactiveNet Monitor Guide. ■ Show all attributes on a single graph .If you select more than one attribute.If you chose more than one instance. ■ Click Edit to change the selected schedule. ■ Show selected attributes on the corresponding graph – This will preserve the existing graph settings. — Period Max: Displays highest attribute value on Y-axis. ■ Show each monitor instance on a separate graph . If you select some more attributes for the existing graph. 12 Select an appropriate Graph Option.All attributes you choose are charted on one graph. — Period Min: Displays lowest attribute value on Y-axis. each is charted separately on separate graphs. this is not available if Scheduled Downtime indicator is selected. Note 11 (optional) Select Schedule from the list. There will be two different icons for open and closed violations. 254 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . to show the same in the legend. — Config Attributes: These attributes are displayed only if configuration attributes are available on the monitor. — Shaded Baseline: Select this option to highlight the area corresponding to the previous baseline selection. the new attributes will also be added to the same graph. 14 Select the Data Type to be used.Creating custom graphs — Show Violations: If there are any violations on the selected attributes and for the selected duration. ■ Click New to define a new schedule. each instance is charted on a separate graph.

A submenu of the child instances is displayed with all the instances that have stats attributes. or use the icons located on the side of the graph to perform other functions. You can change the parameters on the displayed screen. 2 Select any child instance to create a graph for that instance. the Show Parent link displays the super parent which has stats attributes. If this instance does not have stats attributes. 16 Select Refresh this page for every “n” minutes to refresh the page for the specified time. To show the parent instance for the selected monitor instance 1 Click Show Parent in the graph display screen to display the immediate parent instances or the complete hierarchy of parent instances. This option can be selected only if relative time range option is selected from the filter area. see Additional information for changing graph display on page 271 for information about these icons. Unless this option is unchecked. The individual or multiple monitor graph displays attributes selected. rate data will be used.Creating custom graphs Note When raw data is selected and if raw data is not available for the entire time range. 15 Select Auto Scale if you need auto-scaling for the graph. You Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 255 . To show the child instances for the selected monitor instance 1 Click Show Children in the graph display screen to display a menu of all the child instances of the selected monitor instance. all graphs will be automatically scaled. 17 Click Generate Graph. For more information.

Creating custom graphs can also choose to display the first 50 child instances using the All option. 2 In the Views & Graphs drawer. This allows IT groups to justify performance improvements on IT hardware or software. . Figure 14: Show children Creating a x-y graph X-Y graphs are used to show a correlated view of two metrics. To create a x-y graph 1 In the navigation pane in the Operations Console. This option displays only the instances that have stats attributes. are appropriate for X-Y graphs. This graphing is especially useful for related metrics where the dependency is not very clearly known. A good example for online stores may be to correlate a business metric (like $s per hour) with Web server performance. select the X-Y Graph option 4 Select a Group Filter. All such scenarios. click the Custom Graphs icon 3 In the Custom Graphs screen. 6 Click Next. where the relationship between two metrics needs to be qualified. The system populates the corresponding monitor instances in the Monitor Instance area. click Views & Graphs. 5 Select Monitor Types. . 256 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Displaying this graph over a period of time can give you a visual representation of the relationship.

■ Click Edit to change the selected schedule. ■ Time Range: Time Range option allows the Start and End Time selections to reflect either a particular day and hour or a particular duration of time. 12 Click Generate Graph(s). 8 Click Apply. 10 Select attribute for X and Y axis. The Pareto bar chart includes resources with the highest average (based on the common measurement). The list lets you choose from 1 hour up to 3 months. You can change the parameters on Graph Display screen. The number of bars (N) is limited to 15 items per thumbnail. see Additional information for changing graph display on page 271 for information on these icons. ■ Show Graph for the last: Choose the time period you want to show on the graph. or hour to compare measurements. You can change the time and date when you want to view resource data for the previous day.Creating custom graphs 7 Select Monitor Instances for X and Y axis. 9 Select appropriate values in the Filter Area. Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 257 . You can create either a Top N or a Bottom N graph. ■ Click New to define a new schedule. such as the last four hours. Top N graphs compare monitored resources based on a common measurement. On the Custom Graphs (X-Y Graph) screen. 11 Select the Schedule. week. BMC ProactiveNet administrator sets the number of bars in the graph. Creating a Top N graph Top N Graph is a Pareto bar graph comparing Top N resources. For more information. or use the icons located on the side of the graph to perform other functions. Top N graphs can be created from both the Operations Console and the Administration Console.

11 Specify the duration. To create a Top N graph 1 In the navigation pane in the Operations Console. The system populates the corresponding attributes in the lower pane of the screen. and select the units (Days or Hours) from the adjacent list. However. in the Top 10 Interface in Utilization graph.Creating custom graphs Computation of Top N graphs provides an order to the individual elements within each graph. click Views & Graphs. 8 Click Apply. You can select only one monitor type here. ■ Click Edit to change the selected schedule. Example. select the Top N Graph option 4 Select the Group Filter. click the Custom Graphs icon. 9 On the Customs Graphs screen. Note 258 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 6 Click Next. 5 Select the Monitor Type. 7 Select an Attribute. 3 In the Custom Graphs screen. 3-dimensional graphs configured through the Operations Console retain the option during editing through the Administration Console. 13 Select the Graph Preference: 2 Dimensional or 3 Dimensional 14 Select the Schedule. 10 Select the number of bars from the list. 12 Select the Values to be displayed: Average and High or Average and Low. the number one graph shows the highest average for all interfaces. The 3 Dimensional option is available only through the Operations Console. ■ Click New to define a new schedule. 15 Click Generate Graph. select the Graph Type: Top N or Bottom N. . 2 In the Views & Graphs drawer.

Description of slices is available in a file for each threshold or SLO at the following path: installDirectory /usr/pw/pronto/conf/ piebuckets. the system prompts you to create or choose another threshold. contain numerous devices. If the selected threshold does not exist for the attribute to graph. A list of sources used to compile the chart is displayed.xml. Indicators are not applicable to Pie graphs. Pie graphs are available only on attributes that have set thresholds. To modify the statistics. respectively are not available for Top N Graphs. data is reported based on the context of a specific threshold and the break down of data points into 5 different discreet ranges is determined by the threshold value. The Description table located below the graph lists data resources of the Top N graph. You can also generate Individual graphs from each of these items. 2 Click Generate graph. Clicking List All at the bottom of the Top N table expands the table to list all resources that comprise the selected category. Reason being. Creating a pie graph Pie graphs show the distribution of points for specified time ranges in individual pie slices and show the distribution of values over time. see Creating a line or area graph on page 251. If the threshold is unavailable after graph creation. a NO Data image appears for the pie chart even if there is data in the database.Creating custom graphs Note The Forward and Backward buttons that help you view graphs corresponding to the succeeding and preceding time ranges. Pie graphs are best suited for getting a high-level overview of the performance of a specific attribute. and services. Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 259 . The List All feature allows you to generate a maximum number of 100 items per page. Listing all button Most monitored categories. since only a single instance and attribute selection is plotted. such as Availability and Utilization. interfaces. and Critical thresholds. To view a stacked graph for any of the listed instances 1 Select the check box corresponding to the monitor instance. The Num column provides a link to open the Individual graph for the resource. Different slices are available for Major. Minor.

■ Although the breakdown is described in terms of % ranges. values in the graph 260 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Pie graphs allow users to see compliance to threshold over a period. will be shown in terms of the unit that it is collected. 8 Make your selections on the Custom Graph screen. 2 In the Views & Graphs drawer. 3 In the Custom Graphs screen. or use the icons located on the side of the graph to perform other functions. To create a pie graph 1 In the navigation pane in the Operations Console. Note ■ The Forward and Backward buttons that help you view graphs corresponding to the succeeding and preceding time range respectively are not available for Pie Graphs. 6 Click Next. You cannot select more than one monitor type here. This kind of graph makes most sense in a view that updates automatically (on a daily basis). and can be added to a view. You can change the parameters here. and simultaneously see the percentage time where data is falling into each range of values. 5 Select the Monitor Type. 9 Click Generate Graph. select Pie Graph option . For more information see Additional information for changing graph display on page 271 for information on these icons. 4 Select the Group Filter. 7 Select a single Attribute. and click Apply.Creating custom graphs Pie graphs offer a 3D option (available only through the Operations Console). click Views & Graphs. The system populates the corresponding attributes in the lower pane. click the Custom Graphs icon.

Creating custom graphs

Creating a dial gauge graph
The Dial Gauge feature enables you to see monitor data graphically in a semicircular gauge with a dynamic needle that fluctuates between the last three data poll values for the specified attribute. Dial Gauges are used to show a real-time feed of the latest data points, which is best suited for very important attributes that require close attention. Views containing Dial Gauges do not update every two minutes like other views. The gauge fluctuates between the last three data poll values, simulating real-time movement. Displayed color zones are as per threshold settings of the specified monitor and show red for critical, orange for major, yellow for minor thresholds, and green for normal behavior. Like other graph options, when you click the thumbnail, the Graph Display screen appears and you can modify the graph as needed. The dial gauge applet polls the server for data according to the predefined poll interval (this can be configured). The gauge displays the current value at the bottom. The needle pauses for a longer duration at the CURRENT data point highlighting the most current value. If there is No Response or No Data from the monitor, the needle points to zero and the system displays an appropriate message at the bottom.

Note
■ This feature requires the Java plug-in. ■ The latest Sun Java VM must be installed on the computer that hosts the BMC

ProactiveNet Server.

To create a dial gauge graph
1 In the navigation pane in the Operations Console, click Views & Graphs. 2 In the Views & Graphs drawer, click the Custom Graphs icon 3 In the Custom Graphs screen, select the Dial Gauge option 4 Select a Group Filter. 5 Select a Monitor Type, and click Next. The system populates the corresponding instances in the lower pane. 6 Select a Monitor Instance, and click Apply. . .

Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 261

Creating custom graphs

7 On the Custom Graphs screen, choose a Single Attribute. 8 Under Display Options, select the display options from the list. You can choose to show either Intelligent Event or SLO threshold zones on the gauge. The dial gauge will display major, minor, critical, or SLO thresholds and show the actual value of the attribute on the gauge. 9 In the Add this Graph to View section (Dial Gauges can only be configured to be seen from a View), specify the Graph Name (name for the Dial Gauge). 10 Choose to create a new view or add the graph to an existing view. 11 Click Add to View. For add to new view selection, specify the View name. For add to existing view selection, the graph is available under the selected View. Any other graph you add to the View will also be visible. From here, you can Add, Edit, and Delete the view by choosing the corresponding buttons.

Note Fast poll frequency is not available for the dial gauge. For below type thresholds, the colors displayed will show in the opposite direction as compared to above thresholds. Although the gauge appears to update every second, it is important to realize that the data feed is still only as quick as the monitor that is polling for the data.
The gauge repeats the last 3 values over and over again until a new data point is received from the monitor, at which point the oldest data point in the gauge is discarded. That is, every time the needle changes position on the Gauge, it does not mean the gauge is displaying a new data point. The latest 3 data values for that attribute, which gives an indication of the latest trend and most up to date values are displayed. The last data value is always shown for the longest period to make it clear that it is the most current value. Adding too many dial gauges to a single view may take a long time to load. The ideal number of dial gauges in a view is 4 or less. However, we suggest that if more gauges must be added to a view, do not exceed 12.

Tip

Limitations of dial gauge graphs
■ Dial Gauges can ONLY be added to a view. ■ Dial Gauge administration can be done only through the Operations Console.

262 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Creating custom graphs

■ Dial Gauge display requires a supported version of Java Plug-in. If the plug-in is

not available, then a grey box is displayed. For information on supported Java Plugin versions, see the BMC ProactiveNet Release Notes. example, yahoo response time minor > 100ms and major < 50 ms (this should not happen but in case its configured this way), the below type threshold is ignored. thresholds) i.e. minor < major < critical, if this is not so, then the larger zone overlaps the smaller one. for the first time, the delay is more compared to subsequent accesses.

■ For instance or attribute where thresholds are defined both above and below,

■ It is assumed that thresholds are defined in an increasing order (for above type

■ Initial loading of the applet takes some time. So, when the user accesses the page

■ Due to the increased loading time for applets, too many dial gauges in a single

view have performance implications. It is recommended that a maximum of 12 dial gauges be used in a single view.

■ If threshold is not defined, the system displays a normal gauge (i.e., full green). ■ Tool tip is not displayed for dial gauges on the View page. However, tool tip is

available for the link below.

■ If the difference between threshold values is very less, the user may not be able to

notice the color defined for the zone in the dial gauge.

■ Dial gauge displays zero for negative data values. ■ Very large numbers (11 or more digits) may not appear clearly on the gauge.

However, there is no implication on the accuracy of data displayed below the gauge.

■ For large values, the value may overlap with the zone separator line. ■ For very small values i.e. values below 0.001, the needle will be displayed very

close to zero.

■ If the proxy server used requires authentication, the user is prompted for the user

name and password while accessing a view containing dial gauges. gauge and can be ignored.

■ Exceptions on the plug-in console do not interfere with the functioning of the

The following exceptions may be seen in the plug-in console:
■ On some Internet Explorer versions, if the dash board contains a dial gauge in the

second row, some times the dial gauge in the second row appears as overlapped with the All Events page below. Scrolling the dashboard will clear this.

Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 263

Customizing monitor graphs

■ Exceptions that may be observed in plug-in console:
java.lang.ArrayIndexOutOfBoundsException: 0 >= 0 at java.util.Vector.elementAt(Unknown Source) at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Circle.calValueAngle(Circle) at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Circle.drawNeedle(Circle) at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Dial.renderDial(Dial) at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Dial.paint(Dial) at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Dial.update(Dial) at sun.awt.RepaintArea.paint(Unknown Source) at sun.awt.windows.WComponentPeer.handleEvent(Unknown Source) at java.awt.Component.dispatchEventImpl(Unknown Source) at java.awt.Container.dispatchEventImpl(Unknown Source) at java.awt.Component.dispatchEvent(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventQueue.dispatchEvent(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.pumpOneEventForHierarchy(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.pumpEventsForHierarchy(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.pumpEvents(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.pumpEvents(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.run(Unknown Source) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------java.lang.NullPointerException at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Circle.totalDiv1(Circle) at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Circle.drawZone(Circle) at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Dial.renderDial(Dial) at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Dial.paint(Dial) at com.elegantj.gauges.dial.Dial.update(Dial) at sun.awt.RepaintArea.paint(Unknown Source) at sun.awt.windows.WComponentPeer.handleEvent(Unknown Source) at java.awt.Component.dispatchEventImpl(Unknown Source) at java.awt.Container.dispatchEventImpl(Unknown Source) at java.awt.Component.dispatchEvent(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventQueue.dispatchEvent(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.pumpOneEventForHierarchy(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.pumpEventsForHierarchy(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.pumpEvents(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.pumpEvents(Unknown Source) at java.awt.EventDispatchThread.run(Unknown Source)

Customizing monitor graphs
An Individual Graph is a line graph giving a real-time view of the data collected on a specific item. When you click an Individual graph thumbnail, its full-scale version opens in the Graph Display window, along with dialog boxes. You can globally change the line sizes in your graphs by changing the property in pronet.graphs.indGraph.lineWidth=<2>. This does not affect images already created. Related Topics Graph tab on page 265 Attributes and indicators tab on page 266 Monitor information tab on page 268 Button options on page 268
264 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Customizing monitor graphs

Creating an individual/multiple monitor graphs on page 270

Graph tab
Once the larger graph appears in the Graph Display window, there are three tabs where you can interact with and customize the graph. This enables you to change the data view in any particular instance by changing the attributes, indicators, or the start and end time of the current graph. These options allow viewing of data that is not currently part of the display or allows one to focus on a specific type of data to analyze and isolate a problem. Data is available for the last 90 days. The Graph tab shows the larger graph seen as a thumbnail in the View area. Additional options are available on the right side of the graph. The available icons change depending on the type and status of the graph. For details on available options, see Additional information for changing graph display on page 271. Figure 15: Graph Tab

Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 265

Customizing monitor graphs

Attributes and indicators tab
The Attributes and Indicators tab lets you dynamically change statistical data displayed in the graph you are viewing. The statistics selections (attributes) vary based on the monitored entity. A colored box around an attribute indicates there is at least one open event of the severity indicated by the color of the box. You can select device or application-dependent elements for viewing. Choose the attributes you want to graph for each instance. The attributes available vary depending on the monitor chosen. You can chart up to 12 attributes per graph,

266 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Customizing monitor graphs

however you are limited to 2 units of measure (i.e., # and ms). For more information on attribute statistics and their function, see the BMC ProactiveNet Monitor Guide. Figure 16: Attributes and Indicators tab

For more details on Attributes and Indicators Tab, see Creating a line or area graph on page 251.

Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 267

Customizing monitor graphs

Monitor information tab
The Description table is located at the top of the Monitor Information tab. The table contains the item targeted for the graph and information collected from the SNMP data where applicable as well as specific monitored items such as disk location, Web site URL, and instance name. The table does not have default headings but lists pertinent information for the selected resource. Figure 17: Description Table

Button options
There are four button options from which to choose:
■ Generate Graph(s) - Generates graphs once you have defined your choices. ■ Add Graph - Adds another graph to the set of graphs already plotted.

268 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Customizing monitor graphs

■ Add All to View - Adds all graphs to the view.

Figure 18: Add this graph(s) to View – for single graph

If there is more than one graph, you can select the graph to set the graph as thumbnail. Figure 19: Add graph(s) to View – for multiple graphs

Use the Set thumbnail graph list to set the graph as thumbnail.
■ Printer Friendly - Provides a view of graphs and their description tables without

printing the additional options available on the screen.

Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 269

Customizing monitor graphs

Creating an individual/multiple monitor graphs
You can dynamically change the attributes or indicators using the graphing options available below the graph or use the icons located on the right side of the graph to perform other graphing functions. For more information, see Additional information for changing graph display on page 271 Generating a multi-monitor graph:
■ Provides the same options available for an Individual graph. ■ Allows you to select the option for Show instance names in legend for multi-

instance graphs to include instance names in the graph legend.

■ If two monitor instances with different raw retention periods are plotted in a

single graph, where one instance graphs rate data and the other instance graphs raw data, then the Condensed data string is not displayed on the y-axis of the graph. If both instances use rate data for plotting the graph, then this string is displayed. data and the other may fetch raw data, for the same time range selected. In this case, the Condensed data string is not displayed. set of graphs together but still want to add it into a view. After a multi-graph is added to a view, the thumbnail displays a small MG icon next to it

■ Due to the difference in the raw retention periods, one monitor may fetch rate

■ Multi-graphs can be added to a view. This is useful if you want to always see this

If an intelligent event is active for a given attribute or indicator on the graph, the outline is highlighted with the intelligent event color.
■ Red - Critical ■ Orange - Major ■ Yellow - Minor

You can globally change the line sizes in your graphs by changing the property in pronet.graphs.indGraph.lineWidth=<2>. This does not affect images already created.

270 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Additional information for changing graph display

Additional information for changing graph display
When a graph is generated, you will notice a series of icons located to the right of the graph. These are additional options you can choose from:
■ Zoom In or Out ■ Export to Excel ■ Add New Monitors to this Graph ■ More Info ■ Add this Graph to View ■ All Abnormalities ■ Device At A Glance ■ Delete ■ Resource Pool ■ Go to Probable Cause ■ MAIL this Page ■ Share this Page ■ PDF

In addition to these functions, the exact value at any point in the graph is also available. To check the exact value at any point on the graph, place the mouse pointer on the point. BMC ProactiveNet displays the value as tool tip. Related Topics Adjusting graph axes on page 272 Exporting graph data to Excel on page 273 Adding new monitors to a graph on page 273 Obtaining more information on page 273
Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 271

Additional information for changing graph display

Adding a graph to a view on page 273 Displaying all abnormalities for a graph on page 275 Navigating the graph page on page 275 Deleting a graph from a multi-graph view on page 275 Displaying graphs for a resource pool on page 275 Analyzing probable cause on page 276 Mailing the graph page on page 276 Sharing the graph page on page 276 Generating PDF on page 277

Adjusting graph axes
Use the Zoom function to adjust the vertical axis of the graph for viewing data more closely or from a higher level. The left axis is Y1 and the right axis is Y2.

To adjust the graph
1 Click the Zoom icon to display a separate window.

2 Based on the values used to plot the graph, enter the maximum and minimum values to be used to zoom the graph and by default the graphs are auto-scaled. 3 Click the Zoom icon to view results. You can only view one axis change at a time and this option does not permanently change the graph. The browser instance may, at times, cache the zoomed view of a graph. Using the browser navigation buttons may result in display of the cached pages. To avoid this, use the navigation options provided within the Operations Console.

272 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide

Additional information for changing graph display

Exporting graph data to Excel
Use the Export to Excel icon to export all data to a excel file for viewing outside BMC ProactiveNet. This icon launches the excel application and displays all data in the .csv file.

Adding new monitors to a graph
Use the Add New Monitors to this Graph icon to add new monitors to a graph.

When you click this icon, the Custom Graph screen appears. Follow the same procedure as creating a Custom Graph.

Obtaining more information
When a monitor has more information attached, you can use the More Info icon to find out if errors have occurred, and to display other pertinent information such as matched patterns being monitored by a Log File monitor or the reason behind a Web URL not responding. This icon launches the More Info for Graph table, which provides information about the graph and the possible error. If there are more than 25, click Next to bring up additional items. The More Info feature is available for Applications only; it is not available for SNMP information, such as interface or DLCI details.

Adding a graph to a view
Use the Add this Graph to View icon category. to add a particular graph to a view

This icon launches the Add This Monitor to View pop-up window. 1 Specify the graph name, duration, and name of the view to which you want to add the graph. 2 Click Add to View to activate this graph in the View. Once a graph is added to a view, its parameters no longer need to be determined each time you want to view data in that manner. Simply click the named graph in its View group. The Domain Knowledge field is displayed whenever you add a graph to a view. In the Domain Knowledge field, you can enter specific domain knowledge that other users may benefit from when looking at the graph. This information is also used by the Event Details page when events are generated against the same monitor

Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 273

Use this field to enter specific domain knowledge that other users may benefit from by looking at the graph.links to the Domain Knowledge graph is automatically provided to aid users in troubleshooting. 274 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . if the relationship between an event and an event is recorded as domain knowledge. Figure 20: Domain Knowledge field To edit the Domain Knowledge information from the Graph Display page 1 Click Edit next to the Domain Knowledge field. 3 Click Update. The Domain Knowledge field is displayed on the Add this graph(s) to View page. Domain knowledge Domain Knowledge information can be added whenever you add a graph to a view. This information is also used by the Event Details page when events are generated against the same monitor . users can easily trace the event the next time a similar event occurs. 2 Make changes to the information displayed. ■ The Change Domain Knowledge screen is displayed.Additional information for changing graph display . Domain Knowledge information acts as a repository of graph information.links to the Domain Knowledge graph are automatically provided to aid users in troubleshooting. as required. For instance.

This option is available only for graphs with a single monitor instance and can also be accessed from the Tools menu on the Device Matrix page and from the Graph page. Navigating the graph page allows easy navigation from the graph to other The Device at a Glance icon related attributes graphed below without having to re-implement graph selections. Displaying graphs for a resource pool The Resource Pool icon launches the Graph Display page displaying graphs for each of the individual monitor instances forming the Resource Pool. Deleting a graph from a multi-graph view The Delete icon is tied to the Multi-graph feature and is displayed only when there are two or more graphs. and Pie graphs. Click the icon to access the All Abnormalities page that displays abnormalities for: ■ The same group on which the Abnormality Index Monitor is based ■ The same duration for which the graph has been plotted This icon is available for Line. Displaying all abnormalities for a graph is displayed as an additional graphing function only The All Abnormalities icon for graphs plotted using attributes of the same Abnormality Index monitor instance. Area.Additional information for changing graph display A message indicating that the information has been updated is displayed. Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 275 . X-Y. When displayed from the Device Matrix page. the graph displays the last four hours. the Device At a Glance page shows a stacked line graph for all monitors on the device. Use this icon to delete a graph from a multi-graph view. click Close. The All Abnormalities icon is not displayed if a graph is plotted using attributes of multiple monitor types. When generated. 4 In the Graph Description window.

This link can be sent to others via E-Mail or can be pasted in a shared location. Copy Link Location in Mozilla Firefox. This opens the BMC ProactiveNet Login screen if you have not logged in. This link is available in the following locations: ■ Custom Graph (all the graph formats) ■ Drill-Downs from Views ■ Drill-Downs from RCA 276 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 2 Click Copy Shortcut in IE. 2 Enter the User Name and Password and click Log On. 2 Specify the From and E-mail Address in the displayed window. Mailing the graph page To send the graph via e-mail 1 Click the Mail this Page icon .Additional information for changing graph display Analyzing probable cause Click the Go to Probable Cause icon to access the Event History page. To view this graph: 1 Copy and paste the link in the browser address location and click Enter. 3 A brief description can be sent via e-mail either in HTML or plain text format. 4 Select HTML or Plain text to send the description in plain text format and click Send. Sharing the graph page To share the page 1 Right-click the Share link.BMC ProactiveNet navigates to the specified screen. so that it can be used by others.

Additional information for changing graph display ■ Drill-Downs from Event Details ■ All Abnormalities ■ DD outputs Generating PDF Click the PDF icon to view the graphs and the configuration attributes table. Chapter 5 Customizing graphs 277 . in PDF format without the additional options available on the screen.

Additional information for changing graph display 278 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

a BMC ProactiveNet administrator must assign appropriate view management privileges. and display graphs based on the assigned access rights. A view enables you to store graphs and reports. View management privileges allow you to manage the following views: ■ Graph-based views that include graphs ■ Report-based views that include associated reports ■ Folder views that include other views Navigating the Views & Graphs drawer Use the Views & Graphs drawer in the navigation pane in the Operations Console to create and edit views.6 Managing Views What is a view? A view is a placeholder for graphs that allows you to view the graph at any time with the new data value plotted. To create views. Chapter 6 Managing Views 279 .

Using the graph thumbnails.Navigating the Views & Graphs drawer Figure 21 on page 280 displays a single view and identifies the major areas within the Views screen. Thumbnails provide a high-level view of all graphs that exist in the view. The source of the monitored data always appears within the description column of the graph tables. These options are available only for the graph-based view. update frequency. and may not always represent the most current data. By default. and the date and time the view was last updated above the graph thumbnail. ■ View details displays the owner. The highlight color indicates the event severity. rename. enlarge the view. Thumbnails display data from the last update. data source. the View details are not displayed. 280 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Figure 21: Views ■ The title bar contains icons for customizing the display and managing views. the highlight color returns to blue. ■ View display shows the graph thumbnails. you can Note The graph border colors act as visual notifications when data collection pertaining to that graph is in an alarming condition. ■ Critical = Red ■ Major = Orange ■ Minor = Yellow When an event is closed. The graph labels are based on monitored attributes. You must select the Show View details at top of the page option when creating a view to display the details. and the date and time the graph was generated. or delete the graph.

For detailed information on thumbnails. Generally. Figure 22: Inverted triangle symbol The thumbnail appears blank if the monitored resource provides a minimum amount of data during the polling period. For more information see Managing view templates on page 289. edit. View settings that are configured when creating or editing a view differ for different types of views. this happens with newly created instances. Table 61 on page 281 lists the icons available on the View screen. Related topics: Managing graph thumbnails for a view on page 287 “Customizing graphs” on page 249 Managing view templates on page 289 Managing views Through the Views tab you can create.Managing views An inverted triangle symbol is used as a placeholder and is displayed in the following conditions: ■ Data for the entire period is not available for creating a graph ■ Rate data computation for the hour is not complete for the top 10 graphs. see Managing graph thumbnails for a view on page 287. Views can also be created using view templates. Table 61: Icons on View screen Icon Icon name View Template Administration Description Creates a view using a view template and dynamically updates the view Chapter 6 Managing Views 281 . or delete any number of views.

<. provide the necessary information to create a view and add a graph to the view as described in Table 62 on page 282. The Operations Console does not support special characters such as \. and > in the view name. with all options ■ One column: Displays a large size view. click Add View.Managing views Icon Icon name None Show/Hide View Details Add View Edit View Update View Delete View Description Displays the names of the available views Displays hides the view details Adds a view Edits a view Refreshes the graphs and displays updated thumbnails Deletes a view To create or edit a graph-based view 1 In the View Display screen. ". select Graph Based to create a graph-based view Sets the preferences of the thumbnail. with all options Description Note Layout Type 282 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .a Specifies the view name Indicates the type of view. \. Any view name containing special characters is displayed in hexadecimal format on the Operations Console. Table 62: Inputs for the Graph-based Add View screen Fields Add View View Title View Type 2. with fewer options ■ Two columns: Displays a medium size view. 2 In the Add View screen. '. The layout type can be one of the following: ■ Four columns: Displays a small size view.

For detailed instructions. By default. To edit an existing view. 5 Click Finish. Tip To create or edit a report-based view 1 In the View screen. 2 In the Add View screen. You can toggle the display of view details using the Show/ Hide View icon. View Create Option Indicates how the view is created: ■ Manual: Creates a view manually ■ Template: Enables selection and application of a view template to a view Graphs in View Add Graph Adds a graph to the view. click Add View. Chapter 6 Managing Views 283 . provide the necessary information to create a view and add a report to the view as described in Table 63 on page 284. 4 Click Add to View. click Edit View on the View screen and follow the steps listed in To create or edit a graph-based view on page 282. the details are not displayed. 3 Specify a name for the graph.Managing views Fields Update Description Sets the update frequency of the view as follows: ■ Daily ■ Hourly ■ Manually Update the View for every xx minutes Updates the view for a time specified in minutes Show View details at top of the page Displays the details in the View screen. see Creating custom graphs on page 249. a You cannot configure the view type when editing an existing view.

see Creating or editing a report on page 294. This option is available when you create multiple graphs or reports. The layout type can be one of the following: ■ Four columns: Displays a small size view. select the default report(s) to add to the view. 3 In the Reports screen. 2.b Add Reports Adds a report to the view.Managing views Note ■ Users with access to a view have unrestricted access to all the reports.a Reports in View 2. the details are not displayed. the bar graph thumbnail may not display all the indices in Y-axis. You can toggle the display of view details using the Show/ Hide View icon. For detailed instructions. with fewer options ■ Two columns: Displays a medium size view. a By default. ■ The Order button sets the order of graphs or reports in the view. select Report Based to create a report-based view Sets the preferences of the thumbnail. By default. 284 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The thumbnail can be set using the following choices: ■ Add Report as Thumbnail: Sets the report as a thumbnail ■ Select Complete Report as Entire View: Displays a single large report on the View screen Layout Type Sets the preferences of the thumbnail. generated reports are added to the view if they are not generated. with all options ■ One column: Displays a large size view. with all options Show View details at top of the page Displays the details in the View screen. Table 63: Inputs for the Report-based Add View screen Fields View Title View Type Add Report as Thumbnail or Complete Report as Entire View Description Specifies the view name Indicates the type of view. and then click Add To View. b For Capacity Trend Reports.

select Folder to create a folder-based view Chapter 6 Managing Views 285 . the view to the top level first. where one group can be a sub-group of many other groups. Related topics: To show the child instances for the selected monitor instance on page 255 To create or edit a folder view on page 285 To delete a view on page 286 Managing view templates on page 289 Tip To create or edit a folder view 1 In the View screen. click Add View. ■ When adding a folder. provide the necessary information to create a view and add a folder to the view as described in Table 64 on page 285. Note ■ Folder view administration is available from the Operations Console only. the children in the folder are not deleted. This is different in Group behavior. Table 64: Inputs for the Folder-based Add View screen Fields View Title View Type Description Specifies the view name Indicates the type of view. ■ Individual views cannot be moved from one folder to another. To edit an existing view.Managing views 4 Click Finish. click Edit View on the View screen and follow the steps listed in To show the child instances for the selected monitor instance on page 255. without moving ■ If a folder view is deleted. all the immediate children are moved to the top level. Access rights to folder view applies to all child views in the folder. Instead. 2 In the Add View screen. ■ A view can be a child of only one folder view. the Available Top Level Views shows only top level views.

Related topics To create or edit a graph-based view on page 282 To show the child instances for the selected monitor instance on page 255 To delete a view on page 286 Managing view templates on page 289 Tip To delete a view 1 Select the view that you wish to delete. 3 In the Confirmation dialog box.Managing views Fields Description Show View details at top of the page Displays the details in the View screen. click OK. the details are not displayed. Default Sort Select Child View Available Top Level Views/ Selected Child Views Select the view to add to the folder from Available Top Level Views. You can toggle the display of view details using the Show/ Hide View icon. and move it using the arrow key to Selected Child Views Sorts the selected child views in an ascending by default 3 Click Finish. Related topics Customizing monitor graphs on page 264 Creating or editing a report on page 294 286 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . click Edit View on the View screen and follow the steps listed in To create or edit a folder view on page 285. 2 Click Delete View. By default. To edit an existing view.

Show Home View Enables selection of a view that must be displayed as the default whenever you access the Views tab. 2 In the Operations tab. and then click Large View. Chapter 6 Managing Views 287 . You cannot set folderbased views as dashboards. modify the following settings. 2 Right-click a graph thumbnail. You can only set graph-based views as dashboard views. under Layout Preferences. as necessary. You cannot view the large view for a single layout type of graph. Thumbnails of any graphs associated with the view are displayed in the right view pane. Table 65: Basic configuration for View display Setting Show Dashboard View Description Enables selection of the dashboard view that must be displayed as a thumbnail whenever you access the Views drawer in the navigation pane. 3 Click Apply. click Options.Managing graph thumbnails for a view Customizing the basic screen layout on the Views tab To customize the View display 1 In the top right of the Operations Console. Managing graph thumbnails for a view To switch to large view 1 In the Views & Graphs drawer in the navigation pane. Note To rename a thumbnail 1 In the Views & Graphs drawer in the navigation pane. select a view from the navigation tree. select a view from the navigation tree.

click Add this Graph to View . and then click Delete. provide the necessary information as described in Table 66 on page 288. and then click Rename. To delete a thumbnail 1 In the Views & Graphs drawer in the navigation pane. Note To add graph(s) to a new or exiting view 1 In the Views & Graphs drawer in the navigation pane. 288 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 2 Right-click a graph thumbnail. enter a name for the graph. 3 In the Rename Graph dialog box. 3 In the Custom Graphs screen. 2 Double-click a graph thumbnail to be added to an existing view. 4 In the Add this graph(s) to Viewscreen. you can view a large view for the same. and then click Apply. 2 Right-click a graph thumbnail.Managing graph thumbnails for a view Thumbnails of any graphs associated with the view are displayed in the right view pane. However. You cannot delete or rename a graph that is created using a view template. select a view from the navigation tree. select a view from the navigation tree. 3 In the confirmation dialog box. Table 66: Fields in the Add this graph(s) to View screen Field Graph Name Graph Duration Add to View Domain Knowledge Procedure Enter the graph name Select the time duration for which to generate the graph Select the view to which you want to add the graph or create a new view to add the graph Type the domain information 5 Click Add to View. click OK.

5 Click Add Graph. 9 Select the attributes applicable to the graph. To create a view template 1 In the Views & Graphs drawer in the navigation pane. 2 In the right view pane. 7 Select the Group filter. 6 In the Custom Graphs screen. click the View Template Administration button. attributes. associated views are also deleted.Managing view templates ■ For detailed instructions. Chapter 6 Managing Views 289 . 4 In the Create View Template screen. select a view from the navigation tree. if a view is deleted from the view template. and indicators. The Add to View screen does not consider views created using a view template. When you add a graph to a view template all the associated views are updated. click Add. see To create or edit a graph-based view on page 282. 3 In the View Template Administration screen. select the graph type. Related topics: “Customizing graphs” on page 249 Managing view templates on page 289 Note Managing view templates View templates are reusable components that are place holders for details such as graph type. You can apply a view template to groups or services to create a view. monitor type. and then click Finish. enter a name for the view template. 8 Click Next. and then the applicable monitor type(s). Similarly. A view that is created using a view template is automatically updated when a new instance is added or removed from the group.

only monitor types are considered. and therefore. This option is available when multiple graphs are added. see Creating custom graphs on page 249. 10 In the Create View Template screen. 290 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . delete. Note The Order button is used to set the order of graphs in the View Template. Tip In the View Template Administration screen. no dynamic updates to the monitor instances take place. To delete a view template On deletion of a view template. or edit the graph in that template. under the Select column. 2 Make the necessary modifications. you can choose monitor instances. the views created using the template become normal (manual) views. select the view template that you wish to delete. 2 Click Delete Selected. ■ The View Template Administration screen displays the newly created template. when you mouse over on the views count. 3 In the confirmation dialog box. under the Edit column. all the views created from that template are listed. 1 In the View Template Administration screen. click Finish. but in view template creation. you can add. click Edit in the view template row that you wish to edit. To edit a view template When you edit a view template. Creating views for Report or Folder based views does not display the count in the view template wizard. click OK. 3 Click Finish.Managing view templates Note ■ In manual view creation. ■ View template supports and displays the count only for Graph based view. 1 In the View Template Administration screen. For further information. ■ Based on the selected graph type the corresponding screen opens.

select Graph Based to create a graph-based view. with all options Update Sets the update frequency of the view as follows: ■ Daily ■ Hourly ■ Manually Update the View for every xx minutes Updates the view for a time specified in minutes Description Show View details at top of the page Displays the details in the View screen. the details are not displayed. Sets the preferences of the thumbnail. You can toggle the display of view details using the Show/ Hide View icon. provide the necessary information to create a view using a view template as described in Table 67 on page 291.Managing view templates To create a view using a view template 1 In the View Template Administration screen. Table 67: Inputs for the Add View screen using a view template Fields Add View View Title View Type Layout Type Specifies the view name Indicates the type of view. click the Add View button in the row for the view template that you want to use. 2 In the Add View screen. under the Add View column. with fewer options ■ Two columns: Displays a medium size view. View Create Option Select View Template Template Details Groups Provides a link to the Groups Filter dialog box that allows you to specify the groups to which this view template must be applied Chapter 6 Managing Views 291 Indicates how the view is created. By default. The layout type can be one of the following: ■ Four columns: Displays a small size view. with all options ■ One column: Displays a large size view. Displays a list of available view templates that you can apply to a view . select Template to create a view using a view template.

Note 292 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . In such views. it may take more than a minute to create the view.maxMonitorInsCount = 50) that defines the maximum number of monitor instances that can be plotted in a view created using a view template. The Update View operation for such views is restricted to existing monitor instances in that view in case the number of monitor instances in the selected group exceeds the above mentioned maximum count.Managing view templates 3 Click Finish.conf (pronet. Under such circumstances a message is displayed. There is a configurable entry in pronet.viewTemplates. if the number of thumbnails exceed 200.

or SLO Displays a list of report generation frequencies.7 Generating Reports Overview The Reports tab in the Operations Console presents extensive information about creating. for example. Administrative. a hyphen is shown. copying. if a report based on Service Level Objectives (SLOs) is made up of more than one SLO. and changing the email based on the assigned access privileges for various report types. the schedule is displayed as Mixed. Business Hours and 24x7 based on which the report is generated. deleting. The schedule displayed in the report listing depends on the individual schedules of the components that make up the report. Table 68 on page 293 lists the columns of report attributes that appear for each report. Some of the report types also have default reports. the defined reports are listed in tabular form. and Monthly at which the report is generated Displays a list of schedules. In the initial display on the Reports tab. Table 68: Views of report information on the Report tab View Report Type Frequency Schedule Description Reports are generated based on the selected report type. For example. Daily. General. Weekly. For example. schedule 24x7 considers data collected throughout the day for the entire week (including Saturday and Sunday). Name of the report owner Title of the report Report category Owner Report Title Category Related Topics Creating or editing a report on page 294 Chapter 7 Generating Reports 293 . You can query the reports using filter options to view the applicable reports. When the schedule is not applicable. editing. Each SLO can have a different schedule.

Enter Report Details screen. 4 On the Add (Step 2 of 3) . Table 69: Report detail attributes Field Name Contact Information Report Type Enable Report Generation Description Enter a unique report name Enter report owner’s phone number Select a report type from the list. The settings at this point differ. 294 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . depending on the report type. By default. this check box is selected. You cannot change the report type when editing an existing report.Enter Report Details screen specify the following basic report attributes listed in Table 69 on page 294. see Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet on page 300. If you are editing a report. set the attributes and contents for the specific report type. Table 70 on page 295 lists the attributes common to all report types. simply make changes to the attributes. Select this check box to enable report generation for the report. click Add for a new report or select a report and click Edit to edit an existing report. 3 Click Next. For a list of all the available report types and a complete list of reportspecific settings for each report type. you need not specify attributes.Overview Deleting a report on page 298 Copying an existing report on page 298 Changing email settings in a report on page 299 Creating or editing a report This section consists of common steps and attributes required for report creation. 2 On the Add Step (1 of 3) . 1 On the Reports screen.

Enter the title for Sub Report. and click Delete Sub Report to delete the selected sub report. select the attribute set type from the list and select the monitor types. A successful completion message is displayed. click New. enter a name for the new attribute and select attribute(s) and click Finish. Attributes associated to the monitor types are displayed. Use the default option to consider all available monitors. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 295 . Select Device Search for Generate Report to Monitor Type Sub Report Title Delete Sub Report Single Attribute Select a device from the list. Select one or more attributes and click Next. Use this filter to report only those events associated to the attribute being considered. When the Select Monitor Type screen opens. To add a filter. select a monitor type and click Apply.Overview Table 70: Common report attributes Attributes Select Group Description By default the No Filter option is displayed. Select an attribute from the list. Use this filter to limit the report to a single attribute of a monitor type. The attribute set is a collection of attributes that are used for generating a report. A successful completion message is displayed. click Finish. select a group and click Apply. Select a sub report in the Added Sub Report Section. select a monitor type and click Apply. Use the No Filter option to consider all available devices. When the Edit Attribute Set screen opens. Enter a device name to search a specific device Select the appropriate option to show configuration or monitor details Click the Agent Status link. click the No Filters link. Click the attribute link. Attribute Set Select an attribute set from the list to limit the report to those attributes present in the attribute set. When the Select Monitor Type screen opens. To define a new attribute set. When the Add Attribute Set screen opens. Use this filter to limit the report to only those instances that are present in the selected group. To edit an attribute select an attribute from the list and click Edit. On the Select Group screen. When the Add Attribute screen opens. Select one or more monitor types and click Next.

Avg. High. Select one of the following options: ■ Condensed Data . When the schedule is not applicable. Data to be used for calculation Note To edit sub-report. Condensed data is selected. schedule 24x7 will consider data collected through out the day for the entire week (including Saturday and Sunday). 296 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . For example.Select this option to calculate granular data for reports. ■ Raw Data . Select this option to reject misleading events and notifications during a scheduled down time. select a sub report in Added Sub Report Section. the schedule is displayed as Mixed.Overview Attributes Schedule Description The period corresponding to which the data will be considered for Report generation. The schedule displayed in the Report listing depends on the individual schedules of the components that make up the report. By default.Enter Report Details screen set the report details summarized in Table 71 on page 297. 6 On the Add (Step 3 of 3) . During a scheduled down time BMC ProactiveNet performs the following actions depending on the configuration: ■ Stops data collection ■ Stops Event or Event Generation ■ Stops Event related Notification or Actions ■ Calculate Baseline Do not consider data during Schedule DownTime Add Sub Report Select attributes in Selected Attributes and click Add Sub Report to append sub reports to the Added Sub Report section. Each SLO can have a different schedule. or Low rate values can be calculated and applicable for only condensed data.Select this option to calculate data on hourly bases for faster calculation. For example. a hyphen is shown. Follow similar steps to delete a sub-report and click Delete Sub Report. if a report based on Service Level Objectives (SLOs) is made up of more than one SLO. 5 Click Next. and then click Finish to generate the report. To add multiple attributes Press Shift and select the attributes. and click Edit Sub Report.

Example for Global comments: Consider an Element Distribution Summary report created to denote availability of Solaris processes on a server. select the format (in which the report needs to be sent) from the list. Global Comments Chapter 7 Generating Reports 297 . The number of rows to be displayed on a single page. Based on these settings report is displayed. Information or other content that you want to associate with the report. This creates hyperlinks for URLs in report comments. Also. Display the device name with the monitor information. The available options differ based on the report type. Also. of rows per page (applicable for tables) Show Device name with Monitor Information Show Source Agent with Monitor Information Show report details at Show comments at Description The graph type. which are part of comments.Overview Note This step is common to all the report types. If you add text to the Global Comments field. Some of the display attributes are common to all the reports. specify the location (top or bottom of the page) to display the report details. Also. Display the report details. By default the Monitor Information column is displayed even if you have not selected the Show Source Agent with Monitor Information check box. in tags. Click URL Tag to enclose URLs. Display the source agent with the monitor information. specify the location (top or bottom of the page) to display comments. If you select the Show Comments at option. comments that you enter here are displayed on all instances of the report. Global comments always precede report instance comments. Select this check box to view Global comments and Report Instance Comments on the report.99%. Table 71: Report display options Options Graph Type No. this option is selected automatically. then the selections made on the Report Instance Comments window are automatically applied here. If you do not select this option while creating a report but specify comments for a report instance. E-mail Options Enter E-mail Address E-mail used to send the report by email. Global comments can be added to indicate that instances of this report are to be generated daily and the server is considered to be in good state if the availability is >=99. By default the Monitor Information column is displayed even if you have not selected the Device name with Monitor Information check box. Choose the font size for display of comments.

A confirmation dialog box opens. Report periods for Event History. SLO Application Compliance and SLO Compliance History are listed based on the granularity selected for these reports. Use the copy option to replicate an existing report's properties and create new reports. or not to share. the copy option can be used. Weekly. 2 In the Select column of the Report screen. click OK to delete. Repeat the procedure to add more email IDs and preferences. For more information see. Sets report sharing parameters with everybody. Select the check box if required. Sets the report generation frequency to Daily. Remove the email ID from the Email Addresses list. or Monthly.Overview Options Add Description Insert the email id and format into the email Address box. Generate report based on the inputs. 3 Click Delete. Copying an existing report To quickly create similar reports. All applicable email IDs and the associated formats are listed in the email Addresses box. Number of days selected from the list to be included in the report. Then edit the new report to make specific changes if required. Threshold. Table 70 on page 295. group. Asset. 298 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . select the check box corresponding to the report. SLO Compliance Matrix and Capacity Trends report types. Delete Schedule Options Scheduled On Demand Schedule Report Period Save the report in the system and generate it based on the frequency. Report Frequency Sharing Generate this report immediately after adding to the schedule Deleting a report Perform the following steps to delete a report: To delete a report 1 Click the Reports tab. This option is not available for SLO Capacity Trends.

select the check box corresponding to the report. 3 Click Copy. To add a new email ID 1 On the Change Email page. 2 Enter the email ID to be added to the selected reports. modify. 4 Click Apply. or delete email for the selected reports. 2 In the Select column of the Report screen. select Modify. 3 Enter the email ID to be replaced with the new or modified email ID.Overview To copy an existing report 1 Click the Reports tab. To change email settings in a report 1 Click the Reports tab. 3 Click Change Email. click Done. To modify an existing email ID 1 On the Change Email Summary page. Perform the following steps. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 299 . 2 In the Select column of the Report screen. select the check box corresponding to the report. 2 Enter the existing email. click OK to copy. If the email ID exists then the newly entered email ID is appended to the existing list of Email IDs. Changing email settings in a report Use this option to add. 3 Select Email Type from the list. A confirmation dialog box opens. select Add option to add email IDs for all the selected reports. 5 On the Change Email Summary page.

Table 7 presents the types of reports in each category and points you to further information about each report type. you cannot modify the email Type. see Asset on page 301 Threshold on page 302 User on page 303 Aggregate Performance on page 303 Availability Summary on page 305 Capacity Trends on page 307 Custom Graph on page 309 Element Distribution Summary on page 310 Event on page 312 Health Summary on page 315 Top Bottom Performers on page 317 Virtual Inventory on page 318 300 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . To delete a new email ID 1 On the Change Email page. Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet BMC ProactiveNet reports are divided into three categories—Administrative. click Done. and Service Level Objective (SLO). General. 3 On the Change Email Summary page. select Delete option to delete the existing email ID from the selected reports. Table 72: Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Category Administrative Report types Asset Threshold User General Aggregate Performance Availability Summary Capacity Trends Custom Graph Element Distribution Summary Event Health Summary Top/Bottom Performers Virtual Inventory Further information. 2 Click Apply. 4 Click Apply to replace the existing email ID with a new email ID.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Note When modifying the email ID.

Sort Key Chapter 7 Generating Reports 301 . Table 70 on page 295 For further information see. Monitor Type Include Control attributes Available Config Attributes For further information see. Table 73 on page 301 lists attributes specific to Asset reports that need to be entered along with the common attributes. Displays configuration attributes corresponding to the selected monitor type. Select a sort key from the list. Table 70 on page 295 Include control attributes in the Available Config Attributes list. Table 73: Asset report attributes Attributes Select Group Select Device Generate Report To Description For further information see. The default reports of BMC ProactiveNet do not have filters and therefore may consume more resources on loaded setups. for the selected configuration parameters.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Category SLO Report types Further information. see SLO Application Compliance SLO Application Compliance Report on page 319 SLO Capacity Trends SLO Compliance History SLO Compliance Matrix SLO Executive Summary SLO Health Summary SLO Capacity Trends Report on page 320 SLO Compliance History on page 321 SLO Compliance Matrix on page 321 SLO Executive Summary on page 323 SLO Health Summary on page 324 Note BMC Software recommends users to disable those default reports that are not applicable. Table 70 on page 295 ■ The Show Config Details option displays the configuration attribute details of monitor instances for the selected monitor type. ■ The Show Monitor Details option displays the details of various monitor instances of the selected group and device. over a specified time period. Asset The Asset report displays all monitor instances of a particular monitor type in a specific group. This option is displayed only if you have selected Show Config Details.

The threshold values can be sorted by group. Select the monitor type based on which the report must be generated. Also indicate whether instance or global thresholds or both instance and global thresholds must be considered to generate the report. Table 74: Configured Instance and Global Thresholds organized by Monitor Type Default Threshold Report Type Report Type Report Frequency Sub-Reports Included Description Threshold Weekly 1) Absolute Event Thresholds (Global Only) organized by Monitor Type. Monitor Type Threshold Type Default Sort Column Select the columns for the report. Table 75 on page 302 lists attributes specific to Threshold reports that need to be entered along with common attributes. 4) Signature Event Thresholds (Instance Only) organized by Monitor Type. This report is an administrative type of report. device. To consider all monitor types. choose the column that must be displayed first in the report. Select Flat List to lists all monitor types in a table. For further information see. Select the criterion on which the threshold values must be organized in the report.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Show Config DD Sub Report Title Add Sub Report Description Select this option to view configuration DD. Report thresholds are not considered for the Threshold report. select No Filter. or monitor type. 2) Absolute Event Thresholds (Instance Only) organized by Monitor Type. From the Default Sort Column list. Table 74 on page 302 lists the default Threshold report types. Table 75: Threshold report attributes Attributes Consider Description Select the threshold type based on which to generate the report. Table 70 on page 295 Threshold The Threshold report allows you to quickly view the threshold values configured. 3) Signature Absolute Event Thresholds (Global Only) organized by Monitor Type. Organize By 302 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Table 70 on page 295 For further information see.

This report displays the user details in a tabular format and the frequency of the report period is monthly. see User Management of BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide. Minimum. Sum. Each graph reflects the aggregation result of attributes having same unit of measurement. Choose No Filter option to list all the user states (Active or Inactive) or appropriate user status to be reported. Median. Percentile. User Class User Status Select Attributes Sub Report Title Add Sub Report Aggregate Performance The Aggregate Performance report runs an aggregation function on selected attributes of monitor instances belonging to the specified group. The aggregation function can be Average. Choose appropriate user class to be reported. User The User report filters user group. The result of aggregation is displayed as multiple summary line graphs (stacked line graphs). and Standard Deviation. Maximum. the report is displayed in tab format where the first tab consists of all the line graphs and the second tab shows a complete list of all instances of the selected group in table format along with the minimum. Choose No Filter option to list all the user groups or choose the appropriate user group to be reported. Drill down from any of the instances to view the corresponding independent line graph for that instance. If Table Display is enabled.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Add Sub Report Description See Table 70 on page 295. user class. average. Select the attributes to be reported. See Table 70 on page 295. Table 77: User report attributes Attributes Name User Group Description Specify partial or full login name of the user to be reported. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 303 . Table 76: User default report types Default User Report Type Report Type Report Frequency Description User Monthly Table 77 on page 303 lists attributes specific to User reports that need to be entered along with common attributes. and maximum values for the specified attribute. over a specified time period. and user status. For more information. See Table 70 on page 295.

Aggregate Performance report can be made using multiple sub-reports. — Server Memory Capacity Table 78 on page 304 lists attributes specific to Aggregate Performance report that needs to entered along with common attributes. Alternatively. Use Ctrl and Shift keys to make multiple selections.a weekly aggregation of data with the following sub-reports: — Transaction Availability — Transaction Response Time ■ Server Capacity . use the search box to locate a specific attribute. the first tab displays graphs corresponding to each sub-report. Select Attributes (to be part of the sub report) from Available attributes and transfer to Selected Attributes. The summary graph will be larger than the individual graphs.a weekly aggregation of data with the following sub-reports: — Server CPU Capacity (includes sub-reports). where each sub-report is a combination of different group-attribute-set and aggregate function. If Show detail table option is enabled for such reports. and the second tab displays different tables corresponding to each graph. 304 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The following default reports of the Aggregate Performance type are provided out-ofthe-box by BMC ProactiveNet: ■ Web Transaction Availability and Response Time .Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Individual graphs for each instance or attribute are displayed (for the selected report period) when the Show graphs for each Instance or Attribute option is selected. Table 78: Aggregate Performance report attributes Attributes Select Group Select Attributes Description See Table 70 on page 295.

Availability Summary The Availability Summary report displays Availability of a monitored element in the form of a pie graph.Value that X% of the monitors and below are reporting. then the Weightage combo box is enabled for the user to select the appropriate nth weightage factor. It Chapter 7 Generating Reports 305 .It is the standard deviation across all the underlying instances. (0 – being the min. Select this option to view tables in separate tabs.(Minimum) Sort the data points from the various instances and take the lowest value. 50 – being the median) If percentile is selected. Enter title for graph.all data points for each instance-attribute.(Maximum) . ■ Standard Deviation . ■ Max . See Table 70 on page 295. ■ Median . ■ Min .Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Select Aggregate Function Description ■ Avg .Sort the data points from the various instances and take the middle value. The report also displays information such as Total Downtime. 100 – being the max. Select this option to display individual graphs for each instance or attribute for the selected report period. ■ Percentile . This option is enabled only when the Show Tables in separate Tab option is selected. See Table 70 on page 295. Select this option to hide the attribute column from being displayed in the report.5 ■ When the report has too much data. ■ Sum .Sort the data points from the various instances and take the highest value. Show Graphs for each Instance/ Attribute Note The report display can get distorted in the following scenarios: ■ When report is viewed using IE 5.(Average) Sum of all data points for each instance-attribute and divided by the total number of instances. Do not consider data during Schedule DownTime Sub Report Title Graph Title Add Sub Report Show Tables in separate Tab Hide Attribute Column Name See Table 70 on page 295.

The Availability Summary report can consist of multiple sub-reports. range sets. This is taken care when the report is generated again.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet is assumed that attributes displayed will be of type “Availability”. the report displays an additional pie graph that shows the MTTR distribution for each sub-report. the availability attribute does not show the accurate value. Table 79: Availability Summary default report type Default Availability Summary Report Type Web Transaction Availability Description ■ Report Type: Availability Summary ■ Report Frequency: Weekly ■ Report Duration: Week ■ Sub-Reports Included: Transaction Availability Table 80 on page 306 lists attributes specific to Availability Summary report that needs to entered along with common attributes. Note If the report period is greater than the instance creation time. Table 80: Availability Summary report attributes Attributes Select Group Select Device Type Attribute Set Consider Sub Transactions if any Description Click the list to select a group or no filter option to consider all the monitors. If the MTTR option is selected. where each subreport may be a combination of different group-attributes. See Table 70 on page 295. You can select or define the range set for the availability distribution. The report also can include information about Mean Time To Recovery (MTTR). for which you can select a predefined range set or can define a new one. Table 79 on page 306 lists the default report type for Availability Summary. and MTTR information. 306 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . so Attribute Sets that have the string “Availability” in them are only considered by the report. device type. See Table 70 on page 295. Select this option for the report to be generated considering dynamic attributes associated with the monitors of the Attribute set.

See Table 70 on page 295. The report contains a bar graph at the top that shows each instance–attribute pair predicted to violate event threshold in the specified time period. ■ Drill down on the monitor instance in the table displays a line graph for the The report displays Line graph as follows: Chapter 7 Generating Reports 307 . When the option is selected. Select this option to view related tables. which are predicted to violate earliest (in any violated instance are present. See Table 70 on page 295. Alternatively. ■ The table is sorted with instances. See Table 70 on page 295. ■ The duration to violation (in days) is displayed on X axis. use the search box to locate a specific attribute. two additional options are displayed. See Table 70 on page 295. they would appear first). selected attribute along with the threshold line.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Available attributes Description Select the attributes (to be part of the sub report) and transfer to Selected Attributes. Data collected is validated against the custom range specified here. Select MTTR Distribution range set to use a pre-defined range set to calculate the Mean time to recovery. ■ Select the Availability Distribution range to use a pre-defined range set. ■ Select the Availability Custom Range Set option to specify and define the distribution range dynamically. Show Table containing the list of Instances Schedule Do not consider data during Schedule DownTime Sub Report Title Report Options Capacity Trends The Capacity Trends report lists all monitor instances–attribute pairs that are predicted to violate event thresholds in the specified time period. select MTTR Custom Range set to define and assign values to the custom range set. Alternatively. The maximum number of bars can be specified during report creation. Use Ctrl and Shift keys to make multiple selections. The report displays Bar graph as follows: ■ The instance-attribute pair is displayed on the Y axis. Availability Range Set Include Mean Time Recovery Information Select the Include MTTR information option to display the Mean Time to Recovery information in the report. Range sets define the Maximum-Minimum value of the stack in the graph.

Critical. then severity column is displayed and a table title is added displaying severity of each instance. Select this option to consider all the instances in the system Select this option to select the attribute groups from the Available Groups box and transfer to Selected Groups box Descriptions 308 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Minor. Table 81 on page 308 lists Capacity Trend default report. Weekly ■ Duration: One Month Table 82 on page 308 lists attributes specific to Capacity Trend sub-reports and report attributes that needs to be entered along with common attributes.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet ■ The line graph is projected using a dotted line from the last data point to the threshold line and the intersection point is at the predicted violation time. Table 81: Capacity Trend default report Default Capacity Report Type Infrastructure Capacity Trends Description ■ Report Type: Capacity Trends ■ Report Frequency. Highest Severity. or Minor event thresholds are selected. Do not consider data during Schedule DownTime Enter a value to assign downtime. ■ A dotted line from the intersection point to the X axis will also be present. Table 82: Capacity Trend report attributes Report Type Sub-report section No Filter Selected Groups Report Attributes Single Attribute Attribute Set Consider Sub Transactions if any Hide Attribute name Column Use Event Thresholds as Capacity Limit See Table 70 on page 295 See Table 70 on page 295 Select this option for the report to be generated considering dynamic attributes associated with the monitors of the Attribute set Select this option for the attribute column not to be listed with the report Select this option to use Event capacity as thresholds. then severity column is hidden and a table title is added displaying severity type of each instance. Major. Major. When All or highest severity threshold type is selected. or All event thresholds can be selected. When Critical.

High. The Monitor Instance to be graphed option opens. Selected Attributes Chapter 7 Generating Reports 309 . and Monitor Type. Selected attributes are displayed in Selected Attributes. Default value is 14 days. Any violations outside this forecast period will not be considered. X – Y correlation. Condensed data is selected. ■ Show instance which will violate in the next . Schedule See Table 70 on page 295. or Low rate values can be calculated and applicable for only condensed data. This can be used only when the Groups/Services filter is selected. The graph types supported are Line. Table 83: Custom Graph report attributes Attributes Graph Type Add Attributes Description See Table 70 on page 295. The Select Instances for Line Graph screen opens. By default.This option governs the data points to be used for forecasting. Maximum number of bars cannot exceed 20. Default value is 20.This is the forecast period. The inputs for Graph-based reports are collected through a reports input wizard. Avg. and Area. Table 83 on page 309 lists attributes specific to Custom Graph report that need to be entered along with the common attributes.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Report Type Use Custom Group Threshold Descriptions Select this option to set custom group thresholds. Click Add. Pie. Default is 7 days. click Next. Schedule Sub Report Title Report Options Custom Graph The Graph-based report provides an option to create a report equivalent to the current custom graph generator. Select an instance and click Apply. Choose the respective groups and click New to set new thresholds. ■ Maximum number of bars in graph – Specifies the maximum number of bars to be displayed in the bar graph. Any instance that is predicted to violate event thresholds in this time period appears in the report. Custom group thresholds can be set for either a single attribute or group or multiple attributes or groups. See Table 70 on page 295. ■ Data to be used – Specifies whether Condensed (Rate) or Raw (Granular) data is to be used. ■ Use Data for the last . Select a Group Filter. Click Clear to discard the selected attribute. See Table 70 on page 295.

Table 84: Application Infrastructure Element Summary default report Default Element Distribution Summary Report Type Application Infrastructure Element Summary Description ■ Report Type: Element Distribution Summary ■ Report Frequency: Weekly ■ Duration: Week Table 85 on page 310 lists attributes specific to Element Distribution Summary report that needs to be entered along with common attributes. 310 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . This table is a list of all the elements for that distribution range sorted on their average values. Table 85: Element Distribution Summary report attributes Attributes Select Group Single Attribute Attribute Set Consider Sub Transaction if any Description See Table 70 on page 295. Drill down on any bar in the stacked bar graph displays a table based on the distribution ranges. See Table 70 on page 295. See Table 70 on page 295. See Table 70 on page 295.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Show More Info Data to be used Sub Report Title Add Sub Report Description Select this option to display more information on the graph. Custom ranges can be defined in the Create (Step 2 of 3) . Default ranges for percentage distribution in the stacked bar can be specified in the configuration file. See Table 70 on page 295. Element Distribution Summary The Element Distribution Summary report displays either the actual (with respect to custom ranges) or percentage (with respect to specified event thresholds) distribution of instance-attribute values in the form of stacked bar graphs. See Table 70 on page 295. Select this option to generate reports considering dynamic attributes associated with monitors of the Attribute set. Further drill down on each of the elements in the table leads to the individual graph for that element for the specified time period.Enter Element Distribution Details screen. Table 84 on page 310 lists Element Distribution Summary default report.

Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Hide Attribute Name and Column Distribution range based on Threshold Description Select this option to hide attribute name and column during report display. Select this option to generate report for a specific event severity. This option is displayed only if the distribution range is based on thresholds. Data is validated against the specified custom range. Data to be used for calculation See Table 70 on page 295. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 311 . See Table 70 on page 295. Select this option to consider specified event thresholds with percentage distribution of instance attribute values. Select this option to break down the report display. Select this option to dynamically define the distribution range. The available options differ based on the report type. On selecting this option distribution range is displayed and you can select the range from the list. Select one of the following custom ranges: ■ Bad ■ Poor ■ Fair ■ Good ■ Excellent Threshold Severity Custom Distribution Range Distribution Details Show data broken down by Select this option to set the graph display either as 2D or 3D. It defines the maximum and minimum values of the stacks in the graph. See Table 70 on page 295. Report displays instance attribute values for the specified custom range in the form of multiple stacked bar graphs. Select one of the following options: ■ Hour ■ Day ■ Week ■ Month ■ Quarter Do not consider data during schedule down time Sub Report Title Add Sub Report See Table 70 on page 295.

0 or 8. 312 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The Event Report is available only if you are a BMC ProactiveNet user upgrading from version 8. Table 86: Event default report types Default Event Report Types Critical Events for Previous Day Description ■ Report Type: Event ■ Report Frequency Daily ■ Duration: Day Critical Events for Previous Week Note ■ Report Type: Event ■ Report Frequency Weekly ■ Duration: Week Table 87 on page 313 lists attributes specific to Event report that should be specified along with the common attributes. irrespective of their multiple occurrences in the bars of the graph. Drilldown from a multiple options bar graph shows the list of events of the respective options. see Acknowledging events on page 122. External events are those that are received from third party device and Intelligent events are those that are generated from the BMC ProactiveNet server. To see the severity and status history when you drill-down from the status.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Event Events are of two types. BMC recommends that you use BMC ProactiveNet Performance Management Reporting Studio to generate Event Reports. External events coming from a device known to the BMC ProactiveNet server will be automatically associated to that device. The graph lists all events consolidated. Drilldown from the bars of the graph shows events in that time interval block.5. External and Intelligent events. The Event Report shows events that occurred during a specified time period. If you are a new BMC ProactiveNet version 8.5 user. The report consists of a stacked bar graph indicating the number of events on the Y-axis and time period on the X-axis based on the inputs.1 of BMC ProactiveNet to version 8.

■ Intelligent Events: Lists the BMC ProactiveNet events only. Filter Options ■ Intelligent Events ■ All Events — Events Associated with Device—includes only events associated with a device known to BMC ProactiveNet server — Events Not Associated with a Device—includes events that are not associated with a device which are generated from a third party ■ No Filter—includes all events during generation of the report ■ Groups/Services—see Table 70 on page 295. ■ Devices—see Table 70 on page 295.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Table 87: Event report attributes Attributes Event Selection Description ■ All Events: Lists both BMC ProactiveNet and external events. External events refer to device-associated events and events received from external event adapters. ■ Attribute Set—see Table 70 on page 295. ■ Consider Dynamic Attributes if any (applicable only to select monitors)—includes events on all Dynamic attributes for the selected monitors ■ Priority—includes the events with the selected priority ■ Consider Events with Duration Greater Than:—includes all the events that are open for more than the time duration specified Chapter 7 Generating Reports 313 . Attributes to report on ■ No Filter—includes all the events on all monitored instances during generation of the report ■ Single Attribute—see Table 70 on page 295.

Note 314 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Hence. Select any of the following severities to be considered for the report: — Critical — Major — Minor — Warning — Information — OK ■ Graph Options — Show only Graph—only displays the graph — Show only Table—only displays the table ■ Granularity—controls the number of time intervals that the report is divided into — By Hour—one bar of the graph will represent the number of events that occur within an hour — By Day—one bar of the graph will represent the number of events that occur within a day The PDF option for event reports is disabled.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Display Options Description ■ Status — Open: Lists only the events which are not closed — Assigned: Lists only the events that are assigned — Acknowledged: Lists only those events that are acknowledged — Closed: Lists only those events that are closed — Blackout: Lists only those events that are blackout ■ Severity—determines the severity level of the report. the PDF option in E-mail Options (page 3 of 3) while creating or editing a report will not work.

The Health Summary report consists of multiple sub-reports (if multiple groups – attribute sets – severity combinations have been specified).Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Health Summary The Health Summary report shows all monitor instances for a specified group (in order of worst at the top to least worst at the bottom) in terms of violation of threshold over a specified time period. Table 88: Health Summary default report types Default Health Summary Report Types Application Infrastructure Health Description ■ Report type—Health Summary ■ Report frequency—Weekly ■ Duration—Week ■ Sub-reports (apply to all instances) — Health Summary for End User Availability — Health Summary for End User Response Time — Health Summary for Application Infrastructure Availability — Health Summary for Application Infrastructure Response Time — Health Summary for Application Infrastructure Performance — Health Summary for Infrastructure Availability — Health Summary for Infrastructure Performance Chapter 7 Generating Reports 315 . In this case. Table 88 on page 315 lists Health Summary default report types. a summary bar graph at the top (if selected for display) of the Top N violator is available for each sub report. Performance is based on the total violation time for that instance.

Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Default Health Summary Report Types Application Infrastructure Hot Spots Description ■ Report type—Health Summary ■ Report frequency—Daily ■ Duration—Day ■ Sub-reports — Health Summary for End User Availability (Critical and Above) — Health Summary for End User Response Time (Minor and Above) — Health Summary for Application Infrastructure Availability (Critical and Above) — Health Summary for Application Infrastructure Response Time (Minor and Above) — Health Summary for Application Infrastructure Performance (Minor and Above) — Health Summary for Infrastructure Availability (Critical and Above) — Health Summary for Infrastructure Performance (Minor and Above) Table 89 on page 316 lists attributes specific to Health Summary report that needs to be entered along with common attributes. If the check box is not selected. See Table 70 on page 295. Table 89: Health Summary report attributes Attributes Select Group Single Attribute Attribute Set Description See Table 70 on page 295. Select this option to view all instances matching the input criteria. Custom Threshold Show All Instances Select this option to restrict instance violation. 316 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Consider Dynamic Attributes only Select this option to include dynamic attributes. then only violated instances are displayed. When All severity threshold type is selected the severity column is displayed and a table title is added displaying severity of each instance. See Table 70 on page 295. Intelligent Event Threshold Select this option to restrict report generation to a specific severity level.

Table 90 on page 317 lists attributes specific to Top Bottom Performers report that need to be entered along with common attributes. Table 90: Top Bottom Performers report attributes Attributes Select Group Attributes to Report on Graph Type No of Bars Values to be Displayed Show Table containing the list of instances Do not consider data during Schedule DownTime Sub Report Title Data to be used for calculation Description See Table 70 on page 295. Select the number of bars from the list to be displayed on the graph. Select this option to filter the maximum number (top N) of rows in the table.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Show Graph along with the Table Do not consider data during Schedule DownTime Select columns for the table Sub Report Title Add Sub Report Data to be used for calculation Show only rows with duration greater than Description Select this option to indicate the presence of a summary bar graph in the sub-section of the report. See Table 70 on page 295. This option is applicable only for sub reports added without selecting the Show all instances option. See Table 70 on page 295. See Table 70 on page 295. See Table 70 on page 295. Flag rows with duration greater than Maximum number of entries to be displayed in the table Select this option to flag rows corresponding to violations that meet the criterion in terms of absolute time or percentage of report period time violated. Select this option to view a list of related tables. as a bar graph. Select this option to filter and view violations that meet the criterion in terms of absolute time or percentage of report period time violated. See Table 70 on page 295. See Table 70 on page 295. See Table 70 on page 295. Top Bottom Performers The Top/Bottom Performers report displays all attribute or monitor instances of a specific monitor type of a group. Select one of the values to be displayed on the graph. in terms of the average value over a specified time period. Select the column options to be displayed in the table. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 317 . See Table 70 on page 295. See Table 70 on page 295.

on a periodic basis.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Virtual Inventory The BMC adapter for VMWare remotely monitors the Virtual Center (VC) or ESX server (host) using web services and discovers the VMWare entities such as ESX servers. the sub report generated with that option will be empty. If an ESX Host exists without VMs underneath it. Clusters or ESX Hosts and ResourcePools/VMs. 318 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . of the devices. resource pools and their relationships. The ESX in clusters have a drill down to the VMS underneath it. clusters. This report also lists the various configuration attributes and supports drill down to individual line graph. Table 91 on page 319 lists attributes specific to Virtual Inventory report that should be specified along with the common attributes. The report will list ■ ESX Hosts and VMs belonging to the Hosts for a given VC(s) group and will Note display the physical view of the devices. along with their performance attributes. ■ Resource Pool and VMs for a given VC(s) group and will display the logical view ■ Cluster and ESX Hosts for a given VC(s) group and will show the logical view of the devices. Virtual Machines (VMs). The Virtual Inventory Report lists the virtual entities such as ESX Hosts or VMs.

which shows the compliance distribution of the SLO Instances over the report period. Drill down on the pie graph displays a summary table based on the distribution ranges over the entire report period.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Table 91: Virtual Inventory report attributes Attributes Sub Report Selection Description ■ Available Groups—shows a list of all groups. The common attributes for a given pair of entities change when you specify a different entity. ■ Show Virtual Entities—displays the entities you select. SLO Application Compliance Report The SLO Application Compliance Report displays SLO Compliance information of an application. See Table 70 on page 295. This report displays the following for each SLO type selected: ■ Pie Graph. which shows the compliance distribution of the SLO Instances for the granularity selected. However auto-created groups by VMware group has the type of group listed in parenthesis against each group. The baseline data is used for computation. You can search for the available attributes in the Search for field. This table is a list of all the SLO instances for that distribution range sorted on their compliance values. Select either Hourly. By default common attributes for the entities selected are in the Selected Attributes box and the Available Attributes box lists all the uncommon attributes of the entity pair. Each SLO Type for the SLO is displayed in a sub section. Daily or Weekly baselines for generating the report. Drill down on any bar in the stacked bar graph displays a table based on the distribution ranges over the granularity. ■ ESX Hosts/VMs ■ Resource Pools/VMs ■ Clusters/ESX Hosts ■ Select Attributes—add or delete attributes to be included in the report. Select the group that will be considered to generate the report. ■ Bar Graph. The Attribute set is depends on the entity pair selected for the Virtual Inventory report (ESX Hosts/VMs or Resource Pools/VMs or Clusters/ESX Hosts). ■ Sub Report Title—specify the title for the sub report Add Sub Report Report Options Consider Baseline See Table 70 on page 295. This table is a list of all the SLO instances for that distribution range sorted on their compliance values over the entire report period. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 319 .

The X axis shows the duration to violation (in days). they would appear first). Table 93: SLO Capacity Trends attributes Attributes Select SLO Description Select an SLO from the list or select All to consider the entire SLO. For All SLOs. which are predicted to violate earliest (in any violated instance are present. Use Ctrl and Shift keys to make multiple selections. Specify the SLOs to be considered while generating the report. 320 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . use SLO Type filter to select the SLO Types. A single SLO name or multiple SLO names can be selected. use the Search For box to locate a specific SLO. The report contains a bar graph. Attribute that are not expected to violate the SLO Threshold will not appear in the bar graph or the table. This filter is available only when All SLOs are being considered for the report. Specify the granularity for bars displayed in the graph. The table is sorted with instances.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Table 92: SLO Application Compliance attributes Attributes Select SLO Description Select an SLO from the list or select All to consider the entire SLO. Drill down on the monitor instance in the table displays a line graph for the selected attribute along with the threshold line. Each instance–attribute pair predicted to violate the SLO Threshold in the specified time period are displayed as a bar on the Y axis. A dotted line from the intersection point to the X axis will also be present. Enter attributes list in Table 93 on page 320. Sub Report Title Add Sub Report Delete Sub Report Show data broken down SLO Capacity Trends Report SLO Capacity Trends report lists all monitor instance–attribute pairs that are predicted to violate the SLO threshold in the specified time period. See Table 70 on page 295. See Table 70 on page 295. A table which shows the time when each attribute (in the selected SLO Type) for each monitor instance will violate SLO Threshold along with other details appears below the bar graph. The line graph is projected using a dotted line from the last data point to the threshold line and the intersection point is at the predicted violation time. use SLO Type filter to select the SLO Types. This filter is available only when All SLOs are being considered for the report. See Table 70 on page 295. For All SLOs. Available SLO Select the SLO to be considered from the Available SLOs box and transfer to the Selected SLOs box. Specify the SLOs to be considered while generating the report. A single SLO name or multiple SLO names can be selected. Alternatively.

The report contain multiple. The graph also displays a line corresponding to the compliance objective of the SLO. SLO Compliance History SLO Compliance History report lists compliance values for specified set of SLOs for the specified time period. Enter the attributes listed in Table 94 on page 321. Alternatively. Drill-down to SLO Health Summary report for the corresponding time period is available for from each bar in the bar graph. use the Search For box to locate a specific SLO. Any violations outside this forecast period are not considered. week. Table 94: SLO Compliance History attributes Attributes Select SLO Description Select an SLO from the list or select All to consider the entire SLO. For All SLOs. Available SLO Select the SLO to be considered from the Available SLOs box and transfer to the Selected SLOs box. Select this option if you do not want the Resource column to displayed in the report. Specify the granularity for bars displayed in the graph. Specify the time period for which data points are to be used for forecasting. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 321 . For further information see. ordered bar graphs. Alternatively. use SLO Type filter to select the SLO Types.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Available SLO Description Select the SLO to be considered from the Available SLOs box and transfer to the Selected SLOs box. This filter is available only when All SLOs are being considered for the report. month. Any instance predicted to violate SLO Threshold in this time period appears in the report. Show data broken down SLO Compliance Matrix The SLO Compliance Matrix report displays the compliance summary of selected SLOs. which will show the SLO compliance values corresponding to a particular day. At least one time period must be selected to generate this report. or quarter within the specified time period for a particular SLO. Specify the SLOs to be considered while generating the report. The report mainly displays SLO details and the recorded compliance levels for different periods chosen. Use Ctrl and Shift keys to make multiple selections. Hide Resource Column Do not consider data during Schedule DownTime Show instance which will violate in next Use Data for the last Maximum number of bars in graph Specify the maximum number of bars that are to be displayed in the bar graph. one for each SLO. use the Search For box to locate a specific SLO. Administrator Guide. Use Ctrl and Shift keys to make multiple selections. A single SLO name or multiple SLO names can be selected. This is the forecast period. (Link will be provided at the time of document collation).

Only the SLO compliance details summary table is displayed in the report page. Use Ctrl and Shift keys to make multiple selections. Clicking the History column in the report displays the SLO Compliance History report for the SLO. Available SLO Select the SLO to be considered from the Available SLOs box and transfer to the Selected SLOs box. Clicking the SLO name in the summary table displays its instance compliance details in a separate page. SLO instances having array-type attributes are displayed in separate tables (a table for each instance) with the instance name displayed as the table title. Specify the SLOs to be considered while generating the report. This filter is available only when All SLOs are being considered for the report. Table 95: SLO Compliance Matrix attributes Attributes Select SLO Description Select an SLO from the list or select All to consider the entire SLO.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet The report also displays compliance details of instances of the SLOs listed. Alternatively. on the Compliance Matrix page Hide SLO Type Column Show icons instead of numbers for Select this option to display icons instead of numbers to depict SLO the SLO Compliance values compliance values. use SLO Type filter to select the SLO Types. Click the Show Compliance Matrix Report icon to view the Compliance Matrix report. Clicking the Graph column displays the line graph for the SLO. Enter the attributes listed in Table 95 on page 322. use the Search For box to locate a specific SLO. For All SLOs. A single SLO name or multiple SLO names can be selected. 322 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Web transactions have dynamic or array-type attributes and sub transactions. So. Select this option if you do not want the SLO Type column to be listed in the report.

excluding the current day. Drill-down to get more details in terms of a breakdown over the specified time period (see the SLO Compliance History report). ■ Previous Month . ■ Year to Date . ■ Month to Date .Select this option to create the report based on data collected during the previous quarter.Select this option to create the report based SLO compliance values of the last seven days.Select this option to create the report based on SLO compliance values of the previous month. ■ Previous Year . Performance is based on the absolute percentage compliance or the delta from desired percentage compliance. Table 96 on page 324 lists SLO executive summary default report type Worst Performing SLOs. excluding the current day.Select this option to create the report based on SLO compliance values of the previous day.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Attributes Select history periods to be displayed in the table Description ■ Previous Day . excluding the current day.Select this option to create the report based on SLO compliance values of the previous week.Select this option to create the report based on data collected during the previous year. The report contains a graph which shows each SLO's percentage compliance and compliance objective. SLO Executive Summary SLO Executive Summary report lists all SLOs (or the selected set of SLOs) sorted based on their performance for the specified time period.Select this option to create the report based on SLO compliance values collected over the past thirty days. ■ Previous Week .Select this option to create the report based on data collected over the past one year. The SLO names are present in the report instance details keyed to the serial number that appears in the X-axis of the graph. The sort order and the performance criterion can be specified during report creation. ■ Week to Date . Chapter 7 Generating Reports 323 . ■ Previous Quarter . ■ Quarter to Date .Select this option to create the report based on SLO compliance values of the past three months.

Available SLO Select the SLO to be considered from the Available SLOs box and transfer to the Selected SLOs box. each of which may contain a summary bar graph at the top (if selected for display) which shows the top N violators. either the top performing SLOs or the bottom performing SLOs (among the selected SLOs) will be graphed from left to right. then only details of SLOs present in the graph are displayed in the table. Alternatively. This filter is available only when All SLOs are being considered for the report. This is the maximum number of SLOs that will be displayed in the graph. use SLO Type filter to select the SLO Types. Use Ctrl and Shift keys to make multiple selections. Sort Criterion Sort Based On Max No of SLOs Show all SLOs in the table SLO Health Summary The SLO Health Summary report shows all SLO instances (in order of worst at the left to least worst at the right) in terms of violation over a specified time period (with respect to SLO Thresholds). use the Search For box to locate a specific SLO. Delta implies that the difference between the compliance objective and the compliance value for the SLO over the specified time period will be used for reporting. A single SLO name or multiple SLO names can be selected. The SLO Health Summary report consists of multiple sub-reports (if multiple SLOs have been specified). This is a consolidated list per instance–attribute and not a list of individual violations for every instance–attribute pair. Maximum supported number is 20. For All SLOs. Specify the SLOs to be considered while generating the report. Based on this selection.Report types available in BMC ProactiveNet Table 96: Worst Performing SLOs default report type Default Worst Performing SLO Report Types Report Type Report Frequency Duration Description SLO Executive Summary Weekly Week Enter the attributes listed in Table 97 on page 324. Select or clear the check box to enable or disable the option to show all SLOs in the table. If the check box is clear. A table below shows a complete list of all violated instances or a partial list of certain violated instances (if filters have been specified to limit the entries). This table may have selected instances highlighted 324 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Absolute implies that the actual compliance values for the SLO over the specified time period will be used for reporting. Specify the sort (top or bottom) criteria. Table 97: SLO Executive Summary attributes Attributes Select SLO Description Select an SLO from the list or select All to consider the entire SLO. Specify the sort criterion (absolute or delta) to be used when calculating the SLO performance.

conf file for the scheduler module to work: ■ pronet.Report Scheduler flagged based on input criteria. The table has a limited list of entries based on the input criteria. ■ pronet. Select the column for the Table Hide Attribute Column Name Sub Report Title Add Sub Report Select Data to be used for calculation Show only rows with violation time greater than. Weekly.daily.report.report. This option is applicable only for sub reports added without selecting the Show all instances option. Administrator Guide. See Table 70 on page 295. Select this option to specify the presence of a summary bar graph in this sub-section of the report. See Table 70 on page 295.daily. Select this option to include all instances. Specify the maximum number of instances to be displayed in the table. Report Scheduler The Report Scheduler is responsible for triggering report generation at pre-set time intervals (Daily. Default is 4. Enter the attributes listed in Table 98 on page 325. or Monthly). You can drill-down from any of the entries to the independent line graph.minute – The minutes of the hour (defined above) that the Daily Report should triggered. Flag rows with violation time greater than Maximum number of entries to be displayed in the table Select the columns to be displayed in the report. Table 98: SLO Health Summary attributes Attributes Select SLO Show all instances Show Graph along with the Table Description Select an SLO from the list to be considered while generating the report. Select Do not consider data during For further information see. Select this option if you do not want the Attribute column to be listed in the report. Based on the selection. The following properties need to be set in the pronet. Use this filter to flag rows in the generated report table based on the specified criteria.hour – The hour of the day that the Daily Report should be Chapter 7 Generating Reports 325 . Default is 30. (Link will be Schedule DownTime provided at the time of document collation). Use this filter to view only those violations greater than the specified time period. triggered. Raw data or Condensed (Rate) data is used for calculating the output values.

refer to Report Creation).report.The day of the week (values from 1-7) that the Weekly ■ pronet.report.report. Default is 1.day . Default is 45 ■ pronet.report. Additional options BMC ProactiveNet displays a series of icons on the header of each report. Default is 4.The hour of the day (the day is defined above) that the Weekly Report should be triggered.day . ■ pronet.report.Additional options ■ pronet.minute .The hour of the day (the day is defined above) that the Monthly Report should be triggered.weekly.report.monthly. Default is 1.weekly.monthly. ■ pronet. Default is 0. Related Topics Show/Hide report header on page 327 Date drop-down on page 327 Deleting instances on page 327 Disable generation on page 327 Adding comments to a report on page 328 Scheduling on page 329 Adding a report to a view on page 329 Generating a report on page 329 Editing a report on page 330 Exporting to Portable Document Format (PDF) on page 330 326 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .The minutes of the hour (defined above) that the Monthly Report should be triggered.minute .monthly.The day of the month that the Monthly Report should be triggered (valid number or a keyword ‘last’ for end of month).hour . Availability of these additional options are based on the report type (Scheduled Report and Preview Report.hour . Default is 5.The minutes of the hour (defined above) that the Weekly Report should be triggered.weekly. Report should be triggered. ■ pronet.

Earlier to 7. the second option is not displayed.1 version.Additional options Exporting to CSV on page 330 Mailing a report on page 331 Printing a report on page 332 Show/Hide report header Use the Show/Hide Report header icons to view or hide the header display. 5 On the Confirm dialog. 3 Select one of the following options: ■ Delete the selected report instance ■ Delete all previous occurrences for the report Note In case the report has only one instance. there was an option to delete a report but not its instances individually. click OK. by the Delete Instances option in the Reports screen. This is taken care in this release. 4 Click OK. Deleting instances This option is used to delete report instances. Disable generation Use the Disable Generation icon to disable the generation of reports. Date drop-down Select the Report period from the list. 2 Click Delete Instances icon . To delete Report Instances 1 Select the Date. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 327 .

You can enter specific information that other users may benefit from by looking at that particular instance of the report. For example. in tags. This creates hyperlinks for URLs in report comments. which are part of comments. If required. Report Instance comments are always displayed after Global comments of the report. 328 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . If the Show Comments at option was not selected for a report. Click URL Tag to enclose URLs. Use the Report Instance Comments window to indicate to other users that the overall health of the server is good and due to an unforeseen condition the server's condition was Bad for a day. 2 Type in your comments and click OK. 3 Click OK.Additional options Adding comments to a report Use the Add Comment icon to access the Report Instance Comments window. the same is updated for the report and the Show Comments at option is not displayed for the report instance. due to power outage Availability falls below 99% and the server is considered to be in Bad state. change the font size. If you select the option here and specify the location of comments. On a particular day. To add a comment 1 Click the Add Comment icon . consider an Element Distribution Summary report created to denote Availability of Solaris Processes on a server.99%. Add comments you want to associate with the report instance generated. The Report Instance Comments window is displayed. Report instances are to be generated Daily and the server is considered to be in Good state if the Availability is >=99. is displayed. A message. indicating that the comment has been updated successfully. then the Report Instance Comments window displays the option.

Once a report is added to a view. 3 Select Show Detailed Report. This icon is only available for reports where the On Demand option is selected during report creation. To add a report to a view 1 Click the icon to launch the Add this Report to View pop-up window. Generating a report Use the Generate Report icon to generate a report. 2 Specify the view to which you want to add the report. assigned. all these statuses show up in the selected Status column. the Status column displays corresponding entries for the open. You can add the report to an existing view or a new view. if the event is acknowledged and assigned before being closed during the report generation period. 5 Click Add to View. Adding a report to a view Use the Add to View icon to add a report to a view. Note Chapter 7 Generating Reports 329 . an event that is currently closed appears as open in the Status column of the generated because the event was open during the report generation period. For example. If the event life cycle (opened. its parameters no longer need to be determined each time you want to view data in that manner. acknowledged. assigned. Similarly. This is disabled when you select Show Detailed Report. Simply click the report in its View group. and closed statuses.Additional options Scheduling Click the Schedule icon to schedule the report. to show the report as a single large report. 4 Select the Layout Type. Make changes as required in the Report Creation page. and closed) is contained within the report generation period. acknowledged.

0 to use the Export to PDF function effectively. 4 Click Cancel to abort action. To save report in PDF 1 Click PDF icon. 3 Click Save to save the report in CSV format. 330 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . For operational steps to edit report. 2 On the message screen. 2 Save the report with the. click Open to view the report in CSV format. the values are shifted to the next column.pdf extension for further action. To export report to CSV 1 Click the CSV icon. If reports with instance names containing commas are exported to CSV. ■ In Event reports. disabled for new customers. Note ■ Sometimes the Export to PDF function may not work properly on a system running Windows 2000 Service Pack 4. Exporting to Portable Document Format (PDF) Use the PDF icon to save the report in PDF.Additional options Editing a report Use the Edit Report icon to edit the report. the PDF option is available only for upgrade customers and is Exporting to CSV Use the CSV icon to export report data to a excel sheet. refer to the Report Administration topic. BMC Software recommends Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 and Adobe Reader 6.

4 Email address: The receivers' email address. All reports (except SLA reports if the license is not valid) are displayed. This is a Microsoft Managing all reports The Administrator/Admin class users can now manage all the available reports (including private reports) that is. and on the menu click Other Actions. The Automatic Download Settings screen is displayed.conf file is enabled. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 331 . 5 Message: A brief message description sent via mail either in HTML or Plain text format.report.option=false property from the Pw \pronto\conf\pronet. Deselect Don’t download pictures or other content automatically in HTML email. click Tools => Options => Security and click Change Automatic Download Settings. By default. Select View in browser option to view the mail in Internet Explorer in HTML format.Additional options Mailing a report To mail a report 1 Click the Mail this Page icon to display the Mail Details for Snapshot window. limitation. Copy the pronet. Note Change the following settings for Outlook 2003 and 2007 only if the report is not properly displayed in the mail. enable.conf and set the value to "true". The Manage All tab is visible only when the conf entry in the pronet. 3 Subject: The subject line of the email. ■ In Outlook 2003 to view a report in email. disable and delete these reports.manageAllReports. ■ If the mail size is too large the mail will not be delivered. reportType reportName is displayed as the subject of the email. ■ In Outlook 2007 double-click the message. To manage a report 1 Click the Manage All tab to display the Manage all Reports window. 2 From: The report sender's e-mail address. By default the value is set to "false" .conf file to pw\custom\conf\pronet.

BMC ProactiveNet recommends that default reports should not deleted from the system.Points to Remember 2 Select the check boxes against the reports to enable. See the BMC ProactiveNet Administrator Guide for more information about CLI commands. click the Print icon . still be valid when the attribute was modified in the VAM monitor type. ■ The old attribute references from a VAM monitor type added to Asset report will 332 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Note Printing a report To print the report. ■ Asset Reports do not track changes made to the Monitor Wizard based monitors. In case attributes associated with a monitor created through Monitor Wizard are changed after Asset Report creation. hence the Admin user will not be able to navigate through the reports. ■ BMC ProactiveNet 7. The options will only be for 2d and 3d bar. Line and Scatter plot is not used for displaying objective and values.0 uses stacked bars for displaying objective and value. There will be no hyperlinks for the reports. disable or delete the reports. Points to Remember ■ Default reports cannot be restored once deleted. To retain a report for more than 7 days. For Upgrades. Asset report continues to report on the original attributes. all line and scatter plots will be displayed as 3D bars. Pruning a report The prune period for reports is as follows: ■ 1 month: for daily reports ■ 6 months: for weekly reports ■ 2 years: for monthly reports The prune period for events is set to 7 days by default. change the prune period using pw commands.

■ BMC ProactiveNet does not support use of special characters for sub-transaction For non-restricted users. BMC ProactiveNet recommends using RATE data for generating reports for longer periods. and is not recommended. any of the report includes web transaction monitors with special characters in the sub-transaction names. In case. the Operations Console displays the following reports in the Reports list page: ■ All public reports (irrespective of who created the report) ■ All reports that are shared with the user group (irrespective of who created the report) ■ Any private reports created by this user.Points to Remember ■ RAW data is archived after 8 days. change the archive settings using pw commands (pw log period). report is not generated. Chapter 7 Generating Reports 333 . To generate reports based RAW data for longer periods. Please note. names. increasing the archive period has performance impacts.

Points to Remember 334 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Seamless integration with Violation Summary and Probable Cause Chapter 8 Managing service levels 335 . SLO views complement existing infrastructure-centric application management solutions. grouping of required attributes and metrics) present a relational view of objectives and the actual status of SLO compliance. and track SLOs.8 Managing service levels What is an SLO? A service level objective (SLO) is a key component used to evaluate. BMC ProactiveNet monitors and reports on the various aspects of SLOs. SLO views also represent application performance levels and service levels committed to within the organization. business structures are available in a top-down hierarchical view that delivers near real-time service level views of application and service metrics. monitor. The views represent application performance metrics in a way that relates the IT and line of business teams as a close working unit on which the company depends. and maintain acceptable service levels and compliance with service level agreements (SLAs). This view provides valuable information on performance status from an end users’ perspective for each business unit and SLO compliance. The SLO Management Console The SLO Management Console provides an integrated view of all SLOs. SLO business views help define. SLOs measure the performance of the service provider and are outlined to avert disputes between the two parties on misunderstanding. With new business views. Service level view enables you to take a proactive approach to meeting SLOs. Predefined and custom-defined indicators (SLO types. SLO administration is the first step in integrating the SLO with the BMC ProactiveNet system. measure. BMC ProactiveNet enables you to define SLOs in the BMC ProactiveNet system.

Table 99: Navigation tabs in the SLO Management Console Navigation tab Current Status Description Provides the latest view of the performance of various SLOs configured in the system Provides a hierarchical tree presentation of SLOs for a user-defined time duration Provides various options for the administration of SLOs in BMC ProactiveNet Summarizes details for all top-level SLOs created in the system Further information Viewing the current status of SLOs on page 351 Viewing SLOs in a hierarchical tree on page 361 Managing SLOs on page 337 Tree SLO Administration Compliance Matrix Viewing SLO compliance details and history on page 352 Also. you can customize various aspects of SLO data display. 336 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Table 99 on page 336 presents the default tabs that are available in the SLO Management Console and additional tabs that you can define. For more information. you can add the following pages as tabs Reports Enables you to view the reports for an individual SLO Enables you to view the details of SLO violations Displays SLO records with computed delta values (difference between the compliance objective and its value for the time unit) Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations on page 360 Viewing violation details for an SLO on page 355 Comparing compliance objectives with actual results on page 358 Violation Details Watch List Also. Customizing basic settings for SLO data display Using the Options screen.The SLO Management Console Analysis within SLO views help extend the IT capability to troubleshoot and pinpoint problems quickly as SLO violations occur. 2009. 2009 is available only on September 11. and discusses their functions. see To recalculate an SLO on page 349. For example. Product Short computes SLO compliance at the end of each day. computation of compliance for September 10. there is a provision to select a Dashboard View from Options in the SLO Mgmt console.

d Optionally. b Click Add Tab. Table 100: Basic configuration for SLO data display Setting Show Device name with Monitor Description To view device names on all Service Management screens Show icons instead of numbers for the To view a compliance icon instead of percentage in numbers SLO Compliance Values 3 Under Tab Selection. to delete a tab. 2 In the SLO Mgmt tab. select the tab in the Selected Tabs box. perform the following substeps to add. Note You can add multiple tabs only for Current Status. a Select an item from the General. and then click Delete Tab(s). and delete the items to be displayed as tabs in the SLO Mgmt console. you can manage all the SLOs monitored by BMC ProactiveNet. under Display Preferences. 4 Click Apply. move. modify the settings as necessary. However. to change the order of tabs in the console.Managing SLOs To customize SLO data display 1 Click the Options link at the top right of the Operation Console. Related Topics Creating or editing an SLO on page 338 Deleting SLOs on page 341 Chapter 8 Managing service levels 337 . Table 100 on page 337 summarizes the available settings. you must specify a different name for each tab. Managing SLOs Through the SLO Administration tab on the SLO Management console. SLO Details. c Optionally. use the arrows to the right of the Selected Tabs box. or Views box.

click Edit. For all other SLO attributes. ■ To edit an existing SLO. To create or edit an SLO 1 On the SLO Management console. Table 101: Attributes for defining an SLO SLO attribute Name Owner Contact Information Description A unique name for the SLO Name of the user who owns the SLO Phone number or email address of the SLO owner 338 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Managing SLOs Managing SLO types during SLO configuration on page 341 Managing schedules during SLO configuration on page 342 Managing range sets during SLO configuration on page 344 Requesting guidance for setting SLO thresholds on page 345 Recalculating SLO data for modified time periods on page 348 Resetting SLO compliance data on page 350 Creating or editing an SLO A special wizard on the SLO Administration tab guides you through the task of defining a new SLO or editing an existing SLO. and then click Next. Note Only the fields indicated by a red asterisk are mandatory. specify or modify the SLO attributes summarized in Table 71 on page 297. you can accept the default settings. 2 Click the relevant option: ■ For a new SLO. 3 On the first screen (Step 1) of the SLO wizard. click the SLO Administration tab. click Add.

you can select multiple schedules. and then click Next. and then click Next.Managing SLOs SLO attribute SLO Contents Description Type of objects that comprise the SLO. You can add other schedules or edit the attributes of the schedules at this point. you can create an SLO only for classification by selecting the Use this SLO for grouping only. SLOs or Instances ■ SLOs based on instances form base-level SLOs ■ SLOs based on SLOs provide a consolidated view of related SLOs. See Managing schedules during SLO configuration on page 342. See Managing range sets during SLO configuration on page 344. Response time threshold values may not be the same during business and non-business hours. See Managing SLO types during SLO configuration on page 341. Create corresponding Response Time SLO Schedule Select this check box if you chose Availability as the SLO type and want a corresponding Response Time SLO created. and not to calculate Aggregate Compliance values option. The grouping can include SLOs based on instances and other nested SLOs. The type of SLO based on the groups to which it is associated Basic SLO types are Availability. 4 On the second screen (Step 2) of the SLO wizard. 6 On the third screen (Step 3) of the SLO wizard. select one or more Group Filter and at least one Monitor Type to associate with the SLO. and System Performance. 5 Select the Monitor Instances to add to the SLO. Select the schedule to apply to SLO monitoring. Response Time.Objective SLO Compliance .Range Set Percentage of compliance or non-compliance (as indicated and based on the SLO type) that the SLO must obtain You can add other range sets or edit the settings of the user-defined ranges at this point. For example. you can modify any of the SLO values summarized in Table 71 on page 297. Copy from Services/Groups SLO Type Check this option and select between services or groups to copy from the existing services or groups. If required. You can add other types or edit the attributes of the SLO types at this point. This option is static and acts as a filter. If you choose SLOs. This allows you to set threshold values for different time periods. SLO Compliance . or if you chose Response Time as the SLO type and want a corresponding Availability SLO created. Chapter 8 Managing service levels 339 . Basic schedules are 24X7 and Business Hours.

you can now add (and subsequently delete) sub-transactions on the displayed list. click SLO Guidance. Financial Impact Amount of financial loss (per hour) caused if the SLO condition is not met Tip Weight 7 If you want intelligent event thresholds created for all the listed SLO. Weight associated with the SLO attribute. Only after the SLO value has continued to stay in the violation range for a period greater than the minimum duration it is reported as a violation. To ignore SLO violations during computation. For example. 8 If you are defining Transaction Monitors. For more information. either Greater than or equal or Less than or equal SLO value (a percentage) for the instance or attribute Time period for validating the SLO violation. 9 To add a sub-transaction. For guidance on setting values based on compliance values recommended by Product Short for the selected monitor instances. ■ To modify multiple SLOs. select the relevant sub-transactions and click Delete Sub-Transactions. see Requesting guidance for setting SLO thresholds on page 345. if Attributes A. and then specify the severity and duration for the event. enter values directly in the displayed table. 10 To delete sub-transactions. and C have associated weights of 5. a whole number greater than zero Associated Weights define the relative importance of an attribute within the SLO (for computation requirements). and B is twice as important as A. B. then Attribute C is thrice as important as A. such as a Web Transaction. enter values in the fields below the table as described in Table 102 on page 340 and then click Apply. 340 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . select sub-transactions from the displayed list and click Apply. select the Set corresponding Instance Intelligent Event Threshold option. 10.Managing SLOs ■ To modify a specific SLO. and 15 (respectively). and then click OK in the confirmation message. click Add Sub-Transactions. Table 102: Configurable SLO values Setting Service Level Objective: Condition Service Level Objective: Value Minimum Duration Description Condition using which SLOs are compared with actual measurements. specify a weight of zero.

and System Performance. and then click Next.Managing SLOs 11 Click Finish. add new monitor types and attributes to any existing SLO Type. The new SLO is created and displayed in the SLO list on the SLO Administration screen. 2 Click Delete. Each SLO has one associated SLO Type. To define a new SLO Type 1 On the first screen (Step 1) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. 6 In the confirmation dialog box. Chapter 8 Managing service levels 341 . and then click Next. click New beside the SLO Type field. Deleting SLOs To delete a SLO 1 Select the check box under the Select column corresponding to the SLO that you wish to delete. 5 Click Finish. 3 In the confirmation dialog box. BMC ProactiveNet provides three default SLO Types: Availability. 4 Specify a name for the attribute set. 2 Select the Monitor Type(s) to associate with the SLO Type. 3 From the list of attributes corresponding to the selected Monitor Type(s). Managing SLO types during SLO configuration An SLO Type is a grouping of related attributes across different monitor types registered with Product Short. You can also edit existing SLO Types. An SLO Type defines the attributes to include in compliance calculations. click OK. Response Time. click OK. You can create new SLO Types during the configuration of an SLO as described in Creating or editing an SLO on page 3383. select the attributes to associate with the SLO Type. that is.

e Click OK. b Select the Monitor Type(s) to associate with the SLO Type.M. 3 Optionally. click OK.M. and 5 P. Monday to Friday only. e Click OK. For example. A schedule can include multiple time periods for inclusion or exclusion. 2 In the Edit AttributeSet screen. perform the following substeps to delete attributes associated with the selected SLO Type: a Select all relevant attributes. and then click Edit. and then click Next. c From the list of attributes corresponding to the selected Monitor Type(s). select the attributes to associate with the SLO Type. an SLO with the 24x7 schedule will consider all recorded monitored attribute values for SLO computation. for 5 days a week (Monday to Friday) will consider the monitored attribute values recorded between 9 A. to 5 P.Managing SLOs To edit an existing SLO type 1 On the first screen (Step 1) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. Managing schedules during SLO configuration A schedule is a defined period of time used by BMC ProactiveNet to consider recorded monitored attribute values for SLO computations. Schedules help put SLO compliance computation in the right perspective without distorting the values by including invalid periods. However. c In the confirmation dialog box. b Click Delete. another SLO with a schedule of 9 A. perform the following substeps to add attributes: a Click Add Attributes to add new attributes to the selected SLO Type. d Click Finish. 342 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . and then click Next.M.M.. d Click Finish. select the SLO Type from the list. in the Edit AttributeSet screen.

for exclusion. and then click Edit. To delete a time period included in the schedule. click New beside the Schedule field. or a monthly recurrence of days and times to be excluded. define either a one-time exclusion time period by specifying the start date and time and end date and time. e Click Close. To define a new schedule or edit an existing schedule 1 On the first screen (Step 1) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. You can create new schedules or edit existing schedules during the configuration of an SLO as described in Creating or editing an SLO on page 338. 2 Click Delete Schedule. select it in the list and click Delete. Exclusion periods take precedence over inclusion periods. Note Tip To delete a schedule 1 On the first screen (Step 1) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. Chapter 8 Managing service levels 343 . select the schedule in the list. 4 Click OK. d After adding all relevant time periods. click Done. select the relevant option: ■ To create a new schedule. 3 In the confirmation box. define the start time and end time of the period during one or more days of the week. 2 Specify (or modify) a name for the schedule. and then click Edit. 3 Perform the following substeps to define time periods for inclusion or exclusion: a For inclusion. click OK. b Optionally. select a schedule that you wish to delete from the list. c Click Add to add the period to the list of time periods within the schedule. ■ To edit an existing schedule.Managing SLOs BMC ProactiveNet provides two default schedules: 24x7 and Business Hours.

click New beside the Range Set field. See Creating or editing an SLO on page 338. on page 287 and List item. ■ To edit an existing range set. 5 Repeat List item. and then click Edit. select the range set in the list. select the relevant option: ■ To create a new range set. To delete a range from the list of defined compliance ranges (starting with the last defined range). 3 Select the severity and specify the upper limit of the range in the To Range field. 4 Click Add Compliance Range to add the range to the list of defined compliance ranges on the right. click OK.Managing SLOs Managing range sets during SLO configuration You can create new range sets or edit existing range sets during the configuration of an SLO. 2 Specify (or modify) a name for the range set. on page 287 for all other relevant ranges in the range set. 6 Click Done. click Remove Compliance Range. Note To delete a range set 1 On the first screen (Step 1) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. select the range set in the list. 3 In the confirmation dialog box. and then click Edit. 344 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . To create a new range set or edit an existing range set 1 On the first screen (Step 1) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. 2 Click Delete Range Set. The From Range field is auto-populated.

and then click Apply. the value is highlighted in red. A list of suggested thresholds is displayed for the relevant monitor instances and attributes. The thresholds that you chose to apply are highlighted in green. 2 Select the Suggest Thresholds for SLOs option. If a threshold was not suggested. Threshold values are recommended based on raw data points collected for each monitor instance (by default. If the suggested value is inaccurate due to NO_RESPONSE data points. You can choose between the following options: ■ Obtain automatic suggestions for SLO thresholds based on past performance and the overall SLO objective ■ Preview past compliance values for all instances ■ Display performance graphs for all instances To obtain automatic suggestions for thresholds 1 On the third screen (Step 3) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. you can request guidance from in setting thresholds and defining compliance objectives based on past performance. click SLO Guidance. the value is highlighted in yellow. 3 Select the thresholds that you want to apply to your SLO. Chapter 8 Managing service levels 345 . from the last eight days).Managing SLOs Requesting guidance for setting SLO thresholds During SLO configuration. and then click OK.

see Creating custom graphs on page 249. 346 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 3 Click Close. the pronet. To preview past compliance values 1 On the third screen (Step 3) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. 2 Select the Show Past Performance option. click SLO Guidance. when calculating the SLO compliance. and then click OK. but only new calculations. Individual graphs are displayed in the Graph Display window for each monitor instance based on data collected over the last eight days. To display graphs of past performance 1 On the third screen (Step 3) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. 2 Select the Preview Past Compliance option. the recommended SLO value for the attribute is always 100%.businessview. ■ Since data points of the Availability attribute are either 0 or 100%. SLO treats NO_DATA points as violations. ■ Changes in SLO compliance or threshold do not affect previously calculated values. click SLO Guidance.Managing SLOs Note ■ Threshold values cannot be suggested for instances without any past data points. All compliance values are as of the end of the previous day. The new values are displayed throughout the product even though the calculations are based on older values. and then click OK. 3 Click Close. By default. raw data points collected for the monitor over the past eight days are considered. If you set pronet.skipND property is set to true and SLO ignores NO_DATA points. ■ Suggested threshold values may not be accurate if data points are repeated. Compliance values are displayed for each monitor instance and the SLO as a whole. For more information.skipND to false.businessview. ■ BMC ProactiveNet considers NO_DATA and NO_RESPONSE data points ■ By default.

Chapter 8 Managing service levels 347 . the starting month of the quarter and the starting day of the week is configured in the pronet. the number of violated points in calculation and the number of violated points in violation details. result in abnormal values for the current week or quarter.conf entries are as follows: pronet. considers the days for which the SLO has been calculated only. current date. Product Short requires the raw data of all the 24 hours for accurate calculation. As generation or computation happens the next day.conf file. Calculation begins on the next day after SLO addition. This abnormality is corrected from the subsequent week or quarter. the number of violated points in violation details may not ■ Problem not resolved only considers violation records corresponding to the ■ If the SLO uses any schedule other than a full day schedule. However. ■ Any change in Service Level Threshold values may result in a mismatch between ■ In case of server restart. valid entries are 0 to 11 (Jan to Dec). ■ All old compliance values are invalidated if the start of the week or quarter is ■ The corresponding default pronet. Product Short considers all data points for the day during computation. violation records (if any) are available immediately on SLO creation.Managing SLOs Key SLO Computation ■ Retention for stats data should be at least two days. month-to-date compliance ■ Irrespective of the exact time of creation of the SLO. ■ Any change to the start of week or quarter configuration after SLO creation may ■ When calculating Quarter to Date compliance and Week to Date compliance. ■ Columns displayed in the Compliance Matrix are configured in the pronet. changed.businessview.conf file. be accurate and may not match the number of violated points in calculation.firstmonthofquarter=0 The above entry represents the first month of the quarter. ■ If an SLO is added in the middle of the month. the number of violated points from calculation may not match the number of violated points in violations details.

its compliance values are reflected in the parent SLO also.businessview. ■ If you change the pronet.firstdayofweek entry to begin the week on any other day (by default. all its child SLOs are also recalculated. if a child SLO is recalculated. Recalculating SLO data for modified time periods Use the Recalculate SLO option to: ■ Remove or add data collected during specific periods to SLOs ■ Calculate SLO values anew for multiple SLOs Note ■ SLO violation details are not regenerated after SLO recalculation.YTD The above entry represents the periods to be displayed in the compliance matrix page on the Operations Console.showperiods=PD.Managing SLOs ■ The corresponding default pronet. 348 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .1.conf entries are as follows: pronet. ■ When you recalculate a parent SLO. Valid entries are: — Previous Day: PD — Previous Week: PW — Previous Month: PM — Previous Quarter: P — Previous Year: PY — Month to Date: MTD — Year to Date: YTD — Week to Date: WTD — Quarter to Date: QTD ■ Previous Quarter and Previous Year computations are started afresh from the date of upgrade to BMC ProactiveNet 7.businessview. do not recalculate SLOs for the week.WTD. Sunday is the first day of the week). Similarly.QTD.MTD. starting from the day when you changed the entry.

select the SLOs that you want to recalculate. The SLO will report data collected from 9 AM to 10 AM and 2 PM to 5 PM. Note Chapter 8 Managing service levels 349 . the data exclusion clause overrides the inclusion clause. 3 In the SLO Recalculation screen. perform the following substeps: a Select either Inclusion or Exclusion. if the associated schedule is to include data collected from 9 AM to 5 PM. Tip 4 If you want to include or exclude certain time ranges during the specified time period. and the external time range is to exclude data collected from 10 AM to 2 PM. 2 Click Recalculate. The external time range overrides the associated schedule of the SLO. compliance values are recalculated using the external time range and the associated schedule. the SLO will report data collected between 9 AM and 8 PM. SLOs that you selected on the SLO Administration screen are displayed in the Selected SLOs field. If you click Recalculate without defining any external time ranges. the tool tip displays the SLO type and associated schedule. When you mouse over the selected SLO. select the days for which you want to recalculate the SLO values. 5 Click Recalculate. for the same associated schedule. the SLO is recalculated based on the existing schedule associated with it. In the SLO Recalculation screen. ■ BMC ProactiveNet allows you to recalculate data for a period of eight days. if the external time range is to include data collected from 4 PM to 8 PM. When you define a time range and apply it while recalculating an SLO. For example.Managing SLOs To recalculate an SLO 1 On the SLO Administration screen. Similarly. b Set one of the following type of time ranges: ■ One-time Setting: A time range applicable for a period of days ■ Every Day: A time range applied to the individual days c Click Add to add the time range that you specified.

Start Time 12 P.).2005: 75% 05.2005: 95% The server was made unavailable on May 11 and May 12 between 12 P.12.M.2005: 76% 05. 2 Click Reset SLO. The server is expected to be available (Compliance: >= 90%) during business hours (Schedule: 8 A.09.13. 2005 are as follow: 05.2005: 94% 05. 2 Click Delete. Compliance values of the server between May 9. all compliance values are lost. WARNING To reset the existing SLO(s) 1 On the SLO Administration screen.M. To delete a time range 1 In the SLO Recalculation screen. and server compliance values fell below 90 on both days. select the relevant SLOs in the table. Resetting SLO compliance data Resetting an SLO clears all the compliance history that has been collected for the SLO since it was created. 2005 to May 12. for some unscheduled maintenance tasks. select the time range that you want to delete. and End Time 3 P.M.2005: 93% 05. 2005 ■ Select External Inclusion or Exclusion Time Ranges: Exclusion. 2005 and May 13. This action is irreversible. 350 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .M. to 5 P. the following values are used: ■ Select Days: From May 11.M. On resetting SLO(s).11. and 3 P. Every Day.M.Managing SLOs Example 'Chk Availability' is an SLO defined to check the availability of a server. To exclude the server downtime and recalculate the SLO compliance values anew for the week.10.

Availability. On clicking Continue. Represents graphically the longest open violation (if any). the selected SLO is reset and not its referenced SLO(s). On clicking Cancel. click the hyperlink to view the Instance Details page. SLO status details are displayed in a table with several columns of information. and Response Time.Viewing the current status of SLOs Note ■ Reset SLO is not applicable to an SLO that is created for grouping alone. click the icon to view the violation details. you are prompted to reset all the references. ■ If you try to reset an SLO. you can create multiple versions of the SLO current status page. You can expand a nested SLO to view its associated SLOs. see Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations on page 360. If you have selected more than one SLO. click OK. See Customizing the display of SLO status information on page 352. Each SLO can be expanded further to view the instances linked to them. as summarized in Table 103 on page 351. You can select one SLO at a time or all the SLOs configured in the system. Viewing the current status of SLOs The Current Status tab on the SLO Management console provides the latest view of the performance of various SLOs configured in the system. you are prompted to reset the child SLO attached to the parent SLO. Table 103: Columns of SLO status information on the Current Status tab Column Name Description Provides a link to the SLO Details page. 3 In the confirmation dialog box. In case of an existing violation. which is referred by other SLO(s). Chapter 8 Managing service levels 351 . all the SLO(s) are reset. For more information. Each version shows up as a separate tab in the SLO Management console (based on selection). Availability and Response Time for each SLO Current Status Problem Not Resolved Displays the current violation status for the SLO. You can use the Set Current Status Preferences option to customize the contents of the current status screen. Based on the user access level. By default. the current status screen displays all the SLOs (configurable) in the system against the SLO Name. At an attribute level.

The Compliance Matrix tab summarizes SLO details in a tabular format as described in Table 104 on page 353. It can be configured to display any one of the following: Previous month. This option is at a user level and differs for each version of SLO current status. Week to date. choose from the following options: ■ Show Trend for SLO Compliance: Displays trend analysis ■ Show Financial Impact: Includes a financial impact for measurement 6 Click Apply. Depending on the Global setting. the compliance is displayed as an icon or a number. and Year to date. 3 Select the SLO Types for which you want to display status information. Customizing the display of SLO status information The Preference screen helps in configuring the current status display. Viewing SLO compliance details and history The Compliance Matrix tab on the SLO Management Console presents a summary of SLO data for all top-level SLOs created in the system. Quarter to date. To customize the display of SLO status information 1 Click the Set Current Status Preferences icon. 4 In the Time Period box. 2 Select the SLOs for which you want to display status information. Previous week. 5 In the Other Options box.Viewing SLO compliance details and history Column Previous Week Compliance Description Previous week compliance of the SLO. select the time periods for which to display status information. Month to date. 352 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . and the recorded compliance levels. status. including SLO details.

click . The system compares the actual compliance value against this value. The SLO Type is a grouping of related attributes across Monitor Types. or print the page. Displays the SLO compliance for the previous day Week to Date Month to Date Quarter to Date Year to Date Displays the SLO compliance for the previous week Displays the SLO compliance for the previous month Displays the SLO compliance for the current month Displays the SLO compliance for the current year Details Current Status History Objective Tip ■ To generate a printer-friendly version of the Compliance Matrix screen. click . ■ To save the contents of this screen in CSV format. This column does not apply to Nested SLOs (SLO based on SLOs). and graphical representations of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date) and the SLO Violation history Displays the current status of SLO compliance. Displays the SLO Type associated with the SLO. Valid Statuses are: open (red icon) and closed (green dot). Colors and ranges are configurable from the first screen (Step 1) of the SLO wizard during SLO configuration. Displays the compliance objective associated with the SLO.Viewing SLO compliance details and history Note Compliance values for time periods do not include the data from the current date. Table 104: Columns of SLO information on the Compliance Matrix tab Column SLO Type Description Displays the name assigned to the SLO. Related Topics Chapter 8 Managing service levels 353 . send an email. The icons on the top right of this screen let you view the report header. Provides a link to the SLO Details screen that gives complete information about the individual SLO. click ■ To view the Compliance Matrix report. Provides a link to the Compliance Matrix screen that lists the components of that SLO. save the page as a PDF or CSV. All compliance values below the compliance objective are treated as a bad range and the cell is highlighted in red. Provides a link to the Violation Details screen in case of an open violation. It reflects the real-time Service Level Threshold violations at any level. Provides a link to the SLO Compliance History Report screen. . schedule a report.

354 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . ■ Instance Details tab provides complete information about the individual instance. you can click an individual SLO link to display a detailed matrix corresponding to that SLO. and a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). and a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). Table 105 on page 354 summarizes the columns that are displayed on drilling down into an individual SLO. and corresponding attributes depending on the type of the SLO. For more information. a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). Instance Details Tab is only available in the case of drill-down from instance level. Table 105: Columns of SLO information after drilling down into an individual SLO Column SLO Instance Attribute Details Description Displays the SLO instance name Displays the monitored attribute name Provides a link to the Instance Details screen that provides complete information about the individual instance. ■ SLO Details tab provides complete information about the individual SLO.Viewing SLO compliance details and history Viewing a summary of details and compliance metrics for an SLO on page 354 Viewing violation details for an SLO on page 355 Viewing a history graph for an SLO on page 357 Viewing a breakdown of SLO metrics for various time periods on page 357 Viewing a summary of details and compliance metrics for an SLO From the Compliance Matrix tab > SLO column. see Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations on page 360. The matrix lists childlevel SLO instances. and violations.

The default value is 31 days. you can click an individual SLO link to display the Violations Details page corresponding to that SLO. Service Level Threshold violation records are purged at regular intervals. It reflects the real-time Service Level Threshold violations at any level. The Violation Details page provides the Service Level Threshold violation summary and allows the user to sort columns.Viewing SLO compliance details and history Column Current Status Description Displays the current status of SLO compliance. Icons are tied to compliance values during range set definition. Colors can be set for compliance values only and not for the current status. Provides a link to the Violation Details screen in case of an open violation. Table 106 on page 355 summarizes the columns that are displayed on drilling down into the current status of an individual SLO. The Violation Details screen links the SLO with Probable cause Analysis (PCA) and associates Service Level Violation Events and Infrastructure Events. which in turn has a Custom Graph Generator link Lists the weights associated with the attribute Displays the SLO compliance for the previous day Displays the SLO compliance for the current week Displays the SLO compliance for the current month Displays the SLO compliance for the current quarter Displays the SLO compliance for the current year Graph Weight Previous Day Week to Date Month to Date Quarter to Date Year to Date Viewing violation details for an SLO From the Compliance Matrix tab Current Status column. By default. this screen lists all the violations in the last 24 hours. Valid Statuses are: open (red icon) and closed (green dot). and the icon display in all the subsections depends on the corresponding range set definitions. Table 106: Columns of Violation Details current status information after drilling down into an individual SLO Column Time SLO Name SLO Type Description Date and time when the violation was recorded Name of the SLO Name of the SLO type Chapter 8 Managing service levels 355 . Provides a link to the Graph Display page. Icon display depends on the compliance value of the instance.

For more information. Max: 1 day ■ Status of the violation record: either Open or Closed. SLO Details tab provides complete information about the individual SLO. Min. and a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). You can use the query fields to filter the list by various criteria. Instance Details Tab is only available in the case of drill-down from instance level. and a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). Device Information Status Duration Violated Points SLO Violation Description Analyze Details of the instance from which the violation is generated Current status of the violation Duration for which the violation was open Number of violated points for closed violations. Violated points are not displayed for open violations. To filter the list of violations 1 In the query fields above the list of violations. a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). the Violations Details page lists all the violations recorded in the last 24 hours. the default is Open ■ Time period: either a predefined interval or a custom time range defined by the From and To times 356 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . ■ Instance Details tab provides complete information about the individual instance.: 15 minutes. Description of the violation The icon in this column provides a link to the Probable Cause Analysis page Filtering violations By default. and violations.Viewing SLO compliance details and history Column SLO Details Description This column provides a link to the SLO Details screen that provides complete information about the individual instance. set the filtering criteria for the violation from the following criteria: ■ Selected SLO ■ Duration of the violation: the maximum amount of time for which the violation has been open. see Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations on page 360.

you can click the time period for an individual SLO to display a detailed view of the various data points collected for the time period. The list of violations is refreshed according to the specified criteria. see Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations on page 360. For more information. which provides options to generate a graph for different predefined time ranges Associated weight Chapter 8 Managing service levels 357 . and a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). Quarter to Date. Graph Weight This column provides a link to the Graph Displays page. and a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). Instance Details Tab is only available in case of drill-down from the instance level. Month to Date. Viewing a history graph for an SLO From the Compliance Matrix tab > History column. The screen provides options to generate the graph for different predefined time ranges. Table 86 on page 312 summarizes the columns that are displayed on drilling down into the time period of an individual SLO. you can click the graph icon for an individual SLO to display a graphical representation of the SLO compliance over a specified duration.Viewing SLO compliance details and history 2 Click Apply. ■ Instance Details tab provides complete information about the individual instance. Table 107: Columns of SLO metrics for a defined time period Column SLO Instance Attribute Details Description Name of the SLO Instance Name of the associated attribute This column provides a link to the SLO and Instance Details. SLO Details tab provides complete information about the individual SLO. and Year to Date). Viewing a breakdown of SLO metrics for various time periods From the Compliance Matrix tab > time period columns (Previous Day. Week to Date.

The compliance computation does not consider the current date. Details 358 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . SLO compliance for the current month. which provides complete information about the individual SLO. you can sort the compliance percent value for the Month To Date column from worst to best. The system compares the actual compliance value against this objective. For example. Calculation of total points and violated points is based on the schedule of the SLO SLO’s compliance objective Instance level compliance Compliance Objective Compliance Value Comparing compliance objectives with actual results The Watch List screen displays SLO records and computed delta values. which is the difference between the compliance objective and its value for the time unit. For more information. This column provides a link to the SLO Details page. The compliance computation does not consider the current date. only one of them is displayed.Comparing compliance objectives with actual results Column Violated/Total Points Description Number of violated points based on the Service Level Threshold for the instance or attribute and the total number of data points recorded for the time range. Default SLO Types are Availability and Performance. Compliance Objective Month to Date Delta The compliance value associated with the SLO. This screen also provides filters to view specific records. see Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations on page 360. and a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). The difference between the compliance value and objective for the specified time period. Table 108: Columns of information on the Watch List screen Column SLO Type Description Name assigned to the SLO. Table 108 on page 358 summarizes the columns that are displayed on the Watch List screen. If the same SLO is displayed in two or more multi-tier SLOs. You can sort by any column. The SLO Type is a grouping of related attributes across Monitor Types. Link on the name listing directs to the Watch list page specific to that individual SLO SLO Type associated with the SLO.

The available values are: Previous Day. you must have the Watch List tab added on the Operations Console. To filter SLOs in the Watch List 1 Use any combination of the following query fields to set the filter criteria: ■ Time Period: Select the time period from the list to view corresponding compliances for that period. The Watch List screen has two sections: ■ Filters ■ Watch List table Filtering SLO records in the Watch List The default display includes all top-level SLOs with a compliance below 100% set for the Month to Date time period. and Year to Date. Note To view the Watch List 1 From the Options => SLO Mgmt tab. Week to Date. You can use the query fields to filter the list.Comparing compliance objectives with actual results Related Topics Accessing the Watch List on page 359 Filtering SLO records in the Watch List on page 359 Drilling down to an individual SLO in the Watch List on page 360 Accessing the Watch List To access the watch list. Month to Date. Chapter 8 Managing service levels 359 . under Tab Selection. 2 Click the Watch List tab. select Watch List. ■ Show the following SLOs: Select the SLO grouping to view. Previous Month. Quarter to Date. Previous Week.

Table 109: Columns of information on the Watch List Column SLO Name SLO Type Description SLO name. SLO Details Month to Date Compliance SLO compliance for the selected time period. a graphic representation of the compliance levels across different periods (depending on data collected to date). A link on the SLO name directs you to the Watch List page specific to that individual SLO. SLOs with compliance below 100%. and SLOs which violate their compliance goals. 2 Click Apply. SLO type associated with the SLO. Default SLO types are Availability and Performance. Delta Weight Difference between the compliance value and objective for the specified time period. The compliance computation does not consider the current date. Device Info Attribute Compliance Objective Details of the instance from where the violation is generated Attribute for which the Service Level threshold has been set Compliance value associated with the SLO. The SLO Type is a grouping of related attributes across monitor types. For more information. see Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations on page 360. The compliance computation does not consider the current date. The system compares the actual compliance value against this objective.Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations The available values are: All SLOs. ■ Show Top level SLOs Only: Select this check box if you want to include only top level SLOs in the listing. and SLO violations. that provides complete information about the individual SLO. Drilling down to an individual SLO in the Watch List The drill-down from the SLO column displays details of the particular SLO. Associated weight for the attribute Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations 360 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . The icon in this column provides a link to the Instance Details page.

From the SLO Details screen. Chapter 8 Managing service levels 361 . click the link in the Name column to view a graphical representation of an individual SLO. click Generate SLO Health Summary Report . For more information on the health report. Viewing instance details To access the Instance Details screen. ■ Compliance Summary: Displays a graphical representation of the compliance levels within the last 24 hours. click Edit to add comments. a graphical indication of the current status. The SLO Details page displays the following information: ■ SLO Information: Displays general information about the SLO. see Health Summary on page 315. and a graphical representation of the violation history. you can perform the following tasks: ■ In SLO Information. ■ To generate an SLO Health Summary report. Tip On the Current Status tab. interactive visualization of the SLO violation status. ■ To add this SLO Details page as a tab in the Service Management Console. Watch List tab. Viewing SLOs in a hierarchical tree The Tree tab in the SLO Management Console provides a real-time. a weight. click Promote as Tab on the top right of this page. displays a line graph (default) and violations (if any) for the selected instance based on data collected over the last 24 hours. The SLO hierarchy and IT Groups are visible on a hyperbolic plane mapped to a circular display region. and Violation Details tab.Viewing SLOs in a hierarchical tree From the Compliance Matrix tab. click the link in the Thresholds Conditions column on the SLO Details screen. The Instance Details screen provides complete information about an individual instance. ■ SLO Violation History: Displays the various SLO instances with a description of the threshold condition. you can click the SLO Details icon for an individual SLO to view information about an SLO.

right-click the SLO icon and choose Set As Root to set the selected SLO as root. click Network Settings. To ensure proper display of the tree. click Show Legend or Hide Legend. and then change the default option. ■ To display or hide the legend.5 browser 1 In the Control Panel. you can perform the following tasks: ■ To change the focus point on the tree. 2 In the Java Control Panel. ■ To filter SLOs by maximum violation duration. the tree might not be displayed properly in Firefox 1. specify a name for the new tab. 362 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . ■ To promote the page as an independent tab. drag any point on the tree. For example. select the time from the Time list. If the BMC ProactiveNet Server is within the firewall and the Operations Console is outside the firewall. double-click the Java icon. a user may be restricted to view only a subset of SLOs that exist in the system. To control the display on the tree. Use browser settings to Direct connection. click Promote as Tab. perform the following steps on Windows 2000 or XP: To ensure proper display of the tree on Firefox 1. Only the selected SLO and its child nodes are displayed.5. The SLO tree is refreshed to display only those SLOs for which violations occurred within the selected time duration. Related Topics Controlling the display in the SLO Tree on page 362 Accessing further information from the SLO Tree on page 363 Controlling the display in the SLO Tree The following tasks guide you through the various actions that you can perform to control the display of information in the SLO Tree. ■ To focus on the SLO.Viewing SLOs in a hierarchical tree SLOs displayed are based on the Access Control level of the user. and then click Apply.

by right-clicking the SLO instance. see Viewing a graphical history of SLO compliance and violations on page 360. and then choosing SLO Instance Details. For more information.slatree. and then choosing SLO Details. by right-clicking the SLO. For more information. by right-clicking the SLO instance. by right-clicking the SLO. For more information. see Determining the probable cause for an event on page 159. ■ On the SLO level. For more information. ■ Access the Probable Cause Analysis page. see Viewing SLO compliance details and history on page 352.refreshRate property in the installDirectory/usr/pw/ custom/conf /pronet. and then choosing Compliance Matrix. — On the SLO instance level. you can perform the following operations: — Access the SLO Details page.conf file.applet. Accessing further information from the SLO Tree From the SLO tree. you can perform the following operations: ■ Access the SLO Instance Details page. see Viewing instance details on page 361. ■ Access the Compliance Matrix page.Viewing SLOs in a hierarchical tree To change the data refresh interval 1 Data refresh interval (in seconds) for the SLO Tree can be specified using the pronet. Chapter 8 Managing service levels 363 . and then choosing Probable Cause. you can access various screens to view further information about the SLO or the SLO instance.

Viewing SLOs in a hierarchical tree 364 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

or Group Name to view associated monitors. Click Edit link of Data Collection. 6 Click Apply. Device. 4 Click the Device Name. Monitor Type. b Select On/Off option from the list corresponding to the monitors. or Monitor Type level: a Select the check box corresponding to the monitors to alter their data collection. and By Group) for display on the Data Collection Administration screen. under the Data Collection heading. 5 Perform the following actions at individual monitor level or at the Group.9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure Activating and deactivating data collection You can use the Data Collection Administration option to start or stop data collection for a monitor or groups of monitors. To use this option the BMC ProactiveNet administrator assigns the 'Allow Collect Data Management' privileges. 2 On the Administration tab. By Monitor Type. 3 Select the View Type (By Device. Related Topics Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 365 . To change data collection settings 1 Click the Options link at the top right of the console.

Scheduling downtime Scheduling downtime on page 366 Tracking changes to BMC ProactiveNet objects on page 373 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet and PATROL agent statuses on page 374 Managing attribute sets on page 377 Managing baselines on page 380 Knowledge patterns on page 163 Managing relationships on page 397 Managing schedules on page 410 Importing and exporting users on page 412 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet software information on page 415 Downloads tab on page 418 Scheduling downtime The Scheduled Down Time feature for devices. You can schedule down time for the following frequencies: ■ One-time ■ Daily ■ Weekly ■ Monthly The scheduler polls the database periodically for downtime events. therefore. down-time events cannot be scheduled with finer granularity than five minutes. In addition. or group stops collecting data. The Scheduled Down Time feature supports multiple schedules with different time ranges. device. By default. and groups allows BMC ProactiveNet administrators to specify a time range during which the monitor. monitors. if a large number of devices is scheduled. 366 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . this period is five minutes.

and number of monitors scheduled for down time. AlarmRule Action/ Notification. Upgrade users have the option to turn baseline calculation off or on when Data Collection is on. For example.Scheduling downtime it may take some time for the scheduler to turn off data collection for the scheduled devices.) Usage scenario This topic depicts a typical data sample that can consists of the following test data. While scheduling downtime. Note Note for upgrade users New and upgrade users have different options available to them in this feature. allow fair time for the device. number of agents. upgrade users can: ■ Stop alarm or event generation ■ Stop alarm-related notifications or actions ■ Calculate baseline parameters If an upgrade user turns on the Data Collection option. The time taken to stop data collection and then resume data collection depends on the server load. ■ Load on BMC ProactiveNet Server: Moderate (system load <1. BMC ProactiveNet recommends that the downtime event be scheduled 15-20 minutes ahead of the actual maintenance period. or group to stop data collection. (When Data Collection is off. Upgrade users can still access the Alarm/Event Generation. To avoid the possibility of false events at the beginning of the maintenance window. In Windows Day and Time Properties. the Calculate Baseline option is disabled because there is no data to calculate.5) ■ Number of agents scheduled down: 4 ■ Number of monitors scheduled down: 1200 ■ Scheduled down duration: 45 minutes Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 367 . select Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes. This should always be selected to show the appropriate default time zone. then the Calculate Baseline option is enabled. and Calculate Baseline options from the Add Device for Scheduled Down Time dialog. monitor.

in case of SLOs defined for availability of this device. — These alarms will automatically close after the web server is online again. Operations: — During regular monitoring. BMC ProactiveNet will monitor the Web server for availability and response time even during the device downtime and generate event or alarm. Alarm/Event generation is on. However. 3 Frequency is Weekly.15 minutes ■ Time taken to resume data collection: 1 . 368 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . — During downtime. The advantage of this setup is that. BMC ProactiveNet will poll for the monitored attributes and report. AlarmRule Action/Notification is off. and 8 A. any event or alarm generated during this period will not be notified. 5 Add Time Range. let us look at the following example: Assumptions: — BMC ProactiveNet is monitoring a web server for availability and response time.Scheduling downtime ■ Time taken to stop data collection: 10 . BMC ProactiveNet console will display the events. 2 Select the Downtime option. However. for maintenance. To schedule the web server downtime 1 Select the web server. Data collection is on. Thus the administrator can check the system and ensure that the web server is working as expected before the time to get it online. — The web server is brought down on Sunday between 4 A. Once the device is up again. the events will close. both availability and response time will not return data and alarms may be generated.M.5 minutes To understand the usage of the Scheduled Down Time feature. Application: In the above case. 4 Specify the Time and Date as applicable. data collection can be switched off to avoid inconsistent SLO compliance calculation.M.

1 Select the Device to be scheduled.Scheduling downtime Adding a downtime schedule To add a downtime schedule 1 In the BMC ProactiveNet Operations Console. If you choose to filter by Device. You can narrow your device search if Groups have been set up for your devices. All devices or groups that are currently down are highlighted in Red. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 369 . New users can skip to step 3. You can choose to filter the list by Device or by Group. In the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Console. select Tools => Schedule Device Downtime. 3 Click Add to open the Scheduler. You have the following options: ■ One-time setting ■ Daily ■ Weekly ■ Monthly To specify the duration of the down time On the Add Device for Scheduled Down Time screen. Choose Options => Administration => Data Collection => Scheduled Down Time => Edit. These settings govern BMC ProactiveNet behavior during the scheduled downtime. The Scheduled Downtime Administration window is displayed. you specify the duration of the down time. Next. The exact display of time (for each entry in the Devices Already Scheduled for Down Time section) may vary depending on the Administration Console (Windows and Solaris). Select the Downtime option. the list can be quite extensive. launch the Scheduled Down Time Administration window. 2 Upgrade users only. and are monitoring numerous devices. 2 Choose a Filter.

Alternatively click the calendar link and select from the pop-up calendar. the server time is displayed here. 370 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Scheduling downtime ■ Data Collection: Select On or Off to continue collecting data or stop data collection respectively. The downtime is scheduled run daily at the specified time. ■ Alarm Rule Action/Notification: Specify if BMC ProactiveNet should send alarm notification for the alarms generated during this period. Hourly baseline is not recalculated and previous values are used. Outside the pause period baseline calculation is performed using current data. the Start Date changes accordingly. select the Time Zone. 5 Select the Start Time and End Time. ■ Alarm/Event Generation: Specify if BMC ProactiveNet should generate Events/ Alarms against the data collected. At the time of baseline calculation. By default. only old values are used. In case data collection is On. In case Alarm/Event Generation is On. The downtime is scheduled weekly at the specified day and time. BMC ProactiveNet checks for the pause period corresponding to the current time. By default. During this period. Calculate Baseline is a scheduled downtime for baseline calculations. previously calculated baseline is used. If you change the Time Zone and the corresponding time falls either in the previous day or the next day. 6 From the list. 4 Under Time Pattern field. Manually specify the dates in mm/dd/yyyy format. Daily and weekly baseline values are recalculated based on the hourly baseline. When you change the time zone. the Start Time and End Time change accordingly. select the Start and End Date. The downtime is scheduled to occur monthly on the specified day and time. During the pause period. In case Calculate Baseline is Off. the server time zone is displayed here. It is not a recurring setting. The baseline stays unaffected by new data. 3 Select the Frequency: Frequency One Time Setting Daily Weekly Monthly Description The downtime is scheduled to run once.

(If you want to delete the schedule. The system presents various alerts or confirmatory messages. — Click Remove Time Range. you can view and edit it by following the procedure given below: To edit/delete downtime schedule 1 If the Scheduler is closed. Selection is displayed in red if opened during its own scheduled time. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 371 . 11 In the Added Successfully dialog box. 9 Click Add. BMC ProactiveNet adds the schedule to the device. click Close. open it from Tools menu on the Administration Console. together with location. 2 Highlight the device whose schedule you want to change and click Edit. 8 Click Yes to confirm. Edit/Delete downtime schedule Once a schedule is set.1. — Select the entry under Time Range Entry.Scheduling downtime Note The Time Zone field displays GMT + Time Zone difference in hours. ■ The Scheduler presents the Devices Scheduled selection. 7 Click Add Time Range . 12 After defining the required Device Downtime. ■ To change the specified time and date combinations. From 7. On confirmation.0.) 3 Modify the schedule as required. click OK . After specifying the required time and date combination. click Delete. 10 Click Yes to confirm the schedule. Time Zone for Indiana-Starke displays GMT – 05:00 US/Indiana-Starke instead of GMT – 5:00 as in 7. and click OK.

Special notes ■ Do not perform any operations (monitor creation.M. ■ A schedule cannot be edited while it is active (during downtime).. .M.M. Related Topics Activating and deactivating data collection on page 365 Tracking changes to BMC ProactiveNet objects on page 373 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet and PATROL agent statuses on page 374 Managing attribute sets on page 377 Managing baselines on page 380 Knowledge patterns on page 163 372 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . ■ In case of overlapping downtime.M. . to 10:00 A. data collection resumes after the higher schedule is completed.1. schedule downtime has no affect on the device ■ From Release 6. ■ In 7.M.up at 10:30 A. In this case.M. data collection.Scheduling downtime Note BMC ProactiveNet does not allow editing of multiple schedules at a time. data collection resumes only after 10:30 A.up at 10:00 A.M.5. ■ If the devices data collection is off. flash check. (though the daily downtime is from 9:30 A. Day Light Savings settings have been taken care of. This can result in unexpected behavior and display of invalid data. To delete a schedule.M. Daily: down at 9:30 A. editing multiple schedules is not allowed.M. etc) on devices during their scheduled downtime. select the schedule from the list and click Delete. Time settings for the previously scheduled downtime might get effected. Example: Consider the following schedules: Weekly: down at 9:00 A. to 10:30 A.). we have an overlapping weekly downtime from 9 A.

2 Set the Time Filter. Default is the current time 3 Select the Device from the list. By default. This displays the Add Configuration Change Event screen. ■ The screen displays all the available entries related to the selected device. This feature is also accessible from the following flows: ■ All Devices (Grid View) => Tools. List includes all devices in the system. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 373 . ■ All Devices (Grid View) => Monitor list => Tools. ■ All Groups (Grid View) => Tools. ■ User: Name of the user. 2 Inputs for Add Change Entry screen. This regular change necessitates a high degree of change management. software and hardware requirements change constantly and need modification on the fly.Tracking changes to BMC ProactiveNet objects Managing relationships on page 397 Managing schedules on page 410 Importing and exporting users on page 412 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet software information on page 415 Downloads tab on page 418 Tracking changes to BMC ProactiveNet objects In production environments. BMC ProactiveNet can store and track configuration data. To track changes in your environment 1 Go to Options => Administration => Configuration Changes => Add/View. and provide information on the possible impact to your Web environment. To add a new entry 1 Click Add. the login name of the current user is displayed.

The local agent or BMC ProactiveNet server agent resides on the BMC ProactiveNet server. The Agent Status screen lists the current operating status of both the BMC ProactiveNet and PATROL agents. Remote agents are those agents that reside on machines outside the BMC ProactiveNet server. 374 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Viewing BMC ProactiveNet and PATROL agent statuses ■ Day: Day of change ■ Device: List of all devices in the system ■ Hour: Hour of change ■ Group: List of all groups in the System ■ Contact: Contact details (Text field limited to 50 chars) ■ Summary: Summary of the action (Text field limited to 120 chars) ■ Long Description: Comprehensive description of the Configuration Change Event (Text area limited to 1024 chars) 3 Click Apply to add a new entry. Go to Options => Administration => Agent Status. The BMC ProactiveNet Agent Status screen also displays an event summary of the agent’s monitors. Related Topics “Controlling the display in the All Services Tree View ” on page 106 “Managing configuration changes” on page 125 “Viewing further information for a specific event from the Tools Menu” on page 38 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet and PATROL agent statuses The BMC ProactiveNet agent controls all service monitors (non-SNMP monitors) and is responsible for spawning the creation of monitors. PATROL Agents are connected to the BMC ProactiveNet server through PATROL Proxy Server(s) which are hosted on PATROL Proxy Agents. collecting their data. and delivering the data to the BMC ProactiveNet server for storage in the database.

This column lists BMC ProactiveNet version and build number of the agent. indicated by N/A. Use the Monitors hyperlink to view event summary by Monitor Type (of all the monitors associated with a specific device). and the red unplugged icon indicates the agent is disconnected. This screen displays events and provides tools for managing them. indicated by the green plugged icon ■ Agent Unreachable. indicated by the red unplugged icon ■ No Agent. Green plugged icon indicates the agent is connected. Monitors Drill-down Provides access to all the monitors on that device or resource. This column lists the type of connection in use by the BMC ProactiveNet agent.Viewing BMC ProactiveNet and PATROL agent statuses The BMC ProactiveNet agent status columns are listed in Table 110 on page 375. This column lists the latest date and time when the agent connected to BMC ProactiveNet server. Agent Name Agent Version IP Address OS Name Last Connected Running Since Tunnel ID Connection Type Agent Status This column lists the name of the Agent as defined by BMC ProactiveNet administrator. This will be shown as two different icons in three different scenarios as explained in “PATROL agent status icon and tooltip” on page 376. This column is sorted by default. There will be a tooltip on the PATROL agent status icon which displays the connection status of PATROL agent as well as PATROL Proxy Agent. Name This column lists the name of the PATROL agent as defined by BMC ProactiveNet administrator. and the connection status of the agent (connected or disconnected). Valid states are: ■ Connection Active. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 375 . This column displays the current operating status of the agent. This column lists the date and time from which the agent is running. This column lists the Name and version of the operating system on the system hosting the BMC ProactiveNet agent. The BMC PATROL agent status columns are listed in Table 111 on page 375. Table 111: Options for BMC PATROL agents Agent Status Description Connection status of the PATROL agent is displayed. This column lists the Tunnel ID in the case of TunnelAgent. This column lists the IP Address of the system hosting the BMC ProactiveNet agent. Table 110: Options for BMC ProactiveNet agents Agent Status Description The Agent column indicates if there is an agent attached to the device.

Status icon Tooltip Patrol Agent . and PATROL agent status when you select the Patrol Agents tab.Connection Active Patrol Agent . This column lists the hostname or IP address of the PATROL Proxy agent (ProactiveNet Agent) on which the PATROL agent is configured. 376 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Lists the port number on which the PATROL Proxy agent is running. Proxy agent name. Note ■ If the same PATROL agent is configured on multiple PATROL Proxy servers. ■ The Patrol Agents tab is available only if at least one PATROL adapter exists in PATROL agent status icon and tooltip The agent status icons and the tooltip are displayed as follows in three different scenarios. You can filter the agents on the PATROL agent name.Disconnected Patrol Agent .Viewing BMC ProactiveNet and PATROL agent statuses Agent Status Port Proxy Agent Hostname/IP Proxy Agent Port Status Description This column lists the port number on which the PATROL agent is running. the machine. but PATROL Proxy agent is up and running. PATROL and PATROL Proxy agent are down or disconnected. one for each PATROL Proxy server. Table 112: PATROL agent status icon and tooltip Scenario PATROL and PATROL Proxy agent are up and running.Disconnected Patrol Proxy Agent . the Agent Status screen displays such PATROL agents on multiple rows.Connection Active Drill down from the agent status table To drill down from the agent status table 1 Click Monitors under the Monitors column. that is. PATROL agent is down.Disconnected Patrol Proxy Agent . This column displays the current operating status of the agent.

Managing attribute sets ■ BMC ProactiveNet displays all Monitors associated with the Agent. taken together. Use the Tools menu to access other functions. represent a more abstract functional grouping of those individual attributes. Drill down from the event list screen Click the Probable Cause icon (under Analyze column) to view all abnormalities. they can be used to leverage relationships between various elements in the infrastructure. Once these functional groupings are established. 2 Click the Severity Event icon to view Event List screen. ■ The Event List screen displays all open events corresponding to the monitor. Custom Attribute Sets are required for creating advanced relationships. The product is delivered with a Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 377 . Related Topics Activating and deactivating data collection on page 365 Scheduling downtime on page 366 Tracking changes to BMC ProactiveNet objects on page 373 Managing attribute sets on page 377 Managing baselines on page 380 Knowledge patterns on page 163 Managing relationships on page 397 Managing schedules on page 410 Importing and exporting users on page 412 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet software information on page 415 Downloads tab on page 418 Managing attribute sets An Attribute Set is a list of related performance attributes (metrics) that.

3 On the Add Attribute Set screen. AIX System CPU usage. Click Add Attributes to add more attributes. you can create an Attribute Set for all CPU usage performance attributes across all platforms. you can create an Attribute Set containing Windows System CPU usage. 2 Click the relevant option: ■ For a new attribute. click Edit. etc. ■ To edit an existing attribute. These include. select the Attribute Set Type from the list. By creating an attribute set as discussed in the above example. we can do away with creating different relationships for each system monitor type. 378 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 4 Select the Monitor Type. and does not check for deletions. the system only carries forward the new attributes (added). for example. During upgrade. Select all monitors types corresponding to the attributes to be grouped. use the Search For field. In this case. Relationship. Options are Global. click Add on the AttributeSet Administration screen. ■ Use the Shift and Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. Managing relationships on page 397 for more information on how Attribute Groups can be used. See. To create or edit a new attribute set from the Operations Console 1 Go to Options => Administration => Attribute Sets => Edit. This feature is recommended only for advanced users who are trained and familiar with the Probable Cause capabilities of BMC ProactiveNet. to create a relationship between Web Servers and CPU usage. To locate a specific monitor. It is conceptually similar to how many monitor instances can be put together in a 'Group' and relationships are then defined in terms of the 'Group' rather than from the individual monitor instance. Solaris System CPU usage. BMC ProactiveNet recommends not editing default Attribute Sets (with the exception of adding new custom monitors). Report.Managing attribute sets group of out-of-the-box attribute sets. and SLO type. 5 Click Next. 6 Select the Attributes to be grouped from under each of the Monitor Types in the Attributes section.

■ BMC ProactiveNet confirms and deletes the Attribute Set. 8 Specify a name for the Attribute Set. 4 Click OK in the confirmation screen. 5 Click OK to return to Attribute Set Administration screen. To delete an attribute set 1 Open the Attribute Set Administration screen. 10 Click Finish. 3 Click Delete. ■ The new Attribute Set is available for use. use the Search For box.Managing attribute sets ■ Use the Shift and Ctrl keys to make multiple selections. Related Topics Activating and deactivating data collection on page 365 Scheduling downtime on page 366 Tracking changes to BMC ProactiveNet objects on page 373 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet and PATROL agent statuses on page 374 Managing baselines on page 380 Knowledge patterns on page 163 Managing relationships on page 397 Managing schedules on page 410 Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 379 . 2 Select the check box under Select corresponding to the Attribute Set to delete. 9 Select the Attributes to be included by selecting the corresponding check boxes under the Select column. ■ Default Attribute Sets cannot be deleted. To locate a specific attribute. 7 Click Next.

Baseline is calculated daily from Monday to Friday. To track the anomalies in behavior for different attribute types. An hourly baseline is initialized after the monitor instance is created and 24 hours of data collection has occurred.Each hour of the day has a high or low value that is tracked. These two days share the same 24-hour baseline. and Sunday. Hourly interval ranges represent a smaller number of data points and will have a tighter range. consecutive day.A high or low value is derived from the moving average of each ■ Weekday Pattern . The accuracy of the baseline improves over time. This tracks the pattern for that metric on an hourly basis. a pattern captured at hourly intervals may be best. All these ■ Weekend Pattern .Managing baselines Importing and exporting users on page 412 Viewing BMC ProactiveNet software information on page 415 Downloads tab on page 418 Managing baselines The baseline is the expected normal operating range for a metric or attribute of a monitor.Baseline is calculated separately for the weekend . which is best suited for capturing frequent changes. The baseline is calculated by collecting the values for a monitor’s attributes and metrics over a specified time period and establishing a low baseline value (consisting of the 10th percentile of all the values for a given time period) and a high baseline value (consisting of the 90th percentile of all the values for a given time period). A daily baseline is initialized after the monitor instance is created and 24 hours of data collection has occurred. For example. ■ Daily baseline . This high or low range is taken from a larger number of data values and consequently will be a wider range than the hourly. A weekly baseline is initialized after the monitor instance is created and 168 hours of data collection has occurred.Saturday 380 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . taking a weighted average of these values over time. different patterns are required. for attributes that change frequently. BMC ProactiveNet captures the following baseline patterns: ■ Hourly baseline . days share the same 24-hour baseline. A higher weight is given to the latest data being factored into the baseline average. and is repeated for each day.

as well as edit or delete previously defined baseline calculation periods. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 381 . For example. if the baseline is not correct. During this period. the previously calculated baseline is used. you might want to discard this data for the overall baseline. Daily and weekly baseline values are recalculated based on the hourly baseline. You can also create baselines for special or seasonal dates. Absolute thresholds (with "outside baseline") or signature thresholds do not satisfy these requirements.Baseline is calculated separately for pre-determined days when your business experiences out of the ordinary workloads or other special behavior. Pausing baseline calculation Pausing baseline calculation allows you to schedule downtime for baseline calculations. At the time of baseline calculation. For example. you might want to set a pause period for the holiday season when Web traffic is expected to peak. Outside the pause period baseline calculation is performed using current data. only those attributes that have an active abnormality threshold and are also KPI attributes will have baselines generated for them. causing unnecessary abnormalities. Requirements for baseline generation For baselines to be generated for an attribute. it can be easily reset. During the pause period. Additionally. artificially will raise or lower the baseline. Similarly. that attribute must have an active abnormality threshold. Hourly baseline is not recalculated and previous values are used. These days. Through the Options screen you can add new baseline calculation periods. The baseline stays unaffected by new data. BMC ProactiveNet checks for the pause period corresponding to the current time. Because this is an isolated case and not a regular pattern. only old values are used.Managing baselines ■ Seasonal baseline . if the Key Performance Indicator (KPI) mode is active. An active abnormality threshold means that the threshold exists and is not suppressed. Baseline Administration provides a better control over baseline calculations. you can specify freeze points to discard values corresponding to specific period. if calculated into the baseline.

click Edit.Select Group to include all the instances in the group. ■ Monitor Type .Managing baselines To define or edit a Pause Baseline Calculation Period When a Pause Baseline Calculation Period is edited for the first time. 2 Click the relevant options: ■ For a new Pause Baseline Calculation Period. click Update. The system updates the Pause Baseline Calculation Period and returns to the Baseline Freeze Point Administration screen. ■ SLO . 2 Click Edit corresponding to Baseline Administration. 382 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . ■ To edit an existing Pause Baseline Calculation Period.Select Device to include all the instances associated with the device. After making the required changes. ■ Device .Specify the end time for the pause period. 3 In the Pause Baseline Calculation Period screen. subsequent operations performed (such as create.Specify the start time for the pause period. or delete) on Baseline Pause Periods are not effective until the Rate process is restarted. edit. Select Indefinite to stop a particular baseline calculation. ■ Monitor Instance . a From time . b To time .Select the monitor instance to add a single monitor instance. ■ Group . 1 Go to Options => Administration => Advanced => Baseline => Edit. To delete a Pause Baseline Calculation Period 1 Go to => Options => Administration tab.Select the Monitor Type to include all instances of the monitor type. click Add under Pause Baseline Note Calculation. 4 Specify the Pause Baseline period. Select the Monitor Instance. 5 Click Add.Select SLO Group to include all instances from the SLO group.

Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 383 . select the check box (corresponding to the Pause Period to delete) under Select column. ■ Monitor Instance .Select the Monitor Type to include all instances of the monitor type. 3 Click Delete. ■ Number of days for considering data. Resetting a baseline Baseline can be reset to re-compute the baseline. To reset a baseline 1 Click Reset Baseline on the baseline Administration screen.Managing baselines On the Pause Baseline Calculation screen.Select the Group to include all the instances in the group. ■ Device . the baseline data is reinitialized based on previous data generated from the same instances. 3 Specify the period for calculating the new baseline using one of the following options: ■ From Time and To Time . 4 Click OK in the confirmation screen. The system deletes the Baseline Pause Period and returns to Administration screen.Select the Monitor Instance to include the single monitor instance. ■ Monitor Type . All historic baseline information is deleted and the new baseline is initially just an estimate (based on the performance of the old data in the specified period).Specify the start and end time of the period for considering data for baseline calculations.Select the Device to include all the instances associated with the device. ■ Group . On Reset. 2 Select the Monitor Instances. Baseline values are refined over time as the pattern is relearned.Select SLO to include all instances from the SLO. ■ SLO . Confirmation is displayed on the Administration screen.

click Edit. The seasonal baseline can be applied to all groups and services or to specified groups and services. If you select a single attribute. there may be pre-determined days when your business experiences out of the ordinary workloads or other special behavior. These days. You can use the baseline seasonality functionality to calculate specialized baselines for these unusual days that are separate from the baseline for normal business days. 384 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . ■ If you select All Attributes as the Monitor Attribute Selector. 3 In the Advanced area of the Administration page. Note ■ Baseline reset at the attribute level does not change historic values. you control the baseline seasonality feature using the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. next to Baseline. choose Options. 2 On the Options page. then all baseline values of the current day are reset. Creating a separate baseline for seasonal or special dates In your organization. then the attribute baseline value of the current hour is reset. such as weekly or monthly payroll and backups In the Operations console. choose the Administration tab.Managing baselines 4 Select the baseline types to be reset. It modifies only baseline values computed for future use. To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page 1 From the Operations Console. 5 Click Reset. if calculated into the baseline. There are two types of dates that you can account for using the baseline seasonality functionality: ■ specific seasonality dates—planned. single days with exceptional behavior. causing unnecessary abnormalities. daily. ■ The Baseline Administration page is displayed. Specify at least one of available baseline types (hourly. such as special sales and holidays ■ recurring seasonality dates—events that repeat on a regular basis with exact frequency. or weekly). artificially will raise or lower the baseline.

if the seasonality schedule is one year apart. For information about listing and setting the data retention period. In that case.Managing baselines 4 On the Baseline Administration page. the rate and baseline data must cover the longest span of time between seasonality days that is in any seasonality schedule. the rate and baseline tables must be able to hold data for one year. The data retention period for the device should be at least as long as the baseline seasonality schedule. see the pw log period CLI section in the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Guide. For example. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 385 . For example. then the longest span of time between days in the schedule is one year. a warning message is displayed on the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. For baseline seasonality to work. Use the Baseline Seasonality Administration page for ■ Creating a baseline seasonality instance on page 385 ■ Editing or deleting a baseline seasonality instance on page 389 Creating a baseline seasonality instance Before you begin ■ Ensure that your system is configured to have a long enough data retention period to accommodate the baseline seasonality schedule that you select. the data retention period is too short and the Baseline Seasonality Administration page will display a warning message that there insufficient data retention. ■ The Baseline Seasonality Administration page is displayed. if the default retention period for a device is 90 days and you schedule a baseline seasonality schedule for every six months. If the retention period is insufficient. click the Baseline Seasonality link.

For example. specific seasonality dates 1 Access the Baseline Administration page as described in To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page on page 384. ■ If the special dates only affect one or more of your systems and services. If there are duplicate schedules. a warning message is displayed on the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. or all instances. b From the Select/Group dialog box. 3 In the Baseline Seasonality Name field. specific seasonality dates on page 386 To create a seasonality baseline for events that occur on a regular basis on page 387 To create a seasonality baseline for single. If both schedules are for specific groups. group. For example. choose the group that will be affected by the dates you are adding. click Add. choose All Instances. 386 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . precedence is determined alphabetically by the baseline seasonality name. choose the monitor instances that will be affected by these special dates.Managing baselines ■ Plan your baseline seasonality schedules so that there are no duplicate schedules for any instance. seasonality A takes precedence. Sale Days. 2 On the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. If seasonality A is for group Z and seasonality B is for group Y. If duplicate schedules are created. 4 In the Monitor Instance Selector area. ■ If the special dates will affect all of your systems and services. ■ The Select/Group dialog box is displayed. if seasonality A is for group Z and seasonality B is for all instances. 5 Choose the Set Specific Seasonality Dates radio button. c Click Apply to accept your selection and close the dialog box. then A still takes precedence. choose Group and follow these steps: a Click the linked text next to Group. not the group name. a specific group will take precedence over a global instance. Related Topics: To create a seasonality baseline for single. enter a general name to identify the specific dates that you will be entering.

on page 387 and List item. or future date. 4 In the Monitor Instance Selector area. and year from the drop lists or you can click the calendar icon and double-click the desired date. choose the date from you want to start the first occurrence of the seasonality baseline. The start date can be a past. day. choose Group and follow these steps: a Click the linked text next to Group. The date or group of dates that you added appears in the list of dates on the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. choose the monitor instances that will be affected by these special dates. click Add. 9 When you have finished adding dates. You can either select the month. ■ If the special dates only affect one or more of your systems and services. To create a seasonality baseline for events that occur on a regular basis 1 Access the Baseline Administration page as described in To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page on page 384. ■ If the special dates will affect all of your systems and services.Click Apply to accept your selection and close the dialog box. on page 387 to add additional dates. b From the Select/Group dialog box. The Select/Group dialog box is displayed. Weekly Backups. 8 [Optional] Repeat List item.Managing baselines 6 In the Pick Date field. select the month. 3 In the Baseline Seasonality Name field. For example. 5 Choose the Set Seasonality Recurrence Pattern radio button. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 387 . 2 On the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. 6 In the Start From field. and year of the special date for which you want to create a seasonality baseline. choose All Instances. enter a general name to identify the specific dates that you will be entering. choose the group that will be affected by the dates you are adding. click Add. current. 7 Click Add Date. day. The date is displayed in the Included Dates list.

If the backup procedure occurs every week. choose the Day __ of every __ month(s) radio button and enter the day of the month and the monthly frequency for the special event. Example If the backup procedure always takes place on Sunday. choose the The __ __ of every __ month(s) radio button and select the monthly occurrence of the day of the week. — Enter the number of weeks between occurrences of the special event in the Recur every __ weeks on field. you would enter Day _ 30 _ of every _ 1 _ month(s). you would enter 1 in the Recur every __ weeks on field. follow these steps: — Choose the Monthly radio button. If the special event occurs on the same day of the week at the same frequency each month. 388 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . — Select the check box for the day of the week on which the event occurs. ■ If the special event occurs each month or every few months. If the special event always occurs on the 30th day of the month. you would enter The _ Last _ _ Friday _ of every _ 3 _ month(s). select the Sunday check box. such as a weekly or twice per week backup procedure. follow these steps: — Choose the Weekly radio button.Managing baselines 7 Specify the occurrence frequency of the special event that you are adding: ■ If the special event occurs every week or every few weeks. Example Example If the special event occurs on the last Friday of every third month. enter 2 in the Recur every __ weeks on field. the day of the week. Example If your organization has a backup procedure every two weeks. such as payroll or inventory. 8 Click Add. and the monthly frequency for the special event. — Specify the monthly frequency of the special event: If the special event occurs on the same day each month or every few months.

4 Click Update. make the required changes to the baseline seasonality instance. 2 On the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. If you delete a baseline seasonality instance that you have created. click OK. 2 On the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. select the check box of the seasonality baseline instance that you want to delete. 3 Click Delete. To delete a baseline seasonality instance 1 Access the Baseline Administration page as described in To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page on page 384. you can edit or delete it. 3 In the Edit Baseline Seasonality dialog box. the data for that the period that the seasonality baseline existed will remain and the normal baseline will be applied in the future during the time period that was previously specified by the baseline seasonality instance. To edit an existing baseline seasonality instance 1 Access the Baseline Administration page as described in To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page on page 384. click Edit to the right of the baseline seasonality instance that you want to edit. 4 In the confirmation dialog box. Example: Configuring seasonality baselines for a retail organization Your retail organization has planned special sales for the following dates this year: ■ May 31 ■ November 29 Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 389 . ■ The Edit Baseline Seasonality dialog box is displayed. Editing or deleting a baseline seasonality instance Once you have created a baseline seasonality instance.Managing baselines The recurrence pattern that you added appears in the list of dates on the Baseline Seasonality Administration page.

March 20 ■ International Tuba Day. May 8 ■ International Picnic Day. Your organization is closed on Sundays and on the following holidays: ■ New Year’s Day. November 17 When your organization is closed. June 18 ■ International Talk Like a Pirate Day. the load on your systems and services drops considerably. Based on these facts. February 2 ■ International Earth Day. October 5 ■ World Peace Day. so you need to create a seasonality baseline for these sale days to avoid triggering abnormalities due to the increased load on these days. your organization should set seasonality baselines as follows. Your organization pays its employees every two weeks on Fridays and performs inventory quarterly. so you need to create a seasonality baseline to avoid triggering abnormalities due to the decreased load on the days that your organization is closed for business.Managing baselines ■ July 4 ■ December 22 ■ September 7 ■ December 23 ■ November 27 ■ December 26 ■ November 28 ■ December 27 The increased business on these special sale days increases the load on your systems. 390 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . September 19 ■ World Teachers’ Day. January 1 ■ Groundhog Day.

7 Click Add Date. choose All Instances. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 391 . 5 Choose the Set Specific Seasonality Dates radio button. enter Sale Days. select May 31 of the current year. on page 387 and List item. click Add. 2 On the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. in the Monitor Instance Selector area. 8 Repeat List item.Managing baselines To create a seasonality baseline for days on which your store has special sales: 1 Access the Baseline Administration page as described in To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page on page 384. on page 387 to add the additional sale dates. 4 Because these sales increase the load on all your systems and services. 6 In the Pick Date field. 3 In the Baseline Seasonality Name field. The date is displayed in the Included Dates list.

Figure 23: Baseline Seasonality for Sales Days 9 Click Add. this decreases the load on all your systems and services. 2 On the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. The group of special sale dates that you added appears in the list of dates on the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. 392 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . choose All Instances.Managing baselines ■ Figure 24 on page 393 shows the Add Baseline Seasonality page after the data has been entered. 4 Because your business is closed. 3 In the Baseline Seasonality Name field. To create a seasonality baseline for Sundays (the day of the week that your business is closed): 1 Access the Baseline Administration page as described in To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page on page 384. Therefore. click Add. enter Sundays. in the Monitor Instance Selector area.

Managing baselines 5 Choose the Set Seasonality Recurrence Pattern radio button. 8 In the Recur every __ weeks on field. ■ Figure 24 on page 393 shows the Add Baseline Seasonality page after the data has been entered. 7 Choose the Weekly radio button. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 393 . enter 1. 6 In the Start From field. choose the first Sunday in January. Figure 24: Baseline Seasonality for Sundays 10 Click Add. 9 Select the Sunday check box.

in the Monitor Instance Selector area. 4 Because these holidays decrease the load on all your systems and services. click Add. To create a seasonality baseline for holidays on which your business is closed: 1 Access the Baseline Administration page as described in To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page on page 384. 394 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 6 In the Pick Date field. in the Monitor Instance Selector area. 5 Click the linked blue text to the right of the Group radio button (This text reflects the Group that currently is selected). The group of holidays on which your business is closed appears in the list of dates on the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. enter Payroll Activity. enter Holidays. choose Group. 5 Choose the Set Specific Seasonality Dates radio button. 2 On the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. 7 Click Add Date. ■ The Select Group dialog box is displayed. choose All Instances. To create a seasonality baseline for payroll days: 1 Access the Baseline Administration page as described in To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page on page 384. on page 387 and List item. on page 387 to add the additional holiday dates.Managing baselines Every Sunday is added as a recurring pattern for a new seasonality baseline on the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. 2 On the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. 8 Repeat List item. 3 In the Baseline Seasonality Name field. The date is displayed in the Included Dates list. select January 1 of the current year. click Add. 4 Because payroll activities increase the load only on the server used by your accounting department. 9 Click Add. 3 In the Baseline Seasonality Name field.

Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 395 .Managing baselines 6 In the Select Group dialog box. choose the first Thursday in January of the current year. 7 Select the check box for the group that represents your accounting department and click Apply. browse to the group that you have defined that represents your accounting department. the bulk of payroll activity occurs on the Thursday before the checks are received.) 10 Choose the Weekly radio button. ■ The Select Group dialog box closes and the group that you selected is displayed to the right of the Group radio button. 12 Select the Thursday check box. For example. enter 2. 11 In the Recur every __ weeks on field. 8 Choose the Set Seasonality Recurrence Pattern radio button. Every other Thursday is added as a recurring pattern for a new seasonality baseline on the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. (Although your employees receive their checks every two weeks on Friday. it might be a service named Accounting. ■ Figure 25 on page 395 shows the Add Baseline Seasonality page after the data has been entered. 9 In the Start From field. Figure 25: Baseline Seasonality for Payroll activity 13 Click Add.

■ The Select Group dialog box is displayed. and December 31). on page 387 and List item. select March 31of the current year. 9 In the Pick Date field. 11 Repeat List item. 4 Because quarterly inventory increases the load on your database. For example. in the Monitor Instance Selector area. The group of days on which your business conducts quarterly inventory appears in the list of dates on the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. 12 Click Add. ■ The Select Group dialog box closes and the group that you selected is displayed to the right of the Group radio button. choose Group. enter Quarterly Inventory. 2 On the Baseline Seasonality Administration page. 8 Choose the Set Specific Seasonality Dates radio button. 3 In the Baseline Seasonality Name field. 396 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . on page 387 to add the inventory dates for each quarter (June 30. it might be a service named Inventory. 10 Click Add Date.Managing baselines To create a seasonality baseline for quarterly inventory: 1 Access the Baseline Administration page as described in To access the Baseline Seasonality Administration page on page 384. The date is displayed in the Included Dates list. September 30. 6 In the Select Group dialog box. choose in the Monitor Instance Selector area. 5 Click the linked blue text to the right of the Group radio button (This text reflects the Group that currently is selected). browse to the group that you have defined that represents your inventory database. click Add. 7 Select the check box for the group that represents your inventory database and click Apply.

Relationships for both probable cause and Intelligent Event Suppression are called Common relationships. If it does. Intelligent Event Suppression Relationships are NOT static relationships. Although common relationships (applicable to both Intelligent Event Suppression and Probable Cause Analysis) can be created. User-defined relationships work together with static relationships to filter events. impact prediction.an important factor for maximizing the power behind the Probable Cause feature. As explained in the above example. For details about defining Intelligent Event Suppression Relationships. available events related to system A are suppressed by available events of System B. For example. By managing relationships. Now. not related to the queried event. If the event instance does NOT belong to any instance relationship. we can monitor an application and the host system. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 397 . Instead of leveraging 'out-of-the-box' knowledge about how various monitor instances relate to one another. Probable Cause Analysis Relationships are static relationships (in the probable cause smart filter) based on static rules. due to the defined relationship. and event suppression.Managing relationships Managing relationships Relationships allow you to specify how elements within the infrastructure are related. Probable cause and Business Impact features use this information to filter out events and violations. Relationships define dependencies between various monitored elements in the system and are used for Probable Cause Analysis. algorithms first check to see if the event instance belongs to any instance relationships. if the system goes offline. BMC ProactiveNet recommends use of group-level relationships. Only the system availability alert will be sent out. the Probable Cause algorithm can leverage very specific user domain knowledge . Generally. see “Adding or editing an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship” on page 403. Such relationships are easy to manage and all instances added to the group will inherit the relationship. BMC ProactiveNet recommends using separate relationships for event suppression and probable cause analysis. BMC ProactiveNet will not send out an alert for the application availability. Static Relationships relate different monitor types (not specific to any instances). and guide Probable Cause and Business Impact algorithms. it uses the static relationship rules. By defining a relationship between application and the host system. both the system and the application will not be available. However. relationships go a along way in customizing BMC ProactiveNet behavior. higher level of validity can be achieved for both Probable Cause Analysis and events. then the algorithm applies those relationship filters.

5. BMC ProactiveNet recommends defining the broader relationships first. this functionality has been preserved as Intelligent Event Suppression. Think of elements in your infrastructure in abstract groupings and create relationships based on these groupings as opposed to using the device or instance level. Narrow relationships may inadvertently filter out potential abnormalities by forcing BMC ProactiveNet to give them lower scores. 398 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . If this is your first installation of BMC ProactiveNet. relationship administration was deprecated starting with BMC ProactiveNet version 8. Take advantage of this out-of-the-box functionality. if you upgraded from a version of BMC ProactiveNet older than 8. you will not see the Intelligent Event Suppression functionality. you can always define additional relationships.Managing relationships This preserves all built in rules even in environments where the instances are constantly being changed. 3 BMC ProactiveNet includes default.5. This functionality has been absorbed into the changes made to the service model in BMC ProactiveNet version 8. Relationships are used to ascertain the potential probable causes and related events. Best practices for defining Intelligent Event Suppression relationships Before you begin defining Intelligent Event Suppression relationships.5. Plan the relationships well. consider these best practices: 1 Define broad rather than narrow relationships. If more granular relationships are needed. Global relationships. However. 2 Think through the relationships before creating them.00. Defining Intelligent Event Suppression relationships Because of changes to the service model. Generally a scalable and well thought-out plan of related groups works best. Focus on creating relationships that are specific to your infrastructure. or you did not use the relationship administration feature in previous releases.

essential step since all relationships are defined in terms of monitor instances. as well as by different Application servers and/or databases behind the Webservers. you want to convey the above information into the BMC ProactiveNet system so it can be leveraged by Probable Cause Analysis algorithms.Managing relationships Relationship example Assumptions Before attempting to establish relationships. but also depends on a pool of Application servers (Appserver Pool B) and on database B. if there is a problem with any of these online stores and an event is triggered. 2 Online Store B consists of another pool of Web servers (Webserver Pool B) dedicated to selling widget B items. BMC ProactiveNet will guide you to the most accurate Probable Cause event that is related to the event. as you drill down on the event through the Probable Cause pages. This is a required. Without this information. you can input this relationship information into the system so that it can be used whenever a problem crops up with a transaction on any of the three online stores. and C. In this scenario. Once these relationships are established. Each type of widget is served by distinct WebServer pools. a monitor for each relevant element in the Web infrastructure has already been created. Using the Relationships folder located in the Administration Console. the Probable Cause algorithm must rely strictly on out-of-the-box relationships. Scenario Consider that you have an online store that sells widgets A. B. 3 Online Store C consists of a similar third configuration set up for selling widget C items. thus taking advantage of the domain knowledge injected into the system via the relationship mechanism. thus limiting the conclusions it can draw about the potential causes of an event. 1 Online Store A consists of one pool of Web servers (WebServer Pool A) dedicated to selling widget A items. but also depends on a pool of Application servers (Appserver Pool A) and on database A. This information is known as domain knowledge. Establishing relationships The following shows how you would want to create relationships that represent the specific scenario described earlier in this example: WebTranxMonitors A => WebServerPool A => AppServerPool A => Database A Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 399 .

Each relationship has a unidirectional dependency. After these Groups are established. disable. as well as access the dialog box that allows you to create Intelligent Event Suppression rules.Managing relationships WebTranxMonitors B => WebServerPool B => AppServerPool B => Database B WebTranxMonitors C => WebServerPool C => AppServerPool C => Database C Each of the 'pools' above can be represented by creating a standard 'Group' in the BMC ProactiveNet Administration Console. the four pools for online store B would form another relationship. relationships can easily be formed by creating a Relationship for each of these Groups. and delete Intelligent Event Suppression rules. Related topics Managing relationships on page 397 Adding or editing an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship on page 403 Overview of the Intelligent Event Suppression screen From the Intelligent Event Suppression screen. The four pools for online store A would form one relationship tree. you can enable. and the same for online store C. The Intelligent Event Suppression 400 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Only the Ping/ Availability=>Device SameDevice. Relationship names are formed from the primary group. device. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 401 . Default Global relationships are shipped with BMC ProactiveNet and are immediately visible when you access the Intelligent Event Suppression screen. Figure 26: Intelligent Event Suppression screen The Select column allows you to select the check box of the Intelligent Event Suppression relationship that you want to delete. device or monitor separated by an arrow to indicate the direction of the relationship. The Name column displays the name of the Intelligent Event Suppression relationship. This is indicated by the lock icon in the Edit column for each of the default relationships. clicking the Edit link to the right of Intelligent Event Suppression. or monitor (the event that suppresses the events from the secondary event) and the secondary group. You can obtain more information about the relationship by hovering your cursor over the more information icon .SameSourceAgent relationship is enabled by default.Managing relationships Administration screen is accessed by selecting Options=>Administration and in the Advanced area. These out-of-the-box relationships are not editable. .

select the checkbox. For more information. see “Adding or editing an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship” on page 403. to the right of Intelligent Event Suppression.Managing relationships The information displayed by the more information icon is provided by the Description box available when you create an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship. Enabling or disabling Intelligent Event Suppression relationships Use the following procedure to enable or disable Intelligent Event Suppression relationships. 1 is the highest precedence. the Enabled check box for that relationship is selected. the primary event with the highest severity is processed. For more information. 4 On the Intelligent Event Suppression screen. If a relationship is enabled. “Enabling or disabling Intelligent Event Suppression relationships” on page 402. The Delete button allows you to delete any Intelligent Event Suppression relationship that is selected in the Select column. click Edit. 2 Choose the Administration tab. The Edit column allows you to edit the scope and other attributes of the associated relationship. 402 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . see “Adding or editing an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship” on page 403. For more information about providing a description. in the Enabled column for the the Intelligent Event Suppression relationship rule that you want to enable or disable. The Enabled column allows you to enable and disable relationships. see “Adding or editing an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship” on page 403. The Precedence column displays the order in which the relationships are processed if multiple primary events exist for the same secondary event. For more information see. To enable/disable an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship 1 Click the Options menu at the top right of the console. If there is a tie with rule precedence. perform one of the following actions: ■ To enable the Intelligent Event Suppression relationship. The Add button allows you to add a new Intelligent Event Suppression relationship. 3 In the Advanced area. Events are suppressed by the primary event that passes the rule which has highest precedence.

Before you add Intelligent Event Suppression relationships. All relationships are defined in terms of monitor instances. or monitor-based .the Intelligent Event Suppression relationship Note Tip is applied to the monitors within a group or device. Using a group to define a relationship makes it more practical to maintain relationships. and then use the actual monitor to define the relationship. this functionality is not supported. 2 Define groups for any set of related instances: For example. Web servers. You can create any of the following types of Intelligent Event Suppression relationships: ■ Global . you should: 1 Define a monitor for each element in your environment. To define any relationship between elements in your infrastructure. Intelligent Event Suppression relationships can be either applied globally or to a specific monitor or monitors that you specify. deselect the checkbox. If you have installed BMC ProactiveNet for the first time. Adding or editing an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship Intelligent Event Suppression relationships are only supported for users who are upgrading from versions of BMC ProactiveNet older than version 8.Managing relationships ■ To disable the Intelligent Event Suppression relationship. or to a specific monitor or monitors that you specify Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 403 .0. device. Before attempting to establish any relationships. first define a monitor for each element. applications. The status of the relationship is displayed in the Enable column.the Intelligent Event Suppression relationship is applied to all monitors ■ Group. and so on. 5 Click Apply. ensure that a monitor for each relevant element in your infrastructure has already been created. create groups for any pools of servers.

click Add. to the right of Intelligent Event Suppression. The Add Intelligent Event Suppression Relationship dialog box is displayed.) The Select Monitor Type dialog box is displayed. 4 In the Primary Attribute Selector area. 2 In the Scope area. To specify a single attribute: a Choose the Single Attribute option. 2 Choose the Administration tab. the first monitor type in the monitor type list is selected. choose the attributes of the primary monitor that will trigger suppression for the selected attributes on the secondary monitor.Managing relationships Access the Add Intelligent Event Suppression Relationship dialog box and then follow the procedure appropriate for the type of Intelligent Event Suppression relationship that you want to create. choose Global. click Edit. use the check boxes to select whether the primary and secondary monitor instances in the relationship must reside on the same device. Choose from the following: ■ All Attributes . c Choose the monitor type for the attribute and click Apply. 1 Click the Options menu at the top right of the console. on the same source Agent. b Click the link to the right of the Single Attribute option. 404 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . you must first access the Add Intelligent Event Suppression Relationship dialog box.an event on a single attribute for a specified monitor type will suppress events on the secondary monitor. 3 In the Global Scope: Qualifiers area. To add a Global Intelligent Event Suppression relationship 1 Access the Add Intelligent Event Suppression Relationship dialog box. Accessing the Add Intelligent Event Suppression Relationship dialog box To define any type of Intelligent Event Suppression relationship. 4 On the Intelligent Event Suppression screen. (By default. or both. 3 In the Advanced area.an event on any attribute of the primary monitor will suppress events on the secondary monitor ■ Single Attribute .

choose the attribute set to which you want to apply the relationship. Choose from the following: ■ All Attributes .Managing relationships The Select Monitor Type dialog box closes and the name of the monitor you selected is displayed to the right of the Single Attribute option. select the attribute for that monitor that will trigger events to be suppressed on the secondary monitor. the less likely it is that BMC ProactiveNet will suppress the events on the secondary monitor.an event on any attribute in the selected attribute set will suppress events on the secondary monitor. enter a description of the relationship. Notification wait time affects secondary monitor event suppression as follows: Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 405 . HTML is supported.) In the Description text box. b From the drop list. and <body> tags are not supported.)In the Notification Wait Time field enter the time in seconds for BMC ProactiveNet to wait for an event on the primary monitor to occur before processing the event that has occurred on the secondary monitor. The list of attributes available depends on the monitor type you selected. ■ Attribute Set . 5 In the Secondary Attribute Selector area. The shorter the notification wait time.an event on the selected attributes of the primary monitor will suppress events on any attribute in the selected attribute set on the secondary monitor 6 (Optional. The default wait time is 120 seconds. the <html>. 7 (Optional. d From the drop list beneath the name of the monitor you selected. choose the attributes for which events will be suppressed when the specified events occur on the primary monitor. This description is displayed when you hover your cursor over the more information icon next to a relationship on the Intelligent Event Suppression screen. To specify an attribute set: a Choose the Attribute Set option. however.an event on the selected attributes of the primary monitor will suppress events on all attributes for the secondary monitor ■ Single Attribute .an event on the selected attributes of the primary monitor will suppress events for a single attribute for a specified monitor type on the secondary monitor ■ Attribute Set . <head>.

To add a group. BMC ProactiveNet suppresses the event on the secondary monitor and sends the notification for the event on the primary monitor. choose Regexp. The system returns to Intelligent Event Suppression screen. 3 In the text box beneath the Regexp selection. 406 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . choose Group or Device as the primary monitor instance. choose the group or device to be the primary monitor instance for the relationship. 8 After completing the add relationship screen. ■ If there is an event on the primary monitor at the end of the notification wait time. use regular expressions to type a pattern for the groups or devices that you want to be primary monitor instances for the relationship. making it easier for you to find the desired group or device in a large list. The new relationship is enabled and listed.Managing relationships ■ If there is no event on the primary monitor at the end of the notification wait time. choose Group or Device as the primary monitor instance. Define a relationship based on multiple 1 From the drop list. 2 From the drop list under the Group or Device selection. device. You can filter the list of groups or devices by entering search criteria in the Search for text box and pressing Enter. BMC ProactiveNet sends notification for the event on the secondary monitor event as per the notification setting. 2 In the Primary Monitor Instance Selector area. or monitor-based Intelligent Event Suppression relationship 1 In the Scope area. 4 Press the Enter key. Click Add. choose Specific Monitors. 2 From the drop list to the right of the Group selection. The resulting list will be based on your search criteria. perform one of the following actions: Define a relationship based on a single group or device: 1 From the drop list.

1 From the drop list. 3 In the text box beneath the Regexp selection. The primary monitor instance in the relationship will be based on the selected monitor for all the listed devices. choose Regexp. For example. choose Monitor as the primary monitor instance. 4 Press the Enter key. If the selected monitor is added to other devices. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 407 . BMC ProactiveNet searches for groups or devices based on the pattern you entered and displays the number of matches found. Click the number of matches found link to review the resulting list to verify that this list is composed of the monitors that you want to be the primary monitor instances for the relationship. 2 From the drop list under the Monitor selection. All matches in the list will be primary monitor instances in the relationship. choose the monitor that you want to be the primary monitor instance for the relationship.Managing relationships groups or devices BMC ProactiveNet searches for groups or devices based on the pattern you entered and displays the number of matches found. All matches in the list will be primary monitor instances in the relationship. use regular expressions to type a pattern for the monitors that you want to be primary monitor instances for the relationship. Define a relationship based on a single monitor Define a relationship based on multiple monitors 1 From the drop list. those devices will be included as the primary monitor instance. Click the number of matches found link to review the resulting list to verify that this list is composed of the groups or devices that you want to be the primary monitor instances for the relationship. The drop list below the selected monitor displays the list of devices that have that monitor. choose Monitor as the primary monitor instance. Agent*. 2 From the drop list to the right of the Monitor selection.

Device. Choose from the following: ■ All Attributes . This description is displayed when you hover your cursor over the more information icon next to a relationship on the Intelligent Event Suppression screen. HTML is supported. c Choose the monitor type for the attribute and click Apply. The list of attributes available depends on the monitor type you selected. b Click the link to the right of the Single Attribute option. The Select Monitor Type dialog box closes and the name of the monitor you selected is displayed to the right of the Single Attribute option.an event on a single attribute for a specified monitor type will suppress events on the secondary monitor. 408 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . select group(s). (By default.an event on any attribute in the selected attribute set will suppress events on the secondary monitor.Managing relationships 3 In the Primary Attribute Selector area. select Group.an event on any attribute of the primary monitor will suppress events on the secondary monitor ■ Single Attribute . enter a description of the relationship. choose the attribute set to which you want to apply the relationship. or Monitor as the secondary monitor instance.) The Select Monitor Type dialog box is displayed.) In the Description text box. the <html>. b From the drop list. To specify an attribute set: a Choose the Attribute Set option. and <body> tags are not supported. the first monitor type in the monitor type list is selected. d From the drop list beneath the name of the monitor you selected. choose the attributes of the primary monitor that will trigger suppression for the selected attributes on the secondary monitor. To specify a single attribute: a Choose the Single Attribute option. 5 Using the same steps that you used for defining the primary monitor instance. ■ Attribute Set . however. device(s). or monitor(s) to be the secondary monitor instance 6 (Optional. 4 In the Secondary Monitor Instance Selector area. <head>. select the attribute for that monitor that will trigger events to be suppressed on the secondary monitor.

Managing relationships 7 (Optional. ■ If there is an event on the primary monitor at the end of the notification wait time. the less likely it is that BMC ProactiveNet will suppress the events on the secondary monitor. Deleting a relationship To delete a relationship 1 Click the Options menu at the top right of the console. 2 Choose the Administration tab. to the left of Intelligent Event Suppression. 8 After completing the add relationship screen. click Edit. The new relationship is enabled and listed. BMC ProactiveNet sends notification for the event on the secondary monitor event as per the notification setting. The system returns to Intelligent Event Suppression screen. 3 In the Advanced area. BMC ProactiveNet suppresses the event on the secondary monitor and sends the notification for the event on the primary monitor. The system returns to Intelligent Event Suppression screen. The Add Intelligent Event Suppression Relationship dialog box is displayed. The default wait time is 120 seconds. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 409 . To edit an existing Intelligent Event Suppression relationship 1 On the Intelligent Event Suppression screen. The shorter the notification wait time. click the Edit link for the relationship that you want to edit. The relationship is enabled and updated. Notification wait time affects secondary monitor event suppression as follows: ■ If there is no event on the primary monitor at the end of the notification wait time. 3 Click Add. 2 Make the desired changes to the relationship.)In the Notification Wait Time field enter the time in seconds for BMC ProactiveNet to wait for an event on the primary monitor to occur before processing the event that has occurred on the secondary monitor. click Add.

BMC ProactiveNet uses schedules to consider recorded monitored attribute values for SLO computations. to 5 P. and so forth.M.. Monday to Friday. 2 Click the relevant option: ■ For a new schedule. 3 Specify a Name for the schedule. and 5 P. To add more days to the existing schedule. ■ Related topics Managing relationships on page 397 Adding or editing an Intelligent Event Suppression relationship on page 403 Managing schedules A schedule is a defined period which includes hours of the day. you can define new schedules. 6 Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the relationship.M. as well as edit or delete previously defined schedules.M. change the values in the Days. The Edit Schedule screen opens. The system deletes the relationship definition and returns to Intelligent Event Suppression screen. click Edit. days of the week. To add or edit a schedule 1 Navigate to Add SLO (Step 1 of 4) screen. Schedules help put SLO compliance computation in the right perspective without distorting the values by including invalid periods. select the check box next to the relationship that you want to delete. another SLO with schedule of 9 A.M. Start Time.Managing schedules 4 On the Intelligent Event Suppression screen. ■ To edit an existing schedule. against the Schedule field. Example. The Add New Schedule screen opens. 5 Click Delete. click New. SLO with schedule 24x7 will consider all recorded monitored attribute values for SLO computation. 410 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . However. for 5 days a week (Monday to Friday) will only consider monitored attribute values recorded between 9 A. Through the option screen. and End Time fields and click Add.

The BMC ProactiveNet Server’s time zone is selected by default.Managing schedules 4 Choose an applicable Time zone from the list of time zones provided. c Click Add. b Select the Start Time and End Time from the list. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 411 . 6 Click Close. d Select check boxes against the Days to include. ■ To define time range for a single day. 2 After making the required changes. To delete a schedule 1 Click Delete Schedule. a Select the check box against the Day to include. ■ The system updates the new time range in the table below. ■ The system updates the new time range in the table below. 5 After adding the computation timings for all days to be part of the Schedule. ■ The system updates the database and returns to the SLO Creation Wizard screen 4 of 4. Exclusion period takes precedence over inclusion period. Start and End time relate to the each of the days. click Done. Specify both inclusion and exclusion period. ■ To define same time range for multiple days. f Click Add. click Done. e Select the Start Time and End Time from the list. ■ The system displays a confirmatory message. The system updates the entries and returns to the Create SLO Wizard screen 1 of 4. Use the list to change the time zone. The new schedule is available in the list.

user groups. ■ Do not open the exported XML file before importing it on another machine. ■ Ensure that the users you import are the same as you export. and roles. If you want to view the exported XML file in a browser copy the file to <PN_PATH>\pw\pronto\web on the BMC ProactiveNet server to locate the DTD.Use text editor. 412 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . to maintain the user accounts across all the BMC ProactiveNet server’s Enterprise environment. If user want to open the exported XML file for any security reasons.Importing and exporting users Importing and exporting users Users (Export or Import) enables to export and import the users from one BMC ProactiveNet Server to the other. Using this option. user accounts from testing environment can be exported and imported to the production setup. The following scenarios help you understand the steps you will need to perform while importing users. Create users and map only to the user groups which already exists. Use text editor if you want to open the exported XML file. Note ■ First export the users and then import them. Table 113: Scenarios while importing users Import User(s) Exists User Group(s) Exists All Some Procedure Only user Only user Only user Yes No No Do not create the user as the user with this name already exists in the system. Create users and map to all the existing user groups. .There is no need for the user to open the exported XML file before importing on a different machine .

User Groups. Users. create roles if the roles on which this user groups are dependent do not exist). User Groups. 3 Create a user and assign the Read Only group created above. and Roles Users. 2 Create a user and map it to all the user groups (newly created as well as existing). 2 Create a Read Only user group and assign the Read Only role. To export users 1 Click Options => Administration => Advanced => Users . Else 1 Create a Read Only role if it does not exist. and Roles Users. to open Export User Data screen.Importing and exporting users Import User(s) Exists User Group(s) Exists None Procedure Only user No If Read Only user group exists 1 Create a user and assign it to the Read Only user group. User Groups. and Roles Yes Skip No All Create user and map it to all the existing user groups. 3 Use the Filter options to select the users. No Some 1 Create user groups which do not exist from the XML file (if required. 2 Create a user and assign it to all the above newly created user groups. users can be selected based on the following options: Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 413 . 2 Click Export link corresponding to Users. User Groups. Users. and Roles No None 1 Create all user groups present in the XML file (if required create roles if the roles on which these user groups are dependent on do not exist).

5 Select the User form the table. 5 Click Cancel in the Import User(s) screen to return to Administration Tab without importing the user. select Select All to export all the users. 7 Click Save in the File Download window. 9 Click Close in the Download Complete window.Importing and exporting users ■ User Class ■ Status ■ User Name ■ User Group or Role 4 Specify a User Name and User Group or Role. This screen gives the status of the import and the user details table. This will import all the user groups and roles and associate them to the appropriate users. 2 Click Import link corresponding to the Users. to open Save As window. to open the Import User(s) screen. 10 Click Back to Administration link to return to Administration Tab. 6 Click Export. and the default location is desktop. Select Import User Groups and Roles if you want to import the user(s) along with the user groups and roles. to open File Download window. 8 Click Save in the Save As window. Select Export User Groups and Roles if you want to also export user groups as well as the roles associated with the users. 414 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . 4 Click Import. To import users 1 Click Options => Administration => Advanced => Users. 3 Specify the Import File name or use the Browse option to locate the file. The default file name is userdata. to open Download Complete window. to display the User Import Summary screen.xml.

Viewing BMC ProactiveNet performance diagnostics BMC ProactiveNet offers both pre-configured and user-defined diagnostic tools to help monitor your system. 3 The View History File screen opens. To view installation history 1 Click the Options link at the top right of the console. and Performance Diagnostic Details. 4 Use the filter to search for specific information. 4 The Performance Diagnostics Details screen displays the following details as described in Table 114 on page 416. 3 Click View link of Details to view performance diagnostic details. To view performance diagnostic details 1 On the Administration tab. The Options screen opens. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 415 . Click View link of Installation Rules. 2 The BMC ProactiveNet Server Performance screen displays the options Performance Graphs. under the BMC ProactiveNet heading. Installation history The Installation history provides an audit trail of BMC ProactiveNet installation. It provides information of various patches. Click View link of Performance Diagnostics. 2 On the Administration tab. under the BMC ProactiveNet heading.Viewing BMC ProactiveNet software information Viewing BMC ProactiveNet software information This section provides links to view installation history. and hotfixes applied on BMC ProactiveNet Server. performance diagnostics and license usage information.

416 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . displays the monitor type. number of instances. displays a list of all graphs including those that were not created by you.This gives the number of open and closed external events. Click View next to Performance Diagnostic Details to see a list of detailed statistics. both device-associated and non-device-associated. Scroll down to the Event Details heading to see the number of open and closed events of all types. displays a list of all reports including those that were not created by you. displays the device type and count. This also gives the details about the monitor type. displays if monitor instances are turned off by the device flag or device instance flag. However. displays the monitor type. displays SLO details. ■ External events . displays the minimum and maximum value of raw data retention period in hours. monitor instances count.This give the number of open and closed signature events. and total instance attributes. ■ Absolute events . and custom API instances per second. total number of attributes. displays a list of all views including those that were not created by you. describes the cell-based event activity and lists the event classes that are sending the events displays the type of operating system on which BMC ProactiveNet is installed and Agent counts. User detail screen is categorized in to two types namely: configured users and logged in users. number of attributes per monitor type.Viewing BMC ProactiveNet software information Table 114: Diagnostic details Performance diagnostic types General Details Cell metrics Remote Agent Device Monitor instance Monitor type Attribute User Data details Graph View Report SLO Event Description displays the server sizing details. These details can be displayed or hidden using the Show and Hide option.This gives the number of open and closed absolute events. Report details can either be hidden using the Show or Hide options. you are restricted to view only those events that are created by you. poll period in second. displays the following event details: ■ Signature Events . attribute id and total number of events. number of active poll period in seconds. and minimum and maximum value of rate data retention period in hours. and instances per second.

2 Enter the required email information. Chapter 9 Controlling BMC ProactiveNet data collection and infrastructure 417 . under the BMC ProactiveNet heading. The Email Details Snapshot screen opens. processor. To view license usage details 1 On the Administration tab. Note Performance Diagnostic page takes much longer duration to load (6 minutes) on WIndows. 3 Click Send.Viewing BMC ProactiveNet software information Performance diagnostic types System specific Description displays the system specific details of the server. OS. 3 Click Show Details to view details of default monitors. displays the TCP connection details. It can vary depending on the operating system of the server. BIOS. number of licenses being used. click View link of License Usage. Viewing BMC ProactiveNet license usage BMC ProactiveNet License Usage screen displays information on the licensed features of BMC ProactiveNet. and so forth Routing TCP connection displays routing details. To send and view mails 1 On the License Usage screen at the right hand corner. 2 The License Usage screen displays the license details. physical memory. System information displays details about the physical system: its name. exact number of licenses available for each BMC ProactiveNet feature or monitor. click the mail icon. and number of licenses available at present.

Downloads tab Downloads tab Links to various files required for installing the BMC ProactiveNet Agent and BMC ProactiveNet Administration Console are available here. 418 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . See the BMC ProactiveNet Getting Started Guide for exact steps to install BMC ProactiveNet Agent and BMC ProactiveNet Administration Console.

the probable cause analysis filters and ranks the events from most probable cause to least. The probable cause analysis results page indicates if there has been a BladeLogic job executed on the device before 24 hours and after 30 minutes from the current time stamp of the primary event. the probable cause analysis results page flags devices which have had BladeLogic jobs execute in the same time frame as the event that you are trouble-shooting. When you access probable cause analysis for a service degradation event. If a BladeLogic job has been executed on the device. Benefits of BMC BladeLogic integration A BladeLogic job might make a configuration change to a device which causes its behavior to change.10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic This chapter provides details on how to import BMC BladeLogic information into BMC ProactiveNet so that you can factor BladeLogic job history into probable cause analysis. This snapshot job will be able to detect better the configuration changes made to the device. the job name. Integrating BMC ProactiveNet with BMC BladeLogic provides BladeLogic job history information to probable cause analysis. so that when you invoke probable cause analysis for an event. certain events that are generated on BMC ProactiveNet will trigger the execution of a pre-defined snapshot job on BMC BladeLogic. see Determining the probable cause for an event on page 159 The following BMC BladeLogic job types are considered during probable cause analysis: ■ Deploy Job (30) ■ Deploy Job Attempt (205) ■ File Deploy Job (40) Chapter 10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic 419 . and start and end time of the job is displayed next to the device. For more information about probable cause analysis. job type. In addition.

The following job types are not supported or displayed in probable cause analysis device history: ■ ACL Push Job (1009) ■ Batch Job (200) ■ Atrium Import Job (5190) ■ Audit Job (31) ■ Compliance Job (5106) ■ Component Discovery Job (405) ■ Patch Analysis Job (45) ■ Provision Job (5029) ■ Update Service Properties Job (1017) ■ Patch Subscription (220) ■ Download Job (46) 420 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .Benefits of BMC BladeLogic integration ■ Network Shell Script Job (111) ■ Sync Job (190) ■ Deploy Apply Job (203) ■ Deploy Undo Job (204) ■ Snapshot Job Note Snapshot job executions are listed in the probable cause analysis device history only if the snapshot job detects any changes. Batch jobs also are not listed in the probable cause analysis device history. unless the batch job contains any of the supported job types. such as a deploy job or an Network Shell Script job. These changes will be displayed.

1/NSH/br directory. To enable Web services on the BMC BladeLogic Application Server 1 Log in to the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. 2 Assign that user the single role of BLAdmins. run the following command: set AppServer EnableTomcatService true Chapter 10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic 421 . using the BLAdmins account. enter blasadmin. choose Start => Programs => BMC Software BladeLogic => Utilities => Application Server Administration. From the command line. access the /opt/bmc/BladeLogic/8. No other roles should be assigned to this user.Setting up the integration between BMC BladeLogic and BMC ProactiveNet Setting up the integration between BMC BladeLogic and BMC ProactiveNet To integrate BMC BladeLogic with BMC ProactiveNet you must ■ install and license the BMC BladeLogic Agent on the BMC ProactiveNet Server (for instructions. serve as the BladeLogic administrator account ■ create a dedicated user account for the BMC BladeLogic Application Server to ■ enable Web services on the BMC BladeLogic Application server ■ set up the credentials on the BMC ProactiveNet Server for accessing BMC BladeLogic from BMC ProactiveNet ■ test the credentials on the BMC ProactiveNet Server that you have set up to ensure that a connection is being made To create a dedicated BladeLogic administrator user account for the BMC BladeLogic Application Server 1 Create a new user for the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. see the BMC BladeLogic documentation). 2 Start the BMC BladeLogic Application Server Administration utility as appropriate for your operating system: ■ For Windows. 3 From the BMC BladeLogic Application Server Administration utility. ■ For UNIX. This is required only for pw blade create packages command.

2 Access a command line and enter: pw blade setup -use_uddi -uddiuser uddiUserName -uddipass uddiPassword host hostName [-port portNumber] -user userName -pass password 422 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . No other roles should be associated with this user account or the integration will fail. To set up credentials with the UDDI registry on the BMC ProactiveNet Server for accessing BMC BladeLogic from BMC ProactiveNet 1 Log in to the BMC ProactiveNet Server as administrator. 5 Restart the BMC BladeLogic Application Server. These will be registered with the specified web services properties when you start the BladeLogic server. enter the following commands: ■ set WebServices RegistryServer registryServerHostName set WebServices RegistryServerPort registryServerPort set WebServices RegistryServerUserName registryServerUserName set WebServices RegistryServerPassword registryServerPassword The default Registry Server port is 8080. WARNING ■ You must create a dedicated user account with only a BLAdmins role. AssumeRoleService. by giving the following commands: ■ You can remove the web services registration in the BMC Atrium UDDI Server — set WebServices RegistryServer "" — set WebServices RegistryServerPort "" — set WebServices RegistryServerUserName "" — set WebServices RegistryServerPassword "" The web services registered in the BMC Atrium UDDI server will be removed when the BladeLogic server is shutdown. and CLITunnelService.Setting up the integration between BMC BladeLogic and BMC ProactiveNet 4 [optional] To configure the registration of web services in the BMC Atrium UDDI Server. The Blade Logic Application Server log indicates if the web services registration was successful for LoginService.

■ If the command returns 1. An error message is displayed indicating which error occurred. the credentials were created successfully.domain. is displayed. Re-enter the pw blade setup command correctly.Setting up the integration between BMC BladeLogic and BMC ProactiveNet Table 115: pw blade setup with UDDI registry command option descriptions Option -use_uddi -uddiuser uddiUserName -uddipass uddiPassword -host hostName -port portNumber -user userName -pass password Description specifies to use the UDDI registry to obtain BMC BladeLogic web services host and port information user name to connect to UDDI server password to connect to UDDI server host name or IP address of the UDDI server port number of the UDDI server user name to connect to the BladeLogic Application Server Note: This should be the user account created for the BLAdmins role. 3 Follow the appropriate instructions based on the return code that you receive: ■ If the command returns 0. To set up credentials without the UDDI registry on the BMC ProactiveNet Server for accessing BMC BladeLogic from BMC ProactiveNet 1 Log in to the BMC ProactiveNet Server as administrator. pw blade setup –use_uddi -uddiuser udaman -uddipass uopensesame –host server. a message Info: Connection to BladeLogic server succeeded. ■ If the command returns a number other than 0 or 1.com –port 8080 –user pronet –pass opensesame If the connection is successful. an execution error has occurred. password to connect to BladeLogic Application Server For example. 2 Access a command line and enter: pw blade setup -host hostName [-port portNumber] -user userName -pass password Chapter 10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic 423 . there is a syntax error. You can now To change the time correlation filter on page 172.

pw blade setup –host server. Re-enter the pw blade setup connection command correctly. 2 Access a command line and enter the command pw blade test. is displayed. 3 Follow the appropriate instructions based on the return code that you receive: ■ If the command returns 0.domain. password to connect to BladeLogic Application Server For example. To test your credentials on the BMC ProactiveNet Server for accessing BMC BladeLogic 1 Log in to the BMC ProactiveNet Server as administrator. Error: BladeLogic connection information has not been setup. ■ If the command returns a number other than 0 or 1. ■ If the command returns 1. then the credentials that you set up are working correctly. you can now To install the BMC ProactiveNet provided content on BMC BladeLogic on page 427. the credentials were created successfully. If the connection is unsuccessful a message. If the connection is successful. there is a syntax error. You can now To change the time correlation filter on page 172. 424 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . is displayed. an execution error has occurred. is displayed. If desired. 3 Follow the appropriate instructions based on the return code that you receive: ■ If the command returns 0.com –port 9843 –user pronet – pass opensesame If the connection is successful. An error message is displayed indicating which error occurred. a message Info: Connection to BladeLogic server succeeded. a message Info: Connection to BladeLogic server succeeded.Setting up the integration between BMC BladeLogic and BMC ProactiveNet Table 116: pw blade setup without UDDI registry command option descriptions Option -host hostName -port portNumber -user userName -pass password Description host name or IP address of BladeLogic Web Services port number of BladeLogic Web Services user name to connect to the BladeLogic Application Server Note: This should be the user account created for the BLAdmins role.

an execution error has occurred. connection command correctly. Warning: Clearing of BladeLogic connection information failed. An error message is displayed indicating which error occurred. there is a syntax error. Warning: BladeLogic connection information has not been setup. Additional change information using snapshot job execution Chapter 10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic 425 . Depending on the error message displayed.Additional change information using snapshot job execution ■ If the command returns 1. If the connection is unsuccessful a message. you can To set up credentials with the UDDI registry on the BMC ProactiveNet Server for accessing BMC BladeLogic from BMC ProactiveNet on page 422 from a different user. the credentials that you set up are no longer available. a message Info: Connection to BladeLogic server succeeded. there is a syntax error. To clear the connection to BMC BladeLogic that you created on the BMC ProactiveNet Server 1 Log in to the BMC ProactiveNet Server as administrator. you may need to To clear the connection to BMC BladeLogic that you created on the BMC ProactiveNet Server on page 425 and To set up credentials with the UDDI registry on the BMC ProactiveNet Server for accessing BMC BladeLogic from BMC ProactiveNet on page 422 again. an execution error has occurred. is displayed. is displayed. 3 Follow the appropriate instructions based on the return code that you receive: ■ If the command returns 0. Re-enter the pw blade clear ■ If the command returns a number other than 0 or 1. 2 Access a command line and enter: pw blade clear connection If the connection is successful. Re-enter the pw blade test connection command correctly. ■ If the command returns 1. If desired. ■ If the command returns a number other than 0 or 1. An error message is displayed indicating which error occurred.

Certain events (critical or major events that are associated with devices that have a BMC ProactiveNet agent installed) generated/received on BMC ProactiveNet can cause a BMC ProactiveNet provided snapshot job to be executed on the BMC BladeLogic server. ■ The BMC ProactiveNet agent is required on the target machine for BladeLogic Installing the BMC ProactiveNet content BMC ProactiveNet provides pre-defined content by means of a content installer that helps load BMC ProactiveNet content into the BladeLogic server. This snapshot job will be able to better detect the configuration changes made to that device. the snapshot job is executed. the snapshot job must finish execution before it can run again. This content helps collect relevant configuration change information which helps probable cause analysis. 426 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . so that when you invoke probable cause analysis for an event. a mapping file called <<install_dir>/pronto/conf/ supportedDeviceTypesAndOSForBlade. if a particular snapshot job is triggered on BMC BladeLogic. the probable cause analysis results page flags devices which have had BladeLogic jobs execute in the same time frame as the event that you are trouble-shooting. When events matching the criteria mentioned above are received/generated.Installing the BMC ProactiveNet content A BladeLogic job might make a configuration change to a device which causes its behavior to change. If a match is found. certain events that are generated on BMC ProactiveNet will trigger the execution of a pre-defined snapshot job on BMC BladeLogic for that device (provided the BMC ProactiveNet pre-defined content has been installed on BMC BladeLogic).conf> is looked up to check which snapshot job to run on BMC BladeLogic. Limitations ■ BMC BladeLogic can run only a single instance of a snapshot job at a time.conf) needs to elapse before the same snapshot job is executed again. integration to work. Integrating BMC ProactiveNet with BMC BladeLogic provides BladeLogic job history information to probable cause analysis. Hence. You can create content that is more tuned to your environment by customizing the BMC ProactiveNet provided content or by creating new content. In addition. This information can be viewed from the BMC BladeLogic Device History results screen. Also. see “Viewing BMC BladeLogic device history information” on page 431. This may lead to some events on BMC ProactiveNet not triggering snapshot jobs on BMC BladeLogic (since earlier snapshot jobs may not have completed). a default throttling logic time period of 10 minutes(can be altered in pronet. For more information. This snapshot job captures change information on the device associated with the generated/received event provided a BMC BladeLogic RSCD agent is also running on that device.

Run all three component discovery jobs once. BMC ProactiveNet provides content that is appropriate for capturing configuration change for Solaris OS.Installing the BMC ProactiveNet content BMC ProactiveNet provided content consists of three component templates. PPM-WeblogicSolaris-Snapshot) to assign the proper targets and create an appropriate schedule for the snapshot jobs.jsp.exe PPM-solaris-8_1-nnn. PPM-ApacheSolarisSnapshot. PPM-ApacheSolaris-ComponentDiscovery. 4 Edit all three component discovery jobs (PPM-SolarisOS-ComponentDiscovery. This step is mandatory. Run all three snapshot jobs once. Apache Web server on Solaris OS and for WebLogic application server on Solaris OS.bin PPM-linux-8_1-nnn. if any. 5 Edit all three snapshot jobs (PPM-SolarisOS-Snapshot. The component discovery job must run at least once on all targets so that components.bin 2 Copy the content installer to the machine where BMC BladeLogic server is installed. can be discovered.bmc. The filenames of the content installer for BladeLogic server are as follows: OS Windows Solaris Linux Filename PPM-8_1-nnn. 3 Run the content installer which will import the BMC ProactiveNet provided content into the BMC BladeLogic server. This step is mandatory. To install the BMC ProactiveNet provided content on BMC BladeLogic 1 Download the BMC ProactiveNet content installer from https:// webapps. Snapshot jobs run on the same targets will not work unless components have been discovered. three associated snapshot jobs and three associated component discovery jobs. PPM-WeblogicComponentDiscovery) to assign the proper targets and create an appropriate schedule for the component discovery jobs. Chapter 10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic 427 .com/epd/faces/licensedProd.

You can parameterize the name using properties (both local properties and global properties). a Log into BladeLogic Server Automation Console. Discover.Creating new BladeLogic content Creating new BladeLogic content You can create content that is more tuned to your environment. f Select this newly created component template from the Folder and right-click to select the Open option. The following procedure gives an example of how to create content for Apache on Linux which is not a pre-defined sample starter content given by BMC ProactiveNet. To create new content 1 Create component template PPM-ApacheLinux-Template on BladeLogic server. d Select the PPM folder and right-click. Add more parts if necessary. g Select the Parts. Select New => Component Template Folder to create a new folder called PPM. select the Component Template folder and rightclick to get the context menu. e Select Discover. b Under the Folders tab. add the parts that make up this component by clicking on the + sign which shows the Select Parts dialog. Browse and Snapshot from the Allowed Operations section and click Next three times. etc. expand the Component Templates folder. Browse. Click Finish to create the bare bones component template. The component template will open in edit mode. c If PPM folder does not exist. Snapshot and Local Properties tab to edit section. Click Ok twice to create the part. Select the type of the part with the first drop down (File. Directory.) and then add the name. Click Add New button to display the New Component Template Part dialog. h In the Parts tab. From the context menu select New => Component Template to create a component template and provide the template name as PPM-ApacheLinuxTemplate. 428 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Properties can be entered in the form ?? APACHE_CONF_DIR??.

if any.conf. The format in the CSV file is DeviceType.SnapshotJobName.Linux. For example.Operating System type. PPM-ApacheLinuxSnapshot. The map file is in a CSV format with one line per device type. Chapter 10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic 429 . add an entry to <install directory> /pw/pronto/conf/supportedDeviceTypesAndOSForBlade. 3 Create a corresponding snapshot job PPM-ApacheLinux-Snapshot on BladeLogic server and specify the PPM-ApacheLinux-Template as the template.Name of the component template that is associated with the snapshot job.Name of the snapshot job that should be triggered. add a new entry "WebServer./PPM. The discovery rule is used by the component discovery job to discover components on specified targets. can be discovered. click on the Show the Test Signature Screen button in the Discover tab. 4 To map the snapshot jobs created on BladeLogic server (PPM-ApacheLinuxSnapshot) onto the BMC ProactiveNet configuration file.SnapShotPath. ■ SnapShotPath . The component discovery job must run at least once on all targets so that components. Server. WebServer).OS. Local properties and global properties can be used. Assign proper targets and create a schedule for the snapshot job. ■ OS . 2 Create corresponding component discovery job PPM-ApacheLinuxComponentDiscovery on BladeLogic server and specify the PPM-ApacheLinuxTemplate as the template.ComponentTemplateName ■ DeviceType . Assign proper targets and create a schedule for the component discovery job.Group name where BMC ProactiveNet provided snapshot job is present. ■ ComponentTemplateName . ■ SnapShotJobName .The fields are BMC ProactiveNet Device type (for example. Snapshot jobs will not run on targets unless components have been discovered. PPM-ApacheLinux-Template ".Creating new BladeLogic content i To add a Rule Definition.

An error message is displayed indicating which error occurred. 430 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . you can create packages so that BladeLogic can deploy ProactiveNet Agents to BladeLogic managed systems. Info: Creation of BladeLogic packages for ProactiveNet agents succeeded.. ■ If the command returns a number other than 0 or 1. 2 Access a command line and enter: pw blade create packages If the command succeeds the following message is displayed. The ProactiveNet Agent software is loaded into the BladeLogic depot in the / Software/BMC/ProactiveNet directory as BMC_PN_Agent version_build_platform. Before you begin ■ You must have Administrator privileges to create these packages. Re-enter the pw blade create packages command correctly. To create packages to deploy BMC ProactiveNet Agents from the BMC ProactiveNet Server to BMC BladeLogic managed systems 1 Log in to the BMC ProactiveNet Server as administrator. 3 Follow the appropriate instructions based on the return code that you receive: ■ If the command returns 0. there is a syntax error. ■ If the command returns 1.. ■ A BMC BladeLogic Agent must be installed on the BMC ProactiveNet Server and it must be running. execution was successful.Creating packages to deploy ProactiveNet Agents to BMC BladeLogic managed systems Creating packages to deploy ProactiveNet Agents to BMC BladeLogic managed systems After you have set up and tested the credentials necessary to connect the ProactiveServer to the BMC BladeLogic managed system. ■ The machine on which the BMC ProactiveNet Server is installed must be reachable from the machine where BMC BladeLogic Server is installed. an execution error has occurred. Creating BladeLogic packages for ProactiveNet agents This may take a long time.

Viewing BMC BladeLogic device history information BMC BladeLogic device history information is available from the Tools menu in the Operations Console or from the Probable Cause Analysis dialog box.Viewing BMC BladeLogic device history information The packages are created in the BladeLogic depot in the /Packages/BMC/ ProactiveNet directory as BMC_PN_Agent_ platform. use BMC BladeLogic to create and run a deployment job to deploy the packages to BMC BladeLogic managed systems. ■ Before executing the pw blade create packages command you should delete the existing software and packages on the BMC BladeLogic Server. Note ■ BMC recommends that the BMC BladeLogic server and the BMC ProactiveNet Server are in the same LAN. Also. Go to the BladeLogic depot and delete the software BMC_PN_Agent version_build_platform in the directory /Software/BMC/ProactiveNet. delete the packages BMC_PN_Agent_ platform in the directory /Packages/BMC/ ProactiveNet. Once the packages are created. Chapter 10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic 431 . Creating packages across a slow WAN is not recommended because the pw blade create packagescommand may time out while copying the agent packages from the BMC ProactiveNet Server to the BMC BladeLogic server.

History Filters allows you to filter out the BladeLogic jobs from the BladeLogic Device History page.M. refer to “To add history filters” on page 434. To add history filters. if you do not want to view them from the current page as well as from all the BladeLogic pages. if you specify 5 minutes and the system time is 10:00 A. Table 117: Description of BladeLogic Device History screen Column Host Name Description Name of the device for which BladeLogic changes have occurred Name of the BladeLogic job that contributed the change 432 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . Table 117 on page 432 lists the columns in the BMC BLadeLogic Device History results screen and describes the information that is contained in each column.. are displayed. For example.M. Absolute time allows you to specify the time range for displaying the events that occurred during the specified time period. the events that occurred from 09:55 to 10:00 A. Figure 27: BMC BladeLogic Device History screen The Time filter displays 24 hours before and 30 minutes after the timestamp of the event.Viewing BMC BladeLogic device history information Figure 27 on page 432 shows the BMC BladeLogic Device History results screen. The Edit Time option allows you to edit the Relative and Absolute time. Setting the Relative time filters the events that occurred during the specified time until the system time.

select an event that occurred on the device with a timestamp on or near 10:30AM on the current date. By default. To view BMC BladeLogic device history from the Probable Cause Analysis results page 1 From the Events Console. The BladeLogic Device History screen displays the BMC BladeLogic device history for 24 hours before and 30 minutes after the timestamp of the event that you selected. Chapter 10 Integrating with BMC BladeLogic 433 . For example. BMC BladeLogic device history is displayed for 24 hours before and 30 minutes after the event's timestamp. 2 Click the Tools menu icon for that event. to see the BladeLogic history for the previous 24 hours up until 10:30AM on the current day. 2 Click the probable cause analysis icon . select the event for which you want to obtain BMC BladeLogic device history. select BladeLogic Device History. 3 From the Tools menu. select an event which occurred 24 hours before and 30 minutes after the event's timestamp for which you want to obtain BMC BladeLogic device history.Viewing BMC BladeLogic device history information Column Type Description Icon representing the type of job: ■ ■ ■ : Deploy jobs : Nsh jobs or scripts : Snapshot jobs Start End Status User Template Part Changed Timestamp for when the job began Timestamp for when the job ended End result of the job User name of the account who ran the job Details the changes to BladeLogic templates captured by snapshot jobs To view BMC BladeLogic device history from the Tools menu 1 From the Events Console.

For more detailed BladeLogic device history. Restore Defaults option will remove all the specified filters. click the Tools menu icon for the event and choose BladeLogic Device History. as well as the time of the last change. 2 Click on Add Exclusion Filter from the Device History Exclusion Filters screen that is displayed. see Determining the probable cause for an event on page 159 For more detailed information about BMC BladeLogic. 5 Click on the Preferences icon to specify the filter for all BladeLogic pages. For more information about probable cause analysis. 3 Select the job type from the drop down list.Viewing BMC BladeLogic device history information A summary of the BMC BladeLogic device history is included in the BladeLogic History column in the probable cause analysis results page for the selected event. 4 Specify a pattern match in the Job Name contains field and click OK. To add history filters 1 Click on the link against History Filters to edit the filter. The BMC BladeLogic Device History screen will be displayed. 434 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide . This column includes the icon for the job type. see the BMC BladeLogic documentation. Note To delete a filter. click the delete filter icon next to the filter you have defined. The jobs that match the pattern name are excluded from the current page.

A Event information used in probable cause analysis Event classes not used by probable cause analysis Administrative events include all events within the following event classes which are children of the EVENT class. Table 118: Event classes not considered during probable cause analysis ■ MC_CELL_UNDEFINED_CLASS ■ MC_CELL_PARSE_ERROR ■ MC_SMC_EVENT ■ MC_CELL_PROCESS_ERROR ■ MC_SM_SHADOW_REQUEST ■ MC_SM_IMPACTS_REPORT ■ MC_SM_SHADOW_REQUEST_ERROR ■ MC_SM_SHADOW_UPDATE ■ MC_SM_SHADOW_DELETE ■ MC_SM_LOOP_DETECTED ■ SIM_NOTIFICATION_EVENT ■ SIM_COMPONENT_OVERWRITE ■ SIM_COMPONENT_CHANGE ■ SIM_COMPONENT_DELETE Appendix A Event information used in probable cause analysis 435 .

Event classes not used by probable cause analysis ■ SIM_RELATIONSHIP_CHANGE ■ SIM_RELATIONSHIP_DELETE ■ SMC_MAINTENANCE ■ MC_SLM_EVENT ■ MC_SLM_ASSOCIATE ■ MC_SLM_STATUS_UPDATE ■ MC_SLM_REMOVE_SLA_FREQUENCY ■ MC_SLM_DELETE_SLA ■ MC_UPDATE_EVENT ■ ADMIN_EVENT ■ ADMIN_CONFIG_INFO ■ ADMIN_UNREGISTER ■ ADMIN_UNREGISTER_PRODUCT ■ ADMIN_CLEAR_BLOCK ■ ADMIN_ACTIVITY_STATE ■ ADMIN_SECONDARY_INFO ■ IAS_STOP IAS_SYNC_EVENT ■ IAS_EVENT IAS_START ■ IAS_SYNC_BACKUP IAS_REINIT ■ IAS_SYNC_PRIMARY ■ IAS_LOGIN IAS_ERROR ■ BIP_EVENT BIP_START ■ BIP_STOP IPS_EVENT ■ IPS_CONTROL IPS_START ■ IPS_CONFIG IPS_STOP ■ IPS_CNX IPS_CONNECT ■ IPS_IM_CONNECT IPS_ERROR ■ IPS_REQUEST IPS_PUBLISH ■ IPS_CELL_PUBLISH ■ IPS_CLASSINFO IPS_ENV ■ IPS_CLASSINFO IPS_ENV ■ IBRSD_ADMIN_EVENT 436 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Event classes not used by probable cause analysis ■ IBRSD_START IBRSD_STOP ■ MC_CLIENT_BASE ■ MC_CLIENT_CONTROL ■ MC_CLIENT_START ■ MC_CLIENT_STOP ■ MC_CLIENT_PAUSE ■ MC_CLIENT_UNPAUSE ■ MC_CLIENT_HEARTBEAT ■ MC_CLIENT_ERROR ■ MC_ADAPTER_BASE ■ MC_ADAPTER_CONTROL ■ MC_ADAPTER_ERROR ■ MC_ADAPTER_START ■ MC_ADAPTER_STOP ■ PORTAL_PARAMETER_STATE_CHANGE ■ PORTAL_RSM_STATE_CHANGE ■ SMC_STATE_CHANGE ■ IBRSD_ERROR ■ IBRSD_RETRY_EVENT ■ IBRSD_EVENT ■ IBRSD_SM_INCIDENT ■ IBRSD_REMOTE_ACTION ■ IBRSD_SM_INCIDENT ■ IBRSD_REMOTE_ACTION ■ IBRSD_SM_INCIDENT_CLOSE ■ CI_INCIDENT_INFO ■ MC_CELL_CONTROL ■ MC_CELL_START ■ MC_CELL_STOP ■ MC_CELL_TICK ■ MC_CELL_STATBLD_START ■ MC_CELL_STATBLD_STOP Appendix A Event information used in probable cause analysis 437 .

Slots used during probable cause analysis ■ MC_CELL_ACTIVITY_CHANGED ■ MC_CELL_DB_CLEANUP ■ MC_CELL_LOG_CHANGED ■ MC_CELL_LOG_MSG ■ MC_CELL_CONNECT ■ MC_CELL_CONNECT_RESOURCES_EXP ANDED ■ MC_CELL_CONNECT_SUSPENDED ■ MC_CELL_CONNECT_RESUMED ■ MC_CELL_CLIENT ■ MC_CELL_UNALLOWED_CONNECT ■ MC_CELL_ALLOWED_CONNECT ■ MC_CELL_DISCONNECT ■ MC_CELL_MODIFIED_EVENT ■ MC_CELL_DESTINATION_UNREACHA BLE ■ MC_CELL_HEARTBEAT_EVT ■ MC_CELL_HEARTBEAT_ON ■ MC_CELL_HEARTBEAT_FAILURE ■ MC_CELL_DUPLICATE_EVT ■ MC_CELL_DUPLICATE_ON ■ MC_CELL_DUPLICATE_FAILURE ■ MC_CELL_RESOURCE ■ MC_CELL_RESOURCE_OVERFLOW ■ MC_CELL_RESOURCE_EXPANSION ■ MC_CELL_RESOURCE_REDUCTION ■ MC_CELL_ACTION_RESULT ■ MC_CELL_PUBLISH_RESULT Slots used during probable cause analysis The following core event slots provide data that is used during probable cause analysis: 438 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Slots used during probable cause analysis ■ eventclass ■ date_reception ■ status ■ msg ■ severity ■ mc_ueid ■ mc_priority ■ mc_smc_id ■ mc_date_modification ■ mc_incident_time ■ mc_location ■ mc_host ■ mc_host_address ■ mc_parameter_value ■ mc_parameter_unit ■ mc_event_category ■ mc_incident_time ■ mc_object_class ■ mc_object ■ mc_tool_key ■ mc_host_id ■ mc_host ■ mc_tool_key ■ mc_long_msg More data is provided by the following slots from the ALARM and ABNORMALITY event classes: ■ pn_parameter_id ■ pn_last_time ■ pn_group_ids ■ pn_thresh_id ■ pn_thresh_type ■ pn_alarm_id ■ pn_vm_host_id ■ pn_highest_severity ■ pn_end_time ■ pn_detail_diag ■ pn_detail_diag_count ■ pn_suppress_type ■ pn_suppress_mode ■ pn_suppress_notified ■ pn_suppress_rule_id ■ pn_thresh_above ■ pn_baseline_type ■ pn_baseline_hourly_low Appendix A Event information used in probable cause analysis 439 .

Monitors related to VMware ■ pn_baseline_daily_low ■ pn_baseline_weekly_low ■ pn_baseline_hourly_high ■ pn_baseline_daily_high ■ pn_baseline_weekly_high ■ pn_thresh_duration ■ pn_pts_exceeded ■ pn_pts_total ■ pn_extremeness ■ pn_predict_to_occur_time ■ pn_object_class_id The following extended slots from the DEVICE_UPDATE_EV event class provide additional data: ■ new_parent_device_unique_name ■ parent_device_unique_name Monitors related to VMware The following monitors are related to VMware: ■ BMCVMwareResourcePool ■ BMCVMwareCPU ■ BMCVMwareVM ■ BMCVMwareVMCPU ■ BMCVMwareMemory_V2 ■ BMCVMwareCPU_Total ■ BMCVMwareHostMon ■ BMCVMwareDatastoreMon ■ BMCVMwareDiskPerfMon ■ BMCVMwareVCMon ■ BMCVMwareVnetPerfMon ■ VMwareVMSysMon ■ VMwareVMMemMon ■ VMwareHostBusAdapterMon ■ VMwareVCSysMon ■ VMwareHostSysMon ■ VMwareHostMemMon ■ VMwareVMNetMon ■ VMwareVMCPUMon ■ VMwareHostCPUMon ■ VMwareHostNetMon 440 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

Monitors related to VMware ■ VMwareRPSysMon ■ VMwareHostDiskMon ■ VMwareVMCPUTotMon ■ VMwareVMDiskTotMon ■ VMwareVMNetTotMon ■ VMwareHostCPUTotMon ■ VMwareHostDiskTotMon ■ VMwareHostNetTotMon ■ VMwareHostDSMon ■ VMwareMon ■ VMwareHostDatastorePathMon Appendix A Event information used in probable cause analysis 441 .

Monitors related to VMware 442 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

described 25 bookmarks. finding 20 configuring Events tab display settings 86 creating local filter 68 current data 130 Custom Graphs 249 Index 443 . creating 19 E event collectors described 25 event count affected by status 29 event list folder. creating a dial gauge graph 261 custom graphs. creating a line or area graph 251 Custom graphs.A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Index A Acknowledge event icon 76 event operation 76 Acknowledged (ACK) event status icon 26 actions responding to an event 80 area graph. changing preferences 133 Canvas View. setting up and using 132 central ProactiveNet Server 86 child ProactiveNet Server 86 Close event icon 76 operation 76 Closed event status icon 26 collectors event count affected by status 29 color event status icon 26 configuration items. creating for remote cells 61 event operations. creating 251 Assign To (event operation) 76 Assigned event status icon 26 Auto-baseline 183 Custom graphs. performing 76 event priority icons 27 setting 76 understanding 27 event severity icons 27 levels 27 event status icons 26 understanding 26 C Canvas View. creating 261 B BMC Impact Explorer Event Groups. creating X-Y graphs 256 customizing Events tab display settings 86 Customizing_the_display_of_events 86 D Decline Ownership event operation 76 icon 76 dial gauge graphs. creating a top N graph 257 Custom graphs. creating a pie graph 259 Custom graphs.

creating 251 M multiple ProactiveNet Server deployment 86 O Open event status icon 26 operations console. 159 SLO records in the Watch List 359 SLO violations 356 filters creating local 68 global 64 severity quick filter 64 slot quick filter 64 FlashCheck 130 G Graph View. setting up and using the Graph View 149 operations console. overview 64. setting up and using the Tile View 143 operations. 54. changing user preferences in the Graph View 150 operations console. creating 259 priority. by slot name 64 events. 56 instant poll 130 444 Q queries. custom 249 P pie graphs. setting up and using 149 graphs. changing preferences 150 Graph View. performing 76 organizing events in the event list 53 F filtering events. changing user preferences in the Canvas View 133 operations console. by severity 64 events. See event priority 27 I icons Acknowledge Event 76 Close event 76 Decline Ownership 76 event priority 27 event severity 27 event status 26 Set Priority 76 Take Ownership 76 Index Term 31. changing user preferences in the Tile View 143 operations console. setting up and using the Canvas View 132 operations console. setting up and using the Canvas view 132 operations console. See event operations. creating filters when searching for configuration items 20 querying SLO records in the Watch List 359 SLO violations 356 quick filters severity 64 severity quick filter 64 slot quick filter 64 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z events acknowledging 76 assigning to an individual 76 closing 76 declining ownership 76 performing operations 76 responding with an action 80 setting the priority 76 sorting 72 sorting fields 73 taking ownership 76 events list organizing 53 refreshing 52 Events View configuring display settings 86 customizing display settings 86 Integrate BMC ProactiveNet alarms BMC Run Book Automation 237 Integrating with SLM 247 L launching originating ProactiveNet Server 86 line graphs.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Tile View. setting up and using the Tile View 143 user preferences. changing user preferences in the Canvas View 133 user console. creating 257 R refreshing the event list automatically 52 remote actions accessing results of 81 responding to event 80 remote cells. changing for the Graph View 150 user preferences. changing user preferences in the Tile View 143 user console. changing for the Canvas View 133 user preferences. changing user preferences in the Graph View 150 user console. changing for the Tile View 143 S Set Priority event operation 76 icon 76 severity effect on event status icon 26 level indicator (Events View navigation) 27 quick filter 64 slot quick filter 64 sorting events multiple columns 73 single column 73 status affects event count for collector 29 event icons 26 X X-Y graphs. changing preferences 143 Tile View. setting up and using 143 top N graphs. creating event list folder 61 Reopen Event event operation 76 results of a remote action 81 U Unacknowledge Event event operation 76 user console. creating 256 T Take Ownership event operation 76 icon 76 Index 445 . setting up and using the Graph View 149 user console.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 446 BMC ProactiveNet User Guide .

.

49532 *166654* .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful